SWEDISH GRAMMAR 
 
 EDW. J. VICKNER
 
 A BRIEF 
 
 SWEDISH GRAMMAR 
 
 BY 
 
 EDW. J. VICKNER, M. A., PH. D. 
 
 PROFESSOR OP SCANDINAVIAN LANGUAGES, 
 UNIVERSITY OF WASHINGTON 
 
 REVISED EDITION 
 
 ROCK ISLAND, ILL. 
 
 AUGUSTAN A BOOK CONCERN 
 
 1914
 
 COPYKIGHT, 1912, 
 
 BY 
 AUGUSTANA BOOK CONCERN. 
 
 COPYRIGHT, 1914, 
 
 BY 
 AUGUSTANA BOOK CONCERN. 
 
 ROCK ISLAND, ILL. 
 
 AUOU6TAN4 BOOK CONCERN, PRINTERS AND BINDERS.
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 The cause and aim of this book is to present in a clear 
 and concise way the commonplace facts and principles of 
 the Swedish language. It lays no claim to be a compen- 
 dium of all forms and usages of either the spoken or writ- 
 ten language. 
 
 The introduction of Swedish into numerous high schools 
 and universities in this country has created a demand for 
 a book which may not only assist the exclusively English- 
 speaking students to attain a fair reading and speaking 
 knowledge of modern Swedish but which may also meet 
 the demand of American born students of Swedish descent 
 who desire to gain a more complete knowledge of the lan- 
 guage of their fathers. The consideration that the majority 
 of the students who will use his book are already more or 
 less conversant with Swedish has led the author to make 
 the lessons longer and the exercises rather more advanced 
 than is the case in most beginners' books, to make the 
 vocabularies unusually voluminous, and to devote consider- 
 able attention to idiomatic expressions. 
 
 The exercises have been made continuous wherever it 
 was found practicable to do so; and it is to be hoped that 
 this form of exercise will prove more interesting and less 
 irksome to the student than the form that consists of de- 
 tached sentences. The fact that each lesson thus contains 
 words which are associated with one another in common 
 use will undoubtedly encourage an acquisition of con- 
 nected phrases rather than mere words. This form of 
 exercise, moreover, facilitates a m-ethod which the author
 
 IV 
 
 from his experience in the class room has found of great 
 value for the attainment of a correct pronunciation and 
 fluency, that of requiring the student to reproduce the 
 contents of the exercises in his own words. The author 
 feels confident that his grammar lends itself to conversa- 
 tional practice. The vocabulary has been carefully selected 
 from the language of everyday life and the phrases of the 
 Swedish exercises are of a colloquial and idiomatic char- 
 acter. 
 
 In the method employed the teacher will naturally be 
 guided by his own judgment and the character of his class; 
 the author would, however, suggest that two hours be 
 devoted to each lesson. During the first hour the gram- 
 matical part should be thoroughly discussed, the teacher 
 supplementing the examples given as illustrations, and the 
 Swedish portion of the exercise thoroughly practiced; the 
 second hour should be devoted to a rapid review, transla- 
 tion of the English portion, and to conversation. The* 
 conversational exercises are not intended to be exliaustive 
 but suggestive for further drill. The value of the con- 
 versational method cannot be overestimated. 
 
 Unusually ample space has been accorded the treatment 
 of the prepositions, which in all languages and especially 
 in Swedish constitute one of the chief difficulties which 
 confront the learner. 
 
 The author's treatment of pronunciation and accent, 
 especially the musical, which is one of the peculiarities of 
 Swedish, may perliaps evoke criticism by reason of its 
 brevity. The limitations of space in an elementary book 
 forbid entering into minute details. The booJc is chiefly 
 intended for class use and much is therefore left to the 
 instructor to supplement. Moreover, a correct Swedish 
 pronunciation and especially a mastery of the musical
 
 accent, or intonation, can be acquired only by constant 
 imitation and practice. 
 
 In conclusion the author desires to acknowledge his 
 indebtedness to Professor A. A. Stomberg, University of 
 Minnesota, for much valuable advice and encouragement; 
 and to Professor Jules Mauritzson, Augustana College, 
 Rock Island, for his extremely valuable services in revising 
 the manuscript. 
 
 E. J. VlCKNER.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PART I. 
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 The Alphabet 1 
 
 Pronunciation: Quantity; The Vowels; The Consonants; 
 
 Accentuation 1 
 
 Capitalization 12 
 
 Punctuation 13 
 
 Syllabication 14 
 
 PART II. 
 THE PARTS OP SPEECH. 
 
 LESSON 
 
 I. Genders Articles Verbs 15 
 
 II. Definite Articles: Postpositive, Prepositive... 20 
 
 III. Inflection of Nouns: First and Second Declen- 
 
 sion 25 
 
 IV. Third Declension 29 
 
 V. The Verb: First Conjugation 33 
 
 VI. Second Conjugation 38 
 
 VII. Inflection of Nouns: Fourth Declension Ad- 
 jectives: Indefinite Declension 43 
 
 VIII. Nouns: Fifth Declension Adjectives: Definite 
 Declension Use of Prepositive Definite 
 
 Article 49 
 
 IX. Nouns: Irregularities in Declension Declen- 
 sion of Proper Names Genitive Case 55 
 
 X. The Verb: Third Conjugation Pronouns: 
 
 Personal 62 
 
 XI. The Verb: Future and Future Perfect Indica- 
 tive; Imperative Pronouns: Reflexive.... 67 
 XII. The Verb: Fourth Conjugation 73 
 
 XIII. The Verb: Subjunctive 79 
 
 XIV. The Verb: .Irregularities; Unreal Conditions 86 
 XV. Possessive Pronouns and Adjectives Position 
 
 of Adverbs . 92
 
 VIII 
 
 LESSON PAGE 
 
 XVI. The Verb: Passive Voice 98 
 
 XVII. The Verb: Passive with Auxiliaries: Deponents 105 
 
 XVIII. Pronouns: Demonstrative Ill 
 
 XIX. The Verb: Verb Compounds 117 
 
 XX. Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives Rela- 
 tive Pronouns and Adjectives 123 
 
 XXI. The Verb: Present and Past Participle 131 
 
 XXII. The Verb: Impersonal Verbs; Reflexive Verbs 137 
 
 XXIII. The Verb: Modal Auxiliaries 144 
 
 XXIV. The Verb: Modal Auxiliaries 150 
 
 XXV. Pronouns: Indefinite 157 
 
 XXVI. Pronouns: Indefinite 163 
 
 XXVII. The Verb: Tenses of Indicative; Uses of In- 
 finitive 168 
 
 XXVIII. Adjectives: Comparison 176 
 
 XXIX. Adjectives: Comparison Adverbs: Compari- 
 son 181 
 
 XXX. Numerals: Cardinals and Ordinals; Expres- 
 sions of time, measure, and price 186 
 
 XXXI. Numeral Formations; Expressions of date and 
 
 time 193 
 
 XXXII. Prepositions: Uses 201 
 
 XXXIII. Prepositions: Uses 208 
 
 XXXIV. Prepositions: Uses 214 
 
 XXXV. Prepositions: Uses 220 
 
 XXXVI. Adverbs: Uses 226 
 
 XXXVII. Conjunctions: Coordinating 233 
 
 XXXVIII. Conjunctions: Subordinating 239 
 
 XXXIX. Interjections 246 
 
 Appendix: Use of the Articles Rules of Gender Notes 
 on Inflection of Nouns Irregularities in Conversational 
 Pronunciation Irregularities in Conversational Gram- 
 mar 248 253 
 
 Strong and Irregular Verbs: Principal Parts 254 
 
 Vocabulary : Swedish-English 258 
 
 English-Swedish 280 
 
 Condensed Index of Subjects 301 
 
 Swedish National Songs 305
 
 BRIEF SWEDISH GRAMMAR 
 
 PART I. 
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 The Alphabet. 
 
 1. The Swedish alphabet is as follows: 
 
 CHARACTERS 
 
 A a 
 B b 
 Cc 
 D d 
 E e 
 F f 
 Gg 
 H h 
 I i 
 
 J j 
 K k 
 L 1 
 M m 
 1SI n 
 o 
 
 NAMES 
 
 CHARACTERS 
 
 ah 
 
 P p 
 
 bay 
 
 Q q 
 
 say 
 
 R r 
 
 day 
 
 S s 
 
 a 
 
 T t 
 
 eff 
 
 U u 
 
 gay or yay 
 
 V v 
 
 hoh 
 
 W w 
 
 e 
 
 X x 
 
 yee 
 
 Yy 
 
 koh 
 
 Z z 
 
 ell 
 
 A a 
 
 emm 
 
 A a 
 
 enn 
 
 O 6 
 
 00 
 
 
 NAMES 
 
 pay 
 
 ku (Swedish) 
 
 err 
 
 ess 
 tay 
 
 U (Swedish) 
 
 vay 
 vay 
 ex 
 
 U (German) 
 
 saytah 
 o 
 
 ai (in fair) 
 6 ( German ) 
 
 NOTE. Q, w, and z occur only in surnames and in words of foreign origin, 
 especially geographical names. 
 
 Pronunciation. 
 
 REMARK. 1. Only general directions can be given here: 
 pronunciation must be learned by imitation and practice. But 
 if not learned correctly at first, it becomes more difficult after- 
 wards. It is not, however, intended that the whole of this
 
 2 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 chapter shall be studied in advance. The study of the Gram 
 mar proper should begin as soon as possible, and constant 
 reference, supplemented by such help as may be rendered by 
 the teacher, should be made to the discussion of the sounds 
 given below. 
 
 2. It must be borne in mind that the sounds of any two 
 languages hardly ever correspond exactly; hence comparisons 
 between Swedish and English are only approximate. 
 
 QUANTITY. 
 
 2. The quantity of Swedish sounds is either long 
 or short. For practical purposes the consonants 
 offer no peculiar difficulties as regards length. The 
 following rules will serve as a guide in determining 
 the quantity of the vowels: 
 
 (a) A vowel is long in an accented syllable when 
 followed by a short consonant sound : fara, to travel : 
 hdla, cave ; fel, error ; grdl, quarrel ; dra, honor. 
 
 (b) A vowel is short in an accented syllable when 
 followed by a long consonant sound: andas, to 
 breathe; folia, to fall; allt, everything; fall, hem; 
 tanda, to kindle; eld, fire; dygd, virtue. 
 
 (c) In unaccented syllables both the vowel sound 
 and the consonant sound are short: si ' rap, sirup; 
 tall'rik, plate; mor'gon, morning. 
 
 (d) A final accented vowel is always long. 
 
 3. The long and the short vowel sounds are indi- 
 cated in the same manner in writing. The short 
 consonant sound is generally indicated by a single 
 consonant; the long by two or more consonants, 
 especially a double consonant. 
 
 NOTE. Sometimes the long consonant sound in an accented syllable is indi- 
 cated by a single consonant, notably in the case of m and n: dom, sentence; 
 kom, come ; man, man ; van, friend. With a few exceptions m is not doubled 
 at the end of a word or syllable.
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 3 
 
 THE VOWELS. 
 
 REMARK. The vowels must receive full and distinct utter- 
 ance in all positions. No vowel is silent; only in the case of e 
 in unaccented endings such as -en, -el, -er, -et, and -e is there 
 a tendency towards slurring. 
 
 4. a. (1) When long this sound varies between 
 the sound of a in far and the sound of o in foreign 
 when this o-sound is prolonged : fader, father ; grad, 
 grade; tola, to speak. 
 
 NOTE. Avoid a as in fall. 
 
 (2) When short like the first a in aha: malm, 
 ore; salt, salt; tacka, to thank. 
 
 5. e. (1) When long this sound is an approxi- 
 mation to the sound of a in day without the vanish. 
 The exact sound is that of the German long e in 
 mehr: ek, oak; fel, error; leda, to lead; ned, down. 
 
 (2) When short it is (a) qualitatively the same 
 as when long: hem, home; vecka, week; eld, fire; 
 (b) like short a (see 11, 2) : den, the, that; mest, 
 most; herr, Mister (avoid e as in her). 
 
 6. i. (1) When long like i in machine (avoid 
 diphthong) : mig, me; tid, time; ila, to hurry; fir a, 
 to celebrate; ni, you. 
 
 (2) When short it is qualitatively the same as 
 when long: min, mine; ingen, no one; viska, to 
 whisper; silver, silver; stirra, to stare; (avoid i as 
 in stir). 
 
 7. o. (1) When long, o has two sounds: (a) ap- 
 proximately like oo in moon. The exact sound is 
 formed by the tongue position for the Swedish long 
 a, with the lips so constricted ("rounded") as to be 
 nearly closed: olycka, misfortune; sko, shoe; sopa,
 
 4 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 to sweep; ros, rose; (b) like o in hope (avoid diph- 
 thong). This sound is identical with the Swedish 
 long a (see 10, 1) : hov, court; Robert; kol, coal. 
 
 (2) When short it has two sounds: (a) like the 
 first o in oho! or like o in oil: om, if; hopp, hope; 
 kropp, body; (b) like oo in moon shortened: ost, 
 cheese ; blomma, flower ; moster, aunt. 
 
 8. u. (1) The sound of long u is produced by the 
 tongue position for Swedish long e (see 5, 1) with 
 the lips so extremely constricted (rounded) as to 
 be nearly closed: gul, yellow; ut, out; duka, to set 
 the table; mjuk, soft. 
 
 (2) The sound of short u is more open than that 
 of long u. It is approximately that of u in value 
 (without the introductory consonantal ^/-sound) : 
 under, under; guld, gold; kunna, to be able. 
 
 9. y. Y is identical in sound with German u and 
 French u in une. Round the lips as if to pronounce 
 u in rude, then pronounce ee in seen. It is either 
 long or short. Ex. (long) : fyra, four; rysa, to 
 shudder; ny, new; yr, dizzy; (short) : sylt, jam, 
 yttra, to utter; fylla, to fill. 
 
 10. a. (1) When long like o in hope (avoid the 
 diphthong) : ar, year; kal, cabbage; ga, to go; sara, 
 to wound. 
 
 (2) When short like short open o (see 7, 2) : 
 dllon, acorn; fall, hem; holla, to hold; atta, eight; 
 manga, many. 
 
 11. a. (1) When long approximately like a in 
 care (avoid the diphthong) : dra, honor; lasa, to 
 read ; dta, to eat ; dven, even, also.
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 5 
 
 (2) When short like e in met: an, than, yet; man, 
 men; stalla, to put; angel, angel. 
 
 12. 6. d is identical with German 6 and French 
 eu. Round the lips as if to sound o in so; then 
 pronounce the Swedish long e (see 5, 1). It is long 
 or short. Ex. (long) : oga, eye; rok, smoke; over, 
 over; (short) : foil, fell; oppen, open; backer, books. 
 
 NOTE. This vowel has a tendency to become more open when short and also 
 before r, especially rr ; sot, sweet, long and close ; in soft (the neuter form of 
 sot) the o is short and slightly open ; oga, eye, long and close ; hora, to hear, 
 long and quite open ; dorr, door, still more open. 
 
 13. The vowels a, o, u, a are called hard vowels, 
 and e, i, y, d, 6 are called soft vowels. 
 
 14. Vowel modification, which in English is very 
 often referred to under its German name umlaut, 
 is a process of considerable importance in Swedish 
 inflection and derivation. Thus a change from a 
 and a to d, or o to 6, or u to y, occurs in the inflec- 
 tional forms of many words and in derivatives. 
 Ex.: and, duck, pi. dnder; lang, long, comparative 
 langre; bok, book, pi. backer; ung, young, comp. 
 yngre; lang, long, langd, length; ga, to go, gdngse, 
 current. 
 
 GENERAL OBSERVATION. 
 
 A vowel is usually pronounced as it is written. There are 
 a few exceptions in words of foreign origin; thus, ou in a few 
 French words sounds like u short, journal' (shurnal') ; eu 
 sounds like oi in the word Preussen, Prussia, and its deriva- 
 tives; u like y in a few French words: juste (shyst), just, 
 fair. These exceptions are neither many nor important.
 
 6 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 NOTE. Consonants not discussed here have the same sound as in English. 
 
 15. c. (1) Like English s before the soft vowels 
 e, i, and y: cirkel, cylirider, cigarf'. 
 
 (2) Before the hard vowels a, o, u, and before 
 another c or other consonant like English k: Colum- 
 bus, accent'. 
 
 (3) Ch has the sound of sj (26) in a few words 
 of foreign origin: choklad, chocolate; charmant, 
 
 charming. 
 
 
 16. d. Like English d, but is silent before /: 
 
 djup, deep; djur, animal. 
 
 NOTE. Where d according to the old orthography stands before t in the same 
 syllable it is either silent or pronounced like t; according to the new 
 orthography (officially adopted in 1906) it is either eliminated or changed to t : 
 gott (new form), neuter of god, good; godt (old form) ; ont (new form), neuter 
 of ond, evil ; ondt (old form) . 
 
 17. f. Is identical in sound with English /: frdga, 
 to ask ; kraft, power ; folia, to hem ; fotograf, photog- 
 rapher. 
 
 NOTE. In accordance with the old orthography / at the end of a syllable or 
 word (except foreign words) has the sound of v and is silent before t; in the 
 middle of a word except where v begins the succeeding member of a compound. 
 In the new orthography v has supplanted / everywhere in marking the sound of 
 v: tolv (new), twelve, tolf (old) : silver (new), silfver (old) ; lova (new), to 
 promise, lofva (old). 
 
 18. g. (1) Like English g in go before the hard 
 vowels a, o, u, a, and the consonants; and also be- 
 fore the soft vowels e and i in unaccented endings; 
 and in final positions, except after I and r: gd, to go ; 
 gata, street; spegel, mirror; tagit, taken; krig, war. 
 
 (2) Like English y in year (tongue closer to 
 the palate) before the soft vowels e, i, y, d, 6 in 
 accented syllables of native words and after I and
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 7 
 
 r: genom, through; giva, to give; gynna, to favor; 
 korg, basket; svalg, throat. 
 
 (3) Like k before t and occasionally before s: 
 sagt, said; bragt, brought; krigsman, warrior. 
 
 NOTE 1. G is not silent before n: gnaga, gnaw. 
 
 2. G before t, which occurred frequently in the old orthography, has now 
 generally been replaced by k: vikt (new), weight, vigt (old) ; drdkt (new), 
 dress, dragt (old). 
 
 (4) Like sj (see below, 26) in a number of loan 
 words of French origin: generos', generous; gene'- 
 ra, to inconvenience; korrige'ra, to correct; gest, 
 gesture. 
 
 19. h. Is strongly aspirated, but is silent before 
 j: holla, to hold; hel, whole; hjul, wheel; hjdrta, 
 heart. 
 
 NOTE. The silent h before v in the old orthography has been dropped in the 
 new: hvem, who, now vem; hvar, where, now var. 
 
 20. j. Like g (18, 2) or English consonantal 
 y: jord, earth; jdmn, even; jag, I; jul, Christmas. 
 
 NOTE. In a few French loan words like sj: jasmin' (shasmin'), jessamine; 
 jalusi' (shalusi'), window shade. 
 
 21. k. (1) Like English k before consonants and 
 hard vowels, also before e and i in unaccented end- 
 ings, and before soft vowels in words of foreign 
 origin : kalla, to call ; kula, ball ; rike, realm ; rynkig, 
 wrinkled; arkiv', archives. 
 
 (2) Like English ch before the soft vowels (e, i, 
 y, a, 6) except as stated above: kedja, chain; kil, 
 wedge; kylig, chilly; kar, dear; kott, meat. 
 
 (3) Double k is written ck, except in och, and. 
 
 NOTE. K is not silent before n: kniv, knife; knd, knee. 
 
 22. m. Has the same sound as in English. 
 
 NOTE. In some words of French origin em is sounded like the Swedish ang: 
 cmballe'ra (angballera.), pack, wrap; emblem' (angblame), emblem.
 
 8 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 23. n. Has the same sound as in English. 
 
 NOTE 1. In some words of French origin en is sounded like the Swedish 
 ang, and on like the Swedish ang: entusiasm' (angtusiasm), enthusiasm; pente 
 (pangsOi pansy; fond (f&ngd), fund, background. 
 
 2. If g and n occurring together belong to the same radical syllable, they 
 are pronounced with an n before, except at the beginning of a word : gnista, 
 spark; lugn (lungn), calm; vagn (vangn), carriage. 
 
 3. Ng sounds like English ng in singer, not like ng in finger: Idng, long 
 gang, song ; sjunga, to sing. 
 
 24. r. Is strongly trilled with the tip of the 
 tongue: arm, arm; bdra, to carry; dorr, door. 
 Observe that the vowels are pronounced distinctly 
 before r not blurred as in English. 
 
 NOTE 1. The uvular r which is made with the uvula vibrating against the 
 back of the tongue is now regarded as permissible. 
 
 2. R in the combinations rl, m, rs and especially rd and rt is not pro- 
 nounced, the /, n, s, d, and t become supradental, that is, pronounced w-ith 
 the tip of the tongue touching the palate : sort, murmur ; drna, to intend ; 
 kors, cross ; bord, table ; bort, away. 
 
 25. s. Is pronounced like s in so: sol, sun; sys- 
 ter, sister; resa, to travel. 
 
 26. sch, sj, skj, ssj, stj. Before a vowel these are 
 all pronounced with a sound that resembles English 
 sh but is somewhat rougher. It must be carefully 
 practiced with the teacher : schack, chess ; sjo, lake ; 
 sju, seven ; sjdl, soul ; skjorta, shirt ; skjuta, to shoot ; 
 hdssja, hayrack; stjarna, star. 
 
 NOTE. In the endings -sion and -ssion the *t and ssi are sounded like sh. 
 
 27. sk. (1) Before the soft vowels (e, i, y, d, 6) 
 sk has the same sound as sch, sj, etc., as described 
 in the preceding section (26) : skena, to run away; 
 skilja, to separate; skyla, to cover; skdl, reason; 
 skold, shield. 
 
 (2) Before the hard vowels (a, o, u, a) sk is pro- 
 nounced like the English sk: skal, shell; sko, shoe; 
 skuld, guilt; skal, bowl.
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 9 
 
 NOTE 1. Exceptions to this rule are the words marskalk, marshal, and 
 mdnniska, human being, in which sk is pronounced like sj. 
 
 2. Before e and i of an ending sk is pronounced like English sk: disken 
 (from disk, counter) ; flasket (from flask, pork). 
 
 28. t. Like English t in most words. 
 
 NOTE 1. In the ending -tion ti is sounded like sj (26) : action, action : 
 evolution, evolution. 
 
 When -tion is preceded by a, o, and r in dissyllabic words, a t is generally 
 inserted before the *;'-sound in pronunciation: nation' (natsjoon') ; motion' 
 (motsjoon'); portion' (portsjoon'). 
 
 2. Like ts before t'a and ie in foreign words: aktie (aktsie), share; patient' 
 (patsient, also pashent') ; profeti'a (profetsia), prophecy. 
 
 29. tj. Is pronounced like English ch: tjock, 
 (chock), thick ;'tjdra (chairah), tar. 
 
 30. w. Is always pronounced like English v, 
 never like English w. 
 
 31. x. Is pronounced as in English. 
 
 NOTE. In words in -xion it is pronounced like ksj: reflexion 1 (rayflekshoon). 
 
 32. z. Always pronounced like s in so: zebra, 
 (saybrah) . 
 
 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 33. In Swedish a distinction must be made be- 
 tween the accent-stress and the musical accent. 
 
 ACCENT-STRESS. 
 
 34. Simple words. The accent-stress falls on 
 the root syllable of all simple native words: le'va, 
 to live; ha'ge, pasture; tan'ke, thought; mo'der, 
 mother. 
 
 35. Compounds. Compound words of native 
 origin, whether formed of noun-\-noun, prefix -\- 
 noun, noun-\-suffix, adjective+adjective, or prefix-}- 
 verb, have the main stress, as a rule, on the first 
 syllable: skol'hus, schoolhouse; av r stand, distance; 
 
 Swedish Grammar 2
 
 10 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 man'lig, manly; dt'bar, eatable; bla'gul, blue and 
 yellow ; till'sta, to admit ; an' fora, to cite ; har'komst, 
 descent; prat'sam, talkative. 
 
 36. Exceptions, (a) The prefixes be-, e-, ent-, 
 and ge- are always unaccented: beha'ga, to please; 
 entle'diga, to discharge; gemal', consort; ehu'ru, al- 
 though. So also the prefix for- is unaccented in 
 most words: forta'la, to slander; forsta', to under- 
 stand; but fo'r'dom, prejudice (see 211). 
 
 (b) The following words have the main stress 
 on the penult, or next to the last syllable: egent'lig, 
 real; offent'lig, public; manat'lig, monthly; vasent'- 
 lig, essential; ordent'lig, orderly; barmhar'tig, char- 
 itable; fient'lig, hostile. 
 
 (c) All words ending in -eri have the main stress 
 on the ultima, or last syllable: tryckeri', printing 
 office; fiskeri', fishery; slaveri' ', slavery. 
 
 NOTE. Other exceptions will be indicated as they occur. 
 
 37. Compound words have in addition to the 
 principal accent a strong secondary accent on the 
 last member of the compound: skol'hus', school- 
 house; trad'gard', garden. 
 
 38. Foreign words. Words of foreign origin 
 tend to retain their original accent. Words from 
 the Greek and the Romance languages, especially 
 those ending in -ant, -ent, -al, -i, -ik, -il, -ist, -ur, -ark, 
 are generally accented on the last syllable. 
 
 NOTE 1. Nouns having the endings -tnno, -essa, -aker, -cter, -cum, -ikcl, -ifl, 
 -itel; adjectives ending in -abel, -ibcl, -isk, and verbs ending- in -era are ac- 
 cented on the penult. 
 
 2. Nouns ending in -turn, -to, and -ic have with a few exceptions the main 
 stress on the antepenult, or third syllable from the end: privilc' gium, privilege; 
 nola'rie, notary. 
 
 3. Foreign words ending in -or shift the accent when suffixes are added : 
 dok'tor, dokto'rer, doktor'ska, profes'sor, professo'rer.
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 11 
 
 MUSICAL ACCENT. 
 
 39. Different from the stress accent is the mu- 
 sical accent. There are two kinds of musical accent 
 in Swedish employed in single words, the acute and 
 the grave, or the monosyllabic and the dissyllabic. 
 
 The acute, or monosyllabic, accent, which is 
 approximately identical with the musical accent in 
 English and German, is used in words which were 
 originally monosyllables. 
 
 NOTE. Many dissyllabic and polysyllabic words have this accent, since 
 they were formerly monosyllabic or have become dissyllabic or polysyllabic by 
 the addition of some ending, especially the definite postpositive article. 
 
 40. Foreign loan words often receive the acute 
 accent since this approximately resembles the mu- 
 sical accent employed by the mcfre important of the 
 European languages. 
 
 41. The grave, or dissyllabic, accent belongs in 
 most cases to words which were originally dissyllabic 
 or polysyllabic. This accent is a peculiar feature 
 of the Swedish (and Norwegian), and constitutes 
 perhaps the greatest difficulty which confronts the 
 foreigner wishing to acquire a correct pronuncia- 
 tion. Although no rules can teach it, the following 
 remarks may be useful : 
 
 42. We may call the highest pitch to which the 
 voice rises in unaffected pronunciation the high 
 tone, and the lowest to which it falls the low tone. 
 The pitch which is usually employed lies midway 
 between these two and may be designated as the 
 normal tone. (Signs: I, low tone; n, normal 
 tone). A word with acute accent has the normal 
 tone on the first syllable and the loiv tone on the
 
 12 CAPITALIZATION. 
 
 n i n 
 
 following syllable or syllables. Ex.: get'-ter, get'- 
 i i 
 ter-na. The word is originally monosyllabic. This 
 
 intonation is practically the same as the English. 
 
 43. A word with grave accent, if dissyllabic, be- 
 gins with a tone a little below the normal, which we 
 may designate as n, the voice then glides down to 
 the low tone within the same syllable, producing a 
 slightly broken intonation, and rises to the normal 
 
 -nl n 
 
 tone on the second syllable. Ex. : ta-la, to speak. 
 
 44. A word of more than two syllables taking 
 the grave accent has the n tone on the first syllable, 
 the low tone on the second, and the normal tone on 
 
 -n I n 
 
 the third. Ex.: ta*la-re, speaker. 
 
 In the case of words which do not take the stress 
 accent on the first syllable, regard the stressed syl- 
 lable as the first in applying these rules. Ex. : for- 
 
 -nl n 
 
 ta'la. 
 
 REMABK. The accent mark used in this book merely indi- 
 cates the syllable to be stressed. 
 
 Capitalization. 
 
 45. Capitals are used less frequently in Swedish 
 than in English. Thus Swedish uses a small initial 
 letter in the following cases contrary to English 
 usage : 
 
 (a) In the names of the days of the week and 
 in the names of months: tisdag, Tuesday; april, 
 April. 
 
 (b) In the names of certain festivals, holidays, 
 and times of the year : jul, Christmas ; pask, Easter ; 
 advent, Advent.
 
 PUNCTUATION. 13 
 
 (c) In adjectives and nouns derived from proper 
 names: svensk, Swedish; engelsk, English; sveden- 
 borgiansk, Swedenborgian ; darvinist, Darwinist; 
 stockholmare, inhabitant of Stockholm. 
 
 46. In titles of books and headings of chapters 
 only the first word, as a rule, is capitalized. 
 
 47. In compound names like Forenta staterna, 
 United States, and Stilla havet, Pacific Ocean, only 
 the first word is capitalized; so also in expressions 
 like Karl den store, Charles the Great. 
 
 48. Personal titles are generally not capitalized 
 except in direct address: herr Svensson; professor 
 Bjorkman; hans majestdt, His Majesty; but, Bdsta 
 Herr Professor! Dear Professor: Ers Maje- 
 stat! Your Majesty (capitalization is optional). 
 
 49. The pronoun I (second person plural) is 
 capitalized; ni (second person singular) and its dif- 
 ferent cases are often capitalized in letters as a sign 
 of respect. 
 
 Punctuation. 
 
 50. The rules of punctuation are nearly the 
 same in both English and Swedish. But Swedish 
 punctuation is perhaps closer than ours, the comma 
 especially being used more freely. Note examples in 
 reading. 
 
 OBSERVE. The comma is generally used to set off 
 the different clauses of a sentence, whether inde- 
 pendent or dependent, provided they contain a sub- 
 ject and , predicate : ringen, som jag hade pa fing- 
 ret, har kommit bort, the ring that I had on my
 
 14 SYLLABICATION. 
 
 finger has been lost; sag mig, vad du har gjort, 
 tell me what you have done; gossen laser, och flic- 
 kan syr, the boy reads and the girl sews. 
 
 Syllabication. 
 
 51. A consonant between two vowels, except x in 
 simple words of native origin, goes with the follow- 
 ing vowel : a-ra, ce-der, Id-ra-re, re-gel, vax-a. 
 
 52. When two or more consonants occur between 
 two vowels, the last consonant usually goes with 
 the following vowel: fal-la, hop-pas, fladd-ra, myc- 
 ket. 
 
 53. But sch and sk when used as signs for the 
 s.?-sound (sh) are not separated but added to the 
 following vowel : mar-schera, mar-skalk; ng is added 
 to the preceding vowel unless n and g belong to 
 different words: hang-a, sjung-a. 
 
 54. Compound words are divided according to 
 their component parts: trdd-gdrd, garden; kyrk- 
 torn, steeple; hand-skrift, manuscript; bak-om, 
 behind.
 
 PART II. 
 THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 Genders. 
 
 55. The Swedish language has four genders: 
 masculine, feminine, common, and neuter. 
 
 56. Masculine are generally names of living 
 beings, especially persons, of the male sex. They 
 require as pronoun of reference han. 
 
 57. Feminine are generally names of living 
 beings, especially persons, of the female sex. They 
 require as pronoun of reference hon. 
 
 58. Common gender comprises most names of 
 inanimate objects which are not neuter. The pro- 
 noun of reference is den. 
 
 59. Whether the name of an inanimate object 
 is common or neuter depends variously on termina- 
 tion or usage. A few practical rules for determin- 
 ing neuter nouns will be given in the Appendix ; but 
 the best plan for the beginner is to associate the 
 indefinite article with every noun he learns. 
 
 60. The neuter gender requires det as pronoun 
 of reference. 
 
 61. Formerly the distinction between the mas- 
 culine and feminine genders of inanimate objects
 
 16 ARTICLES. 
 
 was more strictly observed ; now it is almost entirely 
 discarded except in some dialects. The distinction 
 is avoided by employing den as pronoun of reference 
 for either. The tendency is to extend the province 
 of the common gender. Thus we find that names 
 of animals, even the higher, when no reference is 
 had to sex, are generally regarded as common and 
 referred to with the pronoun den. On the contrary, 
 nouns ending in -a with plural in -or are often fem- 
 inine even when they denote inanimate objects or 
 living beings of either sex: Var dr klockan? Where 
 is the clock? Hon hanger pa vdggen i sangkam- 
 maren. It hangs on the wall in the bedroom. 
 Vad blev det av den lilla vita duvan? What became 
 of the little white dove? Hon flog sin vag. It flew 
 away. 
 
 NOTE. Masculine, feminine, and common nouns will be referred to as gender 
 nouna. It is not deemed necessary to denote whether a noun is masculine, 
 feminine, or commor ; rules given in 56, 57, and 58 will enable the student to 
 make such a distinction whenever necessary. 
 
 THE ARTICLES. 
 
 62. There are three articles: the indefinite 
 article; the postpositive definite article, which is 
 appended to the noun, and the independent or pre- 
 positive definite article, which stands before the 
 noun and is used only when the noun is qualified by 
 an adjective. 
 
 THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 63. The indefinite article which is equivalent to 
 the English indefinite article a or an has two forms : 
 
 (1) En, which is used before all gender nouns:
 
 VERBS. 1? 
 
 en man, a man; en drottning, a queen; en dngare, 
 a steamer. 
 
 (2) Ett, which is used before all neuter nouns: 
 ett oga, an eye; ett barn, a child. 
 
 RULE OP SYNTAX. 
 
 64. The indefinite article corresponds in the 
 main with that of English, with some important 
 deviations. It must be omitted : 
 
 (a) Before a predicate noun denoting profession 
 or occupation when not qualified by an adjective. 
 As: min van dr larare, my friend is a teacher; but 
 min van dr en begavad larare, my friend is a talent- 
 ed teacher. 
 
 (b) Also in a number of phrases; as, jag har 
 lust att Idsa, I have a desire to read; jag fick svar, 
 I received an answer. 
 
 65. The verb att hava (short form, att ha), to 
 have. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag har, I have PI. vi ha(va), we have 
 
 du har, thou hast (you / haven,han, you have 
 
 have) ni ha(va), you have 
 
 ni har, you have de ha(va), they have 
 han har, he has 
 
 NOTE. The shorter forms of the verb hava have practically supplanted the 
 longer forms, which are limited to the solemn style. 
 
 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag hade, I had, etc. PI. vi hade, we had, etc. 
 du hade / haden 
 
 ni hade ni hade 
 
 han hade de hade
 
 18 VEBBS. 
 
 ( 
 
 66. The verb att vara, to be. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag dr, I am PL vi dro, we are 
 
 du ar, thou art (you / dren, you are 
 are) ni dro, you are 
 
 ni dr, you are de dro, they are 
 han dr, he is 
 
 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag var, I was, etc. PI. vi voro, we were, etc. 
 du var I voren 
 
 ni var ni voro 
 
 han var de voro 
 
 67. REMARKS ON THE VERBS. 
 
 (a) The singular du is used in very familiar 
 address, to relatives, to intimate friends, and to 
 children. The plural 7 is archaic except in elevated 
 style. 
 
 (b) Ni is used instead of du as the conventional 
 form of address. In the plural it has supplanted 1 
 both in familiar and polite address (see 142 and 
 note) . 
 
 (c) The singular of the verb regularly takes the 
 place of the plural in conversation and has begun 
 to replace the latter in the written language: thus, 
 vi har, ni har, vi dr, etc., are permissible. 
 
 NOTE. In the beginning only the third person singular of the verbs will be 
 given in the vocabulary ; this form can be used in all persons and both numbers. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 N. B. The student should be required to reproduce the 
 contents of the exercises, wherever this is practicable, in 
 his own words. 
 
 A. 1. Karl ar en liten gosse, som (wlio) bor i en stor 
 stad. 2. Han gar i skolan och har en snail liirare. 3. TTaii
 
 EXERCISE. 19 
 
 far ofta en lang laxa, som ar mycket svar. 4. Karl iir flitig 
 och kan sin (his) laxa. 5. "Kan du din (your) laxa i 
 dag?" fragar 1 Karls larare. 6. Karl svarar: "Ja, jag kan 
 min (my) laxa." 
 
 a The predicate precedes the subject if the clause is introduced by a modifier 
 of the verb, which may be either adverb, phrase, clause, or object. 
 
 B. Answer the following questions in Swedish: 1. Vem 
 (who) ar Karl? 2. Var (where) bor han? 3. Vad (what) 
 har han? 4. Ar hans larare snail? 5. Vad ger han Karl 
 ofta? 6. Ar Karls laxa svar? 7. Vad fragar han Karl 
 ofta ? 8. Vad svarar Karl sin larare ? 
 
 WRITTEN EXERCISE. 
 
 N. B. The teacher should read the English sentences, give 
 the class a few seconds for mental translation, and then put 
 the question to the individual student. The students should 
 not be allowed to read the translation from their papers or 
 to translate from their books. 
 
 C. 1. Mary lives in a large and beautiful city. 2. She 
 is a good girl. She writes a long (langt) letter to a friend. 
 3. She has a mother, who is very good. 4. Her (hennes) 
 mother asks her (lienne), "What are 1 you writing?" 5. 
 Mary answers her (sin) mother, "I am 1 writing a long 
 letter to a friend who lives in Stockholm." 
 
 1 Swedish has no progressive nor emphatic verb-forms. Use the simple 
 present. Do and did are not translated in interrogative and negative expres- 
 sions. Use the simple present or imperfect. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 N. B. 1. The indefinite article before nouns shows whether 
 they are gender nouns or neuter nouns. 
 
 2. Only the indefinite gender form of the adjective is given 
 in the first few lessons. 
 
 bor, lives din, thy, your 
 
 ett brev, a letter en, a, one, (gender form) 
 
 t <lag, to-day ett, a, an (neuter)
 
 20 
 
 DEFINITE ARTICLES. 
 
 en flicka, a girl 
 flitig, diligent 
 frdgar, asks 
 far, gets, receives 
 ger, gives 
 en gosse, a boy 
 gdr, goes 
 han, he 
 hans, his 
 har, has 
 /ion, she 
 
 henne, her (objective) 
 hennes, her (possessive) 
 i, in 
 ;o, yes 
 
 Jean, can; know 
 Ziifen, little, small 
 Idng, long 
 en Idrare, a teacher 
 IDIOMS: 1. 0d i skolan, to 
 2. kunna (present 
 
 en Idxa, a lesson 
 
 min, my 
 
 en moder (mor), a mother 
 
 mycket, much, very (much) 
 
 och, and 
 
 ofto, often 
 
 sin, his, her (reflexive) 
 
 en skola, a school 
 
 i skolan, to (at) school 
 
 skriver, writes 
 
 snail, good, kind 
 
 som, who, which, that 
 
 en stad, a city 
 
 stor, large, great 
 
 svarar, answers 
 
 svdr, hard, difficult 
 
 vacker, beautiful 
 
 en van, a friend 
 
 attend school. 
 kan) sin Idxa, to know one's lesson. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 The Definite Articles. 
 
 68. There are two definite articles, the post- 
 positive and the prepositive. 
 
 THE POSTPOSITIVE ARTICLE. 
 
 69. The postpositive article consists of a letter 
 or syllable suffixed to the noun. This article is 
 always used when the noun is definite in sense. 
 
 It has the following forms : 
 a. For gender nouns: 
 
 Singular: -en, or -n. 
 
 Plural: -na (rarely -ne).
 
 DEFINITE ARTICLES. 21 
 
 b. For neuter nouns: 
 
 Singular : -et, or -t. 
 Plural: -na, -a, or -en. 
 
 70. The postpositive article with gender nouns. 
 IN THE SINGULAR. 
 
 1. -en is used when the noun ends in a consonant. 
 Ex. : skald-en, the poet ; brud-en, the bride ; sol-en, 
 
 the sun. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. (1) Gender nouns ending in unaccented el, -er, 
 or -or and the words konsul, consul, and purpur, purple, take 
 -n as postpositive article. 
 
 Ex.: fdgel-n, the bird; seger-n, the victory; doktor-n, the 
 doctor; konsul-n, the consul. 
 
 (2) Other words ending in -I, or -r take either -en or -n as 
 postpositive article. 
 
 Ex.: fjaril-en or fjaril-n, the butterfly; sommar-en or 
 sommar-n, the summer. 
 
 2. -n is used when the noun ends in a vowel. 
 Ex. : gosse-n, the boy ; flicka-n, the girl ; blomma-n, 
 
 the flower ; by-n, the village. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. Gender nouns ending in accented -e or -i take 
 either -en or -n as postpositive article. 
 
 Ex.: arme-en orarmen, the army; symmetri-en or symmetri-n, 
 the symmetry. 
 
 N. B. Of gender nouns ending in unaccented -en only the 
 following four take the postpositive article. In so doing they 
 drop the e of the ending: Gotten, bottom, bottn-en, the bottom; 
 socken, parish, sockn-en, the parish; sdgen, legend, sagn-en, 
 the legend; ofcen, desert, okn-en, the desert. 
 
 IN THE PLURAL. 
 
 -na (rarely -ne) is used as postpositive article 
 with gender nouns in the plural. 
 
 Ex. : skalder-na, the poets ; brudar-na, the brides ;
 
 22 DEFINITE ARTICLES. 
 
 faglar-na, the birds; flickor-na, the girls; byar-na, 
 the villages ; oknar-na, the deserts. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS, mann-en, the men; gass-en, the geese; loss-en, 
 the lice; moss-en, the mice. 
 
 71. The postpositive article with neuter nouns. 
 IN THE SINGULAR. 
 
 1. -et is used when the noun ends in a consonant 
 or in an accented vowel. 
 
 Ex. : namn-et, the name ; bo-et, the nest ; parti-et, 
 the party. 
 
 2. - is used when the noun ends in an unaccented 
 vowel. 
 
 Ex.: hjarta-t, the heart; eko-t, the echo. 
 
 N. B. Neuter nouns ending in unaccented -el, -en, or -er 
 drop the e of the ending on taking the postpositive article. 
 
 Ex.: segel, sail, segl-et, the sail; vapen, weapon, vapn-et, the 
 weapon; dunder, thunder, dundr-et, the thunder. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS: siden-et, the silk; papper-et, the paper. 
 
 IN THE PLURAL. 
 
 1. -na is used as postpositive article in the plural 
 with neuter nouns of the Third Declension. 
 
 Ex.: bryggerier-na, the breweries; kafeer-na, the 
 cafes. 
 
 2. -a is used as postpositive article in the plural 
 with neuter nouns of the Fourth Declension. 
 
 Ex. : stdllen-a, the places ; bon-a, the nests. 
 
 3. -en is used as postpositive article in the plural 
 with neuter nouns of the Fifth Declension. 
 
 Ex. : namn-en, the names ; segl-en, the sails. 
 
 72. Certain nouns do not take the postpositive 
 article. 
 
 1. Abstract nouns ending in -an. Ex. : beund- 
 ran, admiration.
 
 EXERCISE. 23 
 
 2. Most gender nouns ending in unaccented -en 
 (see 70, N. B.). Ex.: froken, miss, young lady; 
 examen, examination. 
 
 3. Foreign nouns ending in -um and -us. Ex.: 
 datum, date ; genus, gender. 
 
 But those ending in -eum or -ium drop -um and 
 add -et. Ex. : museum, museum, muse-et, the muse- 
 um ; privilegium, privilege, privilegi-et, the privilege, 
 
 73. THE PREPOSITIVE ARTICLE. 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 Gender Nouns Neuter All Genders 
 
 den det de 
 
 It is used together with the postpositive article 
 when the noun is modified by an adjective. Ex. : 
 den varma solen, the warm sun. For further dis- 
 cussion see 126. 
 
 RULE OF SYNTAX. 
 
 74. Contrary to English usage the definite ar- 
 ticle in Swedish is used with generic and abstract 
 nouns, as, guldet, gold; lyckan, happiness; livet dr 
 kort, men konsten dr Idng, life is short but art is 
 long. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 A. Supply the postpositive article in the following: 
 1. Ser ni hus , som ligger dar pa kulle ? 2. Det till- 
 hor dam , som kommer dar. 3. Hon ar mycket rik, sager 
 man. -i. Tradgard , som ligger bakom hus , ar vacker, 
 och frukt , som viixer i den (it), ar fiirtrafflig. 5. Hon 
 iigcr ocksa ett stort (neut.) 1ms i stad och har pengar i 
 bank . (5. Hon liar en son, som ar atta ar gammal och 
 gar i skola . 7. Hans larare sager, att gosse ar snail 
 och flitig. 8. Nu ar han mycket sjuk, och doktor beso- 
 ker lionom.
 
 24 EXERCISE. 
 
 B. Answer the following questions in Swedish : 1. Vad 
 ligger pa kullen? 2. Kan ni se det? 3. Vem tillhbr det? 
 4. Ax hon fattig eller rik? 5. Vad ligger bakom huset? 
 6. Vad vaxer i den? 7. Vad ar er (your) tanke (idea) om 
 frukten? 8. Ager damen nagot mer (anything else)? 
 9. Beratta vad ni vet om hennes son (Tell what you know 
 about her son). 
 
 C. Translate : 1. Do you know the man who owns the 
 house on the hill? 2. No, I do not (det gor jag icJce), 
 but my father knows him. 3. He always salutes me when 
 I meet him in the street. 1 4. He is a very kind man, and 
 rich, they say (A, 3). 5. His wife is dead and he has a 
 little boy, six years old, who attends school (A, 6). 
 6. Now he cannot (Jean haji inte) attend (go) for he ig 
 sick and is at home. 7. The doctor visits him every day. 
 
 *?& gatan. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 alltid, always honom, him 
 
 ftofcom, behind ett hus, house 
 
 en tank, bank en hustru, wife 
 
 besoker, visits hdl'sar pd, 1 greets 
 
 en dag, day kommer, comes 
 
 en dam, lady en kulle, hill 
 
 den (pronoun), it kdnner, knows 
 
 det (pronoun) it ligger, lies 
 
 en doktor, doctor man (indef. pronoun), one, 
 ddr, there they, people 
 
 do'd, dead en man, man 
 
 en fader, father moter, meets 
 
 frukt (collective), fruit ni, you (formal) 
 
 fdrtraff'Ug, excellent nu, now 
 
 gammal, old nar, when 
 
 en gata, street ocksa, also 
 
 hemma, at home pd, on, upon 
 
 *halsar pd' (with the main stress on pa) signifies to pay a visit: ft halsudt 
 pd' hot honom, we called at his home.
 
 DECLENSION. 25 
 
 pengar (plur.), money ty (conj.), for 
 
 rik, rich en tradgdrd, garden 
 
 ser, sees varje, each, every 
 
 sager, says vaxer, grows 
 
 till'hdr (35), belongs to tiger, owns 
 
 LESSON III. 
 Inflection of Nouns. 
 
 75. CASE. Nouns are changed for case only in 
 the genitive, which is formed by adding s to the 
 nominative of the indefinite or the definite form : 
 
 Ex.: En gosses bok, a boy's book; gossens bok 
 dr hdr, the boy's book is here; flickornas blommor 
 dro vackra, the girls' flowers are beautiful. 
 
 NOTE. For exceptions see 130, a, b, d. 
 
 76. NUMBER. There are five declensions, accord- 
 ing to the manner of forming the nominative plural 
 of the indefinite form. These are : 
 
 First Declension. Plural ending -or. 
 Second Declension. Plural ending -ar. 
 Third Declension. Plural ending -er. 
 Fourth Declension. Plural ending -n. 
 Fifth Declension. Without plural ending. 
 
 In addition there are some irregular nouns which 
 cannot be classified. 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 77. This declension forms its plural by dropping 
 the ending -a of the nominative singular and adding 
 -or. The postpositive article is -n in the singular 
 and -no, in the plural. 
 
 Swedish Grammar 3
 
 26 DECLENSION. 
 
 78. The First Declension comprises all gender 
 nouns ending in -a; also the nouns ros, rose; vdg, 
 wave; toff el, slipper; dder, vein; and a few others. 
 
 Exceptions: histo'ria {-er), story; kolle'ga (-er), colleague; lusta (-ar), desire. 
 
 79. Example of the First Declension: en flicka, 
 a girl. 
 
 INDEFINITE DEFINITE 
 
 Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. 
 
 Nom. en flicka, flick-or flicka-n, flick-or-na 
 Gen. en flicka-s, flick-or-s flicka-n-s, flick-or-na-s 
 
 REMABK. As the genitive is formed regularly by the addi- 
 tion of -s (without the apostrophe), the nominative form only 
 will be given hereafter. 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 80. This declension is characterized by the plural 
 ending -ar. The postpositive definite article is -en 
 or -n in the singular (72) , -na in the plural. 
 
 81. The Second Declension comprises: 
 
 (a) Most monosyllabic gender nouns ending in a 
 consonant and some ending in a vowel. 
 
 (b) Gender nouns ending in -dom, -il, -ing, -ling, 
 -ning, -ung, and unaccented -e, -el, -en, -er. 
 
 NOTE 1. Unaccented e in the endings -e, -el, -en, -er is dropped when the 
 final ending is added. 
 
 2. Unaccented a in the ending -ar, and o and u in the words afton, evening ; 
 djavitl, devil ; morgon, morning, are dropped before the plural ending. 
 
 82. Examples of the Second Declension: 
 
 en fdgel, a bird; en gosse, a boy; en afton, an 
 evening. 
 
 INDEFINITE DEFINITE 
 
 Sg. en fdgel fdgel-n (73,1) 
 
 PI. fagl-ar (81,1) fdgl-ar-na
 
 EXERCISE. 27 
 
 Sg. en gosse gosse-n (72) 
 
 PI. goss-ar (81,1) goss-ar-na(-ne) (73,5) 
 
 Sg. en a/ow afton-en 
 
 PI. aftn-ar (81, b, 2) aftn-ar-na 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 4. Supply the postpositive def. article where there is 
 one dash; the proper plural ending and the postpositive 
 article where there are two dashes : 
 
 1. Herr Brown ar ute och gar 1 . 2. Vadr ar mycket 
 vackert; sol skiner och luft ar varm. 3. Det ar mycket 
 
 folk pa gat , ty det ar helgdag, och man arbetar ej. 
 
 4. Nar han blir trott, satter 2 han sig pa en av soff i 
 
 parken. 5. Han ser pa goss - och flick , som leka 3 
 
 dar, och hb'r pa fagl , som sjunga. 6. Sedan gar 2 han 
 
 till en restaurang, ty han ar hungrig. 7. Han satter sig 
 vid ett bord, ser pa matsedel , kallar pa vaktmastar och 
 bestaller. 8. Ibland aro bans tvenne dbttrar med honom. 
 
 *Xr ute och gar, is out walking, takes a walk. J See note 1, Exercise I. A. 
 3 In conversation the singular is used with a plural subject. 
 
 B. Answer in Swedish : Yad heter (is the name of) er 
 van? 2. Yad gb'r herr Brown? 3. Hurudant ar vadret? 
 4. Ar herr Brown ensam (alone) ute? 5. Varfor (why) ar 
 det mycket folk ute och gar? 6. Varfor arbetar man icke? 
 7. Vad gor herr Brown, nar han blir trott? 8. Vad ser han 
 pa? 9. Vad hor han pa? 10. Vart gar han, nar han ar 
 hungrig? 11. Vem kallar han pa? , 
 
 C. 1. I have a friend whose name is (som heter) Brown. 
 2. He comes often to me and asks me if I will take a walk 1 
 with him. 3. When the weather is fine (vackert} I answer 2 
 yes, for he is a kind and interesting man and his company 
 is always agreeable (angenamt). 4. Sometimes when there
 
 28 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 arc many people 3 in the streets we go 2 to a park and sit 
 down (sdtta oss) on one of the seats. 5. He often tells of 
 his (sina) travels in different (olika) parts of the world. 
 6. When we are hungry (kungriga) we eat together in (pa) 
 a restaurant. 
 
 1 fill gd ut och gd. 2 See note 1, Ex. I, A. 3 There is and there are are trans- 
 lated by det ar, the verb being singular in either case. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 arbetar, works 
 
 l)erdt'tar (36, a), tells, relates 
 bestal'ler (36, a), orders 
 ett bord, table 
 en del, -ar, part, share 
 en dotter, dottrar, daughter 
 ei, not 
 
 en flicka, -or, girl 
 folk (collective), people 
 ett folk, a people 
 en fdgel, fdglar, bird 
 en gosse, -ar, boy 
 en helgdag, -ar, holiday 
 herr, -ar, Mister 
 hungrig, hungry 
 ibland' (adv.), sometimes 
 intressant', interesting 
 kallar pd, calls 
 leker, plays 
 luft, air 
 
 en matsedel (35, 37), -sedlar, 
 bill of fare 
 
 med, with (prep.); along 
 
 (adv.) 
 
 om, about (prep.) ; if (conj.) 
 en park, park 
 en restaurang' , restaurant 
 en resa, -or, journey 
 sedan, thereupon (adv.), after 
 
 (conj.) 
 sig (reflexive pronoun), himself 
 
 herself, itself, themselves 
 sjunger, sings 
 skiner, shines 
 
 en soffa, -or, sofa, seat, bench 
 sdtter, seats, sets 
 ett sdllskap, company 
 tillsammans, together 
 tro'tt, tired 
 tvenne, two 
 
 en vakt'mdstare, waiter 
 varm, warm 
 vid, at, by 
 (ett) vdder, weather 
 en vdrld (mute 1), -ar, world 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. att gd ut och gd, to take a walk. 
 
 2. att sdtta sig, to sit down. 
 
 3. Jag Tieter Karl, my name is Carl.
 
 DECLENSION. 29 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 Inflection of Nouns (Continued). 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 83. The nouns of this declension take -er in the 
 plural. The postpositive article is -en or -n for gen- 
 der nouns and -et or -t for neuter nouns in the 
 singular; -na for either in the plural. 
 
 NOTE. Some nouns ending in unaccented -e, and a few others, take -r in the 
 plural. 
 
 84. This declension contains: 
 
 (a) A large number of monosyllabic gender 
 nouns, especially derivatives ending in -d, -st, -t. 
 
 (b) Gender nouns of more than one syllable end- 
 ing in -ad, -else, -het, -nad, -ndr, -skap. 
 
 (c) Most gender nouns of foreign origin. 
 
 (d) A few neuter monosyllables. 
 
 (e) Neuter nouns of more than one syllable end- 
 ing in -eri', -e'um, -e, -i, -ium, -on, -um, almost ex- 
 clusively of foreign origin. 
 
 85. Examples of gender nouns of the Third 
 Declension: en bild, a picture; en son, a son; en bok, 
 a book; en byggnad, a building; en hdndelse, an 
 event; en neger, a negro; en nota'rie, a notary; en 
 doktor, a doctor ; en nation, a nation. 
 
 INDEFINITE DEFINITE 
 
 Sg. en bild bild-en 
 
 PI. bild-er bild-er-na 
 
 Sg. en son son-en 
 
 PI. son-er son-er-na 
 
 Sg. en bok bok-en 
 
 PI. bock-er bock-er-na
 
 30 DECLENSION. 
 
 Sg. en byggnad byggnad-en 
 
 PL byggnad-er byggnad-er-na 
 
 Sg. en kandelse hdndelse-n 
 
 PL hdndelse-r hdndelse-r-na 
 
 Sg. en neger neger-n 
 
 PL negr-er negr-er-na 
 
 Sg. en nota'rie notarie-n 
 
 PL notarie-r notarie-r-na 
 
 Sg. en doktor doktor-n 
 
 PL doktor'-er doktor' -er-na 
 
 Sg. en nation' nation-en 
 
 PL nation-er nation-er-na 
 
 NOTE. 1. (a) A few monosyllables change the root vowel (14). In addition 
 to those given in the paradigms we may note: and, duck; hand, hand; natt, 
 night ; rand, brim, stripe ; strand, shore ; stdng, pole. 
 
 (b) In bok, book ; fot, foot ; rot, root, there is both a change of root vowel 
 and a doubling of the final consonant. 
 
 Give the plural of the words enumerated above (according to 14). 
 
 (c) In not, nut; get, goat, and a few others the final consonant is doubled. 
 
 2. Some monosyllables take the grave accent in the plural while others take 
 the acute. Ex. (grave accent) : son, soner; bild, bilder; (acute accent) : strand, 
 stranderj stad, stader. 
 
 3. Loan words in -or which in the singular have the accent on the syllable 
 preceding -or shift the accent to the syllable containing -or in the plural: pro- 
 fes'sor, professo'rer. The def. art. is -n. (73, 1). 
 
 4. Gender nouns in unaccented -el and -er drop the e of the ending before 
 the plural ending: fabel, fable, fabler; fiber, fibre, fibrer. 
 
 5. The ending -us in words of Latin origin is dropped before the plural 
 ending: dekanus, dean, dekan-er. 
 
 86. Examples of neuter nouns of the Third De- 
 clension: ett tryckeri', a printing office; ett mu- 
 se'um, a museum. 
 
 INDEFINITE DEFINITE 
 
 Sg. ett tryckeri' tryckeri-et 
 
 PL tryckeri-er tryckeri-er-na 
 
 Sg. ett muse'um muse-et 
 
 PL muse-er muse-er-na 
 
 NOTE. Foreign words ending in -eum and -turn drp the ending -urn upon 
 taking the definite article and the plural ending.
 
 EXEECISE. 31 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 A. 1. Decline in the indefinite and definite form, nomi- 
 native and genitive cases, singular and plural: (like en 
 doktor) en professor, en pastor, a pastor; en rektor, a col- 
 lege president. 2. (Like en stad) en and, a duck; en brand, 
 a firebrand (also conflagration, sing, only) ; en strand, a 
 shore. 3. (Like en hdndelse) en fo'reteelse, a phenomenon; 
 en ok' tie, a share. 5. (Like en neger) en muskel, a muscle. 
 6. (Like ett museum] ett semina'rium, a seminary; (like 
 ett tryckeri) ett bryggen, a brewery; ett kafe, a cafe. 
 
 B. Supply (at ) the missing ending, the definite post- 
 positive article, or the ending of the plural or both 
 
 (at ); also (at...) the indefinite article en, ett: 
 
 1. Ar icke detta (this) . . . vackert landskap? 2. Har kan 
 man se mycket pa en gang. Man ser ... flod, som flyter 
 genom vackra ang , tva stad med gat , park , hus och 
 
 kyrk . 3. Omkring stad ligga akr , skog , berg 
 
 och dal . Punkt , som man ser langt borta pa 
 
 slatt , aro gard , pa vilka bond bo. 4. Dessa 
 
 (these) arbeta hela (the whole) dag pa sina (their) fait 
 och i sina tradgard . 5. Pa hb'jd - pa flod (gen- 
 itive, def.) vanstra strand ligga tva ruin . 6. De aro myc- 
 ket intressanta. 
 
 C. Answer in Swedish: 1. Hurudant (how) ar land- 
 skapet? 2. Vad flyter floden igenom (through) ? 3. Hu- 
 ru manga stader kan ni se? 4. Vad ser ni i dessa (these) 
 stader? 5. Vad aro punkterna langt borta? 6. Vad gora 
 bonderna hela dagen? 7. Vad ser ni pa hojderna pa flo- 
 dens vanstra strand? 
 
 D. Translate: 1. From this (denna) hill you can (kan 
 man) see a very beautiful (vackert) landscape. 2. On 
 both sides there (omit) are heights and in the background
 
 32 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 large (stora) forests. 3. Two rivers flow through the val- 
 ley and by these (dessa) rivers lie cities. 4. The city to 
 the left has two museums and a famous (beromt) picture 
 gallery. 5. I like to see paintings of famous (beromda) 
 artists. 6. If you wish (vill), we shall visit (besoka vi) 
 the museum to-morrow. 7. Do you see the smokestacks on 
 the left side of the river ? 8. They belong to a large factory 
 where they (man) manufacture steam engines. 9. These 
 (dessa) steam engines are exported (translate: one ex- 
 ports) to foreign countries. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 av, of, by, from, off en kyrka, -or, church 
 
 en bakgrund, -er, background ett land, lander, country 
 ett berg, mountain 
 bor (pi. bo), lives 
 borta, away 
 en bonde, bonder, peasant, 
 
 farmer 
 
 en by, -ar, village 
 en dag, -ar, day 
 en dal, -ar, valley 
 exporte'rar, exports 
 en fabriJc', -er, factory 
 en flod, -er, river 
 fiyter, flows 
 frdmmande, foreign 
 frdn, from 
 ett fait, a field 
 genom (igenom) through 
 en gang, one time, once 
 
 ett landskap, landscape 
 
 i morgon, to-morrow 
 
 en punkt, -er, point, dot 
 
 en ruin, -er, ruin 
 
 en skog, -ar, forest 
 
 en sliitt, -er, plain 
 
 en skorsten, -ar, chimney, 
 
 smokestack 
 en strand, strdnder, bank, 
 
 riverside 
 
 en tavla, -or, painting, picture 
 ett tavelgalleri, -er, picture 
 
 gallery 
 
 tillverkar, manufactures 
 tvd, two 
 
 tycker om'. likes 
 vdnster, left 
 
 en gdrd, -ar, yard, farmhouse till vdnster, to the left 
 
 en dker, dkrar, field 
 
 en dngmaskin, -er, steam engine 
 
 en dng, -ar, meadow 
 
 hdr, here 
 
 en hojd, -er, height, hill 
 en konstndr, -er, artist 
 IDIOMS: 1. Jag tycker om att Idsa, I like to read. 
 
 2. att se pa, to look at. 
 
 3. pd en gdng, at once. 
 
 4. i dag, i gar, to-day, yesterday.
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 33 
 
 LESSON V. 
 The Verb. 
 
 87. There are four conjugations in Swedish. 
 
 88. Verbs belonging to the First, Second, and 
 Third Conjugations (also called weak verbs) form 
 their imperfect by adding an ending to the un- 
 changed root. 
 
 89. Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation (also called 
 strong verbs) form their imperfect by changing 
 the vowel of the root, without any added ending. 
 
 REMARK. A certain number of verbs vacillating between 
 different conjugations are called irregular verbs. 
 
 THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 90. This conjugation ha's the following endings: 
 
 -a in the infinitive. 
 
 -ar in the singular of the present indicative. 
 
 -en in the archaic second person plur. pres. ind. 
 
 -a elsewhere in the plur. pres. ind. 
 
 -ade in both numbers of the imperf. ind. 
 
 -aden in the archaic second pers. plur. 
 
 -ande in the pres. participle. 
 
 -at in the supine. 
 
 -ad in the gender form of the past participle. 
 
 -at in the neuter form of the past participle. 
 
 91. SUPINE. The supine has been evolved from 
 the neuter form of the past participle and is used 
 together with the auxiliary verb hava to form the 
 compound perfect tenses. 
 
 92. THE PAST PARTICIPLE is a verbal adjective; 
 it is used as an adjective and also with the auxiliary
 
 34 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 verbs bliva and varda, to become, to form the com- 
 pound passive of transitive verbs (see 188). 
 
 93. (a) The simple tense in Swedish expresses 
 also the progressive and emphatic forms of English ; 
 thus, jag kallar=I call, am calling, do call; jag kal- 
 lade=I called, was calling, did call. 
 
 (b) Likewise the interrogative and negative uses 
 of do, do you call ? I do not call, etc., are expressed 
 in the Swedish by the simple form: as, kallar ni? 
 jag kallar inte. 
 
 94. The verb att kalla, to call. 
 
 (a) PRESENT INDICATIVE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE 
 
 Sg. jag] Sg. jag] 
 
 du I, du I, , 
 
 ni \ kallar ni \ k aUade 
 
 han\ hanj 
 
 PL vi kalla PL vi kallade 
 
 I kallen I kalladen 
 
 ni kalla ni kallade 
 
 de kalla de kallade 
 
 (b) The perfect indicative is formed by combining 
 the supine with the present indicative of hava, to 
 have. 
 
 The pluperfect indicative is formed by combining 
 the supine with the imperfect of hava. 
 Examples : 
 
 PERFECT INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE 
 
 Sg. jag ] jag ] 
 
 du I dit I 
 
 .- rhar kallat \hade kallat 
 
 tbb ft/(/ 
 
 han} han}
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 35 
 
 PI. vi ha 1 kallat vi hade kallat 
 
 I han 2 kallat I haden kallat 
 
 ni ha kallat ni hade kallat 
 
 de ha kallat de hade kallat 
 
 J Also hava. 2 Also haven. 
 
 \ 
 
 95. To this conjugation belong: 
 
 (a) Almost all weak verbs the stem of which ends 
 in a consonant and contains one of the hard vowels 
 a, o, u, a; as skala, to peel; gnola, to hum; skura, 
 to scrub ; mala, to paint. 
 
 (b) Almost all verbs derived from other words 
 by means of a consonantal ending ; as, svartna (from 
 svart) , to grow black ; vidga (from vid) , to widen ; 
 gronska (from gron) , to grow green. 
 
 (c) All verbs ending in -e'ra; as, rege'ra, to rule ; 
 korrige'ra, to correct. 
 
 (d) All verbs having a vowel before the infinitive 
 ending -a; as, skria, to shout; fria, to woo; roa, to 
 amuse. 
 
 96. The present perfect and pluperfect of the 
 verbs hava (ha), to have; vara, to be. 
 
 PRESENT PERFECT 
 
 Sg. 
 
 du L , ,. du I, ., 
 
 m - mar haft n ^ mar vant 
 
 han] han} 
 
 PI. vi ha haft vi ha varit 
 
 I han haft I han varit 
 
 ni ha haft ni ha varit 
 
 de ha haft de ha
 
 36 EXERCISE. 
 
 PLUPERFECT 
 
 Sg. jag 1 jag 1 
 
 du [, j , .. du [, , .. 
 
 n j made haft . n ^ made varit 
 
 han} han] 
 
 PI. vi hade haft vi hade varit 
 
 I haden haft I haden varit 
 
 ni hade haft ni hade varit 
 
 de hade haft de hade varit 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 A. Supply the proper endings of the verbs as well as 
 the postpositive definite article and plural ending. 
 
 1. I gar hals (impf.) jag pa 1 hos min van Lindgren. 
 2. Jag knack (impf.) flera (several) ganger pa dorr , 
 innan han oppn (impf.) den. 3. Han ursakt (impf.) 
 sig med att han hade vil (supine) pa soff och in- 
 somn (supine). 4. Vi samtal (impf.) ett par timm 
 (plur.) om vara plan (plur.) for framtid , och jag 
 frag (impf.), om han amn foretaga den resa utrikes, 
 som han sa lange hade planer (supine). 5. "Ja, om 
 (in} ett ar", svar 2 han, "jag spar (pres.) pengar 
 mi, ty en resa utrikes kost (pres.) mycket. 6. "Vart 
 amnar du att resa?" frag 2 jag. "Till Frankrike och 
 Tyskland", svar 2 han. 7. "Jag har lange b'nsk (supine) 
 att tillbringa ett par ar i dessa (these} land; for att (in 
 order to} studera tyska och franska." 8. Nar jag var hos 
 honom, borja 2 det att regna, sa att (so that} han maste 
 (had to} lana mig ett paraply. 
 
 1 Stress on pa. 2 Notice the inverted order. 
 
 B. 1. Vad gjorde (did} ni nyligen (recently} ? 2. Var 
 han hemma? 3. Oppnade han genast? 4. Varfor drojde 
 det sa lange (why did it take sucJi a long time}, innan 
 han oppnade dorren? 5. Vad samtalade ni om? 6. Nar
 
 VOCABULARY. 37 
 
 amnade ban foretaga sin resa utrikes? 7. Vad gjorde han 
 for att kimna (be able) resa om ett ar? 8. Hur lang tid 
 amnade han tillbringa i Frankrike och Tyskland ? 9. Vad 
 amnade han gora dar? 
 
 C. 1. Yesterday I telephoned 1 to my friend Lindgren 
 and asked him if he intended to stay at home all evening 
 (liela kvdllen}. 2. He answered that he had intended to 
 attend (att gd pa] a concert, but had changed his mind 2 . 
 
 3. "Why?" I asked 1 . "I am not quite well," he answered 1 . 
 
 4. Yesterday somebody (ndgon) knocked 1 at the door. 5. I 
 hurried to the door and opened it. 6. It was my cousin 
 Carl, whom his 3 mother had sent to me with flowers, 
 for it was my birthday. 7. "It must (matte) be rain- 
 ing (93, a), Carl," I said 1 . "You are wet." 8. "Yes," 
 he answered 1 , "it began to rain when I was halfway." 
 9. Carl stayed with (hos) me a couple of hours, and when 
 he went (fjick) home, I lent 1 him my umbrella. 10. Carl is 
 a very good and industrious boy and his 3 father intends 
 to send him to Germany to (for att) study German and 
 music. 
 
 J Invert. "hade dndrat sig. 3 hans, not sin; sin is used when the subject of 
 the clause is the possessor: han skickade sin son (174). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 N. B. Weak verbs are designated by the number of the 
 conjugation to which they belong, the infinitive only of the 
 verb being given. 
 
 att (conj. and sign of the in- fo'retaga (sing, foretager), to 
 
 finitive), that, to undertake 
 
 borja, I, to begin en fodelsedag, -ar, birthday 
 
 en dorr, -ar, door hem (adv.), home 
 
 en framtid, future halvvags, halfway 
 
 fransk, French hos (prep.), at the house of, 
 f ran ska, French (lartguage) with, at
 
 38 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 knacka, I, to knock skynda, I, to hurry 
 
 en konsert', -er, concert spara, I, to save 
 
 kosta, I, to cost stude'ra, I, to study 
 
 en kusin', -er, cousin telefone'ra, I, to telephone 
 
 en kvdll, -ar, evening till'bringa, I, (also irr., 169), to 
 Una, I, to lend; to borrow spend, pass 
 
 lange (adv.), long en timme, -ar, hour 
 
 (en) musik', music tysk, German 
 
 ett par, couple tyska, German (language) 
 ett par timmar, a couple of ut'rikes, abroad (also used as 
 hours an indeclinable adjective) 
 
 ett paraply', umbrella vart, whither 
 
 en plan, -er, plan Vila, I, to rest 
 
 plane'ra, I, to plan vat, wet 
 
 regna (rengna), to rain timna, I, to intend 
 resa, II (sg., reser), to travel andra, I, to change 
 
 sam'fala, I, to converse onska, I, to wish 
 
 skicTca. I, to send oppna, I, to open 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 1. ett par, a couple of; ett par timmar, a couple of hours. 
 
 2. om ett ar, om en vecka, in a year, in a week; om mdndag, 
 
 next Monday. 
 
 3. att ma ~bra, to be well. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 The Verb (Continued). 
 
 THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 97. The verbs belonging to this conjugation are 
 of two classes. 
 
 98. Class 7. To this class belong all verbs of 
 this conjugation the stem of which ends in -k, -p, 
 -s, -t, and the verbs begynna, to begin; bryna, to 
 whet; krona, to crown; rona, to experience; synas, 
 to seem.
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 39 
 
 99. These verbs take the following endings: 
 -a in the infinitive. 
 
 -er in the singular of the present indicative. 
 -a in the plural of the present indicative. 
 -te in the imperfect indicative, both numbers. 
 -ande in the present participle. 
 -t in the supine. 
 
 -t in the gender and neuter forms of the past 
 participle. 
 
 NOTE. The archaic second plural will hereafter for the sake of convenience 
 be disregarded in the lists of verbal endings. 
 
 100. Class II. To this class belong all other 
 verbs of the Second Conjugation. 
 
 101. These verbs take : 
 
 -de in the imperfect indicative, both numbers. 
 -d in the gender form of the past participle. The 
 other endings are identical with those of Class I. 
 
 102. Examples: 
 
 att resa, to travel ; att bdja, to bend. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE 
 
 Sg. jag] jag] 
 
 du du 
 
 n reser n 
 
 han} han\ 
 
 PI. vi resa vi bdja 
 
 I resen I bdjen 
 
 ni resa ni bdja 
 
 de resa de bdja 
 
 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE 
 
 Sg. jag'} jag] 
 
 du du ( 
 
 ni \ reste ni 
 
 han} han
 
 40 ORDER OF WORDS. 
 
 PI. vi reste vi bojde 
 
 I resten I bo j den 
 
 ni reste ni bojde 
 
 de reste de bojde 
 
 PERFECT INDICATIVE 
 
 jag har rest, etc. jag har bojt, etc. 
 
 PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE 
 
 jag hade rest, etc. jag hade bojt, etc. 
 
 103. To the Second Conjugation belong most 
 verbs having a soft vowel (e, i, y, a, 6) in the 
 stem and derived from other words by a change 
 from hard to soft vowel: lysa (from ljus, light), 
 to light; fylla (from full, full), to fill; skylla (from 
 skuld, guilt), to accuse; krona (from krona, crown), 
 to crown. 
 
 NOTE. 1. If the stem of a verb of this class ends in -r no ending- is added in 
 the present indicative, singular ; thus, jag hor, I hear, instead of jag horer; jag 
 gor, instead of jag gorer. Similarly three verbs ending in -I take no ending. 
 These are tola, endure ; mala, to grind ; gala, to crow. 
 
 2. If the stem of a verb of this conjugation ends in -nd or -t preceded by a 
 'consonant, the d and the t are dropped before a d and a t of the ending; thus, 
 
 sanda, to send, has the imperfect sande, not sdndde; the past participle tand, 
 not sandd, and, according to the new orthography, the supine sant, not sdndt. 
 Gifta sig, to get married, has the imperfect ffifte, not giftte; the supine gift, 
 not giftt; and the past participle gift, not giftt. 
 
 3. Verbs in double m or n dron one of these consonants before -de, -d, -le, 
 and -t, but retain the short sound of the vowel: begynna, to begin, bcgiinte ; 
 glomma, to forget, gliimde, glijmt. 
 
 104. ORDER OF WORDS. Normal and Inverted. 
 
 1. Normal order: First the subject with its mod- 
 ifiers. Second, the verb. Third, the object and 
 other adjuncts of the verb. 
 
 2. Inverted order: The subject follows the verb. 
 The inverted order is required: 
 
 (a) In direct questions: Laste han boken i gar? 
 Did he read the book yesterday?
 
 EXERCISE. 41 
 
 (b) When the object or one of the other adjuncts 
 of the verb, adverb, phrase or clause, precedes the 
 verb: i gar Idste han boken, yesterday he read the 
 book ; da han kom, talade han till mig, when he came 
 he spoke to me. 
 
 OBSERVE. Inversion occasioned by preceding modifiers of 
 the verb occurs only in principal clauses and in dependent 
 clauses introduced by att. 
 
 (c) In the imperative, if the pronoun is expressed : 
 Kom du hit bara, (you) just come here. 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 
 A. Supply the proper endings of the verbs; the post- 
 positive definite article and the plural endings, or both. 
 
 1. Ar herr Quist hemma i dag? Nej, han bar res till 
 stad for att traffa nagra (some) van . 2. Sa trakigt 
 (neuter), jag bar sok honom tva gang , men bar ej 
 traff honom annu. 3. Ar det nagot (anything) viktigt? 
 Ja, jag hb'r for en vecka sedan (a week ago), att ban 
 amn kopa vagn och nagra par hast . Jag tank tala 
 med honom om det. 4. Nu behb'v han ej nagra (any), 
 
 ty han bar salt (sold) fabrik , som han ag . 5. Vart 
 
 ha goss gatt (gone) ? De ha gatt till muse for att 
 
 se pa (look at) de nya (plur.) tavl (del p).), som 
 
 man beromm sa mycket. 6. Tror 1 (believe) du, att de 
 komma hem till middag ? Det 2 tror jag, ty de bruka ej 
 forsumma nagot (any) mal. 7. Har ni varit i kyrk i 
 dag? Nej, vadr var sa vackert, att jag promener ut 
 pa landet. 8. Jag vandr genom skog , plock blomm 
 och horde pa fagl (def. gen. plur.) sang. 9. Det var 
 en harlig predikan, tyck jag. 10. Ni borde (ought) ha 
 varit i kyrkan i dag, ty pastor Strom holl 3 (preached) en 
 ypperlig predikan. 
 
 'Observe the Swedish way of 'asking- a question (93, b). 2 Note position of 
 del and inverted order. 3 Impf. of halla, to hold. 
 Swedish Grammar 4
 
 42 VOCABULARY. 
 
 B. Answer in Swedish and supply verbal endings. 
 
 1. Vem har ni besok i dag? 2. Varfor var han ej 
 hemma? 3. Vad 6'nsk ni tala med honom om? 4. Nar 
 amna han kopa hastar och vagnar ? 5. Varfor kb'p han 
 dem ej nu ? 6. Vad har han gjort med fabrikerna, som han 
 a'gde? 7. Aro Karl och Gustav hemma ? 8. Varfor tror ni, 
 att de komma hem till middagen? 9. Vem predik i 
 kyrkan i dag ? 10. Var det mycket folk i kyrkan ? 
 
 C. 1. I tried to see you yesterday, but you were not at 
 home. 2. In the afternoon I telephoned twice, but no one 
 (ingen) answered. 3. Where were you the whole day? 
 4. In the forenoon I visited the museum in order (A, 5) 
 to look at the new pictures, which have been praised 1 so 
 highly. 5. In the afternoon I took a walk (A, 7) into the 
 country. 6. On the way out I met Mr. Quist. He told 
 me that he had sold his (sina) two factories. 7. I thought 
 that he owned only one. 8. You ought to have been (A, 10) 
 in church to-day. Pastor Strom preached (lioll) an ex- 
 cellent sermon and the church was crowded. 9. I saw (sag) 
 Mr. Blomberg there, who seldom attends church 2 . 10. Mrs. 
 Blomberg, on the contrary (ddremot), attends very often. 
 
 1 Use man with the active. 2 gar i kyrkan. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 N. B. The two subdivisions of the Second Conjugation will 
 be designated by a and b. 
 
 behova, lib, to need pa for'middagen, in the fore- 
 
 beromma, lib, to praise noon 
 
 bruJca, I, to use forsumma, I, neglect, miss 
 
 en ef'termiddag, -ar, afternoon forsoka, I la, to try 
 
 pd ef'termiddagen, in the af- Jidrlig, glorious, magnificent 
 
 ternoon en hast, -ar, horse 
 
 full'paclcad, crowded hora, lib, to hear 
 
 en for'middag, -ar, forenoon ho'ra pd, to listen to
 
 INFLECTION OF NOUNS 4,> 
 
 kopa, Ha, to buy en sdng, -er, song 
 
 (ut) pa landet, to (into) the siillan, seldom 
 
 country soka, Ha, to seek, look for 
 
 men, but trdffa, I, to meet, see, speak to 
 
 en middag, -ar, noon; dinner trdkig, tedious, sad, unpleasant 
 
 pd middagen, at noon sd trdkigt, too bad 
 
 mycket, highly tror, believes 
 
 ett mdl, meal; goal tvd ganger, twice 
 
 mota, Ha, meet tycka, Ha, to think 
 
 om'tala, I, tell, relate jag tycker, it seems to me 
 
 plocka, I, to pick tdnka, Ha, to think 
 
 predi'ka, I, to preach vagn, -ar, wagon, carriage 
 
 en predi'kan, sermon vandra, I, to wander, stroll 
 
 promene'ra, I, to take a walk viktig, weighty, important 
 
 ringa pd' hos, lib, to ring up en vdg, -ar, road, way 
 
 sedan (adv., prep, and conj.), ypperlig, excellent 
 
 since tiga, lib, to own 
 
 for... sedan, ago iinnu, yet 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 1. for tvd ar sedan, two years ago; for Idnge sedan, long ago. 
 
 2. Jag ser pd, hor pd, I look at, listen to. 
 
 3 att trdffa (rdka) en person, to see (meet) a person. 
 4. hela dagen, the whole day. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 Inflection of Nouns (Continued). 
 FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 105. The nouns of this declension take -n in 
 the plural. 
 
 106. The postpositive definite article is -t or -ei 
 in the singular, -a in the plural, also -en for neuter 
 monosyllables. 
 
 107. This declension contains: 
 
 (a) A few neuter monosyllables ending in a 
 vowel.
 
 44 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 (b) Most neuter nouns of more than one syllable 
 ending in an unaccented vowel, generally -e. 
 
 108. Examples of nouns belonging to the Fourth 
 Declension : 
 
 ett hjdrta, a heart; ett rike, a realm; ett piano, 
 a piano ; ett bi, a bee. 
 
 INDEFINITE DEFINITE 
 
 Sg. ett hjarta hjdrta-t 
 
 PI. hjarta-n hjarta-n-a 
 
 Sg. ett rike rike-t 
 
 PI. rike-n rike-n-a 
 
 Sg. ett piano piano-t 
 
 PI. piano-n piano-n-a 
 
 Sg. ett bi bi-et 
 
 PI. 5i-n fci-wa (also bi-en) 
 
 NOTE. 1. The words oga, eye, and ora, ear, have the plurals, ogon and 6'ron; 
 def. form, ogonen and oronen. 
 
 2. Bf, 60, and similar neuter nouns, may also have the def. sing, form 
 bi-t, bo-t, etc. 
 
 Declension of Adjectives. 
 
 109. The adjectives have an indefinite and a 
 definite declension. 
 
 THE INDEFINITE DECLENSION. 
 
 110. The Indefinite Declension has the following 
 endings : 
 
 -t in the neuter singular. 
 
 -a (-e, see 112, 1) in the plural for all genders. 
 
 111. NOTES ON THE SINGULAR. 
 
 1. Adjectives ending in -t preceded by a consonant do not 
 take the ending -t in the neuter; as, salt, salt, neuter, salt; 
 likewise foreign adjectives ending in -t: absolut neuter, 
 absolut; TconTcret, neuter, konkret.
 
 INDEFINITE DECLENSION. 45 
 
 2. Adjectives ending in unaccented -en change n to the 
 neuter t; as, trogen, faithful, neuter, troget; funnen, found, 
 neuter, funnet. 
 
 3. Adjectives ending in -d preceded by a vowel change d to 
 t in accented syllables before the neuter t: god, good, neuter, 
 gott; in unaccented syllables d is dropped: Jcallad, called, 
 kaUat; bred, broad, brett. 
 
 4. If the final d is preceded by a consonant it is eliminated: 
 ond, evil, neuter, ont; brand, burned, neuter, brant. If 
 the adjective ends in a double d, one is dropped and the 
 other changed to t : trodd, believed, neuter, trott. 
 
 5. Adjectives ending in an accented vowel add -tt: fri, free, 
 - neuter, fritt; bid, blue, neuter, bldtt. 
 
 6. Adjectives ending in a double n drop one n before the 
 neuter t: sann, true, neuter, sant. 
 
 1. Adjectives ending in -e (especially present participles) 
 do not change in the neuter: alskande, loving, neuter, 
 iilskande; ode, desolate, neuter, ode. Some adjectives are 
 not used in the indef. form of the neuter; as, lat, lazy; 
 vanster, left, etc. 
 
 112. NOTES ON THE PLURAL. 
 
 1. The plural generally takes the ending -a for all genders, 
 but -e is always used when the adjective ends in -ad (past 
 participles of the First Conjugation) and sometimes, espe- 
 cially in solemn style, when the adjective modifies a masculine 
 noun. 
 
 2. Adjectives ending in an unaccented -al, -el, -en, -er elimi- 
 nate the vowel of these endings when the plural ending, -a 
 or -e, is added: gammal, old, gamla; ddel, noble, ddla; 
 mogen, ripe, mogna. 
 
 USE OF THE INDEFINITE DECLENSION. 
 
 113. The adjective is declined in the Indefinite 
 Declension when used attributively with a noun 
 in the indefinite sense, and also when it -is used 
 predicatively: ett sndll-t barn ar sin moders frojd, a 
 good child is the joy of its mother; barnet ar vac-
 
 46 INDEFINITE DECLENSION 
 
 ker-t, the child is pretty; Karl och Robert dro fti- 
 tig-a gossar, Carl and Robert are industrious boys. 
 
 114. Examples of the Indefinite Declension: 
 
 M. F. GENDER FORM NEUTER M. F. GENDER FORM NEUTER 
 
 Sg. god gott ddel ddelt 
 
 PI. goda ddla 
 
 Sg. gammal gammalt trogen troget 
 
 PI. gamla trogna 
 
 Sg. ond ont dlskad dlskat 
 
 PL onda dlskade 
 
 Sg. absolut absolut trodd trott 
 
 PI. absoluta trodda 
 
 115. PARADIGMS WITH NOUNS. 
 
 Sg. en god gosse en god flicka ett gott barn 
 
 PI. goda gossar goda flickor goda barn 
 
 Sg. en ddel konung en ddel kvinna ett ddelt namn 
 
 PI. ddla konungar ddla kvinnor ddla namn 
 
 Sg. en dlskad man en dlskad moder ett dlskat land 
 
 PI. dlskade man dlskade modrar dlskade lander 
 
 RULES OF SYNTAX. 
 
 116. Adjectives agree with the nouns they quali- 
 fy in number and gender but not in case: ett sndll-t 
 barn, a good child; sndll-a barn, good children; ett 
 sndllt barn-s moder, the mother of a good child; 
 sndll-a barn-s modrar, the mothers of good children. 
 
 117. Most descriptive adjectives can be used in 
 the indefinite form of the neuter singular as ad- 
 verbs; thus, ddel, ddelt, noble, ddelt, nobly; tro- 
 gen, troget, faithful, troget, faithfully.
 
 EXERCISE. 47 
 
 EXERCISE VII. 
 
 A. Supply the proper endings : 1. I gar var det mycket 
 kail men klar och vacker . 2. En haftig l nordan 
 bias , och termometer vis atskillig grad under 
 fryspunkt . 3. Hela dag arbet 2 jag trog (adv.), 
 men pa kvallen ak 2 jag skridskor. 4*. Det gick (went) 
 ypperlig (adv.), ty is var blank och hard . 5. Skrid- 
 skoban var illuminerad, en stor musikkar spel . . . 
 (proper form of munter) styck , och glad mannisk 
 ak hastig (adv.) fram och tillbaka. 6. Pa is traff 2 
 jag en gammal van, som res (went) till Amerika for 
 tva ar sedan, men nu har kommit (come) tillbaka. 7. Av 
 alia . . . (noble) mannisk , som jag kann , ar 2 han den 
 baste. 8. Han hade mycket att saga om forhallande i 
 Amerika, som i manga hanseende behag honom. 9. I 
 min vans tradgard vaxa 2 god apple . I gar var 2 jag 
 dar och plock nagra. 10. Apple (def. pi.) aro . . . 
 (red) och ... (yellow) och mycket ... (sweet). 11. Un- 
 der traden (the trees) aro sate och i gren - (def. pi.) 
 bygga fagl (def. pi.) sina bo . 
 
 J In order to test the student's knowledge dashes are put even where no 
 endings are to be supplied. 2 Xote inverted order. 
 
 B. Answer in Swedish: 1. Hurudant var vadret i gar? 
 2. Var det lugnt (calm) ? 3. Huru manga (many) grader 
 visade termometern under fryspunkten? 4. Vad gjorde 
 (did ... do) ni under (during) dagen? 5. Vad gjorde ni 
 pa kvallen? 6. Beskriv (describe) skridskobanan ? 7. Vem 
 traffade ni dar? 8. Var hade han varit? 9. Vad talade 
 han om? 10. Vem tillhor tradgarden, dar ni var i gar? 
 11. Var aro satena? 
 
 C. 1. The weather is cold to-day, but cLar and beautiful. 
 2. I believe that the thermometer indicates several degrees
 
 48 VOCABULARY 
 
 below the freezing point. 3. I am tired because I have 
 worked faithfully all ' day. 4. If the ice is good I wish 
 (invert) to skate a couple (of) hours. 5. The ice is ex- 
 cellent, very hard and r-mooth, and to-night a big baud will 
 play 1 in the rink. 6. Do you know 2 if the rink is illumi- 
 nated to-night? Surely (ja visst). 7. It is a great pleasure 
 to skate rapidly back and forth. 8. The band plays merry 
 pieces. 9. I like merry music and happy people. 10. There 
 I see a couple (of) old friends. I wish to speak to (vid) 
 them. 11. They have been in America and know the con- 
 ditions there. 
 
 a Use present tense and invert (104, 2) ; in, pa. 2 kno\v, vet. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 N. B. Two forms are given of the adjective: the gender 
 and the neuter form; the latter is also the adverb. 
 
 behaga, I, to please klar, -t, clear 
 
 blank, -t, smooth, shiny munter, -t, merry 
 
 bldsa, Ha, to blow en musik'kdr, -er, band 
 
 ett 60, -n, nest mdnga, many 
 
 bygga, lib, to build manniska (fern.) -or, man, 
 fryspunkt, -er, freezing point human being 
 
 eti forhdllande, -n, condition, ett noje, -n, amusement, pleas- 
 relation ure, enjoyment 
 
 gammal, -t, old plocka, I, to pick 
 
 glad glatt, glad, happy rod, rott, red 
 
 en grad, -er, degree en skridsko, 1 -r, skate 
 
 en gren, -ar, branch en skridskobana, -or, skating 
 gul, -t, yellow rink 
 
 hastig, -t, rapid spela, I, to play (music) 
 
 hard, hart, hard ett stycke, -n, piece 
 
 hdftig, -t, violent, vehement ett sate, -n, seat 
 
 ett hdnseende, respect sot, soft, sweet 
 
 iUumine'rad, -rat, illuminated en termome'ter, -rar. ther- 
 en is, -ar, ice mometer 
 
 kail, -t, cold trogen, troget, faithful
 
 FIFTH DECLENSION. 49 
 
 ett viider, weather iidel, -t, noble 
 
 visa, I, show, indicate ett apple, -n, apple 
 
 uka, Ha, ride, travel 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. aka skridsko, to skate. 
 
 2. from och tillbaka, back and forth. 
 
 'Generally pronounced skrisko. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 Inflection of Nouns (Continued). 
 
 FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 118. The nouns belonging to this declension take 
 no ending in the plural (cf. deer, sheep, swine, in 
 English). 
 
 119. The postpositive article is -n, or -en for 
 gender nouns and -et for neuter nouns in the sin- 
 gular and -no, (sometimes -ne for masculines in 
 -are) for gender nouns and -en for neuter nouns 
 in the plural. 
 
 120. The Fifth Declension includes: 
 
 (a) All gender nouns ending in -ande and -are. 
 
 NOTE. Kammare, ha.mma.re, and kallare have also the plurals kamr-ar, liamr- 
 or, and kallr-ar.. 
 
 (b) Names of peoples and nouns of foreign origin 
 ending in -er. 
 
 (c) Most neuter nouns ending in a consonant, 
 except those ending in -eum and -ium which belong 
 to the Third Declension. 
 
 (d) The nouns fader, father; broder, brother; 
 man, man ; gas, goose ; lus, louse ; mus, mouse, which 
 modify the vowel in the plural; pi. fader, broder,
 
 50 DEFINITE DECLENSION. 
 
 man, gdss, loss, moss; and a few common words of 
 measure ; as,' fot, foot ; turn, inch ; mil, mile. 
 
 NOTE. Fot has the plural fatter only when signifying a part of the body. 
 Klein, gdss, loss, moss have the definite forms mannen, gdssen, lossen, mossen. 
 
 121. Examples of nouns of the Fifth Declen- 
 sion: en bagare, a baker; en ordforande, a chair- 
 man; en mu'siker, a musician; ett namn, a name; 
 ett modus, a mode. 
 
 INDEFINITE DEFINITE 
 
 Sg. en bagare bagare-n 
 
 PL bagare bagarna (ne)* 
 
 Sg. en ordforande ordforande-n 
 
 PL ordforande ordforande-na 
 
 Sg. en musiker musiker-n 
 
 PL musiker musiker-na 
 
 Sg. ett namn namn-et 
 
 PL namn namn-en 
 
 Sg. ett modus modus 2 
 
 PL modus modus 
 
 *Observe the elimination of the e of the ending -are. Such forms as doma- 
 re.no, or domrarna from domare, judge, to distinguish its plural from the plural 
 domarna of dom, sentence, are growing obsolete. The def. article is generally 
 -na even for words like bagare, cf. 73, note 5. 
 
 2 Words in -us cannot take the postpositive article. The indef. form is used 
 for the def. (73, note 4, c). 
 
 Declension of Adjectives (Continued). 
 
 THE DEFINITE DECLENSION. 
 
 122. In the Definite Declension the adjective 
 has practically only one ending, -a, which is added 
 to the original form (the indefinite singular of the 
 gender form) ; sometimes, however, we find -e. 
 
 123. The ending -e takes the place of -a in the 
 following instances:
 
 DEFINITE DKCLENSIOX. 51 
 
 (a) Often in the singular; occasionally in the 
 plural when the adjective modifies a noun denoting 
 a person of the male sex : den god-a (also god-e) gos- 
 sen; den stor-e (never stor-a) Gustav Adolf, the 
 latter expression is emphatic and formal ; den stor-e 
 mannen means the great man. Stora would here 
 because of its greater commonplaceness convey the 
 sense of physical largeness. 
 
 (b) When the adjective is used as a noun to 
 denote human beings of the male sex; the adjective 
 then has a genitive in -s: den gamle, the old man; 
 but den gamla, the old woman; de rike, the rich; 
 den gamles hus, the house of the old man. 
 
 (c) Always when the adjective ends in -ad; as, 
 den alskade drottningen, the beloved queen. 
 
 NOTE. Adjectives ending in -a, -e (se), -om, -s (es) and -tals are indeclinable. 
 
 USE OF DEFINITE DECLENSION. 
 
 124. The adjective is declined in the Definite 
 Declension when used: 
 
 (1) Before a noun with the postpositive article; 
 as, den rike mannen, the rich man; svenska sprd- 
 ket, the Swedish language (69). 
 
 (2) After a noun in the genitive; as, min far- 
 brors vackra hus, the fine house of my uncle; ko- 
 nungens ddla upptrddande, the noble conduct of 
 the king. 
 
 (3) After the possessive and demonstrative adjec- 
 tives and pronouns ; as, mina nya handskar, my new 
 gloves; denne trogne tjdnare, this faithful servant. 
 
 (4) In expressions of address and in apposition 
 with a personal pronoun; as, Kdre van! Dear 
 friend. Jag olyckliga manniskal I unhappy man.
 
 52 EXERCISE. 
 
 125. Examples of the Definite Declension: ddel, 
 noble; trogen, faithful; dlskad, loved. 
 
 MASC. FEM. NEUTER 
 
 Sg. ddl-a(e) ddl-a ddl-a 
 
 PI. ddl-a (e) ddl-a ddl-a 
 
 Sg. trogn-a(e) trogn-a trogn-a 
 
 PI. trogn-a(e) trogn-a trogn-a 
 
 Sg. dlskad-e dlskad-e dlskad-e 
 
 PI. dlskad-e dlskad-e dlskad-e 
 
 NOTE. Adjectives ending in unaccented -al, -el, -en, -er drop the vo\\t-l uf 
 their last syllable before -a or -e of the def. form. 
 
 THE USE OF THE PREPOSITIVE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 126. The prepositive definite article den, det, 
 pi. de (70) is employed when the noun is qualified 
 by an adjective or numeral ; in such a case the post- 
 positive definite article must also be used; thus, 
 den vackr-a flickan, the beautiful girl; det sndll-a 
 barn-et, the good child; de tio flitigast-e gossarna, 
 the ten most industrious boys. 
 
 NOTE 1. The prepositive article is generally employed when the adjective is 
 used as a noun; thus, den gamle, the old man; den lilla, the little girl; del 
 tkona, the beautiful. 
 
 2. It is omitted in a number of set phrases, especially such as serve as 
 names ; often before superlatives and adjectives of place ; before hel, whole, 
 halv, half, sjalv, self ; thus, svemka gpr&ket, the Swedish language ; forsta 
 dagen, the first day ; vdnstra sidan, the left side ; hela natten, the whole night. 
 
 'EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 A. Supply the proper form of the Swedish equivalents 
 of the adjectives given within parenthesis in the following : 
 den (noble) mannen; min faders (beautiful) hus; 
 de (faithful) lararna; de (ripe) applena; de 
 (small) gossarna; ett (free) land; ett (wet) fait; 
 det (wet) faltet; det (respected) namnet; den 
 (little) flickan; ett -- (red) hus; ett (sweet} barn;
 
 EXERCISE. 53 
 
 (sweet) barn (pi.); ett (salt) bad; de - - (noble) 
 mannen; (respected) lakare; den - (old [one], 
 m. and f.) ; de -- (ripe [ones]); ett -- (small) barn; 
 de (new) lararna; den (new one) ; den (free one, 
 m. and f.). 
 
 B. 1. I gar vaknade jag med en haftig huvudvark. 
 2. Jag kladde mig och promenerade i den vackra parken 
 en timme fore frukosten. 3. Da jag kom (came) tillbaka, 
 voro min far och mor otaliga, ty de hade vantat lange. 
 4. Jag madde inte (did not feel) alls bra och kunde (could) 
 ej ata nagot av den goda maten. 5. Jag forsokte (att) 
 dricka en kopp av det starka kaffet, men kunde inte. 6. Pa 
 eftermiddagen gick jag till den skicklige lakaren dr Buren. 
 7. Denne (he, lit., this one) ar en gammal van till 1 min 
 far. 8. Hans mottagningsrum ar i det nya huset pa hornet 
 af Kungsgatan och Vasagatan. 9. Jag maste (had to) van- 
 ta en hel timma, innan jag traffade honom, ty det var 
 manga patienter fore mig. 10. "Vad fattas er?" fragade 
 den gamle vanlige lakaren. 11. "Jag har ofta en mycket 
 haftig hufvudvark", svarade jag. 12. "Ar aptiten god eller 
 dalig?" 13. "Pa morgonen ar den mycket dalig." 14. 
 "Hur sover ni?" "Daligt." 15. "Far (may) jag se pa er 
 tunga?" 16. "Har har ni ett recept, det ar for aptiten." 
 17. Dessutom ordinerade han rorelse i friska luften 
 (126, 2). 
 
 i Till is sometimes used to express genitive relation ; translate of. 
 
 C. Answer in Swedish : 1. Var ni bra, nar ni vaknade 
 i gar ? 2. Vad f attades er ? 3. Vad gjorde ni fore frukos- 
 ten ? 4. Varfor voro er far och mor otaliga ? 5. Hur lange 
 hade ni promenerat? 6. Hum manga koppar kaffe drack 
 (impf.) ni? 7. Kanner er far dr Buren? 8. Var har han 
 sitt mottagningsrum? 9. Hur lange och varfor maste ni
 
 54 VOCABULARY 
 
 vanta? 10. Vad fragade den gamle vanlige lakaren er? 
 11. Vad ordinerade (prescribed) han? 
 
 Z>. 1. My old father woke up to-day with a very violent 
 headache. 2. He came down for (till) breakfast (def.) but 
 could not eat anything (ndgot). 3. At (vid) noon (def.) 
 his appetite was very poor and we had to 1 telephone for 2 
 the famous old physician, Dr. Buren. 4. Our dear father 
 and he are old friends. 5. He came soon in the big red 
 automobile, which he bought last year (i fjol). 6. When 
 he came in, he asked (104, 2) my father, "What ails you, 
 old friend?" 7. When he had examined him he wrote 
 (sJcrev) two prescriptions, one for the violent headache, 
 the other (andra) for the poor appetite. 8. Besides he 
 prescribed exercise and fresh air. 
 
 1 Have to when it denotes compulsion is expressed by mdste, which is the same 
 in the present and imperfect. 
 
 'For with the verbs like ask, send, write, call, telephone, is rendered efter. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 alls, at all eft horn, corner 
 
 en aptit (no pi.) appetite inte, not 
 en automobil', -er, automobile innan (conj.), before 
 ett bad, bath kldda, lib, to dress 
 
 ett barn, child en kopp, -ar, cup 
 
 bra, well Kungsgatan, King's street 
 
 dessutom, besides, in addition liten, -et (def. lilla, pi. smd), 
 dricka (strong verb), to drink little, small 
 ddlig, -t, bad, poor (en) luft (no pi.) air 
 
 fattas (deponent verb), I, to en lakare, physician 
 
 lack; to ail (en) mat (no pi.), food 
 
 fri, fritt, free mogen, -et, ripe (18, 1) 
 
 frisk, -t, fresh; well, healthy ett mottagningsrum, reception 
 en frukost (pron. fruckost), room, doctor's office 
 
 -ar, breakfast ny, nytt, new 
 
 fore (prep, and adv.), before ndgot, anything 
 en huvudvark (no pi.) head- ordine'ra, I, to prescribe 
 
 ache otdlig, -t, impatient
 
 IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 55 
 
 en patient', -er, patient stark, -t, strong 
 
 ett recept', prescription telefone'ra, I, to telephone 
 
 ansedd, ansett, respected en tunga, -or, tongue 
 
 en rorelse, -r, movement; ex- vakna, I, to wake up 
 
 ercise Vasagatan, Vasa street 
 
 salt, salt vdt, vatt, wet 
 
 skicklig, -t, skillful vanlig, -t, friendly, kind 
 sova (strong verb), to sleep vtinta, I, to wait 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. en kopp kaffe, a cup of coffee. 
 2. inte alls, not at all. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 Inflection of Nouns (Continued). 
 
 127. IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. 
 
 (a) For the syncopation of the vowel of an un- 
 accented ending before the plural ending, see 81, 
 notes 1 and 2 ; and 85, note 4. 
 
 (b) For the elimination of the endings -us and 
 -um after e and i before the plural ending, see 86, 
 note. 
 
 (c) A few nouns of the Second, Third, and Fifth 
 Declensions modify the root vowel in the plural ; as, 
 
 bonde, peasant; pi. bonder 
 broder, brother ; pi. broder 
 dotter, daughter; pi. dottrar 
 fader, father; pi. fader 
 man, man ; pi. man 
 moder, mother; pi. modrar 
 
 son, son; pi. so'ner (grave accent), and some 
 others (see 85, notes 1 and 2). 
 
 (d) A few nouns of the Third Declension double 
 the last consonant. Often there is also a vowel 
 modification; as,
 
 56 THE CASES. 
 
 bok, book; pi. backer 
 fot, foot; pi. f otter 
 get, goat; pi. getter 
 not, nut; pi. notter 
 
 (e) So also, 
 
 gas, goose; pi. gdss. 
 Ins, louse; pi. loss, 
 mus, mouse; pi. moss. 
 
 (f) Some nouns of the Third Declension take 
 only -r in the plural; such are, nouns ending in 
 unaccented -e, a few monosyllabic gender nouns end- 
 ing in o, a, o, and some others; as, 
 
 fi'ende, enemy; pi. fiende-r 
 hustru, wife; pi. hustri(-r 
 klo, claw; pi. klo-r 
 ko, cow; pi. ko-r 
 sko, shoe; pi. sko-r 
 td, toe; pi. ta-r 
 
 (g) Many loan words retain their foreign plural : 
 faktum, fact; pi. fakta; examen, examination; pi. 
 examina. 
 
 DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 
 
 128. Names of persons, countries, cities, rivers, 
 mountains, and places take an -s in the genitive ; ex., 
 jag laser Tegners dikter, I am reading the poetry 
 of Tegner; Sveriges floder dro vackra, the rivers of 
 Sweden are beautiful. (Exceptions 130, a.) 
 
 NOTE. If a title precedes the name, the latter only takes the -* as in Eng- 
 lish: herr Liners dotter dr hdr, Mr. LineVs daughter is here. 
 
 THE CASES. 
 
 129. The nominative and the genitive are the 
 only cases that need to be taken into account in 
 the declension of nouns, the objective being identical 
 with the nominative.
 
 THE GENITIVE. 57 
 
 130. The genitive is formed, as has been stated 
 before, by the addition of an -s to the nominative, 
 indefinite and definite, singular and plural. 
 
 IMPORTANT OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 (a) Proper nouns ending in an s-sound (s, x, 2) in the 
 nominative have their possessive of the same form, adding 
 only an apostrophe; as, Johannes' evangelium, the Gospel of 
 St. John. 
 
 Cb) In the case of a common noun ending in an s-sound, 
 -st, or -xt in the nominative, the genitive relation is gener- 
 ally expressed by the prepositions pd and till (rarely av) ; 
 thus, taket p& ett hus, the roof of a house; vdggarna till 
 ett hus, the walls of a house; sometimes by putting the 
 noun in the definite form and suffixing an s; as, blixtens 
 hastighet, the rapidity of a flash of lightning, instead of en 
 blixts hastighet. 
 
 (c) In certain expressions names of localities ending in a 
 vowel use a nominative in apposition where other words 
 would require a genitive; as, Uppsala universitet, the univer- 
 sity of Upsala. 
 
 (d) A Latin genitive in -i occurs with nouns in -us; as, 
 Kristi liv, the life of Christ. Note also the genitive of Jesus, 
 Jesu. 
 
 (e) When several words are used to designate the same 
 person or object, the last word in the group generally takes 
 the -s: Karl den stores rike, the realm of Charles the Great; 
 konungen av Sveriges (also konungens av Sverige) hov, the 
 court of the king of Sweden. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE CASES. 
 
 131. The nominative and the objective need no 
 illustration since their functions are the same as 
 in English. 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 132. In regard to the genitive it is of prime 
 importance to notice that the form in -s is employed 
 much more freely in Swedish than in English. The 
 
 Swedish Grammar 5
 
 58 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 genitive relation is rarely expressed by the prepo- 
 sition av, of; thus impersonal nouns, which in Eng- 
 lish invariably would be construed with of to express 
 the genitive relation, in Swedish take -s; as, bordets 
 ben, the legs of the table; vid mdnadens slut, at 
 the end of the month. 
 
 133. The following uses of the genitive should 
 be noted: 
 
 (a) The word modified by the genitive is omit- 
 ted in expressions like: min klocka dr vackrare an 
 min brors, my watch is prettier than my brother's; 
 detta dr min systers hatt, min mors ligger ddr borta, 
 this is my sister's hat, my mother's lies over there. 
 
 (b) Somewhat analogous is the use of the geni- 
 tive designating the house, family, or business of 
 somebody: jag bor hos Lindholms, I live at Lind- 
 holm's; Blombergs dro sjuka, the Blombergs are 
 sick. 
 
 (c) In a few expressions a genitive is used after 
 the prepositions i and till: gd till sdngs, to go to bed; 
 till lands, by land ; till sjoss, by water, to or at sea : 
 gd till bords, to sit down at table; i sondags, last 
 Sunday ; i hostas, last fall ; i varas, last spring. 
 
 A temporal expression with i governing the geni- 
 tive denotes a past period. 
 
 NOTE. This use of t and till is limited to a few phrases, which, however, are 
 of very common occurrence. 
 
 134. After quantitative nouns of measure and 
 weight, and nouns of value, the nominative is used : 
 en kopp kaffe, a cup of coffee; tio meter tyg, ten 
 meters of cloth; ett kilo smo'r, a kilogram of but- 
 ter; for tio kronor socker, ten 1 crowns' worth of 
 sugar.
 
 EXERCISE. 59 
 
 135. The objective genitive is often expressed 
 by till, sometimes by av; thus, kdrleken till j osier - 
 landet, love of country; asynen av land, the sight 
 of land. The possessive genitive is often expressed 
 by till (or pa) when the possessor is an inanimate 
 object: locket till ladan, the cover of the box; kryc- 
 kan pa kappen, the crutch of the cane (never hatten 
 till den unge mannen, but den unge mannens hati, 
 the young man's hat). 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 
 A. Translate the following sentences and expressions. 
 1. Where is the leg of the table (in two ways) ? 2. The 
 
 roof of the house (in two ways) is poor. 3. The history of 
 Charles XII. 4. Mr. Lindgren's daughters. 5. The books 
 of Strindberg, the author (place author first). 6. The 
 university of Upsala is very old. 7. He is at sea. 8. Plato 
 was a pupil of Socrates 1 . 9. I bought the shoes at Lind- 
 holm's. 10. My house and my father's. 11. The literature 
 of Sweden. 12. The speech of the emperor of Germany. 
 13. The banks of the Mississippi are beautiful. 14. He 
 came (kom) last Monda}'. 15. A cup of good coffee. 
 16. The streets of Berlin. 17. The theaters of Paris. 
 18. The city (of) Berlin 2 . 
 
 translate: one of Socrates' pupils. 2 Put Berlin in apposition with city. 
 
 B. Supply endings where indicated: 1. Kanner ni till 
 den svensk litteratur val ? 2. Tyvarr icke. Av de klas- 
 
 sisk forfatt (pi. def. gen.) arbet har 1 jag last 
 
 Tegners Fritiofs saga och Eunebergs episk dikt (pi. 
 indef.), och av Sveriges modern forfattare kanner jag 
 till August Strindberg och Selma Lagerlof. 3. Hur tyck 
 ni om Strindberg, ar han ej mycket pessimistisk ? 4. Jo 2 , 
 jag tyck mycket battre om Selma Lagerlofs bb'cker.
 
 60 EXERCISE. 
 
 5. Var ni ej pa teater i gar kvall? 6. Nej, men jag hade 
 amn att ga, ty jag hade hb'r , att man skulle (would) 
 spela en' av Strindbergs dramer, men sa borj det att 
 snb'a, och vi stann hemma. 7. Det var skada, ty fore- 
 stallning var utmarkt; Blombergs och vi voro dar. 8. 
 
 Roll (pi. def. gen.) utfb'rande var mycket gott (also, 
 
 utfb'randet av rollerna). 9. Herr Palme, som i mandags 
 spelade Fausts roll i Gb'thes dram, spelade nu Gustav 
 Adolfs. 10. Har ni last i tidning om kejsarens av Tysk- 
 land tal? 11. Kan ni saga mig vad Sokrates' berb'md 3 
 larjunge hette? 
 
 *Note the inverted order. -Jo is used in answering a question containing a 
 negative. *rhe def. form of the adjective is used after a possessive modifier 
 (124, note 2). 
 
 C. Conversation. 1. Vilka av de klassiska fb'rfattarna 
 har ni last? 2. Vilka moderna fb'rfattare kanner ni till? 
 3. Varfor tycker ni battre om Selma Lagerlof an om 
 Strindberg? 4. Hade ni ej amnat att ga pa teatern i gar? 
 5. Vad spelade man i gar kvall? 6. Hurudan var fore- 
 stallningen? 7. Vem utfb'rde Gustav Adolfs roll? 
 
 D. 1. Where are you going 1 to-night, Charles? i am 
 going to Sandell's. 2. What do you wish, sir (min her re) ? 
 I wish to buy the works of Topelius (130, d). 3. Does the 
 green house belong to Mr. Williams' mother? No, it is 
 his brother's, I believe. 4. Where do you pass your win- 
 ters? Sometimes in Italy and sometimes in one of the 
 towns of southern (def.) Prance (128). 5. I like the 
 climate of Italy better than that of southern France (than 
 southern France's). 6. Where is to-day's paper (the day's 
 paper 2 ) ? I wish to read the latest (senaste) speech of 
 the king of England. 7. Are you acquainted with Francis' 
 (130, a) parents? Yes, I met them at Blomberg's last 
 Monday. 8. Have you read Selma Lagerlof 's famous (def.)
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 61 
 
 book, "Jerusalem" ? 1). Unfortunately not, but I have heard 
 that it contains an excellent portrayal of the peasants of 
 Sweden. 10. Where have you bought the chickens and the 
 geese? I have bought them at Lind's. Aren't they fine? 
 11. What do you wish, sir? I wish a cup of strong coffee, 
 and (samt 3 ) bread and butter. 12. I believe you are 
 sleepy, Mr. Brown. Yes, I am very tired. I went to bed 
 so late last night. 
 
 translate: Where do you intend to go to-night f 2 Also tidningen for i dag. 
 3 Samt is interchangeable with och to avoid repetition, though rarely used in con- 
 versation ; med, with, could be used here. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ett arbete, -n, work 
 
 ett brod, bread 
 
 en dikt, -er, poem 
 
 en dram, -er, ett drama (no 
 
 plur.), drama 
 episk, -t, epic 
 
 Frankrike (neuter), France 
 Frans, Francis 
 
 en Idrjunge, -ar, pupil 
 lii-sa, Ila, to read 
 modern', -t, modern 
 en mdndag, -ar, Monday 
 pessimis'tisk, -t, pessimistic 
 en roll, -er, part (acting) 
 sen, -t, late 
 skada, -or, damage 
 
 en fo'restdllning, -ar, perform- en skildring, -ar, description, 
 
 ance 
 
 en forfat'tare, author 
 fo'rdldrar (plural only), 
 
 parents 
 gron, -t, green 
 en gas, giiss, goose 
 heta, Ila, to be called 
 in'nehdlla (st. v., see Jidlla), 
 
 to contain 
 
 Ilalien (neuter), Italy 
 jo, yes (used in answer to a 
 
 negative question) 
 klassisk, -t, classic 
 ett klimaf, climate 
 
 portrayal 
 (ett) smor, butter 
 snu'a, I, to snow 
 stanna, I, to stay, stop 
 Sverige (neuter), Sweden 
 sitdra (def. only), .southern 
 somnig, -t, sleepy 
 en sang, -ar, bed 
 ett tal, speech; number 
 ett tak, roof 
 en teater, -rar, tteater 
 en tidning, -ar, newspaper 
 trott, tired 
 tyvlirr', unfortunately 
 
 kiinna till', lib, to know about ett utforande, -n, execution, 
 en kyckling, -ar, young chicken performance
 
 62 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 1. att ga pa, teatern, pd en konsert, to attend the theater, a 
 
 concert. 
 
 2. det iir skada, it is a pity. 
 
 LESSON X. 
 The Verb (Continued). 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 136. To the Third Conjugation, which may be 
 considered a slightly modified form of the Second, 
 belong all weak verbs which end in any other vowel 
 than -a in the infinitive. This conjugation contains 
 comparatively few verbs. 
 
 137. The Third Conjugation has the following 
 endings : 
 
 stem vowel in the infinitive : e, o, y, a not a. 
 -r in the singular of the present indicative, 
 stem vowel in the plural of the present indicative. 
 -n in the archaic second plural. 
 -dde in the imperfect indicative, both numbers. 
 -ende in the present participle (111, note 7). 
 -tt in the supine. 
 
 -dd in the gender form of the past participle. 
 -tt in the neuter form of the past participle 
 (HI, 4). 
 
 138. Examples of verbs of the Third Conjuga- 
 tion : att tro, to believe ; att sy, to sew. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE 
 
 1. 
 
 Sg. fag] Sg. jag 
 
 m I ni \ syr 
 
 du [. du 
 
 >tror 
 
 han] han]
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 63 
 
 PI. vi 1 vi ] 
 
 ni nro ni \sy 
 
 de\ de\ 
 I iron I syn 
 
 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag 1 jag } 
 
 du {, j, du I 
 
 ni ttrodde ni \sydde 
 
 han\ han\ 
 
 PI. vi ] vi ] 
 
 ni ttrodde ni \sydde 
 
 de J de J 
 
 / trodden I sydden 
 
 PERFECT INDICATIVE. 
 
 /tar trott, etc. yagr Tiar ST/if, etc. 
 
 PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. 
 
 jag hade trott, etc. jag hade sytt, etc. 
 
 Personal Pronouns. 
 139. DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON 
 
 Masc. and Fern. Masc. and Fern. Masc. Fern. Neuter 
 
 Sg. Nom. jag du han hon det 
 
 Gen. (min) (din) hans hennes dess 
 Obj. mig dig honom henne det 
 
 PI. 
 
 
 
 
 Gender 
 
 Form 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 den 
 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 dess 
 
 
 
 
 Obj. 
 
 den 
 
 Nom. 
 
 vi 
 
 ni (I) 
 
 
 de 
 
 Gen. 
 
 (vdr) 
 
 (eder, er) 
 
 
 deras 
 
 Obj. 
 
 OSS 
 
 eder, er 
 
 
 dem
 
 64 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 140. REMARKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 (a) The personal pronouns with the exception 
 of the third person lack genitive forms ; these forms 
 are supplied by the possessive adjectives. But a 
 genitive form for the second person occurs in a few 
 titles; as, Ers Majestat, Your Majesty; Ers excel- 
 lens, Your Excellency. 
 
 (b) Mig and dig are colloquially pronounced mdj 
 and daj. 
 
 (c) In conversational language 'en or 'n is some- 
 times appended to the verb or to the pronoun subject 
 in a question and used as a sort of enclitic pronoun 
 for honom or den; likewise also 'et or 't for det and 
 'no, for henne. Ex. Jag sag 'en i gar. I saw him 
 yesterday. Pick du't? Did you get it? 
 
 141. For the use of du and ni in address, see 
 67, a, b. 
 
 142. It is considered more polite in the singular 
 to use the title of the person with or without herr or 
 fru. The definite form of the title is generally used 
 except when it occurs together with the name or is 
 used in independent construction. 
 
 Ex.: Kommer doktorn i kvall? Will you come to- 
 night, Doctor? But Kommer doktor Lind i kvall? 
 Are you coming to-night, Doctor Lind ? Ndr flyttar 
 ni ut pa landet, herr doktor? When are you going 
 to move out into the country, Doctor? 
 
 Persons whose titles and names are unknown may 
 be addressed with herrn, frun, or fro'ken (also da- 
 men, the lady) ; it is impolite to omit name or title 
 in speaking to persons we know : Vill herrn vara sa
 
 EXERCISE. G5 
 
 god och saga mig, var Kungsgatan ar? Will you 
 kindly tell me, sir, where King's Street is? 
 
 NOTE. To combine convenience with politeness one may judiciously intersperse 
 the pronoun ni with the title. The existing objection to this convenient pronoun 
 is gradually disappearing. 
 
 EXERCISE X. 
 
 A. Supply the endings of the verbs and nouns where 
 indicated. 
 
 1. Var tillbring (impf.) ni era ferier i somras (133, 
 c), herr doktor? 2. Vi bo pa landet som vanligt, vid 
 en harlig liten insjo. 3. Nar sommar komm , forma 
 jag inte att stanna i staden langre, jag maste fly ut i 
 naturen for att hamta nya kraft (pi.) till mitt arbete. 
 
 4. Ni flytt ut ganska sent i ar, herr doktor, eller hur? 
 
 5. Ja, det bero pa olyckan, som han min hustru. Har 
 ni ej hb'r om den? 6. Strax innan vi amna (att) 
 lamna stad , voro (93, a) vi ute och kb'r i min nya bil; 
 vi kollider med en sparvagn, och min hustru blev (was) 
 skadad. 7. Nu ma hon ypperligt, men jag kan ej forma 
 henne att aka i automobil mera. 8. Varfb'r besoker (93, b) 
 ni oss aldrig, herr professor, medan vi bo pa landet? 9. Vi 
 ha det sa trevligt, var villa ligger vid sjostrand , och 
 fran dess veranda ha vi en harlig utsikt over sjb'n. 10. Vi 
 ha bade (both) motorbat och segelbat och naturligtvis 
 
 roddbat, om ni tyck om att ro. 11. Vag (pi. def.) 
 
 aro fb'rtrafflig och passande for automobilakning. 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Var bodde ni i somras? 2. Varfor 
 bor ni pa landet? 3. Flyttade ni ut tidigt i ar? 4. Varfor 
 flyttade ni ut sa sent? 5. 7ad skedde, nar ni voro ute och 
 akte ? 6. Vad kolliderade ni med ? 7. Varfor vill fru Ed- 
 strom ej aka i automobil mera? 8. Var ligger er villa? 
 9. Hur har ni det pa landet? 10. Hum manga slags (kindi 
 of) batar har ni? 11. Vad passa vagarna for?
 
 66 VOCABULARY 
 
 C. 1. Doctor Edstrom and his family lived at a beau- 
 tiful little lake last summer. 2. Their villa is situated 
 (Hgger) at (vid) the lake shore, and from the porch they 
 have a charming view over the lake and its islands. 3. The 
 doctor does not feel well if he does not spend his (sina) va- 
 cation in (pa) the country, 4. Last summer they moved 
 out later than usual, for an accident had occurred to Mrs. 
 Edstrom. 5. They were out riding in their (sin) large new 
 automobile and collided with a street car. 6. Mrs. Edstrom 
 was seriously injured, and now the doctor cannot make her 
 (Ex. X, A, 7) ride in an automobile. 7. Haven't you 
 heard of that (ddrom) ? I thought you and the doctor 
 were very good friends. 8. I have visited them several 
 times at (i) their home in the country; they have such a 
 pleasant home. 9. Once I stayed a whole week and was out 
 rowing and fishing (ute och rodde ocli metade) on the lake 
 every (varje) day. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 aldrig, never kollide'ra, I, to collide 
 
 allvarsam, -t, serious en kraft, -er, strength 
 
 en automobil'dkning, automo- kora, lib, to drive 
 
 bile riding Idmna, I, to leave 
 
 bero', III, to depend langre, longer, any longer 
 
 en bil, -ar, colloquial abbrev. medan, while 
 
 for automobile meta, I, to fish 
 
 ferier (always plur.) vacation en motorMt, -ar, motor boat 
 
 fly, III, to flee ma, III, to feel (well, ill, etc.) 
 
 flytta, I, to move en natur', -er, nature 
 
 forma', III, to be able; to in- natur'ligtvis, of course 
 
 duce or compel en o'lycka, -or, accident, mis- 
 ganska (adv.), quite fortune 
 
 Jiamta, I, to fetch passande, suitable 
 
 handa, lib, to happen, occur ro, III, to row 
 
 en hustru, -r, wife en roddbdt, -ar, rowboat 
 
 en insjo, -ar, lake en segelbut, -ar, sailboat
 
 INDICATIVE. 07 
 
 en sjostrand, sjiJstriinder, lake som vanligt, as usual 
 
 shore en veranda, -or, porch 
 
 skadad, -at, injured en villa, -or, villa, cottage 
 
 i somras, last summer dka, Ha, to ride 
 
 en spdrvagn, -ar, street car en o, -ar, island 
 
 strax, soon over (prep, and adv.) over, 
 trevlig, -t, pleasant, agreeable past 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 1. att vara ute och kora, gd, rida, etc., to be out driving, 
 
 walking, riding. 
 
 2. att gd ut och gd, to take a walk. 
 
 3. att ha det trevligt, to have a pleasant home or time. 
 
 4. att md bra, ilia, to feel well, bad, ill. 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 The Verb (Continued). 
 
 FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE. 
 
 143. The future indicative is formed by com- 
 bining the present of the auxiliary skola, shall, which 
 is skall (in conversation ska), with the present infin- 
 itive; and the future perfect by combining the 
 same auxiliary with the perfect infinitive. 
 
 FUTURE INDICATIVE FUTURE PERF. INDIC. 
 
 Sg. jag] jag] 
 
 du \ i 7 , , 7 x T 17 du [skall (ska) 
 
 ni fskall (ska) kalla ni h akaUat 
 
 han] han] 
 
 PI. vi ~\ vi 1 
 
 m \skola (ska) kalla ni I skola (ska) 
 
 de J de j ha kallat 
 
 I skolen kalla I skolen ha kallat 
 
 NOTE 1. Pure future is generally expressed either by the present or by the 
 infinitive together with the present of the verb komma, to come (296). 
 
 2. The double forms of the English future and future perfect, / shall call, 
 I shall be calling, and / shall have called, I shall have been calling, are to be 
 rendered by the single forms, jag skall kalla and jag skall ha kallat.
 
 68 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 144. The imperative is formed by attaching to 
 the stem of the verb the following endings: 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 Second Person -a or First Person -om 
 
 Second Person -en or -n 
 
 NOTE. Only verbs of the First Conjugation take -a in the second person sin- 
 gular ; all other verbs use the mere stem. 
 
 145. Instead of the form in -om, which is exceed- 
 ingly rare, the imperative of the verb Idta, let, latom, 
 generally shortened to lat, is used with the reflex- 
 ive pronoun oss, us, of the first person plural and 
 the infinitive. This form corresponds exactly to 
 the English imperative with let; thus, Idt(om) oss 
 kalla, let us call. 
 
 146. Instead of the second person plural in -en 
 or -n the second person singular, with the pronoun 
 ni understood, is used as an imperative for the 
 second person plural. 
 
 NOTE. The pronouns are generally omitted in the imperative. 
 
 147. The conversational language uses a num- 
 ber of expressions which are more polite than the 
 imperative ; the most common is vill ni vara sa god, 
 will you be so kind; thus, vill ni vara sa god och 
 komma (will you have the kindness to come), 
 also, var sa god och, etc. ; or the expression, sa dr ni 
 (du) snail (then you are kind), may be used after 
 the imperative; as, kom, sa dr ni snail (please 
 come), or, kan (can) may be used in a question: 
 kan du komma mi? equivalent to, come now, 
 please.
 
 INFINITIVE. 69 
 
 148. Examples of the imperative of the verbs 
 kalla, to call; bdja, to bend; tro, to believe; ga, 
 to go. 
 
 kalla (du, ni), kallom, lat(om) oss kalla, kallen(I) 
 
 bd'j (du, ni), bojom, Idt(om) oss bdja, bbjen(I) 
 
 tro (du, ni), lat(om) oss tro, iron (I) 
 
 ga (du, ni), lat(om) oss ga, gan (I) 
 
 NOTE. Verbs the stem of which ends in a vowel lack the form in -07*1, and 
 take -n in the second person plural. 
 
 149. REMARKS ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 (a) The present active infinitive ends in -a, but 
 verbs of the Third Conjugation and a few verbs 
 of the Fourth Conjugation the stem of which ends 
 in a vowel take no ending in the infinitive. The 
 sign of the infinitive i? att, to. Ex.: att kalla, att 
 tro, att ga. 
 
 (b) The perfect infinitive is formed as in Eng- 
 lish; thus, att ha kallat, to'have called; att ha trott, 
 to have believed ; att ha gdtt, to have gone. 
 
 (c) There is also a future infinitive formed by 
 combining the present infinitive of the auxiliary 
 verb skola, shall, with the infinitive of the verb; 
 as, att skola kalla. This is rarely used. 
 
 (d) The sign of the infinitive is omitted very much 
 as in English. (Further particulars will be given 
 later.) 
 
 (e) An infinitive phrase expressing purpose is 
 generally introduced by the preposition for, for; 
 as, jag har rest till Tyskland for att studera tyska 
 dar, I have gone to Germany in order to study Ger- 
 man there.
 
 70 EXERCISE. 
 
 The Reflexive Pronoun. 
 
 150. There is only one distinctively reflexive 
 form, the objective sig, which is used for all genders 
 and numbers of the third person: himself, herself, 
 itself, themselves; as, han (hon) sdtter sig, seats 
 himself (herself) ; de sdtta sig, they seat themselves. 
 
 151. Elsewhere the objective case of the personal 
 pronouns is used as reflexive; as, jag sdtter mig, 
 I seat myself ; m sdtta oss, we seat ourselves. 
 
 NOTE 1. In English the reflexive -self must be distinguished from the em- 
 phatic -self. This is expressed in Swedish by sjalv; as, jag sjalv, I myself; 
 han har gjort det sjalv, he has done it himself. 
 
 2. Sjdlva(e) preceding a noun means even ; as, sjdlva konungen kan inte 
 .gora det, even the king cannot do it. 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 
 A. 1. Om m onska taga en liten tur pa sjon, barn, sa 
 kom med mig. 2. Ga in till Ostermans pa vagen, Karl, och 
 sag till dem, att jag b'nsk lana . . . (Iheir) bat. 3. Hop- 
 pa nu i bat , goss , men forsiktigt, sa att ni ej stjalp 
 . . . (it). 4. Vem skall ro? Jasa, du Erik, nej, lat Karl 
 ro, jag tror ej, att det skall bli tungt for honom, ty sjon 
 ligger som en spegel. 5. Sluta att ro, Karl, och slapp ned 
 ankar . Lat oss nu kasta nt rev . 6. Se bara, hur 
 mycket fisk det ar har! Karl har redan ett napp pa sin 
 krok. 7. Tycker ni inte, att det ar roligt att meta, nar 
 man far napp? 8. Var nu snail och ro i land, sa satta vi 
 oss under det stor trad for att ata var middag. 
 
 B. 1. Kara barn, oppna lasebockerna pa sidan tjugu, 
 och lat oss lasa Tegners vackra dikt. 2. Sag mig, Karl, 
 vad den handlar om, ar du snail. 3. Det var alldeles rik- 
 tigt. Borja nu och las den hogt och val for oss, Maria. 
 4. Yar god och ursakta mig, froken Forsell, jag kan ej
 
 EXERCISE. ?'l 
 
 lasa hogt; jag ar forkyld och har ont i halscn. 5. Det var 
 ilia, da skall lilla Klara lasa den. 6. Sna.Ha froken, tillat 
 mig att lasa den utantill ; jag bar lart hela dikten utantill. 
 7. Det var bra gjort, Klara. Hor nu pa uppmarksamt 
 allesammans, medan Klara laser. 8. Sedan skall jag sjalv 
 deklamera den for or. 
 
 C. Conversation. 1. Vad b'nskar ni (att) gora i dag? 
 2. Vem ska vi lana baten av? 3. Varfor blir det ej tungt 
 for Karl att ro? 4. Vad maste man gora, innan man kan 
 borja (att) meta? 5. Vem av er bar napp pa sin krok? 
 6. Nar ar det roligt att meta? 7. Var skola vi ata var 
 middag? 8. Varfor kan Maria ej lasa hogt? 9. Hur har 
 Klara visat, att hon ar flitig? 10. Vad amnar froken 
 Forsell (att) gora, nar Klara har last dikten? 
 
 D. 1. The children wished to go out fishing (ut och 
 meta) yesterday. 2. Since we do not have any boat, we 
 had to (maste vi) borrow one from Osterman's. 3. The 
 boys jumped carefully into the boat in order not to upset 
 it. 4. Carl rowed the whole way 1 , and it was not very 
 difficult, for the lake was like a mirror. 5. Stop rowing, 
 Carl; and you, Eric, drop the anchor. 6. Let us throw out 
 our lines here, boys, there is (A, 6) plenty of (much) fish 
 here, I think. 7. If you are tired we shall (invert) row 
 ashore and sit down (A, 8) under the big tree to eat our 
 breakfast. 8. Please (B, 2) open the books on page ten, 
 children. 9. Tell me, Carl, who the author of this (denna) 
 beautiful poem is. 10. Quite right, my dear boy. And 
 now Clara will recite the poem for us. 11. When she has 
 done (gjort) this, I myself shall declaim it for you. 12. 
 Why don't you begin, Clara ? Have you not learned it by 
 heart? 13. Please excuse me (var god och ursakta mig}, 
 Miss Forsell. I tried to learn it by heart yesterday, but
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 could (kunde) not. I had such a sore throat (sa out i lial- 
 sen). 14. Please open (var snail och ...) the window. 
 Carl, I have a headache (huvudvark, or, out i huvudet). 
 
 *Hela vagen: the prepositive article is omitted. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 alldeles, quite, entirely en lasebok, -bocker, reader 
 
 allesammans, all en middag, -ar, noon; dinner 
 
 ett ankare, , anchor ett napp, bite 
 
 bara, only ndgon, nagot, any 
 
 bra, well (often referring to ond, ont, bad, wicked; sore; 
 
 angry 
 
 redan, already 
 en rev, -ar, line 
 riktig, -t, right, correct 
 rolig, -t, amusing 
 
 health) 
 
 deklame'ra, I, to declaim 
 erne' dan, because, since 
 en fisk, -ar, fish 
 ett fonster, window 
 forkyld' -kylt, having caught en sjo, -ar, lake 
 
 a cold sluta, I, to cease 
 
 forsik'tig, -t, cautious som (rel. pronoun, adv. and 
 
 handla om, I, to treat about conj.), who, like, as 
 
 hoppa, I, to jump en spegel, -lar, mirror 
 
 hog, -t, high (as adv. also stjiilpa, Ha, to upset 
 
 aloud) saga, (irr. v.), to say 
 
 i gdr, yesterday til'lata (st. v.), to permit 
 
 ilia (adv.), bad(ly), too bad tio, ten 
 
 jasa', so, is that so 
 kasta, I, to throw 
 en krok, -ar, hook 
 
 tung, -t, heavy 
 
 en tur, -er, turn; trip; luck 
 
 uppmarksam, -t, attentive (-ly) 
 
 lara, lib, to learn; to teach ur'sakta, I, to excuse 
 
 lasa upp', Ha, to recite 
 
 utantill, by heart 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. Det ar roligt, it is fun. 
 
 2. Jag ar forkyld, I have caught a cold. 
 
 3. Jag har ont i nalsen, I have a sore throat. 
 
 Note that long m can be written double only when it is intervocalic. This 
 principle causes sometimes a dropping of one m and sometimes a doubling : 
 vppmarksam, becomes vppmarlcsamma in the plural m is here intervocalic; 
 nummer becomes num-ret in the def. form m is no longer intervocalic.
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 73 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 The Verb (Continued). 
 
 THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 152. This conjugation contains all verbs that 
 form their imperfect by means of a change of the 
 vowel of the root without any added tense sign. 
 There is frequently also a change of vowel in the 
 supine and past participle. These verbs are called 
 strong verbs. 
 
 The verbs belonging to this conjugation are 
 divided into two classes. 
 
 153. The first class contains verbs the root of 
 which undergoes but one vowel change. In these 
 verbs the vowel of the supine and past participle is 
 the same as that of the infinitive and the vowel of 
 the plural of the imperfect the same as that of the 
 singular. 
 
 Examples : 
 
 INFINITIVE IMPERFECT SUPINE PAST PARTICIPLE 
 
 SO. PL. 
 
 hdlla, to hold holl hollo hallit hallen, -et 
 gripa, to seize grep grepo gripit gripen, -et 
 
 154. The second class contains verbs the root of 
 which undergoes two vowel changes. In these the 
 vowel of the supine and the past participle is always 
 different from that of the infinitive ; the vowel of the 
 plural of the imperfect is in most cases the same as 
 that of the supine, in the case of a few verbs like that 
 of the singular of the imperfect and different from 
 that of the supine. 
 
 Swedish Grammar 6
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Example : 
 
 INFINITIVE 
 
 SUPINE PAST PARTICIPLE 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 INFINITIVE 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 SG. 
 
 PI* 
 
 1. 
 
 i, 
 
 c, 
 
 e, 
 
 i. 
 
 bita, to bite 
 
 bet 
 
 beto 
 
 2. 
 
 a, 
 
 o, 
 
 o, 
 
 a. 
 
 fara, to travel 
 
 for 
 
 foro 
 
 3. 
 
 u, 
 
 o, 
 
 o, 
 
 u 
 
 njuta, to enjoy 
 
 njot 
 
 njoto 
 
 4. 
 
 y, 
 
 o, 
 
 o, 
 
 u. 
 
 knyta, to tic 
 
 knot 
 
 knoto 
 
 5. 
 
 i, 
 
 a, 
 
 u, 
 
 u. 
 
 finna, to find 
 
 fann 
 
 funno 
 
 6. 
 
 a, 
 
 a, 
 
 u, 
 
 u. 
 
 skdra, to cut 
 
 skar 
 
 skuro 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 SG. PL. 
 
 finna, to find fann funno funnit funnen, -et 
 knyta, to tie knot knoto knutit knuten, -et 
 
 155. The following table of the most common of 
 the vowel changes in the Fourth Conjugation may 
 prove helpful : 
 
 SUPINE 
 
 bitit 
 
 farit 
 
 njutit 
 
 knutit 
 
 funnit 
 
 skurit 
 
 156. The verbs of the Strong Conjugation have 
 the following endings : 
 
 -er (-r) in the singular of the present indicative. 
 
 -a in the plural of the present indicative. 
 
 -en in the archaic second person plural. 
 
 No ending in the singular of the impf . indicative. 
 
 -o in the plural of the imperfect indicative. 
 
 -ande in the present participle. 
 
 -en in the gender form of the past participle. 
 
 -et in the neuter form of the past participle. 
 
 -it in the supine. 
 
 NOTE 1. The difference of vowel in the singular and plural of the imperfect 
 indicative need not occasion the beginner any difficulty, since the singular is 
 invariably used for the plural in conversation ; thus, vi fann is the common 
 form, vi funno is rarely heard. 
 
 2. The past participle is declined like adjectives in -en, for which see 111, 2, 
 112, 2, and 125, note. 
 
 157. Examples of verbs of the first and second
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 75 
 
 classes of the Fourth Conjugation: att gripa, to 
 seize; att finna, to find. 
 
 PRINCIPAL PARTS. 
 
 INFINITIVE IMPERFECT SUPINE 
 
 SG. PL. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE 
 
 I. gripa grep grepo gripit grip en, -et 
 II. finna fann funno funnit funnen, -et 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 f*1 ^\ 
 
 Sg. jag 1 
 
 ni \ griper 
 han] 
 
 Sg. jag } 
 
 . \finner 
 m 
 
 han] 
 
 PI. vi ] 
 ni \gripa 
 de ] 
 I gripen 
 
 PI. vi } 
 ni \finna 
 de J 
 I finnen 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag 1 
 
 ni \ grep 
 han] 
 
 Sg. jag} 
 
 . \fann 
 m 
 
 han] 
 
 PI. vi ] 
 ni \grepo 
 de } 
 I grep en 
 
 PI. vi } 
 ni \funno 
 de } 
 I funnen 
 
 FUTURE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag skall (ska) gripa, finna, etc. 
 PL vi skola (ska) gripa, finna, etc. 
 
 PERFECT INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag har gripit, funnit, etc. 
 PI. vi ha gripit, funnit, etc. 
 
 PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag hade gripit, funnit, etc. 
 PI. vi hade gripit, funnit, etc.
 
 76 EXERCISE. 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 Sg. jag skall ha gripit, funnit, etc. 
 PI. vi skola ha gripit, funnit, etc. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Sg. grip (du, ni) finn (du, ni) 
 
 PI. gripom, lat(om)oss gripa finnom, lat(om) oss 
 
 finna 
 gripen (I) finnen (I) 
 
 INFINITIVES. 
 
 Present, gripa finna 
 
 Perfect, ha gripit ha funnit 
 
 Future, skola gripa skola finna 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 
 
 A. Change the present into imperfect in the following: 
 1. Min bror skriver ett brev till min far, som har farit 
 
 till Amerika. 2. Jag bar brevet pa posten. 3. Han far svar 
 (64, b) pa det. 4. Jag gar till stationen for att mb'ta min 
 bror. 5. Han kommer pa besb'k hos oss. 6. Taget ankom- 
 mer ej forran klockan sex, det ar forsenat. 7. Nar ban ser 
 mig, stiger ban av taget. 8. Han ger sitt handbagage till 
 en barare 1 och gar med mig. 9. Vi taga en droska och fara 
 hem. 10. Den sjuke gossen ligger till sangs. 11. Han 
 sover ganska gott. 12. Det ger honom krafter. 13. Karl 
 ater for mycket. 14. Han blir sjuk, och vi maste tillkalla 
 lakaren. 15. Vi ata frukten, som vi fa av Karl. 16. En 
 haftig storm ntbryter. 17. Vagorna sla over skeppet. 
 18. Det sjunker pa oppna sjb'n. 
 
 J In Stockholm called stadsbud (neuter). A porter in a hotel is called 
 hotellvaktmastare. 
 
 B. 1. Vi kommo ej till den lilla staden forran sent pa 
 kvallen, ty vi voro forsenade. 2. Vart tag gick ej fort, och 
 dessutom stannade det vid alia stationer. 3. Som (as) vi
 
 EXERCISE. 77 
 
 voro trotta, besago vi ej staden, utan gingo direkt till vart 
 hotell, som lag nara stationen. 4. Vi sovo utmarkt hela 
 natten, men maste stiga upp klockan sex for att fara vida- 
 re. 5. Vi hade bett dem vacka oss i tid, men vaknade sja'l- 
 va. 6. Nar vi hade atit frukost, begarde vi var rakning. 
 7. Den var ganska resonabel; vi betalade den samt gavo 
 drickspengar. 8. Nar ni besb'ker staden X, bor (ought] 
 ni ga till detta (this) hotell. Jag kan rekommendera det. 
 
 C. Conversation. 1. Nar komma vi till Stockholm? 
 2. Hur manga minuter ar taget forsenat? 3. Tycker ni, 
 att taget gar fort? 4. Hur manga minuter stannar taget 
 vid Alvesta ? 5. Var ligger hotellet, dar ni brukar taga in? 
 6. Nar skall man va'cka oss i morgon? 7. Tror ni, att ni 
 kan vakna sjalv? 8. Har ni sovit gott i natt, herr Arndt? 
 9. Ar rakningen for hog? 
 
 D. I.I did not come to Vexio before ten o'clock in (pa) 
 the evening. 2. The train which I was on did not run 
 very fast, and I believe it stopped at all stations. 3. A 
 friend of mine (en of mina vanner) had recommended a 
 small hotel which lies near the station. 4. I gave my hand 
 baggage to a porter and asked 1 him to show me the way to 
 the hotel. 5. In the dining room of the hotel (gen. def.) 
 I had 2 a good supper. 6. An hour later (scnare) I went 
 to bed and slept well until six o'clock in (pa) the morning, 
 when they (man) called 3 me. 7. I asked for the bill and 
 found it very reasonable. 8. At this hotel one gives (invert) 
 no tips. 9. It is not large but very good (bra), and I 
 shall recommend it to all my (mina) friends who go (resa, 
 fara) to Vexio. 10. Vexio is a pleasant little town. It is 
 situated by (vid) a lake. 11. I did not have time to view 
 the town for I arrived late (sent) and had to leave early in 
 the morning. 
 
 *To ask a question is fraga, to ask a favor is bedja. 2 Uae iHo, and invert. 
 'Use vdcka.
 
 78 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 N. B. Of the strong verbs the following parts are given: 
 the infinitive, the singular and plural of the imperfect, the 
 supine, and the gender and neuter forms of the past par- 
 ticiple, when found. 
 
 ankomma, ankom, ankommo, 
 ankommit, -en, -et, to ar- 
 rive 
 
 bedja, bad, bddo, bett, bedd, 
 bett, to pray, to ask 
 
 bega'ra, lib, to demand 
 
 beta'la, I la, to pay 
 
 bestf, besdg, besdgo, besett, 
 besedd, -sett, to look at, 
 view 
 
 ett hotell', , hotel 
 
 ligga, Mg, logo, legat, to lie, to 
 be situated 
 
 en matsal, -ar, dining room 
 
 en natt, nutter, night 
 
 ntira (adv. and prep.), near 
 
 en post (in this sense no 
 pi.), mail, post office 
 
 rekommende'ra, I, to recom- 
 mend 
 
 bliva, blev, blevo, blivit, -en, 
 
 -et, to become; to remain resona'bel, -t, reasonable 
 
 en broder (bror), broder, en rdkning, -ar, bill 
 
 brother se < s &9, Sa 9> sett > - dd > ~ ett > 
 bdra, bar, buro, burit, -en, to see 
 
 -et, to carry, to bear ett skepp, , ship 
 
 en bdrare, , porter skriva, skrev, skrevo, skrivit, 
 direkt', direct (ly) -en, -et, to write 
 
 drickspengar (always pi.), tip, sjunka, sjonk, sjonko, sjunkit, 
 
 tips 
 
 en droska, -or, cab 
 fara, for, foro, farit, -en, -et, 
 
 to travel, to drive, to go 
 fa, ftck, fingo, fdtt, to get, to 
 
 receive 
 
 forrdn (adv.), before 
 forse'nad, -t, belated, late 
 
 (train) 
 giva (also ge), gav, gdvo, 
 
 -en, -et, to sink 
 sld, slog, slogo, slagit, -en, -et, 
 
 strike 
 
 sld over, to wash over 
 sova, sov, sovo, sovit, to sleep 
 en station', -er, station 
 stiga, steg, stego, stigit, -en, 
 
 -et, to step; to rise 
 stiga upp', to rise, to get up 
 
 givit (gett), -en, -et, to give en supe, supeer, supper 
 
 gd, gick, gingo, gdtt, gdngen, taga, tog, togo, tagit, -en, -et, to 
 
 -et, to go (run) take 
 
 ett handbagage (-gash'; no tiU'kalla, I, to call (in) 
 
 pi.), hand baggage ett tag, , train
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 79 
 
 ut'bryta, utbrot, utbroto, utbru-viicka (tr. v.), Ha, to wake 
 
 tit, -en, -et, to break out Ufa, dt, dto, iitit, -en, -et, to eat 
 vidare, further 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. att bedja om en sale, to ask for a thing. 
 
 2. att Mra (lagga) pd posten, to mail. 
 
 3. Har posten Commit? Has the mail come? 
 
 4. Vad (ir Jclockan? What time is it? Klockan (ir 
 sex. It is six o'clock. 
 
 5. att visa vagen, to show the way. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 REMARK. Note the tendency of substituting compound 
 forms for the simple subjunctive. 
 
 PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 158. The simple present subjunctive of all per- 
 sons, except the archaic second person plural, is 
 formed by adding -e to the stem. The archaic second 
 person plural ends in -en. Much more common is 
 the compound form with ma. 
 
 NOTE. Verbs the infinitive of which ends in any other vowel than a lack the 
 simple present subjunctive. These include all verbs of the Third Conjugation 
 and a few others ; as, ga, to go ; std, to stand ; le, to smile ; etc. 
 
 159. Examples of the present subjunctive: att 
 vara, to be; att alska, to love; att tro, to believe. 
 
 ^} vare, 
 . Imd vara, 
 
 ?* matte vara 
 Han] 
 
 vi 1 vare, 
 ni \ma vara, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 r l 
 
 ^ (ma alska, 
 
 ^ matte alska, 
 han] 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 vi ] dlske, 
 ni \ ma alska, 
 
 f 
 han 
 
 v 
 ni 
 
 de } matte vara de } matte alska de 
 
 tro 
 
 tro 
 [ T0
 
 80 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 f varen, f dlsken, f m&n tro 
 
 1 4 man vara, 1 1 man alska, 1 1 matten { ro 
 [ mdtten vara [ mdtten alska 
 
 160. IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 (1) In verbs of the Fourth Conjugation the sim- 
 ple imperfect subjunctive is formed by changing the 
 ending -o of the plural of the imperfect indicative 
 to -e (the archaic second person plural having the 
 additional ending -n) . The vowel of both numbers 
 of the imperfect subjunctive is thus the same as 
 that of the plural of the imperfect indicative. 
 
 NOTE. The singular of the imperfect indicative of the Fourth Conjugation is 
 often used instead of the impf. subjunctive. 
 
 (2) In the First, Second, and Third Conjugations 
 the simple imperfect subjunctive is identical with 
 the imperfect indicative. 
 
 (3) Compound forms consisting of the imperfect 
 of skall, skulle, are of very common occurrence. 
 
 161. Examples of the imperfect subjunctive of 
 the verbs binda, to bind ; vara, to be ; alska, to love. 
 
 INFINITIVE IMPERFECT SUPINE PAST PARTICIPLE 
 
 SO. PL. 
 
 binda band bundo bundit bunden, -et 
 
 vara var voro varit 
 
 alska alskade alskade dlskat dlskad, -at 
 
 Sg. jag bunde, skulle binda, etc. 
 PI. vi bunde, skulle binda, etc. 
 
 Sg. jag vore, skulle vara, etc. 
 PI. vi vore, skulle vara, etc. 
 
 Sg. jag alskade, skulle alska, etc. 
 PI. vi alskade, skulle alska, etc.
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 81 
 
 162. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 (a) The perfect subjunctive is formed by com- 
 bining the present or the imperfect of the auxiliary 
 md with the perfect infinitive. 
 
 (b) The pluperfect subjunctive is either identical 
 with the indicative or formed by combining the im- 
 perfect of skall, skulle, with the perfect infinitive. 
 
 Examples of the perfect and pluperfect subjunc- 
 tives of the verbs skriva and vara. 
 
 PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag ma or matte ha jag ma or matte ha varit, 
 
 skrivit, etc. etc. 
 
 PL vi ma or matte ha vi ma or matte ha varit, 
 
 skrivit, etc. etc. 
 
 PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Sg. jag hade skrivit, or jag hade varit, or 
 jag skulle ha skrivit jag skulle ha varit 
 
 PI. vi hade skrivit, or vi hade varit, or 
 vi skulle ha skrivit vi skulle ha varit 
 
 USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 163. Classification of uses. The subjunctive 
 which marks in general the absence of direct or 
 positive assertion is used regularly in statements 
 of doubtful reality; such as wish, request, purpose, 
 concession, possibility. 
 
 164. SUBJUNCTIVE OF WISH. 
 
 (a) A realizable wish is expressed by the simple 
 present subjunctive, or by the compound form with 
 md and matte, md implying greater and matte less 
 confidence in the realization of the wish.
 
 82 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Ex. Give Gud dig hdlsa; also, ma or matte Gud 
 giva dig hdlsa! May God give you health. Matte 
 han vara hdr! Would he were here! Vi matte vdl 
 komma i tid till tdget! I do wish we might come 
 in time for the train. 
 
 NOTE. The wish may sometimes have the force of a command : Gud sade : 
 "Varde Ijus !" God said, "Let there be light." 
 
 (b) A wish which refers to the present and which 
 is not at least not immediately realizable is 
 expressed by the simple imperfect subjunctive; a 
 similar wish referring to the past, by the pluperfect 
 subjunctive. 
 
 Ex. Ack, om jag vore ung igen! Would I were 
 young again ! 0, att han vore hdr! Would he were 
 here ! Hade jag blott vingar! If I only had wings ! 
 Hade jag blott haft en enda van! Had I only had 
 a single friend! 
 
 NOTE 1. The simple imperfect subjunctive may also express a very vivid 
 wish referring to the future: Ack, om del snart vore vdr I O that spring were 
 here! 
 
 2. Note the use of ack, om..., o, aft... with the sense of would (that) 
 
 Closely related to the subjunctive of wish are the 
 subjunctives of purpose and concession. 
 
 165. SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE. 
 
 The compound subjunctive with ma and matte is 
 used in clauses expressing purpose with the con- 
 junctions att, pa det att, sa att, in order that. After 
 a past tense the subjunctive with skulle may be used. 
 
 Ex. Bed till Gud, att han ma (matte) beskydda 
 oss, pray to God that he may protect us; han skyn- 
 dade sig, sa att han skulle vara fdrdig, he hurried 
 in order that he might be ready.
 
 EXERCISE. 83 
 
 NOTE 1. The compound subjunctive (sometimes the indicative) of fa, may 
 (permission), and kunna, can (ability, possibilty), are often used in a purpose 
 clause if permission or ability is implied: han bad barnen vara tysta, sa att 
 han skulle fa sova, he asked the children to be quiet in order that he might 
 sleep ; han studerade svenska flitigt, sa att han skulle kunna tala del flytande, 
 he studied Swedish diligently in order that he might speak it fluently. 
 
 2. If the subject of the purpose clause ia the same as that of the principal 
 clause the infinitive with for att (149, e) is used: herr Vallner or ej hemma. 
 han har rest till Stockholm for att besoka sin sjuka bror, Mr. Vallner is not 
 at home ; he has gone to Stockholm to visit his sick brother. 
 
 166. SUBJUNCTIVE OF CONCESSION. 
 Concession is expressed by the subjunctive with 
 
 ma (not matte) . Ex. : Det ma sa vara, that may be ; 
 nu ma fienderna komma, now the enemy may come. 
 
 NOTE. Note the concessive subjunctive in vare sig du vill eller ej, whether 
 you wish or not ; vi skola ga, vare sig han kommer eller ej, we shall go whether 
 he comes or not. The expression vare fig (let it be for itself) has practically 
 become a conjunction meaning whether. 
 
 167. THE POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE, or subjunc- 
 tive of possibility, indicates merely the possibility 
 that an action may occur, without any reference to 
 its probability : kanhdnda vore det sa gott att borja 
 arbetet med detsamma, perhaps it would be well to 
 begin the work immediately ; med din hjalp formad- 
 de jag nog go'ra det, with your help, I should be 
 able to do it, no doubt ; det kunde vara sant, it might 
 be true. 
 
 NOTE. Absolute possibility is denoted by kan (sometimes ma). See Senses 
 of Modals (255, b). Ex.: det kan vara sant, it may possibly be true; a very 
 vivid probability is denoted by matte: det matte vara mamma, som kommer ; 
 it must be mother who comes. 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 A. 1. Nagon knackar pa db'rren; det matte 1 vara brev- 
 bararen, ty han kommer alltid vid derma tid. 2. Jag 6ns- 
 kar, att det vore han och att han hade med sig en postanvis- 
 ning hemifran, sa att jag kunde 2 betala min inackordering
 
 84 EXERCISE. 
 
 och min skolavgift. 3. Vore 3 man bara rik och ej en fat- 
 tig studerande! 4. Nej, det ar inte brevbararen, utan ett 
 telegrambud. 5. Matte 4 de ej vara sjuka dar hemma! 
 6. Vem skulle 5 ha trott det! Min bror Kobert, som reste 
 till Brasilien for att gb'ra 6 sin lycka, bar kommit tillbaka, 
 och nu onska mina foraldrar, att jag matte 4 resa hem pa 
 ett par dagar. 7. Ack, om jag bara kande 7 nagon, som 
 ville lana mig hundra kroner, sa. att jag kunde 2 resa med 
 detsamma. 8. Vore 1 det ej battre, att du sande dem ett 
 telegram och bade dem- om pengar ? 9. Jag skulle sa garna 
 vilja lana dig, nien jag bar tyvarr inga. 10. Har kommer 
 brevbararen med ett rekommenderat brev. Matte 4 det bara 
 innehalla nog pengar, sa att jag ma 2 kunna betala mina 
 skulder och resa hem. 
 
 ne?, note. ! 165, 1. r 164, b, 1. 4 164, a. B 167. 165, 2. T 164 b, 2. 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Vem tror ni det ar, som knackar 
 pa dorren? 2. Varfor formodar (suppose) ni, att det ar 
 brevbararen? 3. Vad b'nskar ni, att ban medforde (brought 
 along) ? 4. Varfor ville 1 ni garna ha en postanvisning hem- 
 if ran ? 5. Vad ville ni hellre vara an en f attig studerande ? 
 6. Vad nyheter (news) innehb'll telegrammet? 7. Varfor 
 hade er bror rest till Brasilien ? 8. Vad ville era foraldrar, 
 att ni skulle gora ? 9. Varfor kunde ni icke resa med det- 
 samma? 10. Vad tjanst hade er kamrat gjort er, om ban 
 hade haft pengar? 
 
 1 Impf. subjunctive (like the indicative) ; vilja giirna, to like. 
 
 C. 1. Somebody must be knocking at the door. Would 
 you go and open? 2. I wish it were (164, b, 1) the post- 
 man, for I expect a money order or a registered letter from 
 home. 3. Only a common letter! I wish that it might 
 contain 1 money, for I am entirely without (any). 4. If my 
 parents would only send 2 me some money soon so that I 
 could pay (A, 2) my debts. I owe both for board and
 
 VOCABULARY. 85 
 
 tuition. 5. Who would (skulle) have believed that he 
 would return so soon. 6. Father (min far) writes that 
 brother Robert has returned from Brazil in order to cele- 
 brate (165, 2) Christmas at home. 7. Mother wishes that 
 I too might come (164, a) home, and they promise that 
 they will send money in a few days (om ndgra dagar). 
 
 D. 1. Let us study diligently so that our teacher may 
 praise (165) us. 2. Let us hope that it may not rain 3 , for 
 we have no umbrellas. 3. The old woman asked me to give 
 her something 4 . 4. I did so and she said, "May God bless 
 the good gentleman." 5. The children eat breakfast very 
 early that they may be in school on time (i tid). 6. Be 
 quiet, children, so that your poor father may sleep (far 
 sow, 165, 1). 7. We wish that he might come (164, a) ; 
 but whether (166, note) he comes or not, we shall go. 
 8. If we had only not gone out! But who could believe 
 that he would (skutte) come. 9. Their father required 
 (fordrade) that they come 5 home early. But he may (ma, 
 kan) say what he will, they do not obey. 10. What he says 
 might (167) be true. Would that what he says were 
 (164, b, 2) true. 
 
 1 Use the impf. subjunctive of innehalla (164, b, 1). 2 0m minaforaldrar bara 
 ville, etc. *Pres. indie, may be used, translate two ways: literally and "asked 
 that I", etc. 5 After a verb of command Swedish often uses the modal auxiliary 
 skola with the pres. inf. (not to be confused with skoltt in its use as an 
 auxiliary of the future). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 alldeles, altogether, entirely en brevbdrare, , -arna (def. 
 
 bara, only pi.) letter carrier 
 
 befal'la, lib, to order, to com- darhemma, at home 
 mand fattig, -t, poor 
 
 beromma, lib, impf. beromde fira, I, to celebrate 
 (see 103,- note 3), to Jiemifrdn, from home 
 praise en herre, -ar, gentleman
 
 86 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 hoppas, I, (deponent v.), to rekommende'rad, -rat, regis- 
 hope tered 
 
 en in'ackorde'ring, -ar, board 
 
 , , , en skolavgift, -er, tuition 
 and room (or board on- 
 
 , . . , en skuld, -er, debt; guilt 
 ly) ' boarder 
 
 > -L.31T*. skyldig, -t, in debt; guilty 
 
 tn'neMlla, -holl, -hollo, -halht, 
 
 , . vara skyldig, to owe 
 -en, -et, to contain 
 
 . , m._t_i stackers (indeclinable), poor 
 en jul, -ar, Christmas 
 
 (in the sense of pitiable) 
 komma, kom, kommo, kom- 
 
 mit, -en, -et, to come. en studerande. , a student 
 
 iova, I, to promise ett telegram', , telegram 
 
 en lycka (no pi.), fortune, ett telegrambud, , telegraph 
 
 happiness messenger 
 
 lyda, lib, to obey en ^ ^ time 
 med detsamma, immediately ,f ear i y 
 
 nog, enough; I am sure; cer- tjug 
 
 certainly tyst, , quiet, silent 
 
 ndgon, some (one), pi. nagra, utan (ady prep ^ and CQnj }> 
 
 some, any, a few butj without 
 
 ocksd, also 
 
 en postanvisning, -ar, postal vanlig, -t, common, usual 
 
 money order valsigna, I, to bless 
 
 IDIOM: Det ar nog han som kommer, it is very likely he that 
 is coming. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 The Verb (Continued). 
 
 IRREGULARITIES OF VERBS. 
 
 168. Some verbs of the second class of the Second 
 Conjugation which are derived from other words by 
 means of the suffix -ja drop j in the imperfect, 
 supine, and past participle in which forms the cor- 
 responding hard vowel generally reappears. The 
 most common of these verbs are:
 
 INFINITIVE 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 8? 
 
 PRESENT IMPERFECT SUPINE P. PART. 
 
 gladja, to gladden gldder : gladde glatt gladd 2 
 
 salja, to sell saljer salde salt said 
 
 skilja, to separate skiljer skilde skilt skild 
 
 smorja, to grease, oil smorjer smorde smort smord 
 
 sporja, to ask, learn sporjer sporde sport spord 
 
 vdlja, to choose, elect vdljer valde valt vald 
 
 vanja, to accustom vanjer vande vant vand 
 
 ^lur. gladja. "The neuter is glatt, ST.lt, skilt, etc. (Ill, 3). 
 
 169. Such a change of vowel occurs also in the 
 following very common verbs : 
 
 INFINITIVE 
 
 bringa, to bring 
 gb'ra, to do 
 Idgga, to lay 
 saga, 2 to say 
 sdtta, to set, put 
 toras, to dare 
 
 PRESENT IMPERFECT SUPINE P. PAET. 
 
 bringar bragte bragt bragt ] 
 
 gor gjorde gjort gjord 
 
 lagger lade lagt lagd 
 
 sdger sade sagt sagd 
 
 sdtter satte satt satt 
 
 tor(e)s tordes torts 
 
 1 The neuter is bragt, lagt, satt, etc., (Ill, 3). 2 Commonly pronounced sdja. 
 
 170. There are besides a small number of verbs 
 which are entirely irregular. The most important 
 of these are: 
 
 INFINITIVE 
 
 bedja, to ask, pray 
 
 do, to die 
 
 fd, to get, receive 
 
 gd, to go 
 
 komma, to come 
 
 heta, to be called 
 
 le, smile 
 
 leva, to live 
 
 ligga, to lie 
 
 se, to see 
 
 sZ<$, to strike 
 
 PRESENT IMPERFECT SUPINE P. PART. 
 
 su. 
 
 bcder, ber bad 
 dor dog 
 far fick 
 gdr gick 
 kommer kom 
 heter hette 
 ler log 
 lever levde 
 ligger Idg 
 ser sag 
 sldr slog 
 
 n, 
 
 bddo 
 dogo 
 fingo 
 gingo 
 kommo 
 hette 
 logo 
 levde 
 Idgo 
 sdgo 
 slogo 
 
 bett 
 dott 
 fdtt 
 gdtt 
 kommit 
 hetat 
 left 
 levat 
 legal 
 sett 
 slagit 
 
 bedd 
 [fdngen * 
 fddd, 1 
 gdngen 
 kommen 
 
 ledd 1 
 levad 1 
 legad 1 
 sedd 2 
 slage*
 
 88 
 
 UNREAL CONDITIONS. 
 
 INFINITIVE 
 
 PRESENT IMPERFECT SUPI 
 
 
 sa. PL. 
 
 sova, to sleep 
 
 sover sov sovo sovit 
 
 std, to stand 
 
 stdr stod stodo stdtt 
 
 tiga, to be silent 
 
 tiger teg tego tegat 
 
 veta, to know 
 
 vet visste visste vetat 
 
 P. PART. 
 
 stddd 
 
 1 Only in compounds. 'The neuter is sett, belt, fanget (111, 2, 3). 
 
 UNREAL CONDITIONS. 
 
 171. (a) In a conditional sentence where both 
 the condition and the conclusion are contrary to 
 fact the verbs of both clauses are put in the subjunc- 
 tive. The imperfect subjunctive is used when the 
 statement refers to the present, the pluperfect when 
 it refers to the past. 
 
 Ex. Om han vore hdr, skulle han ge mig rdtt, 
 if he were here, he would agree with me; om han 
 hade varit sparsam, sa hade han ej varit fattig, 
 if he had been economical he would not have been 
 poor. 
 
 (b) In the conclusion the subjunctive forms with 
 skulle are very often used, this usage corresponding 
 exactly to the English usage of should and would 
 (skulle translates both) . 
 
 Ex. Jag skulle tro honom, om han.sade det, I 
 should believe him, if he said it; jag skulle ha kopt 
 huset, om jag hade haft pengar, I should have 
 bought the house if I had had money. 
 
 NOTE 1. If om is omitted, the conditional clause has the inverted order : 
 hade jag pengar, sa vore jag glad, if I had money, I should be glad. 
 
 2. If the conclusion follows it is frequently introduced by so (translated by 
 then or left untranslated). 
 
 3. The compound conjunction som om, as if, very often introduces an unreal 
 or uncertain condition. If om is omitted, the clause must have the inverted 
 order: Aon. talar, som om han skulle vara rik, or, som skulle han vara rik.
 
 EXERCISE. 81) 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 
 A. Complete the following by adding a clause express- 
 ing condition or conclusion. 
 
 1. Hade jag black och penna, sa . . . 2. Om ban hade 
 tid, sa . . . 3. Om jag inte vore sa trott, sa . . . 4. Om 
 hon icke vore f orkyld, sa . . . 5. Det skulle vara mycket 
 trevligt, om . . . 6. Regnar det i morgon, sa . . . 7. De 
 bade garna gatt med oss, om . . . 8. Jag skulle ha rest till 
 Stockholm, om . . . 
 
 B. 1. Skulle ni gora en resa till Sverige, om ni hade 
 tillfalle? 2. Det skulle jag visst gora! Om min bror ej 
 hade blivit sjuk sa hastigt, hade jag rest for en manad se- 
 dan. 3. Om jag visste, att ban snart skulle bli bra, sa 
 skulle jag losa biljett mi. 4. Senare blir det svart att fa 
 en, ty batarna aro sa upptagna pa sommaren. 5. Vart liar 
 Karl gatt? Han bar gatt for att kopa morgontidningen, 
 som du bad om. 6. Jag bar en nyhet, som sakert skall 
 gladja dig. Jag sag var gamle van Agrell pa gatan i mor- 
 se. 7. Han hade just anlant med londonangaren och sade, 
 att ban skulle balsa pa 1 hos dig i dag, om ban finge tid. 
 8. Han talade, som om ban hade gjort goda affarer i Eng- 
 land och fortjant mycket pengar. 9. Vet du om herr An- 
 derson bar salt sin lilla villa vid Djursholm ? 10. Ja, han 
 salde den i gar och rick mer, an han hade betalt for den. 
 11. Om han ej hade salt den, sa skulle jag ha hyrt den 
 for sommaren. 12. Hade Karl onskat det, sa hade man 
 sakert valt honom till ordforande i foreningen. 13. Vein 
 valde man i stallet? Det 2 vet jag ej, men Karl sade, att 
 han skulle fb'resla herr Lindell. 
 
 ^H'dlsa pa with main stress on pa, signifies to pay a visit, with stress on hatsa 
 it means to greet. 2 Notice word order, det tror jag ej ; det generally comea 
 first in expressions of this kind. 
 
 C. Conversation. 1. Vad skulle ni gora, om ni hade till- 
 falle? 2. Varfor reste ni ej for en manad sedan? 3. Var- 
 
 Swedish Grammar. 7
 
 90 EXERCISE. 
 
 for skulle det vara fordelaktigt (advantageous) att losa 
 biljett nu? 4. Nar aro batarna mest upptagna? 5. Vad 
 vill du, att Karl skall gora for dig? 6. Var har du lagt tid- 
 ningen ? 7. Vad har var van Anderson gjort med sin prak- 
 tiga (fine) villa vid Djursholm? 8. Bor ban ej pa landet 
 om somrarna langre? 9. Yad skulle du ha gjort, om ban 
 ej hade salt den? 10. Varfor valde man ej Karl till ord- 
 forande i klubben? 11. Hade man valt honom, om ban 
 hade b'nskat det? 
 
 D. 1. I should like 1 to take a trip (B, 1) to Sweden 
 next summer. 2. If I had money and time I should cer- 
 tainly go with you. 3. Would it not be fine (trevligt), 
 if you could accompany me? 4. You could not choose a 
 better (bdttre) occasion. 5. I should do it if I could only 
 sell my house. 6. We should also of course visit Germany 
 and England. 7. I think you would enjoy yourself very 
 much in Stockholm. 8. My wife does not dare to go along ; 
 she is afraid of 2 the passage. 9. I never get (bJir) sea-sick; 
 I have grown accustomed 3 to (vid) the sea. 10. Have you 
 heard whether Mr. Anderson will go 4 ? 11. He would have 
 gone a month ago, if he had gotten a ticket. 12. Why did 
 he not get a ticket? The boats were all full, I think (tror 
 jag). 13. The news, which you brought me about Agrell 
 made me very happy. 14. I thought that he had died long 
 ago. 15. We used to be very good friends and I was sure 
 (saker pa) that he would have written me, had he been 
 alive 5 . 16. He has been in England ever (anda) since he 
 left Stockholm, but now it looks as if he intended to stay in 
 Sweden. 17. I am glad to hear that. I wish he would call 
 so that we might have a chat. 
 
 *Skvlle garna or skulle tycka om att. *To be afraid of- att vara radd for. 
 3 To grow accustomed att vanja sig vid; accustomed to, van vid. 'English go 
 must often be translated by resa, fara, Ska. 5 Use the pluperfect subjunctive of 
 leva.
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 91 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 en affar, -er, business 
 
 arilanda, lib, -nde, -nt, -nd, 
 -nt, to arrive 
 
 ett black, , ink 
 
 bruka, I, to use, make use of 
 
 folja, lib, to follow 
 
 folja med', to accompany 
 
 en fore'ning, -ar, society 
 
 fo'resld, -slog, -slogo, -slagit, 
 -en, -et, to propose 
 
 fortja'na, I, to earn, make 
 (money) 
 
 en gata, -or, street 
 
 glcidja (168), to gladden, make 
 happy 
 
 hastig, -t, rapid, quick, sudden 
 
 hastigt (adv.), rapidly, sud- 
 denly 
 
 hyra, lib, rent, hire 
 
 i morse, this morning 
 
 just (adv.), just 
 
 en londondngare, -arna, Lon- 
 don steamer 
 
 med (prep, and adv.), with, 
 along 
 
 en mor'gontid'ning, -ar, a 
 morning paper 
 
 en mdnad, -er, month 
 
 en nyhet, -er, news 
 
 en ord'forande, , chairman 
 
 en penna, -or, pen 
 
 rtidd (no neuter), afraid, 
 timid 
 
 sjosjuk, -t, sea-sick 
 
 i stdllet, in the place of 
 
 svdr, -t, difficult 
 
 sdker, -t, sure, certain 
 
 helt sdkert, certainly 
 
 ett tillfdlle, -n, chance, oppor- 
 tunity; occasion 
 
 trevlig, -t, pleasant, fine 
 
 upptagen, -et, occupied, full 
 
 visst (adv.), surely, certainly 
 
 an, yet, than 
 
 en overresa, -or, voyage, pas- 
 sage 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. Han har nyss kommit, he has just come 
 
 2. att ha mycket roligt, to enjoy oneself very much. 
 
 3. Det gldder mig, I am happy (or pleased) 
 
 4. Man har valt honom till president, he has been 
 elected president 
 
 5. Han ar rddd for spoken, he is afraid of ghosts.
 
 POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 The Possessive Adjectives and Pronouns. 
 172. The possessive adjectives and pronouns are : 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 MASC. FEM. NEUTER 
 
 ram 
 
 din 
 
 (hans) 
 
 (hennes) 
 
 (dess) 
 
 var 
 
 eder (er) 
 
 (deras) 
 
 sin 
 
 . mitt 
 ditt 
 (hans) 
 (hennes) 
 (dess) 
 vdrt 
 
 edert (ert) 
 (deras) 
 sitt 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 ALL GENDERS 
 
 mina, my 
 
 dina, thy, your 
 
 (hans) , his 
 
 (hennes), her 
 
 (dess), its (gen. of den, det) 
 
 vara, our . 
 
 edra (era), your 
 
 (deras), their 
 
 sina, his, her, its, their 
 
 173. The genitive of the corresponding personal 
 pronoun is used as a possessive in the third person 
 masculine, feminine, and neuter. These forms are 
 invariable. The other possessives are declined ac- 
 cording to the Indefinite Declension of adjectives 
 and agree in gender and number with the noun they 
 modify. Ex. : ram son, my son ; mitt barn, my child ; 
 mina backer, my books; hennes son, her son; hans 
 backer, his books. 
 
 174. The reflexive possessive sin is used, for all 
 numbers and genders of the third person but must 
 be used only when the possessor is the subject of 
 the verb ; as, Karl tog sin hatt, Carl took his (own) 
 hat; but, Karl tog hans hatt, would mean that he 
 took somebody else's hat. Gossarna visade sina lek- 
 saker, the boys showed their (own) toys; gossarna 
 visade deras leksaker, the boys showed the toys of 
 some other children.
 
 POSITIONS OF ADVKKBS. 93 
 
 175. The possessives are used also as pronouns; 
 as, hdr dr ram bok, din ligger ddr, here is my book, 
 yours lies there; mina ogon tiro bid, era tiro bruna, 
 my eyes are blue, yours are brown. 
 
 FURTHER REMARKS ON THE POSSESSIVE. 
 
 176. The possessives are often combined with 
 the adjective egen, eget, pi. egna, own; as, mina 
 egna ord, my own words. 
 
 177. They are never preceded by the article 
 except in such expressions as : de dina, your family, 
 people; de mina, my family, people; de vdra, our 
 family or our party. 
 
 178. SUBSTITUTE FOR THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 The definite form is often used instead of the pos- 
 sessive adjective, provided there is no ambiguity, 
 particularly when the thing possessed is a part of 
 the body or an article of clothing; as, han har fb'r- 
 lorat hatten, he has lost his hat ; jag har ont i hjar- 
 tat, 1 have a pain in my heart. 
 
 NOTE. The possessor especially in reflexive constructions is often represented 
 by an object pronoun : han brot av sig benet, he broke his leg 1 ; tag av dig 
 hatten, take off your hat ; han foil och slog sig i huvudet, he fell and struck 
 his head. 
 
 POSITION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 179. The position of the adverb in a sentence 
 depends largely on its relation to the verb and 
 also on emphasis. Only a few special rules need be 
 given. 
 
 (a) There are in Swedish a number of adverbs 
 which are called movable adverbs. In an independ- 
 ent clause these follow the simple verb and stand 
 between the auxiliary and infinitive or participle
 
 94 EXERCISI:. 
 
 in compound tenses. In a dependent clause these 
 adverbs precede the simple verb and the auxiliary 
 of a compound verb. Such movable adverbs are 
 especially the adverbs of negation: ej, Icke, inte, 
 not; aldrig, never; certain indefinite temporal ad- 
 verbs, as, alltid, always; jdmt, continually; snart, 
 soon; ndgonsin, ever; a number of other non- 
 descriptive adverbs like vdl, I suppose; nog, possi- 
 bly, to be sure ; tyvtirr, unfortunately. Ex. : han dr 
 icke sjuk, he is not sick ; han sager, att han icke dr 
 sjuk, he says he is not sick ; hans bror reste snart till 
 Amerika, his brother soon went to America; hans 
 bror, som snart reste till Amerika, his brother, who 
 soon went to America ; han kan nog ha rdtt, he may 
 possibly be right; jag medger, att han nog kan ha 
 rdtt, I admit, that he may possibly be right. 
 
 (b) Descriptive adverbs as a rule follow the in- 
 finitive or the participle when the verb is a com- 
 pound. No adverbs except those mentioned above 
 can stand between the verb and the subject: he 
 often used to come is in Swedish, han brukade ofta 
 komma. 
 
 EXERCISE XV. 
 
 A. Turn ihe following sentences into dependent clauses 
 by prefixing the parenthesized words, noting the change of 
 position of the adverbs. 
 
 1. (Han sager, att . . .) Han har aldrig satt vete pa sin 
 aker. 2. (Jag tror, att . . . ) De amna inte annu plantera 
 sin potatis. 3. (Lantbrukaren sade, att . . . ) Man maste 
 forst uppluckra jorden med en harv. innan man kan sa. 
 4. (Jag ar saker pa att . . . ) Vetet kan aldrig vaxa utan 
 regn och solsken. 5. (Sager ni, att . . . ?) Ni skola sakert
 
 EXERCISE, 95 
 
 plantera er potatis och er majs nasta vecka. 6. (Vet ni 
 om . . . ?) De skola snart sa sin havre. 7. (Jag fruktar, 
 att . . . ) Det daliga vadret kommer mojligen att forhindra 
 arbetet pa falten. 
 
 B. Supply the possessive adjectives and pronouns indi- 
 cated in the following. 1. Har ar . . . (our) hus, dar ar 
 ... (his). 2. Herr Wallin ar en av ... (my) vanner. 
 3. Fonstren till . . . (her) rum aro stora. 4. Huru manga 
 rum har . . . (your) hus? 5. Karl har givit mig . . . (his) 1 
 pengar. 6. Ha barnen fatt . . . (their) 1 laxor an? 7. Pas- 
 sa . . . (your) skor? 8. ... (his) rock passar honom. 
 9. Jag har funnit . . . (my) bocker. 10. Var aro . . . 
 (yours, polite). 11. ... (their) faders tradgard ar stor, 
 men . . . (his) hus ar mycket litet. 12. Han tycker om 
 . . . (our) matsal, men ej om . . . (his own) 1 . 13. De ha 
 lagt 2 . . . (my) bocker pa ... (their) 1 bord (sing). 
 
 1 174. 2 Supine of lagga, to lay (169). 
 
 C. 1. I morgon om vadret ar vackert, skola vi foretaga 
 var utflykt. 2. Mamma skall packa vara korgar i kvall, 
 pa det att (3d att and subj. or indie.) de ma vara fardiga 
 tidigt i morgon. 3. Hennes syster, som ar pa besb'k 1 i vart 
 hem med sin lilla 2 dotter, skall folja med oss. 4. Vi tycka 
 mycket om deras sallskap och onska, att de matte stanna 
 lange hos oss. 5. Vi skola stiga upp mycket tidigt och fara 
 med den elektriska sparvagnen till jarnvagsstationen. 
 
 6. Na'r vi komma dit, gar en av oss till biljettkontoret och 
 koper vara jarnvagsbiljetter, och sedan stiga vi pa taget. 
 
 7. Efter en halv timmes resa stiga vi av och ga till en 
 vacker plats i skogen. Var och en bar sitt paket eller sin 
 korg. 8. Dar packa vi upp vara korgar och duka pa graset, 
 medan en av edra systrar kokar kaffet. 9. Nar vi atit och 
 druckit, springa vi omkring och leka. 10. Flickorna ploc-
 
 96 EXERCISE. 
 
 ka blommor och pry da med dem sina 3 hattar. 11. Pa kval- 
 len taga vi taget tillbaka till staden. 12. Matte det bara 
 ej regna i morgon! 13. Min bror Erik klader (klar) sig. 
 14. Han tvattar sig om handerna 4 och i ansiktet, borstar 
 tanderna samt kammar haret. 15. Sedan tar ban pa sig 
 rocken, satter pa sig batten och ar fardig att ga ut. 
 
 *Is visiting. 2 Plural and definite form of liten. 'Express the possessive idea 
 in a different way (178). 4 Also, tvattar handerna och ansiktet. 
 
 D. Conversation. 1. Nar gora ni er utflykt ? 2. Varfor 
 packade er mor edra korgar pa kvallen? 3. Vem var pa 
 besb'k hos er? 4. Behagar deras sallskap er? 5. Hur 
 komma ni till stationen? 6. Ar det en hastsparvagn eller 
 en elektrisk sparvagn? 7. Varfor gar ni till biljettkonto- 
 ret? 8. Hur lange racker resan? 9. Tad gora ni med 
 korgarna? 10. Vad gora ni efter maten? 11. Varmed 
 pryda flickorna sina hattar? 
 
 E. I.I wish that all our picnics might be as (sd) agree- 
 able as (som) ours was yesterday. 2. The weather was not 
 very pleasant when we woke up, but the sun soon 1 began 
 to shine. 3. Mother had packed our baskets 'in (pa) the 
 evening in order that they might be ready early in the 
 morning 2 . 4. Her sister who is on a visit with (hos) us 
 likes to go on (med pa) excursions. 5. We took the street 
 car to the station since we had much to carry. 6. When we 
 had bought our tickets we boarded (invert) the train and 
 rode (for) half an hour (en lialv timma). 7. We un- 
 packed our baskets in the woods and set the table in the 
 grass. 8. Who made the coffee? My sister Mary. She 
 makes (kokar) very good coffee. 9. When we had eaten we 
 had a great deal of fun (mycket roligt), we played games 
 and sang. 10. In the evening we returned to the city by 
 train. 11. I wish that you had been with us.
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 F. 1. Wash 3 your hands and brush your teeth, Eric. 
 
 2. Put on your coat and ^at. Carl, and let us go out. 
 
 3. Where do you have your hat? 4. Does he have his own 
 (176) hat or mine? 5. Take off your (178, note) hat 
 when you come into the room. 6. Eric struck Carl in the 
 head. 7. Carl struck his head while ( medan) he was 
 skating. 
 
 J In English adverbs may often precede the simple form of a verb, in Swedish 
 never, except as stated in 179, a. z lidigt pa morgonen; sent pa kvdllen, late 
 in the evening. 3 Tviitta dig om handerna (B, 14). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ett ansikte, -n, face 
 
 ett besok, , visit 
 
 en biljett', -er, ticket 
 
 ett biljett'kontor', , ticket 
 
 office 
 
 borsta, I, to brush 
 driclca, dracJc, drucJco, druc- 
 
 kit, -en, -et, to drink 
 dnka, I, to set the table 
 elektrisk, -t, electric 
 fara tillbaka, to return 
 finna, fann, funno, funnit, -en, 
 
 -et, to find 
 fardig, -t, ready 
 folja, lib, to follow 
 folia med', to accompany 
 (ett) gras, , grass 
 en hand, hander, hand 
 en hatt, -ar, hat 
 ett hdr, , hair 
 (ett) kaffe (generally no pi.) 
 
 coffee 
 
 kamma, I, to comb 
 koka, I, to cook (to make), 
 
 to boil 
 
 en korg, -ar, basket 
 leka, I la, to play 
 
 en mamma, -or, mother 
 mamma (in address), mama 
 omkring (adv. and prep.) about, 
 
 around 
 
 packa, I, to pack 
 packa upp', to unpack 
 en plats, -er, place 
 passa, I, to fit, to suit 
 pryda, lib, to adorn 
 en rock, -ar, coat 
 ett rum, , room 
 sedan, thereupon, then 
 sjunga, sjo'ng, sjo'ngo, sjungit, 
 
 -en, -et, to sing 
 sld, slog, slogo, slagit, -en, -et, 
 
 to strike 
 snart, soon 
 
 en skog, -ar, forest, woods 
 springa, sprang, sprungo, 
 
 sprungit, -en, -et, to run 
 ett sallskap, , company 
 satta, satte, satte, satt, satt, to 
 
 put 
 
 en tand, tander, tooth 
 tidig, -t, early 
 tvatta, I, to wash 
 en utflykt, -er, excursion
 
 98 PASSIVE. 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. Vi hade mycket roligt, we enjoyed ourselves very 
 much. 
 
 2. att tvatta sig om hdnderna, i ansiktet to wash 
 one's hands, face. 
 
 3. att stiga pa (av) tdget, to get on (off) the train. 
 5. att koka kaffe, to mafce coffee. 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 The Verb (Continued). 
 
 THE PASSIVE. 
 
 180. The passive is formed from the active 
 either by adding s to the corresponding form of the 
 active, or by combining the corresponding tense of 
 the auxiliary bliva (sometimes vara and varda) 
 with the perfect participle of the verb. 
 
 THE PASSIVE IN -S. 
 
 181. This passive is less common in conversation 
 than that formed by means of the auxiliary verb 
 bliva, for which see 188. This -s is a remnant of 
 the reflexive pronoun sig (old form sik) extended 
 by analogy to the first and second persons. 
 
 NOTE 1. The r in the present indicative singular endings -or, -er, -r is al- 
 ways eliminated and quite often the e in the ending 1 -er ; as, active jag kailar, 
 passive jag kallas, I am called ; active jag griper, passive jag gripes, I am 
 seized ; del finnes or del finns, there is found or there is. 
 
 2. The pres. ind. pi. (with the exception of the arnhaic second person in 
 -en*) of the Second and Fourth Conjugations ends in -as (.s is added" to the 
 corresponding active form) and not in -es, an error to which beginners are 
 liable: mdnniskor finnas, there are. (are found) men. 
 
 3. In the compound forms s is added to the supine or infinitive: han har 
 dodats, he has been killed ; rdgen skall sas (from *d) t morgon, the rye will be 
 sown to-morrow. 
 
 182. Examples of the passive of the verbs att 
 kalla, to call ; att gripa, to seize ; att binda, to bind.
 
 PASSIVE. 99 
 
 (I) kallas, to be called. 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 Sg. jag kallas, etc. jag kalles or ma kallas, etc. 
 
 PL vi kallas, etc. vi kalles or ma kallas, etc. 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 Sg. jag kallades, etc. jag kallades or matte, 
 
 skulle kallas, etc. 
 
 PI. vi kallades, etc. vi kallades or matte, skulle 
 
 kallas, etc. 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 Sg. jag skall kallas 
 PL vi skola kallas 
 
 Sg. jag har kallats, etc. jag ma ha kallats, etc. 
 PI. vi ha kallats, etc. vi ma ha kallats, etc. 
 
 PLUPERFECT 
 
 Sg. jag hade kallats, etc. jag hade kallats or matte 
 
 ha kallats, etc. 
 
 PI. vi hade kallats, etc. vi hade kallats, or matte 
 
 ha kallats, etc. 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT 
 
 Sg. jag skall ha kallats, etc. 
 PI. vi skola ha kallats, etc. 
 
 INFINITIVES 
 
 Present, att kallas 
 Perfect, att ha kallats 
 Future, att skola kallas 
 
 (2) gripas, to be seized bindas, to be bound 
 
 PRINCIPAL PARTS 
 
 g*-ipa, grep, grepo, gripit, binda, band, bundo, 
 gripen bun-dit, bunden
 
 100 PASSIVE. 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 Sg. jag gripes, bindes jag gripes, bindes 
 
 PI. vi gripas, bindas vi gripes, bindes 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 Sg. jag greps, bands jag grepes, bundes 
 
 PI. vi grepos, bundos vi grepes, bundes 
 
 The compound forms are conjugated like kalla; 
 thus, jag ma bindas, matte bindas; vi matte ha 
 bundits; vi skola bindas; de ha gripits, etc. 
 
 NOTE. In verbs with present in -er e is very often eliminated in conversa- 
 tion ; thus jag grips, I am seized ; jag hijrs, I am heard. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE PASSIVE. 
 
 183. The agent of a passive action is expressed 
 by the preposition av. The agent may be either 
 personal or impersonal. Instrument is usually 
 expressed by med (medelst) : han dodades av sin 
 fiende med ett svdrd, he was killed by his enemy 
 with a sword. 
 
 184. SUBSTITUTE FOR THE PASSIVE. When some 
 personal agent is implied but not expressed, Swe- 
 dish prefers the indefinite pronoun man, one, they, 
 with the active voice; as, man kallar mig, instead 
 of jag kallas, I am being called; man sager or det 
 sages, it is said. 
 
 NOTE. Sometimes a reflexive construction is employed ; thus, blyet bojer sig 
 Idtt (blyet bojes latt), lead is easily bent (can easily be bent). This con- 
 struction generally conveys an idea of possibility. 
 
 185. THE APPARENT OR FALSE PASSIVE. 
 
 Since English uses the verb to be and the past 
 participle to represent the subject both as under- 
 going the action of the verb, as in the door is shut
 
 PASSIVE. 101 
 
 (is being shut), which is a real passive, and also as 
 being in the state or condition resulting from the 
 action, as in the door is shut (has been shut before), 
 which may be called a false passive, great care must 
 be taken to distinguish between the true passive and 
 the apparent or false passive. The latter is expressed 
 in Swedish by vara, to be, and the past participle 
 of the verb, which as any other adjective agrees 
 with the subject in number and gender; as, dorr en 
 ar stdngd, the door is (in the state of being) shut; 
 do'rren stdnges, or man stdnger do'rren, the door 
 is being closed. 
 
 186. IDIOMATIC MEANINGS OF THE PASSIVE. 
 
 (a) The passive in -s has very often a reciprocal 
 meaning. Ex. : de motas ofta, they meet one another 
 often (literally, they are met often) ; barnen klap- 
 pas och kyssas, the children caress and kiss one 
 another (literally, are caressed, etc.). 
 
 (b) Sometimes it is used absolutely, denoting 
 habit, characteristics, etc. Ex.: Hasten bits (pro- 
 nounced with short i) , the horse bites (has the habit 
 of biting) ; pappa, Karl knuffas, papa, Carl is push- 
 ing me. 
 
 XOTE 1. It is best to avoid using the -s form of a verb which is often used 
 in the reciprocal or even absolute sense when it is not accompanied by an 
 agent or other modifier which obviates the ambiguity ; de knvffades can hardly 
 mean anything else than they pushed one another, (reciprocal) or, they pushed 
 (absolute); on the contrary, de knuffades. . .av honom, or, ...at sidan, they 
 were pushed... by him, or... to the side, have passive force. In the first case 
 \ve would invariably say, de blevo knuffade. (The teacher should give other 
 examples.) 
 
 2. When used in the absolute sense verbs of the Second and Fourth Conjuga- 
 tions take -s, not -es (181, 1) ; there is also a shortening of the vowel: katten 
 rivs (pronounced with short t), the cat scratches ; rives would mean t* being 
 torn. The passive in its true as well as its reciprocal use generally takes -es 
 nd there is no shortening of the vowel.
 
 ] 02 EXERCISE. 
 
 187. IMPERSONAL PASSIVE. 
 
 The passive voice, especially the form in -s, is 
 often used impersonally. Even intransitive verbs 
 that lack personal passive forms may thus be used: 
 det tolas for mycket har, there is too much talking 
 here; det har inte spelats i dag, there has been no 
 playing to-day; har dies och soves jamt, here they 
 eat and sleep all the time. 
 
 NOTE 1. Man with the active would be less stiff in such cases. 
 2. Note such impersonal passive expressions as, det har berdttats mig, I have 
 been told. 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 A. Continue through all persons of the singular and 
 plural. 
 
 I. Man tackar mig, man tackar dig, etc. (I am being 
 ihanked, etc., pres., impf., and perf.) 2. Man kallar mig, 
 etc. (I am being called, etc., pres., future, and pluperf.). 
 
 Turn the following sentences into the passive form. 
 
 3. Har ban salt huset 1 ? 4. Den store forfattaren von 
 Heidenstam boll ett tal den forsta maj. 5. Jag har betalt 
 rakningen. 6. Yem skall mota honom vid stationen? 
 7. En hund bet mig i benet. 8. En poliskonstapel skot 
 hunden med en revolver. 9. Man arresterade agaren till 
 hunden (also hundens agare). 10. Ratten (the court] 
 botfallde (fined) honom. 
 
 Turn into the active with man as subject : 
 
 II. Skall huset 2 saljas? 12. Har ban valts till ordfo- 
 rande? 13. Dansades det bar i gar? 
 
 lP The subject in the active becomes the agent in the passive (183). *The 
 subject becomes object ; for construction with man, see 184. 
 
 B. 1. Detta ar ett vetebrods historia. 2. Pa bosten 
 plojer bonden en del av sin aker och sar vetet ; detta kallas
 
 EXERCISE. 103 
 
 vintervete. 3. Medan vadret annu ar varmt, gror vetet. 
 4. Da vintern kommer med kold och sno, slutar vetet att 
 vaxa. 5. Om den unga brodden ej tacktes med sno, sa 
 skulle den frysa bort, men snb'n skyddar den mot kolden. 
 6. Pa varen, nar snon har smalts av solstralarna, borjar 
 vetet att vaxa, och pa sommaren mognar det. 7. Da av- 
 meja bb'nderna det och kora det till logen, dar det troskas. 
 8. Nar vetet har trb'skats, kb'res det till kvarnen, och dar 
 males det till mjb'l, som sedan av bagaren forvandlas till 
 brod. 
 
 C. 1. Vill du ha en skiva av detta vetebrbd till ditt 
 kaffe, Erik? 2. Nej, giv mig hellre en skiva av ragbrb'det, 
 sa ar pappa snail. 3. Det har legat pa bordet sedan i gar 
 och ar torrt. 4. Brodet ar ej sa gott, som det brukar vara, 
 denna gang har Anna ej lyckats riktigt. 
 
 D. Conversation. 1. Vad gor bonden pa hb'sten? 2. Plo- 
 jer han hela sin aker? 3. Varfor gror vetet pa hosten? 
 
 4. Nar mognar vetet? 5. Vad tjanst (service) gor snon 
 det unga vetet? 6. Vid vilken arstid borjar brodden ater 
 att vaxa ? 7. Av vem har vetet avmejats ? 8. Vart forslar 
 man vetet? 9. Yad gor man med det dar? 10. Till vem 
 skall vetet saljas? 11. A r ad gor han med det? 12. Av 
 vilket brod vill ni ha en skiva ? 
 
 E. 1. The field has been plowed by the farmer. 2. I do 
 not believe that the wheat has been sowed yet. 3. What is 
 the wheat called that is sowed in the fall? 4. It is called 
 winter wheat and it is regarded as (som) the best (Msta). 
 
 5. This wheat sprouts in the fall before (innan) the winter 
 comes. 6. It is protected by the snow, which covers it; 
 otherwise it would 1 be damaged by the frost. 7. It begins 
 to grow again 2 in the spring and ripens in the summer. 
 8. The farmer savs that the wheat will be cut to-morrow
 
 104 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 and he hopes that the weather will be (use pres.) fine. 
 9. The wheat which was threshed yesterday has been hauled 
 to the flour mill to-day. 10. It has been bought by the 
 miller, who will grind it to flour, which he will sell to the 
 baker. 
 
 F. 1. Is there any (nagot) bread in the house? I am 
 so hungry. 2. Yes, there is (har ar) a loaf of white bread 
 here, but it is dry. 3. This (delta) bread is excellent. 
 Sister Anne has had good luck with (lyckats med) her 
 bread this (dennd) time. 
 
 'Use skullc and invert. "Ater directly after main verb. 
 NOTE. When the next lesson has been mastered, go back and substitute the 
 passive with bliva wherever it is possible. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 anse, ansdg, -sago -sett, -sedd, en loge 1 , -ar, threshing floor, 
 
 granary 
 
 mala, lib, to grind 
 (ett) mjol (no pi.), flour 
 en mjolnare, , miller 
 mogna, I, to ripen 
 mot, against 
 
 -it, to regard 
 annars, otherwise 
 arreste'ra. I, to arrest 
 av'meja, I, to cut 
 baka, I, to bake 
 ett ben, , bone, leg 
 bita, bet, beto, bitit, -en, -et, 
 
 to bite 
 
 en brodd, sprout 
 frysa bort', fros bort, froso , en revolver, -rar, revolver 
 
 frusit , bortfrusen, -et, en skiva, -or, slice 
 
 plo'ja, lib, to plow 
 en polis'konstapel, -lar, police- 
 man 
 
 to be killed by frost 
 forste, -a, first 
 forvandla, I, to transform 
 gro, III, to sprout 
 hellre, rather 
 en hund, -ar, dog 
 en host, -ar, fall 
 en kvarn, -ar, flour mill 
 (en) kold (no pi.) cold, frost 
 ko'ra, lib, to drive, to haul 
 
 skjuta, skot, skoto, skjutit, 
 
 skjuten, -et, to shoot 
 skydda, I, to protect 
 sluta, I, to stop, close (also 
 
 slot, sloto, slutit) 
 (en) sno, snow 
 smalta. Ha, or IV, to melt 
 en solstrdle, -ar, sunbeam 
 sa, III, to sow, to plant 
 torr, -t, dry
 
 PASSIVE. 105 
 
 troska, I, to thresh en vAr, -ar, spring 
 
 (ett) vete, wheat dter, again 
 
 en vinter, -rar, winter en agare, , owner 
 
 1 g is hard in loge (g, k and sk are always hard before a soft vowel in an 
 unaccented ending 1 .) 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 The Verb (Continued) 
 PASSIVE WITH AUXILIARIES. 
 
 188. The passive voice can also be formed by 
 combining the corresponding tense of the auxiliary 
 verb bliva (bli), to become (also, lo remain), with 
 the past participle (not the supine) of the verb, 
 which agrees in number and gender with the sub- 
 ject. Occasionally the verbs varda, to become, and 
 vara, to be, are used as auxiliaries. 
 
 189. Passive of the verbs tro, to believe; binda, 
 to bind : 
 
 INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 Sg. jag blir trodd, bunden jag blive trodd, bunden 
 vi bli(va) trodda, vi blive trodda, bundna 
 bundna 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 Sg. jag blev trodd, bun- jag bleve trodd, bunden 
 
 den 
 PI. vi blevo trodda, vi bleve trodda, bundna 
 
 bundna 
 
 Sg. jag skall bli(va) trodd, bunden 
 PI. vi skola bli(va) trodda, bundna 
 
 Sicedish Grammar
 
 106 PASSIVE. 
 
 PERFECT 
 
 Sg. jag har blivit trodd, jag ma ha blivit trodd, 
 
 bunden bunden 
 
 PI. vi ha blivit trodda, vi ma ha blivit trodda, 
 
 bundna bundna 
 
 PLUPERFECT 
 
 Sg. jag hade blivit trodd, jag hade blivit trodd, 
 
 bunden bunden 
 
 PI. vi hade blivit trodda, vi hade blivit trodda, 
 
 bundna bundna 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT 
 
 Sg. jag skall ha blivit trodd, bunden 
 PI. vi skola ha blivit trodda, bundna 
 
 PRESENT INFINITIVE 
 
 att bli(va) trodd, bunden 
 
 PERFECT INFINITIVE 
 
 att ha blivit trodd, bunden 
 
 _NOTE. The other subjunctives are formed as shown above ; thus, jag ma 
 bli(va) trodd, vi skulle ha blivit bundna, etc. 
 
 190. OTHER AUXILIARIES OF THE PASSIVE. 
 
 (1) Varda (vart, vordo, vorden), which is con- 
 jugated with the verb vara instead of hava in the 
 perfect tenses. Ex. : Jag varder kallad, I am called ; 
 han vart kallad, he was called ; vi tiro vordna kallade, 
 we have been called; du skall varda kallad, thou 
 wilt be called. The beginner may disregard this for- 
 mation of the passive entirely since it is obsolete; 
 the imperfect tense, however, is of comparatively 
 frequent occurrence. 
 
 (2) Vara is generally used only in the apparent 
 or false passive (185), that is, to express a condition 
 or state; as, huset ar brunnet, the house is burnt.
 
 PASSIVE. 107 
 
 Sometimes, however, it comes very near expressing 
 a true passive: han dr omtyckt av alia, he is liked 
 by all ; jag dr plagad av mygg, I am troubled by mos- 
 quitoes. 
 
 191. Too much stress cannot be laid upon the 
 fact that in the overwhelming majority of cases 
 passive action is not expressed in Swedish by vara, 
 to be, and the past participle as in English, but by 
 bliva and the past participle, or by the passive in -s 
 (note also construction with man, 184) ; thus, the 
 house was built in a month, is not huset var byggt 
 pa en mdnad, but huset byggdes, or huset blev byggt 
 (also, man byggde huset). 
 
 NOTE. But since vara plus the past participle indicates a state or condition 
 regarded as complete and permanent, and as resulting from the action of the 
 verb (185) its present plus the past participle is often used as an equivalent 
 for the English perfect passive and its imperfect plus the past participle as an 
 equivalent for the English pluperfect passive. As: brevet dr skrivet, the letter 
 has been written ; poslen var redan utburen, the mail had already been dis- 
 tributed. 
 
 FURTHER REMARKS ON THE PASSIVE. 
 
 192. The passive in -s is preferred to the passive 
 with bliva in expressions denoting a common rule, 
 a general fact, an injunction or direction; as, sadana 
 brott straffas med fdngelse, such crimes are pun- 
 ished with imprisonment ; flaskan forvaras pa is, the 
 bottle should be kept on ice; de hdr skorna skola 
 lagas, these shoes. are to be repaired; jag kallas 
 Johan, I am called John ; but jag blir kallad feg, om 
 jag ej gor det, I shall be called a coward if I do not 
 do this ; on the contrary, han kallas feg av var man, 
 he is called a coward by everybody. 
 
 NOTE. The passive with bliva is more common in conversation than the 
 -* form. These two passives are often interchangeable ; sometimes, however,
 
 108 EXERCISE. 
 
 they express different shades of meaning. For instance, when no agent is men- 
 tioned, the passive with bliva seems to imply a definite agent, ,while the -s form 
 very often imparts a sense of indefiniteness : floden fylldes seems to point to a 
 slow natural process, whereas floden blev fylld would imply action on the part 
 of some definite agent. If the agent is expressed, both forms may be used 
 without any difference in meaning. 
 
 193. The present of bliva has generally a future 
 sense; this is also the case in the passive: frukten 
 blir skadad av frosten, the fruit will be damaged 
 by the frost. To express the present, use either 
 the present of the passive in -s, or man with the 
 active, or make the agent the subject. 
 
 Deponent Verbs. 
 
 194. Many verbs have only the passive -s form. 
 These deponent verbs are active in meaning; many 
 are even transitive. They are conjugated like the 
 passive of other verbs except that some have imper- 
 ative forms, which are wanting in the passive. 
 Some have a present participle in -s, others one 
 without. Most deponent verbs lack this form. 
 
 Ex.: latas (from lat, lazy), to be lazy; vredgas 
 (from vred, angry), to be (grow) angry; vdras 
 (from var, spring) , to turn spring ; brottas, to wres- 
 tle; andas, to breathe; lyckas, to succeed; minnas, 
 to remember. 
 
 EXERCISE XVIJ. 
 
 A. Conjugate the following both as indicated and with 
 the -s form of the passive. 
 
 1. Jag har blivit beromd av min larare; du har blivit 
 beromd av din larare, etc. 2. Jag skall icke bli klandrad 
 av min fader, etc. 3. Jag kom ej ; ty jag hade ej blivit
 
 EXERCISE. 10H 
 
 kallad; du kom ej, ty du, etc. 4. Jag skulle ha blivit 
 klandrad, om jag ej hade hjiilpt honom; du skulle ha blivit 
 klandrad, om du ej hade hjalpt honom, etc. 5. Om jag 
 hade blivit agad mera, nar jag var liten, sa hade jag blivit 
 en battre manniska; om du, etc. Use also the active 
 with man, leaving out "av min Idrare" and "av min fader." 
 
 B. 1. Ar 1 hela huset forstb'rt? Ja, allt ar 1 uppbrant. 
 Utom nagra gamla mobler liar intet blivit 2 ra'ddat. 2. Vet 
 man hur elden uppstod? Icke sakert, men man tror, att 
 den har blivit 2 anlagd. 3. Kan herrn saga mig, om museet 
 ar 1 stangt hela sondagen? Nej, det ar det inte, men det 
 cippnas 3 ej forran pa eftermiddagen. 4. Vill du taga de 
 har 4 skorna till skomakaren, Karl, det har paret skall halv- 
 sulas 3 , och pa det har skola klackarna lagas 3 . 5. Du ser sa 
 trott ut. Har du ej sovit gott? Nej, jag har plagats av 
 en sa svar tandvark hela natten. 6. Jag brukade ocksa 
 plagas av tandvark, men nu ha alia mina ihaliga tander 
 blifvit plomberade 5 . 7. Herr Lind dodades vid jarnvags- 
 olyckan, som skedde i gar. 8. Jag skulle ha tagit samina 
 tag, men man radde mig att ej resa. 9. Har aro vi hos ur- 
 makaren, han har blivit rekommenderad 2 till mig av en 
 van, och jag hoppas, att han lyckas laga min klocka. 10. 
 Vad ar fatt med den? Den har stannat. Jag tror att 
 fjadern ar 1 avbruten, dessutom behover verket nog att ren- 
 goras. 11. Nu har den blivit rengjord, uppdragen och 
 justerad; den saktar sig 6 ej mer. 12. I dag blev jag vackt 
 av min van Berggren, innan det dagades. 13. Vi rodde ut 
 pa sjon, fiskarna nappade bra, och innan klockan sju voro 
 tjugu stora abborrar upptagna 1 . 
 
 *See 190, 2, and 185. 2 -s form can be used. 192. 4 De hiir, these; de dar, 
 those. 5 192, note. 'En klocka fortar sig or saktar sig, gains or loses time. 
 
 C. I have heard that Mr. Anderson's house has been 
 destroyed by fire. Has nothing been saved ? 2. I do not
 
 110 VOCABULARY. 
 
 believe that they succeeded in saving anything except some 
 old pieces of furniture. 3. I have seen in the paper that 
 Mr. Lind was killed in the railroad accident which 
 happened yesterday. 4. I knew him well, but I was never 
 introduced to him. 5. Just think (tank bara), I should 
 have taken the same train if I had not been advised 
 by a friend not to go. 6. Now I shall not be troubled 2 by 
 toothache any longer, for my hollow tooth has been filled 3 . 
 7. Where does the shoemaker live? I have a pair of shoes 
 that need to be repaired 2 . 8. These shoes are to be half- 
 soled 2 . 9. My watch, which had stopped, has been repaired 3 
 by the watchmaker. 10. It has been cleaned and regulated 3 
 and I hope that it will keep good time 4 now. Mr. Hall din 
 is an excellent watchmaker; he was recommended 3 to me 
 by a friend. He is a man who deserves to be recom- 
 mended 2 . 
 
 ipresenterad for. 2 Passive in -. 'Passive with bliva. 4 Keep good time, 
 gu raft. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 en ab'borre, -ar, perch fortjd'na, I (sometimes Ha), 
 
 arilagga, -lade, -lagt, -lagd, -t, to deserve, earn 
 
 to establish; anldgga eld, haWsula, I, to half-sole 
 to cause arson hoppas (dep. v.), I, impf. hop- 
 
 av'bruten (p. part, of av'bryta pades, to hope 
 and bryta av', to break i'Jidlig, -t, hollow 
 off), broken intet, nothing 
 
 doda, I, to kill juste'ra (j=sh), I, to adjust, 
 
 en eld, -ar, fire, conflagration regulate 
 
 fatt, in expressions like taga en jdrn'vdgsolycka, -or, rail- 
 fatt p&, to lay hold of; way accident 
 
 vad ar det fatt? What is en Jclack, -ar, heel 
 the matter? en klocka, -or, clock, watch; . 
 
 en fjdder, -drar, feather, main- bell 
 
 spring laga, I, to mend 
 
 fo'rrdn (adv.), before en mobel, -ler, piece of fur- 
 
 forsto'ra, lib, to destroy niture
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. Ill 
 
 nappa, I, to bite (of fish) en land, tunder, tooth 
 
 plombe'ra, I, to fill (teeth) (en) tandvdrk, toothache 
 
 pldga, I, to pain, torment, upp'brant (p. part, of upp'brdn- 
 
 trouble na and branna upp', to burn 
 
 presente'ra, I, to introduce up), burnt up 
 
 ren'gora, rengjorde, etc., to upp'dragen (p. part, of upp'dra- 
 
 clean go, and draga upp', to pull 
 
 rdda, lib, to advise up, wind up), wound up, 
 
 radda, I, to save pulled up 
 
 sakta, I, to reduce speed, slow upp'std, -stod, -stodo, -stdtt, to 
 
 up originate; arise 
 
 en sko'makare, , shoemaker en ur'makare, , watchmaker 
 
 stanga, lib, to close, shut utom, beside 
 
 stiker, -t, sure(ly), certain (ly) ett verk, , work; movement 
 
 en sondag, -ar, Sunday vid, in 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 195. The demonstrative pronouns are: den, det, 
 this, that; denne(a), detta, this; densamme(a), det- 
 samma, the same. They are declined as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 MASC. & FEM. GENDER FORM NEUTER ALL GENDERS 
 
 Nom. den den det de 
 Gen. dens dess dess deras 
 Obj. den den det dem 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 MASC. FEM. & GENDER F. NEUTER ALL GENDERS 
 
 N. denne(a) denna detta dessa 
 
 G. dennes dennas deltas dessas 
 
 N. densamme(a) densamma detsamma desamma 
 
 G. densammes densammas detsammas desammas 
 
 NOTE. Dens refers only to persons, dess only to things, except occasionally in 
 poetry. Det is pronounced da or de in conversation.
 
 112 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 196. These are used also as adjectives, but have 
 then no genitive. There is besides a demonstrative 
 adjective samme, same, which is used more fre- 
 quently than densamme and inflects as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 MASC. FEM. & GEND. F. NEUTER ALL GENDERS 
 
 samme (a) samma samma samma 
 
 197. The following adjectives partake of the 
 nature of demonstratives and may also be used as 
 pronouns in the plural and in' the neuter singular : 
 sddan, sddant, sadana, such; likadan, -t, -a,, like, 
 alike; dylik, -t, -a, such, similar. Ex.: en sadan 
 gosse, such a boy; dylikt har jag aldrig sett forr, 
 I have never seen such a thing (or things) before. 
 
 198. Den har, this, and den ddr, that, used orig- 
 inally only in conversation, are rapidly finding their 
 way into the written language. They are declined 
 as follows: 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 MASC. FEM. GENDER FORM NEUTER ALL GENDERS 
 
 Nom. and Obj.: 
 
 den har, ddr det har, ddr de har, ddr 
 (Genitive lacking.) 
 
 Ex. Den har hasten dr vacker, den vill jag ko'pa, 
 this horse is fine, I wish to buy it; det ddr huset 
 tillhor visst herr Carlen, I think that house belongs 
 to Mr. Carlen; de ddr rosorna tiro hdrliga, those 
 roses are beautiful. (After den har and den ddr, 
 the noun takes the definite form.) 
 
 199. The former and the latter are expressed by 
 den forre(a) (neut. det forr a, pi. de forr a) and den
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 113 
 
 senare (neut. det senare, pi. de senare) : Anna och 
 Emma tiro systrar; den forra ar ljus, den senare 
 mork, Anna and Emma are sisters; the former is a 
 blonde, the latter a brunette. 
 
 NOTE. When used substantively, these expressions take an -s in the genitive: 
 den forras (Annas) lynne ar glattigare an den senares, the disposition of the 
 former is merrier than that of the latter. 
 
 200. REMARKS ON THE DEMONSTRATIVES. 
 
 (a) The forms in -e must be used when the demon- 
 strative is used as a pronoun and refers to persons 
 of masculine gender; they are generally preferred, 
 at least in the written language, when the demon- 
 strative is used adjectively before a noun denoting 
 a person of masculine gender: denne ar min bror, 
 this one is my brother; det ar samme man jag sag 
 i gar, it is the same man I saw yesterday. 
 
 (b) After samme a following adjective has always 
 the definite form but a following noun generally the 
 indefinite; after denne the adjective is always def- 
 inite and the noun generally indefinite in the written 
 language but very often definite in the spoken : jag 
 har sett samme (a) lille(a) gosse forr, I have seen 
 the same little boy before; denna stdtliga kyrka ar 
 den nya Vasakyrkan, this stately church is the new 
 Vasa church. 
 
 (c) Sadan is regularly preceded by the indefinite 
 article: en sddan man. 
 
 NOTE. In exclamations, however, the order may be reversed in case of 
 
 sddan and its equivalents sicken, slik, and tocken; thus, sddant ett elande ! 
 
 oh, such misery ! Sicken en stackare ! Such a miserable creature ! (Never 
 en sicken stackare /)
 
 114 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (d) The demonstrative pronouns den, det, and 
 denna, delta, referring to things in a general way, 
 and depending upon a preposition, are sometimes 
 translated by dar (sometimes hdr) , with the prepo- 
 sition added: ddrmed, with that, or those; harmed, 
 with this, or these ; jag har talat med honom ddrom, 
 I have talked with him about that thing, or those 
 things ; jag litar ddrpd, I rely on that. 
 
 201. SOME USES OF THE DEMONSTRATIVES. 
 
 For they, this, that, these, those, when used as 
 subjects and referring to a predicate noun, Swedish 
 uses the neuter singular det, detta, det hdr, det dar, 
 irrespective of the gender and number of the follow- 
 ing noun, if the demonstrative idea is not very em- 
 phatic or if one person or thing is not contrasted 
 with another; as, detta dr min bror, this is my 
 brother; detta dr vackra blommor, these are beau- 
 tiful flowers ; but denne dr min bror, this one is my 
 brother; de hdr dro -vackra blommor, de dar fula, 
 these are beautiful flowers, those are homely ones. 
 
 202. Den is often used as antecedent to a restric- 
 tive relative (he who) ; as, den, som sagt detta, talar 
 icke sanning, he who said this does not speak the 
 truth (222, d). 
 
 NOTE. De is often used indefinitely ; de darhemma. the people at home. 
 
 203. Idiomatic expressions with demonstratives : 
 
 En sadan dumbom han dr! (or, sddan en dumbom, 
 etc.) Whafca stupid fellow he is ! Det gor detsamma, 
 it does not matter ; med detsamma, immediately.
 
 
 EXERCISE. 115 
 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 
 A. Fill out the blanks as suggested. 
 
 1. Smek ej ... (that) 1 katten, Anna, ... (it) rivs 
 (186, b). 2. ... (it) ar visst . . . (the same) katt 2 , som 
 rev ... (me) i gar. 3. Ar ... (this)* ... (your) gosse, 
 fru Anderson? Ja, och . . . (detta or dessa) 3 ar . . . (my) 
 flicker. 4. Vilka aro . . . (yours) ? ... (those) 1 i parken. 
 5. Aro ej Maria och Elisabet ganska lika? Nej, det ar 
 . . . (such, 200, c) skillnad pa dem, att man ej kan se, att 
 de aro systrar. 6. ... (the former) ar ljus, ... (the 
 latter) mork. 7. Ar ... (this) 3 ... (your, familiar) 
 ring? Ja, . . . (it) ar . . . (mine). 8. Av vem bar du fatt 
 . . . (this) vackra ring 2 (def. or indef. ?) ? Jag bar fatt 
 den av min far till julklapp. 9. ... (it) ar sa ovanlig; 
 jag tror ej, att jag nagonsin sett en precis likadan. 10. Jag 
 blev sa glad, nar jag fick . . . (it), jag hade lange b'nskat 
 mig ... (a similar one, 197). 11. Ar . . . (this, 200, a) 
 Smith, som du talar om, . . . (the same) person 2 , som vi 
 larde kanna pa ... (that) 1 resa (def. or indef.?) till 
 Stockholm for ett par ar sedan? Ja, han ar ... (the 
 same one, 200, a). 12. ... (He who, 202) talade var 
 . . . (the same) gamle herre 2 (use man), som vi traffade 
 i gar kvall pa bjudningen hos Linds. 13. Vad sade han 
 . . . (about that, 200, d) ? Han sade, att han var glad 
 . . . (because of it, translate, over it). 
 
 '198. 2 200, b. 3 201. 
 
 B. 1. This 1 is a beautiful flower; where did you find 
 it? I found it in that 2 little flower bed. 2. Please take a 
 seat 3 . That chair 2 is not comfortable; take this one 2 . 
 3. I believe I shall take that one 2 by (vid) the window, 
 thank you (tack sa mycket, first). 4. Doesn't that 2 little 
 girl take after her mother? Yes, she has the same eyes 4 ,
 
 116 VOCABULARY. 
 
 the same mouth 4 , and the same voice 4 . 5. Have you ever 
 seen such a (200, c) sturdy old man? 6. He is almost 
 eighty years old, but it does not matter (203) ; he does the 
 same heavy work as he used to do. 7. Let us take a walk ; 
 such a fine autumn day as (som) this is rare. 8. I must 
 work till six o'clock; after that (sedan) I can take a walk. 
 9. Which (vilJcen) Mr. Smith do you mean? The one 
 who (202) lives on King's Street. 10. That is the same 
 Mr. Smith whom I used to know. He was such a good 
 man. 11. Are these 1 your sisters? Yes, and those are my 
 brothers. 12. You have such a beautiful ring, Anna; 
 where (var. . .ifrdn?) did you get it? 13. Yes, it is very 
 pretty. I got it as a Christmas present from my brother. 
 14. I wish I had one like it (197). 15. In that (200, d) 
 you are right, Carl, but please do not talk any more about 
 it. 16. Our teacher was angry with (ond pa) us yesterday. 
 17. He told us that he had never seen such compositions 
 before. 18. Those who (202) had more than ten errors 
 had to rewrite theirs. 
 
 MJOl. *198. *Either var sd god och titt ner, or var sa god och salt er 
 (also tag plats). 200, b. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 bekvam, -t, comfortable ganska, quite, .fairly 
 
 en bjudning, -ar, reception, en hostdag, -ar, autumn day 
 
 party en julklapp, -ar, Christmas 
 en Wom'sterrabatt', -er, flower present 
 
 bed en katt, -er, cat 
 
 brds pd (dep v.) ( III, impf. lik, -t, like, alike 
 
 brdddes, supine brdtts), ljus, -t, light, blonde 
 
 to take after mena, I (sometimes I la), to 
 duktig, -t, capable, sturdy mean 
 
 ett fel, , error en mun, munnar, mouth 
 
 fd, fick, fingo, fdtt (170), to mork, -t, dark, brunette 
 
 get; be allowed ndgonsin. ever
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 117 
 
 niistan, almost en skillnad, -er, difference 
 
 o'vanlig, -t, unusual skriva om', to rewrite 
 
 en person', -er, person smeka, Ha, caress 
 
 precis', exactly en stol, -ar, chair 
 
 en ring, -ar, ring sdllsynt, , rar, 
 riva, rev, revo, rivit, -en, -et, tio, ten 
 
 to scratch, tear en tunga, -or, tongue 
 
 ratt, , right en upp'sats, -er, composition 
 
 en rost, -er, voice dttio, eighty 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. att ha ratt, to be right. 
 
 2. att bras pa ndgon, to take after somebody. 
 
 3. det iir visst, I think it is. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 The Verb (Continued) 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 204. There are two kinds of verb compounds in 
 Swedish: inseparable and separable. 
 
 INSEPARABLE VERB COMPOUNDS. 
 
 205. The following prefixes always form insepa- 
 rable verb compounds ; that is, compounds of which 
 the component parts are never separated: be-, bi-, 
 ent-, er-, for-, gen-, har-, miss-, sam-, um-, mid-, 
 van-, veder-, a-. 
 
 206. Noun Prefixes. Verb compounds of which 
 the first member is a noun are generally inseparable ; 
 as, kors'fasta, to crucify; impf. korsfaste; supine, 
 korsfast; past part., korsfast; land'satta, to put 
 ashore; landsatte, landsatt, landsatt; hals'hugga, to 
 behead; halshogg, halshuggit, halshuggen. 
 
 NOTK. If the noun is compounded with a proposition, this compound prefix 
 may be separated from the verb. Thus: landsatta, to put ashore, satte f land.
 
 118 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 etc. ; adagaldgga, to manifest, lade ddaga; lagt adaga; ddagalagd; the present 
 and past participles of such verb compounds are always inseparable when used 
 as attributive adjectives: den landsatte passageraren, the landed passenger; when 
 equivalent to a clause or when used in the predicate, they are sometimes sepa- 
 rable: satta i land vid kajen, skyndade m till tullhuset, landed at the pier, we 
 hurried to the custom-house; vi ha bh'vit satta i land, we have been landed. 
 
 SEPARABLE VERB COMPOUNDS. 
 
 207. Adjective Prefixes. Adjectives used as pre- 
 fixes generally form separable verb compounds: 
 fri'kopa or ko'pa fri', to ransom; frikopte or kopte 
 fri, frikopt or kopt fri; but frikalla, to acquit, not 
 kalla fri; frikallad, frikallat. For the present and 
 past participle see 206, note. 
 
 NOTE. If the adjective is separated it agrees with the object in gender and 
 number; as, han vitmalade huset, he painted the house white; but han mdlade 
 huset vitt. It is best for beginners to regard the adjective prefixes as in- 
 separable. 
 
 208. Adverb and preposition prefixes. Adverbs 
 and prepositions used as prefixes form both sepa- 
 rable and inseparable verb compounds. Separable 
 verb compounds of this class often change their 
 meaning when the adverb or preposition follows the 
 verb. 
 
 (1) Separable, with no difference of meaning: 
 u'teldsa or Idsa u'te, to lock out; fo'rega or ga fo're 
 to precede; ge'nomldsa or Idsa ge'nom, to read 
 through; fran'taga or taga fran', to take from or 
 deprive of; av'hugga or hugga av', to cut off, etc. 
 
 (2) With difference of meaning: the sense is liter- 
 al when the parts of the verb compound are sepa- 
 rated; figurative when not separated: av'ga, to re- 
 sign ; graduate ; ga av', to break ; an'lagga, to estab- 
 lish, organize ; lagga an', to aim ; fram'hdlla, to point 
 out; holla fram', to stretch forth; un'derhalla, to
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 119 
 
 entertain; hallo, un'der, to hold beneath; fram'gd, 
 to appear, become evident; ga fram', to go forth. 
 
 209. Compound verbs are conjugated exactly like 
 corresponding simple verbs. 
 
 210. If the separable affix is an adjective or 
 phrase (206, 207) the object is placed between the 
 verb and the affix; if an adverb or a preposition, 
 often after ; as, man satte honom i land, they landed 
 him ; but han hogg av handen, he cut off his hand. 
 
 211. The stress accent falls always on the prefix, 
 if a phrase, on the noun, except in the case of be-, 
 ent-, for- [see 36 (a)], which never take the accent. 
 The musical accent is grave. 
 
 NOTE. Care should be taken not to confuse for-, the inseparable prefix, and 
 fore-, the separable prefix. The latter takes the accent and imparts an entirely 
 different meaning to the verb. Thus: fordra' ga, to endure; fo'redraga, to 
 prefer, present; forsta', to understand; fo'restd, to manage; to impend. 
 
 212. When the affix is separated and happens 
 to stand before a noun, care must be taken not to 
 confuse it with a preposition introducing a phrase; 
 the affix is always accented, the preposition rarely. 
 Ex. : han brot' av brodet och at, he broke a piece off 
 the bread and ate, but han brot av' brodet, he broke 
 the bread in two. 
 
 213. Synopsis of the verbs av'bryta, to interrupt, 
 and stdnga in'ne, to shut in. 
 
 ACTIVE 
 
 Pres. jag av'bryter jag stdnger in'ne 
 
 Impf. jag avbrbt jag stdngde inne 
 
 Future jag skall avbryta jag skall stdnga inne
 
 120 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Perf. jag har avbrutit 
 Plupf. jag hade avbrutit 
 Fut. P. jag skall ha av- 
 brutit 
 
 PASSIVE 
 
 jag har stdngt inne 
 jag hade stdngt inne 
 jag skall ha stdngt inne 
 
 Pres. jag avbrytes, or 
 
 blir avbruten 
 Impf. jag avbrots, or 
 blev avbruten 
 Future jag skall avbry- 
 
 tas, or 
 
 skall bli(va) av- 
 bruten 
 Perf. jag har avbrutits, 
 
 or 
 
 harblivit avbruten 
 Plupf. jag hade avbru- 
 tits, or 
 
 hade blivit av- 
 bruten 
 
 Fut. P. jag skall ha av- 
 brutits, or 
 skall ha blivit 
 avbruten 
 
 jag stdnges inne, or 
 
 blir innestdngd 
 
 jag stdngdes inne, or 
 
 blev innestdngd 
 
 jag skall stdngas inne, 
 
 or 
 skall bli innestdngd 
 
 jag har stdngts inne, or 
 har blivit innestdngd 
 
 jag hade innestdngts. 
 
 or 
 hade blivit innestdngd 
 
 jag skall ha inne- 
 stdngts, or 
 
 skall ha blivit inne- 
 stdngd 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 A. Translate. 1. He has interrupted me. 2. I had 
 broken off a piece. 3. Hold the glass beneath the water. 
 4. You must entertain your friends. 5. Which do you pre- 
 fer, to stay here or to go with us ? 6. He will comply with 
 my request. 7. He will come after. 8. They (man} have 
 landed the passengers. 9. The landed passengers wished to 
 view the city. 10. I can't endure that man. 11. Had you 
 recognized (two ways) him? 12. He was (blev) recog- 
 nized. 13. They ransomed him. 14. The ransomed one 
 thanked his friends. Put the verbs in different tenses.
 
 EXERCISE. 121 
 
 B. Nikolaus den forste av Eyssland onskade att iakttaga 
 sitt folks liv. For att kunna (165, 2) gb'ra detta bmkade 
 ban foretaga langa spatserturer forkladd i en vanlig offi- 
 cerskappa, sa att man ej skulle (165) igenkanna honom. 
 En gang hade han gatt ut till en liten forstad. Nar han 
 skulle atervanda, varseblev han (blev han varse), att han 
 ej hittade. Nu aterstod for honom endast att anfb'rtro sig 
 at en droska. Han ropade pa en, steg in och befallde kus- 
 ken att kora honom till slottet. Da de hade anlant dit, 
 steg tsaren ut. Da han skulle betala, blev han varse, att 
 han givit ut alia sina pengar. "Var god och vanta", sade 
 han till kusken och amnade ga in, "jag skall skicka ut 
 pengarna genast." "Nej, lille far", avbro't kusken honom, 
 "sa ha officererna redan ett par ganger bedragit mig, de ha 
 underlatit att skicka ut pengarna. Kvarlamna din kappa 
 som (as} pant; om du skickar ut pengarna, sa skickar jag 
 in den." Kejsaren efterkom kuskens begaran och gav ho- 
 nom sin kappa som pant. 
 
 C. Conversation. 1. Varfor fb'retog kejsaren av Eyss- 
 land langa spatserturer? 2. Varfor kande man ej igen 
 honom? 3. Vart begav han sig en gang? 4. Vad varse- 
 blev han, nar han skulle atervanda? 5. Vad gjorde han? 
 6. Vad befallde han kusken? 7. Varfor kunde han ej 
 betala kusken genast? 8. Hur ville han uppgora saken 
 (settle the matter) ? 9. Av vilka (whom) hade kusken 
 forut blivit bedragen? 10. Varfor ville han, att kejsaren 
 skulle kvarlamna kappan? 11. Efterkom kejsaren bans 
 begaran ? 
 
 D. 1. We must disguise ourselves 1 if we do not wish to 
 be recognized 2 . 2. Have you observed the conduct of this 
 man? 3. Yes, I have, and I do not understand how people 
 can entrust money to 3 him; he spends 4 too much for amuse- 
 
 Su-edish Grammar 9
 
 122 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ments. 4. Now we have arrived at (till) the palace. 
 Please 5 step out of the carriage. 5. Get into the carriage. 
 I shall order the cabman to drive to the theater. 6. I did 
 not know that I had lost my money; I became aware (of) 
 it when I was going (skulle) to pay for the ride (dJctur). 
 7. How did you settle the matter (C, 8) ? I settled it in 
 this way, that I asked the cabman to wait and said that I 
 should send out the money. 8. Did he comply with your 
 request? In a way (pa satt och vis), but he asked for 
 (bad om) my watch as security and said he would return 
 it when he got the money. 9. The man had a good reason 
 for this request, he had been cheated so often in the same 
 way (pa samma satt). 10. He interrupted me while I was 
 speaking and asked for the money which he had entrusted 
 to me. 
 
 1 FSrkldda oss, reflex, verb. 2 Use passive with bliva, also construction with 
 man; passive with -* would hardly ever be used in such a case. *An indirect 
 object is often preceded by at or till, which are not always interchangeable: 
 tSga at or till, but skriva till. 4 The separable forms are, as a rule, used more 
 than the inseparable, at least in the simple tenses: han ger (giver) ut. f Var 
 sa god och stig vr, or, stig w, car ni matt. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 N. B. The past participle is practically always inseparable, 
 even when the verb is separable. The supine of a separable 
 verb is separable. The teacher should point out the differ- 
 ence in meaning of the two kinds of verbs, if any. 
 
 an'fortro (insep.), Ill, to en- bedra'ga (insep.), -drog, -dro- 
 
 trust go, -dragit, -dragen, -et, to 
 
 an'ldnda (insep.), lib, impf. cheat - deceive 
 
 anliinde, to arrive Defal'la (insep.), lib, to com- 
 mand 
 
 av'bryta (infep.), -brot, bro- efterkomma> ef terTcom, -Jcom- 
 
 to, -brulit, -bruten, -et, ^ -kommit, kommen, 
 
 to interrupt ^ to comply with ' 
 
 bryta av', to break off icomma efter, to come after 
 
 en bega'ran (no. pi.), request, fri'Jcppa, kopa fri', Ha, to 
 demand ransom
 
 INTEHROGATIVES. 
 
 123 
 
 fordra'ga (insep., see bedra- 
 ga), to endure, tolerate. 
 
 fo'redraga (insep.), to prefer 
 
 forkld'da (insep.), lib, to dis- 
 guise 
 
 en for'stad, -stdder, suburb 
 
 forstd' (insep., see std), to un- 
 derstand 
 
 ut'giva, giva ut', utgav, -gdvo, 
 -givit, -given, -et, to spend; 
 publish, edit 
 
 hitta, I, to find, find one's way 
 
 i'akttaga (sep.), -tog, -togo, 
 tagit, -tagen, -et, to ob- 
 serve 
 
 igen'kdnna, kdnna igen', lib, 
 to recognize 
 
 kvar'lamna, lamna kvar', I, to 
 leave behind 
 
 en klocka, -or, clock, watch 
 
 land'sdtta, -satte, -satt, -satt, 
 to land 
 
 ett Hi, , life 
 
 en officer', -er, officer 
 
 IDIOM: att varsebliva en sak, 
 
 en officers' kappa, -or, officer's 
 cloak 
 
 en orsak, -er, reason, cause 
 
 en pant, -er, security 
 
 ropa, I, to shout 
 
 Ryssland (neuter), Russia 
 
 ett slott, , castle, palace 
 
 skicka in', ut', I, to send in, 
 out 
 
 en spatsertur, -er, walk 
 
 ett stycke, -n, piece 
 
 un'derhdlla (see hdlla), to 
 entertain 
 
 hdlla un'der, to hold beneath 
 
 un'derldta (insep.), -Idt, -Idto, 
 -Idtit, -en, -et, to neglect 
 
 var'sebliva, bliva var'se, to be- 
 come aware of 
 
 d'terldmna, lib, to return 
 
 lamna dter (unusual) 
 
 a'terstd (sep., see std), to re- 
 main 
 
 d'tervdnda(sep.) , lib, to return 
 
 vdnda dter (unusual) 
 to become aware of a thing. 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 The Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives. 
 
 214. The interrogative pronouns are: vem, who; 
 vad, what; vilken, which, who; vilkendera, which 
 one ; vad for en, what kind of, what. 
 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 r.-rit?: ?t = 
 
 vem vad vilken vilket vilkendera vilketdera 
 vems vilkens vilkets vilkenderas vilketderas
 
 124 INTERROGATIVES. 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 Nom. vilka 
 Gen. vilkas 
 
 Vad for en has a neuter vad for ett and a plural 
 vad for ena, but no genitive. 
 
 215. The interrogative adjectives are: vad, vil- 
 ken, vilkendera, vad for en, and hurudan, of what 
 nature, how. Their declension is identical with 
 that of the interrogative pronouns but they lack 
 the genitive case: hurudan has the neuter form 
 hurudant and the plural hurudana. 
 
 216. REMARKS ON THE INTERROGATIVES. 
 
 (a) Vem refers only to persons and is never used 
 as an adjective. Ex.: Med vem talade du? (or vem 
 talade du med?) With whom did you speak? Vems 
 bok ar detta? Whose book is this? 
 
 NOTE. When vem is subject in an indirect question it is followed by som : 
 vet du vem som var hart do you know who was here? 
 
 (b) Vad is used both as a pronoun and as an 
 adjective ; when used pronominally it is always neu- 
 ter; adjectively it may be used for all genders like 
 the English what. This use being rather restrict- 
 ed, the student should use vilken and vad for en: 
 Vad talar han om? What is he talking about? Vad 
 rdtt har du att gora detta? What right have you 
 to do this? 
 
 NOTE. When ichat is subject in an indirect question it is often represented 
 by vad som in Swedish: jag vet ej vad som ar bast, I do not know what is best ; 
 but jag vet ej, vad (object) han har sagt. 
 
 (c) Vad for en is used both as a pronoun and 
 as an adjective, the latter use prevailing. As an 
 adjective it drops ena in the plural. Ex.: Vad for
 
 RELATIVES.. 125 
 
 blommor har du ddr? What kind of flowers have 
 you there ? Sometimes it has the meaning of vilken : 
 vad for en konung hade Sverige da? What king 
 did Sweden have then? 
 
 NOTE. For may be separated from vad: vad ar del for en blommaf What 
 kind of (a) flower is that? 
 
 (d) Vilken and vilkendera are used both as adjec- 
 tives and as pronouns; hurudan (hurdan) only as 
 an adjective. Ex.: Vilken har varit hdr? Who has 
 been here? Vilket hus har du hyrt? Which house 
 have you rented? Vilkendera o'nskar du? Which 
 one (of several objects) do you wish? Vilketdera 
 huset ar hans? Which house (of these houses) is 
 his? Hurudant ar vddret? How is the weather 
 (of what nature) ? 
 
 217. If the interrogative pronoun is governed 
 by a preposition this may as in English either pre- 
 cede or stand at the end of the clause: med vem 
 talade du? or vem talade du med? with whom did 
 you speak? 
 
 218. With prepositions, vad may in certain cases 
 be replaced by prepositional compounds with var, 
 where: varav, varmed, vartill, etc.: varmed har 
 man belonat honom? With what have they rewarded 
 him? Varav lever han? What does he live on? 
 
 Relative Pronouns and Adjectives. 
 
 219. The relative pronouns are som, vilken, vad, 
 den, and the genitive form vars. 
 
 220. For inflection of vilken and vad see 214, and 
 for inflection of den see 195. 
 
 221. The relative adjective is vilken.
 
 126 RELATIVES. 
 
 222. REMARKS ON THE RELATIVES. 
 
 (a) Som is by far the most common of the rela- 
 tive pronouns; it is indeclinable and is used for all 
 genders and all cases with the exception of the 
 genitive, which is supplied by vars and vilkens (vil- 
 kets, vilkas). Ex.: min van, som dr hdr pa besok, 
 skall resa i morgon, my friend who is here on a 
 visit will leave to-morrow; mannen, vars barn dro 
 sjuka, dr mycket fattig, the man whose children are 
 sick is very poor. 
 
 (b) Vilken when used as a pronoun often employs 
 the genitive form vars instead of vilkens. It is 
 not used very often in conversation except when 
 the antecedent is a clause (when it is indispensable) 
 or when a preposition must stand before the rela- 
 tive. Ex. : han har blivit void, vilket forvanar mig, 
 he has been elected, which fact surprises me (here 
 som would be incorrect) ; fyra gossar, av vilka 
 en var min kusin, drunknade i gar, four boys of 
 whom one was my cousin were drowned yesterday. 
 
 (c) Vad is used as a compound neuter relative 
 including its antecedent, also after the indefinite pro- 
 noun allt. It has no plural. Ex.: vad han sdger, 
 dr sant, what he says is true; det dr allt, vad jag 
 har sett, that is all I have seen (som may be used) . 
 
 NOTE. When vad is the subject of the sentence or clause it is generally com- 
 bined with som; thus, ft skolu saga vad som iir rdtt, we ought to say what 
 is right. 
 
 (d) Den is used as a definite relative only in the 
 objective case; as* such it is of comparatively rare 
 occurrence. In the nominative together with som 
 it corresponds to he who, the one who (which), who-
 
 EXERCISE. 127 
 
 ever. In solemn style it is sometimes combined with 
 ddr, den ddr, he who, whoever. Ex. : dessa dro de 
 regler, dem (more common som) ni maste folja, 
 these are the rules which you must follow; den som 
 sdger detta, dr dum, whoever says this is stupid ; den 
 ddr vet det rtitta, han gore det rdtt dr, he that knows 
 the right, let him do right. 
 
 223. The prepositions which govern the rela- 
 tives are generally placed at the end of the clause; 
 when used with som, always. Ex.: damerna, som 
 du talar om, kdnner jag, I know the ladies that you 
 speak about; huset, vilket (i vilket) han bor i, dr 
 gammalt, the house in which he lives is old. 
 
 224. In Swedish as in English the relative is 
 often omitted when objective. Ex.: Vem var det, 
 du mo'tte i gar? Who was it you met yesterday? 
 
 225. When the relative is governed by a prepo- 
 sition and refers to things, a compound of the rela- 
 tive adverb var, where, and the preposition may 
 be used; as, bordet, varpa boken ligger, or bordet, 
 som boken ligger pa, dr mitt, the table which the 
 book lies on is mine; huset, som han bor i, or vari 
 han bor, dr hans fars, the house which he lives in 
 is his father's. 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 A. Translate orally. 1. Who goes there? 2. Who is he? 
 3. What do you have in your (178) hand? 4. Of whom 1 
 are you speaking? 5. Of what are you speaking? 6. What 
 book do you mean? 7. What 2 new house is that? 8. Do 
 you know at (vid) what time the train leaves (gar) ? 
 9. What sort of a man is he? 10. Do you understand what 
 he says? 11. I do not know what is best (bast). 12.
 
 128 EXERCISE. 
 
 Which drama of Strindberg do you like best 3 ? 13. In 
 what (218) does the difference consist? 14. Do you know 
 what kind of teacher he is? 15. How is the weather? 
 
 translate in two ways: preposition before and at the end of the clause. 
 = Transl. : what kind of a new house is that? or which is that new house? *To 
 like best, tycka bast om. 
 
 B. Translate orally. 1. He is a man who knows every- 
 thing. 2. That is the lady who has the pretty daughters. 
 3. That is not the man I mean. 4. He who (222, d) is 
 rich is not always happy. 5. That is all 1 I know about the 
 matter. 6. Whoever (222, d) does such a thing (nagot 
 sadant) is not a good man. 7. The man whom (224) I 
 spoke about is a professor at (vid) the University of Up- 
 sala 2 . 8. The house in which (225) he lives is his father's. 
 9. There is 3 no poet whose life is so interesting. 
 
 1 Relative may be omitted ; see 222, c. -Uppsala universitet. *There is, 
 there are, in a general sense must be rendered by det finnes (/inns), in a limited 
 sense by det ar. 
 
 C. En apotekare, som 1 hade rakat i tvist med en officer, 
 blev av denne utmanad till duell. Den sak, om vilken de 
 voro oense, var en obetydlighet, och apotekaren, som var en 
 forstandig man, onskade att forhindra duellen. Tidigt pa 
 morgonen av den dag, pa vilken duellen skulle utkampas, 
 gjorde apotekaren ett besok i officerens bostad och sade 
 helt lugnt till denne : "Emedan jag ar den, som liar blivit 
 utmanad, sa 2 tillkommer det mig att valja vapnen. Har 
 aro tva piller, av vilka det ena 3 ar forgiftat, det andra dar- 
 emot oskadligt. Var sa god och valj det ena och svalj det ; 
 jag svaljer det, som aterstar, och en av oss maste do." 
 Officeren, som blev mycket overraskad av apotekarens for- 
 slag, vars andamal naturligtvis var att forhindra duellen, 
 kastade ut pillerna genom fonstret och forsonade sig med 
 honom. 
 
 J Note the frequent use of som. 2 Note the frequent use of sa to introduce the 
 principal clause when it follows the dependent. *det ena. . . . det andra, one. . . 
 the other.
 
 EXERCISE. 129 
 
 C. Conversation. 1. Med vem hade apotekaren rakat 
 i tvist? 2. Vartill blev han ntmanad av officeren? 3. Niir 
 gick apotekaren till officeren? 4. Varfb'r hade apotekaren 
 beslutat forhindra duellen? 5. Vad tillkom honom och 
 varfor?. 6. Vad for vapen foreslog (proposed) apotekaren? 
 7. Visste apotekaren, vilketdera pillret var forgiftat? 8. 
 Vad skulle hans motstandare (opponent) gora med det 
 piller, han valde? 9. Vad var andamalet med detta for- 
 slag? 10. Vad gjorde officeren med pillerna? 11. Upp- 
 nadde (attained) apotekaren sitt andamal? 
 
 D. 1. Do you know what kind of a man the druggist is 
 with whom the officer got into a quarrel? 2. Yes, I know 
 him well (ml). He is a man whose friendship I esteem 
 very highly. 3. I do not know what 1 the quarrel consisted 
 in 1 , but according to what I have heard it was about a 
 trifling matter. 4. The druggist, who was a very sensible 
 man, wished to prevent the duel. 5. By what means 
 (transl. : through what) did he succeed in preventing it? 
 6. He went to the house of the man who had challenged 
 him and had a talk with him. 7. He reminded him of an 
 old custom according to which it is the right of him (C, 5) 
 who has been challenged to choose the weapons. 8. When 
 the officer asked him what kind of weapons he would choose 
 he held out a couple of pills. 9. Of these there was one 
 which was poisoned 2 ; the other was harmless. 10. The 
 druggist asked the officer which one of the two he would 
 (ville) take and swallow. 11. He himself would (skulle) 
 swallow the one that (222, d) remained. 12. The propo- 
 sition which the druggist made surprised the officer and he 
 threw the pills out through the window. 13. The druggist, 
 whose (222, a) purpose it was to prevent the duel, suc- 
 ceeded in this (200, d). 
 
 translate in two ways (218). 2 True or apparent passive?
 
 130 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 en apotekare, , druggist 
 
 bestd' (insep., see std), to con- 
 sist; endure; treat 
 
 en bostad, bostdder, dwelling, 
 home 
 
 en duell', -er, duel 
 
 ddr'emot, on the contrary 
 
 do, dog, dogo, dott, , to die 
 
 emedan, because 
 
 enligt, according to 
 
 er'inra (insep.), I, to remind 
 
 fram'rdcka, rdckd frarn', Ha, 
 to reach or hold out 
 
 forgif'ta (insep.), I, to poison 
 
 forhind'ra (insep.), I, to pre- 
 vent 
 
 ett forslag', , proposition, 
 proposal . 
 
 forso'na, I, to reconcile 
 
 forstdn'dig, -t, sensible, intel- 
 ligent 
 
 hog, -t, high 
 
 kasta ut' (rarely utkasta), 
 (sep.), I, to throw out 
 
 lugn, -t, calm(ly) 
 
 lycklig, -t, happy 
 
 mena, I, to mean 
 
 en o'betydlighet, -er, insignifi- 
 cance, trifle 
 
 o'ense (indecl.), at variance 
 
 o'skadlig, -t, harmless 
 
 ett piller, , pill 
 
 rdka, I, to come or get (into), 
 to meet (with), to meet 
 
 ett samtal, , conversation 
 
 en sed, -er, custom, usage 
 
 svdlja, lib, to swallow 
 
 till'komma (insep., see kom- 
 ma), to befit, be the right 
 of somebody 
 
 en tvist, -er, quarrel 
 
 upp'skatta (insep.), I, to esteem 
 
 ut'mana (insep.), I, to. chal- 
 lenge 
 
 ut'kdmpa, I, to fight out 
 
 kdmpa ut', to cease fighting 
 (i. e. die) 
 
 ett vapen, , weapon 
 
 en vdnskap, friendship 
 
 o'verras'ka (insep.), I, to sur- 
 prise 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. att rdka i grill, svdrigneter, to get into a quarrel, 
 difficulties. 
 
 2. att bliva overrasTcad av nagot, to become astonished 
 at something. 
 
 3. Det tillkommer mig, I havr a right to it, or it is 
 my privilege.
 
 LESSON XXL 
 The Verb (Continued). 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 
 226. The present participle is formed by adding 
 -ande to the stem of the verb if the infinitive ends 
 in -a, otherwise -ende. Ex.: kallande, from kalla, 
 to call; leende, from le, to smile; syende, from sy, 
 to sew. 
 
 NOTK 1. The present participle is indeclinable, but if used as a noun, it 
 takes -s in the genitive: en doendes anger, the repentance of a dying person. 
 
 2. Deponent verbs form their present participle either with or without the 
 -3j as, minnandes, remembering; aldrande, aging, from minnas and aldras, 
 many lack a present participle. 
 
 227. The present participle is used: 
 
 (1) as an adjective: ett sovande barn, a sleeping 
 child; 
 
 (2) as an adverb: han talte flytande, he spoke flu- 
 ently ; 
 
 (3) as an adverbial predicative: hon gick tiggan- 
 de fran hus till hus, she went begging from house 
 to house. 
 
 NOTE. The conversational language often prefers a finite verb to the present 
 participle used as an adverbial predicative. Ex. : hon yick frdn hus till hus 
 och tiggde, instead of hon gick tiggande, etc. 
 
 228. The present participle is not used in Swe- 
 dish to form a progressive tense as in English. When 
 the idea of continued action is especially prominent, 
 it is expressed by means of the verb hdlla pa', to 
 keep on, continue, and the infinitive preceded by att : 
 han hbll pa att skriva, da jag kom in, he was writ- 
 ing when I entered. Sometimes the preposition mea,
 
 132 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 with, is inserted before the infinitive: han holl pa 
 med att lasa. 
 
 NOTE. Sitta, to sit ; ga, go ; sla, stand ; ligga, lie, and similar verbs are 
 used with a finite form of some other verb to express progression: jag sitter 
 och skrifver, I am writing ; ligga och lata sig, lounging 1 about, idling ; aid 
 och hanga, hanging around (idly). Note the following use of halla pa: jag 
 holl pa att falla, I came near falling. 
 
 229. The English present participle very often 
 must be rendered by a subordinate clause either 
 temporal, causal, or relative, according to the sense : 
 the boy, hearing us come, ran away, gossen sprang 
 sin vag, ndr han horde oss komma; being sick he 
 had to go home, emedan han var sjuk, mdste han 
 ga hem. 
 
 230. The English verbal in -ing is often equiva- 
 lent to the infinitive: running is a useful exer- 
 cise, att springa ar en nyttig o'vning; he went away 
 without seeing me, han gick bort utan att se mig. 
 
 NOTE. When the verbal is modified by a possessive adjective, Swedish uses a 
 noun clause with att instead of att with the infinitive: He came without my 
 seeing him, han kom utan att jag sag honom; their having come home was a 
 surprise, att de hade kommit hem var en ofverraskning. 
 
 231. Nouns in -ning and -ande (added to the 
 verbal stem) correspond to the English verbals and 
 abstract nouns an -ing. Ex.: allt detta talande ar 
 onodigt, all this talking is unnecessary; mycken 
 skrivning ar trottande, much writing is tiresome. 
 
 232. After the verbs hora and se Swedish uses 
 the infinitive, never the present participle, as in 
 English: jag sag honom komma, I saw him coming. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 233. The past participle is formed in five differ- 
 ent ways according to the class or conjugation to 
 which the verb belongs.
 
 PARTICIPLES. 133 
 
 234. In the First Conjugation the ending is -ad. 
 In the Second Conjugation, Class I, the ending 
 
 is -t. 
 
 In the Second Conjugation, Class II, the ending 
 is -d. 
 
 In the Third Conjugation the ending is -dd. 
 
 In the Fourth Conjugation the ending is -en 
 (-n, -et). 
 
 235. These endings are added to the stem of 
 the verb. In the Fourth Conjugation there may 
 or may not be a change of vowel ; thus, kallad, bojd, 
 kopt, sydd, shriven, funnen. 
 
 NOTE 1. Deponent verbs as a rule lack the past participle, so do many in- 
 transitive verbs. 
 
 2. It may be of assistance for the beginner to notice that the past participle 
 of weak verbs may be found by dropping the e of the imperfect. 
 
 236. The past participle is used as an adjective 
 and agrees in number and gender with the noun or 
 pronoun which it modifies or of which it is a com- 
 plement. It is declined in accordance with the rules 
 governing the declension of adjectives. 
 
 237. STRONG DECLENSION. 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 GENDER FORM NEUTER ALL GENDERS 
 
 I. dlskad dlskat dlskade 
 
 II. Class i. kopt kopt kopta(e l ) 
 II. Class ii. bojd bo'jt bojda(e) 
 
 III. sydd sytt sydda(e) 
 
 IV. skriven 'skrivet skrivna(e) 
 
 238. WEAK DECLENSION. 
 
 dlskade dlskade dlskade 
 
 kopta(e^) kopta kopta (e 1 ) 
 
 bojda(e) bojda bojda(e) 
 
 sydda(e) sydda sydda(e) 
 
 skrivna(e) skrivna skrivna(e) 
 
 'Masculine nouns denoting persons often take the -e form of the adjective.
 
 134 EXERCISE. 
 
 239. The past participle is used only adjectively 
 as an attributive, an appositive, or a predicate modi- 
 fier. In the last function it is used with bliva (varda) 
 to form the compound passive and with vara in the 
 apparent passive (185) : de slagna ryssarna flydde, 
 the defeated Russians fled ; hdren, besegrad och upp- 
 riven, drog sig tillbaka, the army, defeated and 
 shattered, withdrew; huset har blivit mdlat, the 
 house has been painted; brevet dr skrivet, the letter 
 is written; rocken dr lagad, the coat is mended. 
 
 240. The past participle should not be confused 
 with the supine, which is. used only with the auxil- 
 iary verb hava to form the perfect tenses and is 
 indeclinable. 
 
 NOTE. With some verbs of motion vara may be used with the past participle 
 to form the perfect tenses ; as, han dr bortrest, he has left ; han dr anldnd, 
 hi? has arrived. 
 
 EXERCISE XXI. 
 
 A. Supply the present participle, the past participle, or 
 the supine of the verbs indicated, according to the context ; 
 also the definite and plural endings. 1. Den . . . (forlora) 
 ring har blifvit . . . (finna) 2. Barn stod . . . (grata) 1 
 framfor den . . . (stanga) dorr . 3. Ester ar en ... (fb'r- 
 tjusa) 1 liten flicka. 4. ... (sova) 1 hund (pi.) bitas ej. 
 5. Ert . . . (vanta lange) 2 brev har . . . (komma). 6. ... 
 (vanda) 1 sig till mig, bad tiggar om en slant. 7. Jag har 
 ... (hitta) alia de . . . (forlora) brev (def. pi.), edert 
 . . . (inbegripa) 2 . Express in more idiomatic Swedish by 
 expanding the participles into clauses. 8. I eke havande 
 erfarenhet nog, vet jag ej vad jag bor gora. 9. Nyheterna 
 mottagna i gar ha gjort oss alia glada. 10. Havande last 
 brevet, kastade jag bort det. Translate: 11. I heard him
 
 EXERCISE. 135 
 
 singing 3 . 12. He came driving. 13. Reading and writing 
 are taught at school. 
 
 1 Pres. part. 2 Past part. 'After verbs like se, hora, kanna, Swedish uses the 
 infinitive of the dependent verb, not the pres. part. 
 
 Note the inverted order in an independent clause following a dependent. 
 
 B. 1. Nar jag gick hem fran kyrkan i gar, traffade jag 
 froken Lind, dotter till en gammal skolkamrat. 2. Erne- 
 dan det ar lange sedan jag sag henne, kande jag knappast 
 igen henne. 3. Hon var fb'rtjusande vacker i sin nya vin- 
 terhatt, vilken hon sade var en julklapp fran hennes far. 
 4. Hon omtalade for mig, att hennes far ofta hade ut- 
 tryckt en b'nskan att fa traffa mig. 5. Jag svarade, att jag 
 ej skulle lamna staden utan att ha besokt dem. 6. Det 
 gladde mig, att han mindes mig. 7. Han ar en mycket in- 
 tressant man, som talar manga frammande sprak flytande 
 och .ar val belast. 8. Da vi hollo pa att samtala, kommo 
 hennes vanner ut ur kyrkan. 9. Nar jag sag dem komma, 
 sade jag adjo och lamnade henne. 
 
 C. 1. Emedan jag ville rbka en cigarr, gick jag in i rok- 
 kupen. 2. Mannen, som star dar borta, ar konduktb'rn, 
 fraga honom, nar taget gar. 3. Han kom springande, men 
 nar han sag mig, stannade han och halsade. 
 
 Z>. 1. Going 1 home from church last Sunday, I met Miss 
 Wallner. 2. Stopping 2 she wished me a merry Christmas 
 and a happy New Year. 3. She looked 3 charming in her 
 new winter hat. 4. Seeing 1 me look at it, she told me that 
 it was a Christmas gift from her father. 5. Her father is 
 a very learned and cultured man and a celebrated author. 
 6. He speaks fluently six foreign languages and is very 
 well-read. 7. Not having 4 seen him for many years, I ex- 
 pressed my desire of calling (inf.) on him. 8. Smiling 2 
 kindly she said that her father would like to see me, hav-
 
 136 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ing 5 often talked about me and wondered where I was. 
 9. Thanking 2 her I asked her to greet her parents from 
 me. 
 
 E. 1. Is this a compartment for smokers? No, smoking 
 is prohibited here. 2. How much did you have to (maste 
 ni) pay for overweight? Nothing; they checked my bag- 
 gage without weighing (230) it. 3. Having asked 1 the 
 conductor if it was the express train for (till) Stockholm, 
 we boarded the train. 4. My stopping and talking (230, 
 note) caused me to (gjorde att jag) come too late to the 
 train. 5. Having bought 1 a time-table, I went into the 
 waiting room. 
 
 translate by a temporal clause. ! Expand into a coordinate clause. *To look 
 (appearance) se ut. 4 Causal clause introduced by en'dr, emedan, or do. 
 'Clause introduced by ty. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ad jo', good-bye en kupe, -er, compartment 
 
 belast', -t, well-read (railroad) 
 
 oildad, -at, p. p. (bilda), cul- le, log, logo, lett, to smile 
 
 tured lange vantad, -at, p. p. (viinta 
 en er'farenhet, -er, experience lange), long expected 
 
 flytande, pres. p. (flyta), fluent lard, lart, p. p. (Idra), learned 
 
 frammande, .foreign, strange (e)mot'taga, taga emot' (sep., 
 forbjuden, p. p. (forbjuda), see taga), to receive 
 
 prohibited om'tala, tola om' (sep.), to tell 
 
 fortju'sande, pres. p. (for- polette'ra, I, to check (baggage) 
 
 tjusa), charming en ro'kare, , smoker 
 
 foriil'drar, parents en rokkupe, -er, compartment 
 for sent', too late for smokers 
 
 grata, grdt, grdto, grdtit, to rokning, smoking 
 
 weep sju, seven 
 
 hitta, I, to find en slant, -ar, coin 
 
 hdlsa pa', to call on ett snalltdg, , express train 
 
 in'begripa, -grep, -grepo, -gri- ett sprdk, , language 
 
 pit, -en, -et, to include stanna, I, to stay, stop 
 
 en konduktor', -er, conductor stiga pa', to board, enter
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 137 
 
 i sondags, last Sunday en vinterhatt, -ar, winter hat 
 
 en tid'tabell', -er, time table vaga, lib, to weigh 
 
 en tiggare, , beggar vanda, lib (vande, vant), to 
 tit'ta pA, I, to look at turn 
 
 undra, I, to wonder en vantsal, -ar, waiting room 
 
 ut'trycka (insep.), Ha, to ex- en overvikt, overweight 
 
 press en onskan (no pi.), wish 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. att onska ndgon en glad jul, to wish somebody 
 a merry Christmas. 
 
 2. att onska ndgon ett gott nytt dr, to wish some- 
 body a happy New Year. 
 
 3. att om'tala, or tala om' ndgot for ndgon, to tell 
 somebody something. 
 
 4. Jag sade adjo till honom, I said good-bye to him. 
 
 5. att ha frammande, to have company. 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 The Verb (Continued). 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 241. The impersonal verb form, like the reflex- 
 ive, is used more extensively in Swedish than in 
 English. The impersonal subject is det, which is 
 never omitted except in a few archaic expressions. 
 
 242. Important impersonals are: 
 
 (1) Those referring to processes of nature: 
 
 det regnar, it rains det fryser, it freezes 
 
 det snoar, it snows det toar, it thaws 
 
 det blixtrar, it lightens det dagas, it dawns 
 
 (2) Those expressing merely abstract action; as, 
 det knackar pa dorr en, there is a knock on the door ; 
 det ror sig i skogen, something moves in the forest ; 
 det gar i korridoren, somebody is walking in the 
 hall. 
 
 Swedish Grammar 10
 
 138 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 (3) Verbs in many idiomatic phrases, the person 
 or thing referred to often appearing as object: 
 
 det gdller mitt llv, my life is at stake 
 
 det gdller honom, it concerns him 
 
 det lonar modan, it is worth the while 
 
 det gar mig vdl, I am doing well 
 
 det gor mig ont om dig, I feel sorry for you 
 
 hur star det till med dig? How are you? 
 
 243. THE IMPERSONAL PASSIVE. Many verbs, 
 even intransitives, may form an impersonal passive 
 either with det as the subject or with the subject 
 omitted; as, det skrattades och s Jongs, there was 
 laughing and singing; hdr dies, ser jag, you are 
 eating, it seems (I see) ; det frdgas ofta, the ques- 
 tion is often asked. 
 
 244. Other uses of det: 
 
 Det corresponds in general to the English it, but 
 has some idiomatic uses, as already shown in part. 
 
 (a) Det stands for the introductory there and 
 serves to bring the verb before the logical subject; 
 as, det,levde en gang en konung, once there lived a 
 king; det sprang ett par gossar over fdltet, literally, 
 there ran a couple of boys across the field. 
 
 NOTE. The verb does not as in English agree with the logical subject but is 
 always in the singular. This form is often resorted to for emphasis. 
 
 (b) Det finns, det gives, and det dr: 
 
 1. There is, and there are, expressing mere exist- 
 ence, are rendered by det finns, det gives, and det 
 dr. 
 
 2. Det finns, more seldom det gives, expresses 
 existence within a space of extended or indefinite 
 limits, whereas det dr expresses existence within
 
 REFLEXIVE VERBb. 139 
 
 a definite space of relatively small extent : det fanns 
 dnnu drliga man, there were still honest men; det 
 gives intet val, there is no choice ; det finns, or gives 
 en Gud, there is a God; det dr ett par herrar vid 
 dorren, there are a couple of gentlemen at the door. 
 Note the singular of the verb, irrespective of the 
 number of the following noun. 
 
 (c) Det is used expletively to represent another 
 word, phrase, or clause already used, and of which 
 the repetition is avoided (it is then rendered by so 
 or not translated) . Ex. : han var rik, nu dr han det 
 ej Idngre, he was rich, now he is so no longer; vet 
 du vad han sade? Ja, det gor jag; do you know 
 what he said? Yes, I do; dr han hdr? Ja, det tror 
 fag; is he here? Yes, I think so. 
 
 REFLEXIVE VERBS. 
 
 245. Reflexive verbs "reflect" the action upon 
 the subject. Hence the object is always the pro- 
 noun corresponding to the subject. 
 
 246. A reflexive verb has no peculiarity of con- 
 jugation. The pronoun object is placed immedi- 
 ately after the verb. 
 
 247. The reflexive form is used much more wide- 
 ly in Swedish than in English, often giving rise to 
 secondary significations which require their own 
 peculiar translations. Examples : 
 
 erinra, to remind erinra sig, to remember 
 
 inbilla, to make believe inbilla sig, to imagine 
 uppfora, to perform, erect uppfora sig, to behave 
 tro, to believe tro sig, to presume, dare 
 
 fatta, to seize fat ta sig, to compose one- 
 
 self
 
 140 
 
 REFLEXIVE VERBS. 
 
 Some verbs are used only reflexively ; as, 
 
 befinna sig, to be (as to tilldraga sig, to take place 
 health, condition) 
 
 beflita sig, to apply one- begiva sig, to betake one- 
 self self 
 
 248. Conjugation of the reflexive verb: att 
 inbilla sig, to imagine. 
 
 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE 
 
 jag inbillade mig, etc. 
 
 vi inbillade oss, etc. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE 
 
 Sg. jag inbillar mig 
 
 du inbillar dig 
 
 han inbillar sig 
 
 ni inbillar er (eder) 
 PI. vi inbilla oss 
 
 I inbillen er (eder) 
 
 ni inbilla er (eder) ' 
 
 de inbilla sig 
 
 PERFECT PLUPERFECT 
 
 jag har inbillat mig, etc. jag hade inbillat mig, etc. 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT 
 
 jag skall inbilla mig, etc. jag skall ha inbillat mig, 
 
 etc. 
 
 IMPERATIVE 
 
 2nd Sg. 
 
 inbilla dig (familiar) 
 
 2nd PI. 
 
 inbillen er (archaic) 
 
 2nd Sg. and PI. 
 
 inbilla er 
 
 1st PI. 
 
 INFINITIVES 
 
 Present : 
 
 att inbilla sig 
 
 Perfect : 
 
 att ha(va) inbillat sig 
 
 Future Perfect: 
 
 att skola ha inbillat sig 
 
 Idt(om) oss inbilla oss, etc. 
 
 NOTE. The reflexives may be intensified by sjiilv: han alskade sig sjdlv och 
 icke sina medmanniskor : he loved himself and not his fellow men. The student 
 should, however, avoid the use of sjalv with the reflexives, this construction 
 being very limited.
 
 EXERCISE. 141 
 
 249. Note such idiomatic reflexive constructions 
 as: jag skar mig i fingret, I cut my finger; Karl 
 har brutit av sig benet, Carl has broken his leg; 
 satt pa dig hatten, put on your hat. The postposi- 
 tive definite article is often used instead of the pos- 
 sessive with nouns which denote parts of the body 
 and articles of clothing. The possessor may be 
 represented by an object pronoun. 
 
 250. THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUN is varandra, each 
 other, one another, which is indeclinable : vi trdffade 
 varandra, we met each other; vi dlskade varandra, 
 we loved one another. 
 
 NOTE. The reciprocal idea may, as has been stated before, often be expressed 
 by the -s form of the verb : vi traffas, we meet one another ; hdstarna bitas, 
 the horses bite one another ; sang och gladje foljas at, song and joy accom- 
 pany one another. When no agent is mentioned the -s form of the passive 
 must often be avoided since it may give a reciprocal meaning to the verb 
 (186). 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. 
 
 A. Continue the following: 1. Jag skall klada mig 
 varmt, sa att jag ej f orkyler mig, du . . . dig . . . , sa att, 
 etc. 2. Innan jag mottog frammande, maste jag klada om 
 mig, innan du . . ., maste du. . . dig, etc. 3. Om jag inte 
 uppfor mig battre, sa maste jag skammas, om du, etc. 
 4. Jag hade befunnit mig battre, pm jag hade skyddat mig 
 mot kolden, du, etc. 5. Om jag ej andrar mig, och det ej 
 regnar, sa kommer jag, om du, etc. 
 
 Translate: 1. I think so. 2. We shall see one another 
 soon. 3. Hurry, Carl, we are waiting for (pa) you. 4. 
 There are two industrious boys in this room. 5. Can you 
 tell if there is a postoffice in (vid or pa) this street? 6. 
 Stay at home, boys, it is freezing and snowing.
 
 142 EXERCISE. 
 
 B. 1. Det gar pa verandan, nu knackar det pa dorren; 
 skynda dig, Anna, att oppna. 2. Jag inaste ga och klada 
 om mig; det passar ej att taga emot frarnmande, kladd 
 som jag ar. 3. Jag tror, att det ar herr Edgren, bed ho- 
 nom stiga in i fb'rmaket och satta sig, det drojer endast ett 
 par minuter, tills jag ar far dig. 4. Jag hoppas ni ursaktar, 
 att jag bar latit er vanta, herr Edgren. 5. Hur star det 
 till? S'a trakigt 1 , att min man icke ar hemma, det skulle 
 ha glatt honom att fa traffa er. 6. Jag mar fortraffligt, 
 fru Sterner. Men hur befinna ni er nu for tiden (nowa- 
 days) ? 7. Jag horde for nagon tid sedan, att Karl hade 
 fb'rkylt sig mycket svart. 8. Vi ma alia bra nu, men vadret 
 iindrar sig sa hastigt nu for tiden, att det ar omb'jligt att 
 skydda sig mot forkylning. 9. I gar snoade det, i dag reg- 
 nar det, nu blixtrade det till och med, tror jag. 10. Sag 
 till (at) gossarna, att de uppfora sig litet battre, Anna, 
 Erik skriker ju, som om det gallde livet. 11. De kunna 
 val 2 roa sig utan att vasnas sa; herr Edgren och jag kun- 
 na knappast hora varandra. 12. Ad jo, fru Sterner; det 
 var trakigt, att Karl ej var hemma, men vi traffas val 
 senare. 
 
 J It is too bad that, etc. ; boken ar trakig, the book bores me. 3 Val I 
 suppose, I should think, very likely, etc. 
 
 C. 1. I think the weather has changed 1 ; it is becoming 
 cloudy, it looks as if it would (skulle) rain soon. 2. It is 
 quite (ganska) chilly and we must dress warmly if we in- 
 tend to go out, otherwise (annars) we shall catch cold. 
 
 3. Somebody is walking 2 on the porch; now there is a 
 knock 2 . Please look and see (se efter) who it is, Anna. 
 
 4. Father, it is Mr. Lind. How are you, Mr. Lind ? I am 
 very glad 3 to see you. 5. The pleasure is mutual, Mr. Len- 
 nart, it is long since we met. 6. Why do the boys make 
 such a noise (B, 11), Anna? Tell (B, 10) them to behave
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 143 
 
 better when there is company. 7. If I am not mistaken 1 , 
 it is Carl that is yelling ; he ought to be ashamed to behave 1 
 so badly. 8. Who is that lady you greeted ? It is the wife 
 of Mr. Brown. 9. We do not know one another well, but 
 we always greet one another when we meet (250). 10. Who 
 is Mr. Brown ? He is a man who always lacks 3 money and 
 who wants to borrow from everybody. 11. He used to be 
 much respected, but he is no longer so (244, c.). 12. There 
 are not many (manga) in this town who would lend him 
 money. 13. Has he presumed 4 to ask you to lend him? 
 14. No, he knows that it is not worth while 3 . 15. Good-bye, 
 I must hurry; there is much work for me at home. 
 
 1 Use reflex, verb, 
 siime tro sig. 
 
 2 242, 2. 3 Use an impersonal construction, 242, 3. 4 Pre- 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 befin'na sig, to feel, to be 
 
 (health) 
 droja (intr.), lib, to delay, 
 
 take time 
 fattas (dep. v., often impers.) 
 
 I, to lack 
 frysa, fros, froso, frusit, -en, 
 
 et, to freeze 
 ftirdig, -t, ready 
 forky'la siff, lib, to catch cold 
 en forkyl'ning, -ar, cold (health) 
 ett for'mak, parlor 
 en glddje, joy 
 giilla, lib, to have a value; 
 
 concern 
 
 hdl'sa pa, I, to greet 
 kldda, lib, to dress (some- 
 body) 
 
 Jcltida sia, to dress (oneself) 
 kldda om' (sig), to change 
 
 dress 
 
 knappast, hardly 
 
 en kold, cold 
 
 kylig, -t, cool 
 
 ett liv, , life 
 
 Idta, Idt, Idto, Idtit, to let, 
 
 allow 
 miss'taga (insep., see taga), 
 
 to mistake 
 
 misstaga sig, to be mistaken 
 mulna (generally impers.), I, 
 
 to become cloudy 
 motas (used reciprocally), to 
 
 meet one another 
 passa, I, to fit; be proper 
 roa sig, I, to amuse oneself 
 senare, later 
 skrika, skrek, skreko, skri- 
 
 kit, to yell, cry 
 skydda, I, to protect 
 skynda sig, I, to hurry
 
 144 MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 sfcummas (dep.), lib, to be trdkig, -t, boring, sad, bad 
 
 ashamed uppfo'ra, lib, to erect; to per- 
 snoa (impers.), I, to snow form 
 
 std till', to be (health) uppfora sig, to conduct oneself 
 
 svdr, -t, difficult, serious fora upp 1 , to bring up 
 
 sd att (conj.), so that ur'sakta, I, to excuse 
 
 till och med, even vasnas (dep.), I, to make noise 
 
 tills (conj.), until dndra, I, to change (something) 
 
 traffas (used reciprocally), to iindra sig, to change one's mind 
 
 meet or see one another omsesidig, -t, mutual 
 
 IDIOMS. 
 
 1. Varfor drojer han sd lunge? Why does he stay so long? 
 
 2. Myntet galler icke Idngre, the coin is no longer current; 
 han galler icke mycket har, he is of small account here. 
 
 3. att skdmmas for ndgot, to be ashamed of something. 
 
 4. att ta emot' frdmmande, to receive company. 
 
 5. Hur star det till med er Itrorf How is your brother? 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 Verbal Auxiliaries. 
 
 MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 251. The modal auxiliaries are: 
 
 INFINITIVE PRESENT IMPERFECT SUPINE 
 
 SING. PLUR. SG. AND PL. 
 
 kunna, can kan kunna kunde kunnat 
 
 ma, may ma ma matte 
 
 bora, ought to bor bora borde bort 
 
 skola, shall skall (ska) skola(ska) skulle stcolat 
 
 vilja, will vill vilja mile velat 
 
 maste, must maste maste maste mast 
 
 tor, is likely tor tora torde 
 
 The modals are conjugated regularly; some of them, how- 
 ever, are defective. The following remarks will suffice: 
 
 (a) The archaic second person has the ending -en: I skolen 
 (md takes only -n in 2nd pers. pi.: I man). 
 
 (~b) The singular form is practically the only one used in 
 conversation.
 
 MODAL AUXILIARIES. 145 
 
 (c) The compound tenses 'are formed regularly: jag har 
 skolat, han hade kunnat. Skola, md, tor, mdste, and bora 
 lack future and future perfect; md and tor lack perfect and 
 pluperfect. 
 
 fd) The subjunctives of the modals except of kunna and 
 vilja are not formed with md, matte, and skulle. The im- 
 perfect and pluperfect subjunctives only are in use (except 
 in the case of vilja and kunna) and they are like the indica- 
 tive: kunna and vilja may form a present subjunctive with 
 md or matte and the present infinitive; an imperfect sub- 
 junctive with skulle and the present infinitive; a perfect sub- 
 junctive with md or matte and the perfect infinitive; a plu- 
 perfect subjunctive with skulle and the perfect infinitive. 
 The imperfect and pluperfect subjunctives generally used are 
 identical with the imperfect and pluperfect indicative: im- 
 perfect subjunctive, jag skulle kunna, vilja, or jag kunde, 
 ville; perfect subjunctive, jag md, mdtte ha kunnat, velat; 
 pluperfect subjunctive, jag skulle ha kunnat, velat or jag hade 
 kunnat, velat. 
 
 SOME USES OF THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 252. The modal auxiliaries have more complete 
 forms in Swedish than in English. The Swedish 
 modal must for that reason sometimes be translated 
 by a paraphrase; as, jag mdste arbeta i gar, I had 
 to work yesterday; jag har kunnat gora det, I have 
 been able to do it. 
 
 253. The modal auxiliaries govern, as in English, 
 the simple infinitive: han sdger, att han ej kan 
 komma, he says that he cannot come; jag maste 
 ga nu, I must go now. 
 
 NOTE. They are generally accompanied by an infinitive, but sometimes a 
 complementary verb may be implied ; when an adverb of direction is used a 
 verb of motion may be omitted after skola, vilja, and mdste: jag maste hem, 
 I must go home ; jag vill in, I want to come in. 
 
 254. In the pluperfect subjunctive of skola and 
 bora, Swedish prefers a construction made up of
 
 146 SENSES OF MODALS. 
 
 the imperfect subjunctive of the modal and the 
 perfect infinitive of the verb to one consisting of 
 the pluperfect subjunctive of the modal and the 
 present infinitive, conforming thus with the Eng- 
 lish usage. The treatment of kunna is identical, 
 except that when we wish especially to empha- 
 size the pluperfect time of the ability or possibil- 
 ity we use the pluperfect subjunctive of kunna. 
 Ex. : han skulle ha gjort det, he should have done it ; 
 ni borde ha kommit, you ought to have come; 
 jag kunde ha skrivit, I could have written; but 
 jag hade kunnat skriva, I might have been able 
 to write. 
 
 NOTE. Vilja, on the other hand, would in a similar case always be put in 
 the pluperf. and the depending verb in the present infinitive: jag hade velat 
 skriva brevet, and not jag wile ha skrivit; han hade velat ga, om hans mor ej 
 hade varit sjuk, he would have wished to go, if his mother had not been sick. 
 
 SENSES OF MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 255. Kunna. Originally it meant to know how, to 
 be skilled in. This use is still retained in the verb 
 when used independently : han kan svenska, sin liixa; 
 he knows Swedish, his lesson. 
 
 (a) Ability : han kan Idsa, men han vill ej, he can 
 read but he does not want to. 
 
 (b) Possibility: det kan nog hdnda, that may 
 happen; jag kunde nog gora det, I could perhaps 
 do it. 
 
 (c) Permission: nu kan ni ga, now you may go. 
 In this sense it is often used as a mild command. 
 
 (d) Willingness : det kan jag giva (ge) er genast, 
 I can give you that at once. 
 
 (e) Habit, custom : hon kunde grata i timtal, nar
 
 EXERCISE. 147 
 
 hon tdnkte pa sitt doda barn, she would cry for 
 hours when she thought of her dead child. 
 
 NOTE. Habit and custom are more often expressed by the verbs bruka, and 
 pliiga and the infinitive, or by the present or imperfect of the verb: ndr han sag 
 mig, brukade lian jraga, or, frdgade han, whenever he saw me he would ask. 
 
 256. Ma. 
 
 (a) Auxiliary: the present and imperfect are 
 used as auxiliaries to form the present subjunctive. 
 
 (b) Desire: ma Gud valsigna vart arbete, may 
 God bless our work; vi matte vdl komma i tid till 
 taget, may we only come in time to the train (would 
 that we might etc.). 
 
 NOTE 1. Matte expresses a more vivid wish than ma. 
 
 Z. From this sense of ma springs its use in purpose clauses and some other 
 clauses introduced by att: han badj att jag matte stanna (also, bad mig att 
 stanna) he asked me to remain. 
 
 (c) Permission, possibility: ma (not matte) may 
 be used with the sense of kan: det ma sd vara, that 
 may be so ; occasionally in the sense of fa (263, a) : 
 det ma du ej gora, you may not do that. 
 
 NOTE. Here belongs the expression mahdnda, perhaps. 
 
 (d) Supposition, expressed by the imperfect of 
 the modal matte (not ma) : det matte ha varit 
 hemskt, it must have been uncanny; du matte vara 
 mycket trott, I dare say, you are very tired. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIII. 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Jag visste icke, vad jag ville, du visste 
 icke, vad du ville, etc. 2. Jag hade kunnat gora en resa, 
 om jag hade velat, du hade, etc. 3. Jag skulle vilja ga ut, 
 men jag maste stanna hemma, du skulle, etc. 4. Jag skulle 
 ha spelat tennis, om jag hade kunnat, du, etc. 5. Om jag
 
 148 EXERCISE. 
 
 hade velat fara med tiotaget, sa hade jag mast skynda mig;, 
 om du, etc. 6. Jag horde ha fragat min far forst, om han 
 ville lata mig ga med, du horde, etc. 7. Jag ville giirna 
 veta, om jag skulle kunna gora det, du, etc. 8. Matte jag 
 ej ha kommit for sent ! matte du, etc. 
 
 B. 1. Min van Karl fragade mig i gar morse, om jag 
 ville fara med honom till staden. 2. Jag sade at honom, 
 att jag hade mycket arbete, som jag horde gora, men att 
 jag onskade, att han matte fraga min far, om jag kunde 
 fara med. 3. Matte pappa bara tillata det! tankte jag, 
 nar Karl avlagsnade sig foi att bedja honom om lov. 4. Vi 
 skulle kunna ha sa roligt tillsammans. 5. Naturligtvis 
 skulle vi bevista det stora fotbollspelet, som skulle utkam- 
 pas mellan tva av de basta fotbollagen i staden. 6. Jag bar 
 ofta bett pappa, att han matte lata mig spela fotboll, men 
 jag bar ej kunnat overtyga honom om att det ar en nyttig 
 idrott. 7. Jag brukar ofta saga, att om han blott forstodo 
 spelet, sa maste han finna det intressant. 8. "Det ma sa 
 vara", sade han en gang, "jag bar blott sett ett enda spel 
 och kunde alls inte bli pa det klara darmed. 9. Det syntes 
 mig vara litet for mycket for ett spel och litet for litet for 
 ett slagsmal." 10. Karl kom tillbaka och sade, att han 
 hade mast lova, att vi skulle vara tillbaka sa tidigt, att jag 
 kunde vattna blomsterrabatterna och kiippa grasmattan. 
 11. Det matte ha varit svart for Karl att fa pappas tilla- 
 telse. 
 
 C. Conversation. 1. Vad fragade Karl er i gar morse? 
 2. Varfor trodde ni ej, att ni skulle fa folja med? 3. Vad 
 onskade ni, att Karl skulle gora? 4. Varfor avlagsnade 
 Karl sig. 5. Vad skulle ni ga till, om ni finge resa till sta- 
 den ? 6. Mellan vilka skulle spelet utkampas ? 7. Vad bar 
 ni ej lyckats overtyga er far om ? 8. Varfor tror ni ej, att
 
 VOCABULARY. 149 
 
 er far finner spelet intressant? 9. Hur manga fotbollspel 
 har er far bevistat? 10. Har Karl lyckats att fa er fars 
 tillatelse till resan? 11. Vad maste ni gora, nar ni kom- 
 mer hem? 
 
 D. 1. I should like to go to town with my friend Carl. 
 
 2. A football game will be played between the two best 
 teams in town and I should like very much 1 to attend it. 
 
 3. But I do not know whether (om) I may 2 go, for my 
 father has given me much work to do before evening. 
 
 4. But it seems to me that he ought to allow me to go this 
 time (gang). 5. I have had (perf. of maste) to stay at 
 home all summer 3 in order to take care of the garden, 
 water the flower beds and cut the lawn. 6. I have always 
 wished to play football, but my father does not think that 
 it is a useful sport. 7. If Carl were only here, he would 
 be able to get my father's permission. 8. I am so glad 
 that you came, Carl. Would you go and ask father (pappa) 
 whether I may 2 go? 9. You see, I ought (horde] really 
 to work to-day. I should have done (254) this work yes- 
 terday. 10. What did papa say? Did he give his per- 
 mission? 11. Yes, you may 2 go with me; but you will have 
 (pres. of maste} to be back early. 12. He must be very 
 rich, for he spends much money. 13. I wish he would come 
 soon so that we could 4 begin to eat. 14. Now I must say 
 good-bye to you, but we might meet 5 again to-morrow. 
 
 l Skulle mycket garna vilja... 2 Fdr (263). 'After hela, which is not 
 preceded by the prepositive article, the noun takes the definite form. 'Imper- 
 fect subjunctive of kunna. 5 s-form, 186a. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 atttid, always en Worn' 'sterrabatt' ', -er, flower 
 
 av'ldgsna, I, to rerriove bed 
 
 avlagsna sig, to go away blott, only 
 
 bara, only fara, to travel, go 
 
 bevista, I, to attend fara med, to accompany
 
 150 SENSES OF MODALS. 
 
 ett fotbollspel, , football game naturligtvis, of course 
 ett fotbollag (lag), , foot- nyttig, -t, useful 
 
 ball team ett slagsmdl, , fight 
 
 forst, first skota, Ha, take care of 
 
 for mycket, too much ett spel, , game, play 
 
 en grasmatta, -or, lawn spela, I, play 
 
 en gang, once tennis, tennis 
 
 en i'drott, -er, sport tidigt, early 
 
 igen, again tillsammans, together 
 
 Tclippa, Ha, to cut, mow en tilldtelse, permission 
 
 ett lov, , permission tillata (insep.), to permit 
 
 lova, I, to promise ett tiotdg, ten o'clock train 
 
 mellan, between vattna, I, to water 
 
 i gar morse, yesterday morn- verkligen, really 
 
 ing o'vertyga ( insep. ) , I, to convince 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. att fara till staden, to go to town. 
 
 2. Jag vill gdrna fara med, I should like to accompany. 
 
 3. Det synes mig, or jag tyclcer, it seems to me. 
 
 4. bli pd det Jclara, understand. 
 < % 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 Verbal Auxiliaries (Continued). 
 
 SENSES OF MODAL AUXILIARIES (Continued). 
 
 257. Bora. 
 
 (a) Duty: jag bb'r gb'ra vad som ar rtitt, I ought 
 to do what is right. 
 
 NOTE 1. The imperfect borde is generally used with present meaning and 
 hag the same signification as bar (ought) if unaccented : du borde skammas. 
 you ought to be ashamed of yourself. If accented it implies that one does 
 not do what one ought to, for instance: jag borde ga hem och arbeta, I ought 
 (that is, if I were to do my duty) to go home and work. 
 
 2. In the sense of duty bora is weaker than skola. 
 
 (b) Calculation : taget bor vara har om tio minu- 
 ter, the train ought to be here in ten minutes. 
 
 (c) Fitness : sa bor det vara, thus it ought to be. 
 
 258. Skola. Originally it signified duty or obli- 
 gation.
 
 SENSES OF MODALS. 151 
 
 (a) Auxiliary: 
 
 1. The present (skall) is used as an auxiliary 
 with the infinitive to form the future tense : jag skall 
 ga, I shall go ; jag skall hava gatt, I shall have gone. 
 
 2. The imperfect (skulle) is used with the in- 
 finitive as one mode of forming the imperfect and 
 pluperfect subjunctive. 
 
 (b) Condition or contingency: om ni skulle se 
 honom, sa hdlsa honom frdn mig, give him my greet- 
 ings, if you should see him ; han sade, att han skulle 
 komma, he said that he would come. 
 
 (c) Duty or necessity, when proceeding from 
 the speaker : du skulle ha gatt, ndr han bad dig, you 
 should have gone when he asked you; du skall icke 
 stjala, thou shalt not steal; om vi ska gora det, sa 
 lat oss gora det snart, if we are to do it, then let us 
 do it soon. 
 
 (d) Threat or promise: det ska du inte ha gjort 
 for inte, I will remember you for this (i. e. repay 
 you in kind). 
 
 (e) Intention: han skulle ha kommit i gar, he 
 intended to come yesterday. 
 
 (f) Report: han skall vara kolossalt rik, he is 
 said to be enormously rich. 
 
 (g) Wish: vi skulle allt ha en trddgard, i vilken 
 alia slags blommor skulle vdxa, I wish we had a gar- 
 den in which all kinds of flowers might grow. 
 
 259. Vilja. 
 
 (a) Will, intention, purpose: han ville visst icke 
 gora dig ond, he did not at a!l intend to make you
 
 152 SENSES OF MODALS. 
 
 angry; han vill hem, jag kan ej kvarhdlla honom, 
 he is determined to go home, I cannot keep him. 
 
 (b) Wish, entreaty or request: han ville garna 
 hjalpa, he was anxious to help ; v ill ni komma ndr- 
 mare or vill ni vara sd god och komma ndrmare, 
 please come a little closer (vill is very often used 
 thus to express a mild command) ; jag ville garna 
 ha en kopp till, I should like another cup. 
 
 NOTE 1. The imperfect subjunctive of vilja with the adverb garna, willingly, 
 is generally used to express a request politely as above, sometimes with vdl 
 and a negative: ni ville vdl inte gora del for migf Would you do that for me' 
 
 2. Vilja is often used with an object, especially a pronoun: Vad vill han 
 dig t What does he have to say to you ? han vill mig vdl, he wishes me well, 
 he is well disposed toward me. Its signification seems to forbid its use with 
 any other than animate subjects, but it is often used figuratively with inani- 
 mate: min klocka vill ej ga, my watch does not run (won't run) ; blommor 
 'vilja ej vaxa i sadan jord, flowers do not grow in such soil. 
 
 REMARK. Do not translate will and would by vill, ville, 
 if they are only a sign of the future or the subjunctive. Will 
 and would denoting habitual action are generally expressed 
 by the simple tenses, present and past, or by the verbs bruka 
 and plaga (255, e). 
 
 260. Mdste. 
 
 (a) Physical necessity: jag mdste ha mat, annars 
 svdlterjag ihjal, I must have food, or else I shall 
 starve to death. 
 
 (b) Logical necessity: det mdste vara sant, that 
 must be true. 
 
 (c) Moral necessity: barn mdste lyda sina for- 
 dldrar, children must obey their parents. 
 
 261. Tor. 
 
 Probability, supposition: the imperfect torde is 
 used with present sense and is of much more fre- 
 quent occurrence than the present tor: det torde
 
 VERBAL AUXILIARIES. 153 
 
 vara ganska svdrt, very likely it is quite difficult; 
 han torde vara sjuk, ty han lovade sdkert att komma, 
 I suppose that he is sick, for he promised surely to 
 come. 
 
 OTHER VERBAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 262. The causative auxiliary lata, to let, make, 
 or cause (to do or to be done). It has three main 
 significations : 
 
 (a) to allow, to give permission : han lat pojkarna 
 leka, he allowed the boys to play. 
 
 (b) to have somebody do a thing: jag har latit 
 Karl hdmta bro'det, I have had Carl fetch the bread. 
 When the verb has this signification the subject of 
 the infinitive is often omitted: jag har Idtit gora en 
 rock, I have had a coat made. 
 
 XOTE. In the latter case it is best to render lata, by have and the infinitive 
 by the passive participle. 
 
 (c) Lata is used to paraphrase the first person 
 plural of the imperative : lat oss ga; also occasionally 
 as a substitute for the passive ; as, det later sig gora, 
 that can be done; han har latit overtala sig, he has 
 been persuaded. 
 
 NOTE. In this reflexive construction the passive infinitive is also permitted : 
 the reflexive always precedes the infinitive: han har latit sig ofvertalas, he has 
 been persuaded. 
 
 263. Fa, to get, to receive, is also used as an 
 auxiliary in a variety of meanings. 
 
 (a) Permission : nu far du ga, now you may go. 
 Tn this sense it is more common than either kunna 
 
 255, c) or ma (256, c). 
 
 (b) Necessity: som gosse fick han ofta gora en 
 
 Swedish Grammar 11
 
 154 EXERCISE. 
 
 mans arbete, as a boy he often had to do a man's 
 work. 
 
 NOTE 1. Very often the word lov, permission, is used euphemistically with 
 
 fa when it denotes necessity: du far lov alt studera nu, you must study now. 
 
 2. Mdstc has a more general and absolute meaning than fa; thus, we must 
 all die, must be rendered by, vi mdste alia do. 
 
 (c) With the verbs veta, hora, and se, fa is used in 
 an inchoative sense resembling the English get; as, 
 hon fick veta det i gar, she received news of it yes- 
 terday (learned to know) ; kommer han? du far se, 
 you will see (learn). 
 
 NOTE. When used independently fa presents many striking analogies with 
 gel. Fa tag pa, to get hold of ; fa igenom en sale, get a thing through, etc. 
 
 264. Lar is used only in the present indicative 
 to denote a supposition based on report. In this 
 sense it is more common than skola (258, f ) : han 
 lar vara sjuk, they say he is sick. 
 
 NOTE. The same idea is more commonly expressed by the use of the adverb 
 visst, certainly, surely ; han ar visst sjuk. The adverbs allt, nog and vdl ex- 
 press the idea conveyed by torde (261). 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 
 
 A. Continue: 1. Jag bor vara hemma om en timma, 
 ty min far har sagt, att jag maste hjalpa honom, du bor 
 vara, etc. 2. Om jag anda skall gora det, sa borcle jag gora 
 det strax, etc. 3. Jag skulle garna vilja ha kaffe, om jag 
 blott finge lov af min lakare att dricka det, du skulle garna, 
 etc. 4. Som gosse hade jag nog fatt arbeta tungt, om jag 
 hade kunnat, men jag var sa klen, som gosse hade du, etc. 
 5. Jag skulle ha latit gora mig en kostym, om min far hade 
 velat ge mig pengar att betala den med, etc. 6. Om han 
 hade velat avlagsna sig, sa kunde jag ha gatt till sangs 
 tidigt, etc. 7. Jag lat honom vanta pa svar, ty jag var ej 
 pa det klara med hvad han ville, du lat honom, etc.
 
 EXERCISE. 155 
 
 B. En bonde hade kommit till en marknad och ville 
 kopa nagot. Han stod vid ett av marknadsstanden och 
 sag, hur folk kopte glasbgon. Handlanden gav dem en 
 bok med fin stil i, sedan satte de pa ett par glasogon och 
 sago uppmarksamt i boken. "Kan ni lasa den liar sfilen 
 bra?" fragade handlanden, och nar den andre svarade ja, 
 sa kopte han glasb'gonen. Bonden ville ocksa kopa sig ett 
 par glasogon. Han steg fram till disken, satte pa sig det 
 ena paret efter det andra och sag i boken, man lade ater 
 bort dem. Handlanden ville hjalpa honom och erbjb'd ho- 
 nom olika glasogon, men bonden sade gang efter aiman: 
 "Jag kan inte lasa med dem." Till sist fragade honom en 
 annan bonde, som under tiden hade kommit dit: "Men 
 sag mig, kan du verkligen lasa?" "En sadan dumbom du 
 ar", svarade den forsta bonden, "skulle jag. val kopa mig 
 glasogon, om jag kunde lasa?" 
 
 (7. Conversation: 1. Vem hade kommit till markna- 
 den? 2. Vad ville han garna gora? 3. Vad gjorde man 
 vid ett av standen? 4. Vad gjorde handelsmannen for att 
 kunna se, vad for glasogon han maste ge dem? 5. Av vem 
 bor man lata undersoka sina ogon, innan man koper glas- 
 ogon? (ogonlakaren). 6. Yad for stil kunna de, som ha 
 svaga ogon, bast lasa? 7. Vad tyckte bonden, att han ocksa 
 skulle ha? 8. Vad gjorde han alltsa? 9. Vad fick han- 
 delsmannen lov att ge honom? (one pair after another). 
 10. Hade bonden velat kopa glasogon, om han hade kunnat 
 lasa? 11. Vad trodde han, att glasb'gonen skulle satta ho- 
 nom i stand 1 att gbra. 
 
 *Satta i stand, to enable; roro i stand, to be able. 
 
 D. 1. A peasant who was unable 1 to read wished to buy 
 a pair (of) spectacles. 2. He thought (trodde) that all 
 he had to have in order to be able (165, 2) to read was a
 
 156 VOCABULARY. 
 
 pair (of) spectacles. 3. He said to himself: "I ought to 
 have spectacles, and if I can get a pair that fits me I shall 
 be able to read." 4. The peasant would not have wished 
 (254, note) to buy glasses, had he been able to read. 5. A 
 wise man would (258, b) have had (262, b) his eyes ex- 
 amined by an oculist before buying 2 glasses. 6. The dealer 
 let him try one pair after another, thinking 3 that he would 
 find a pair which would fit him. 7. The young man is not 
 permitted (263, a) to read because his eyes are weak. 
 8. The doctor says that he may read a short while to-mor- 
 row. 9. What do the children wish (to have) for Christ- 
 mas ? They want many things, but we can't afford to give 
 them much. 10. Then they will have (use pres. of modal) 
 to be satisfied with little. 11. Carl asked my father, "May 
 we go to town?" and my father answered, "You may go, 
 but you must be back before six o'clock." 12. Your father 
 must have a great deal to do now. Several times I have 
 wished to see him, but I have not been able 1 to. 13. Yes, 
 he is having (262, b) a house built in the country, and 
 must superintend the work. 14. Where have you had your 
 suit made? I should like (259, b) to have the address of 
 your tailor. 15. He can make clothes that fit; he is said 
 (258, g) to have studied his art in London. 
 
 1 Icke kunna in proper tense. : Expand into a temporal clause with innan. 
 3 Causal clause with emedan, endr or do. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 en adress', -er, address flere(a) more, several 
 
 en bonde, bonder, peasant forstdn'dig, -t, wise, sensible 
 bort'laggd 1 (sep.), to put away genom, through 
 bygga, lib, to build glasogon, spectacles 
 
 en disk, -ar, counter gdng efter annan, time and 
 
 en dumbom*, -mar, fool again 
 
 er'bjuda, -bjo'd, -bjodo, -bju- en handlande, , merchant 
 dit, -en, ~et, to offer en Jiandelsman, -man, dealer
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 157 
 
 kliider, clothes en skriiddare, , tailor 
 
 en konst, -er, art atiga fram', to step forth 
 
 kort, , short stil t -ar, style; print 
 
 liten, -et, def. lilla(e), pi. en stund, -er, while 
 
 smd, little wag, -t, weak 
 
 en marknad, -er, fair under tiden, in the meantime 
 ett marknadsstund, booth un'dersoka tinsep.), to examine 
 
 mycket, much upp'marksam, -t, attentive 
 
 nu, now vilja ha', to want 
 
 nijjd, nojt, satisfied en ogonldkare, , oculist 
 
 olik, -t, unlike, different overvaka (insep.), I, to super- 
 
 ett rdd, , advice; means intend 
 sex, six 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. Jag har ej rdd, I cannot afford. 
 
 2. Vad vill du ha till julklappf What do you wish 
 for Christmas (.present)? 
 
 3. att luta sy en rock, to have a coat made. 
 
 J More commonly used separably. 
 
 2 Note how final m of a word when the preceding vowel is short is doubled on 
 its becoming intervocalic by the addition of an ending (3). 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 Indefinite Pronouns. 
 
 I. USED AS PRONOUNS ONLY. 
 
 265. Man (indeclinable) is used only in the 
 nominative as an indefinite personal subject and, 
 lacking an exact equivalent, is variously translated 
 one, they, you, we, people (cf. German man, French 
 on} . Ex. : man sager, att han har skrivit en ny bok, 
 they say that he has written a new book; man fb'r- 
 talar mig, people slander me. 
 
 (a) In the oblique cases the corresponding forms 
 of en are used, ens for the genitive, en for the 
 objective ; the reflexive is sig. Thus : vad man ger, 
 bringar en lycka, what one gives brings one luck;
 
 158 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 man skulle icke beromma sig sjdlv, one should not 
 praise oneself. The reflexive possessive is sin, sitt, 
 otherwise ens is usedr ens vdnner dro ofta vdrre 
 an ens fiender, one's friends are often worse than 
 one's enemies; man bar vorda sina fordldrar, one 
 ought to honor one's parents. 
 
 (b) When man is the subject of a transitive verb 
 it is usually best to render the sentence by a passive : 
 man har behandlat honom ilia, he has been badly 
 treated. 
 
 266. Allting (gen. -s; no plur.), everything. 
 
 267. Ndgonting (gen. -s; no plur.), something, 
 anything. 
 
 268. Ingenting (gen. -s; no plur.), nothing, 
 Ingenting as well as ndgonting in a negative sen- 
 tence are often intensified by a following (sometimes 
 preceding) alls; as, har du sett nagonting? Ingen- 
 ting alls, have you seen anything? Nothing at all; 
 jag sag alls ingenting, I saw nothing whatever. 
 
 NOTE 1. Ingenting and ndgonting are followed by an adjective in the indef- 
 inite form of the neuter: har ni nagonting gott alt ataf do you have anything 
 good to eat? Likewise nagot and intet. 
 
 2. Ingenting is usually placed before the supine of a compound tense, ndgon- 
 ting, after; likewise intet is placed before and nagot after; Jag har ingenting 
 (intet) sett, jag har sett ndgonting (nagot). In a dependent clause ingenting and 
 intet come immediately after the subject: han sager, att han ingenting har sett. 
 
 269. Envar (gen. envars; no plur.) ; var och en 
 (neut. vart och ett, gen. vars och ens; no plur.), 
 sometimes en och var, everybody, every one : var och 
 en (envar) har sina fel, everybody has his faults; 
 envars (vars och ens) rykte bor respekteras, every- 
 body's reputation should be respected. 
 
 NOTE. Var och en is sometimes used adjectively.
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 151) 
 
 II. USED AS BOTH PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 
 
 270. En (neut. ett, only as adj., gen. ens, plur. 
 ena, def. form ene, ena), one, a, an: man tror ens 
 egna vdnner bast, one has most confidence in one's 
 own friends; han dr en av mina bdsta vdnner, he 
 is one of my best friends. In less elegant conversa- 
 tion en is used in the nominative with the same 
 sense as man; in the oblique cases it always takes 
 the place of man. It is not used after adjectives 
 like the English one: the red apple and the green 
 one, det roda applet och det grb'na. 
 
 271. Den ene (-a) (fern, den ena, neut. det ena) , 
 the one, is often used in correlation with den an- 
 dre (-a), etc., the other: den ene kommer, den 
 andre gar, one comes, the other goes. 
 
 272. En och annan (neut. ett och annat, gen. 
 en och annans; no plur.), one now and then, one 
 here and there: en och annan sdger sd, one now 
 and then says so (some say so). 
 
 273. Ende (-a) (plur. and def. enda), only, is 
 used as an adjective: han var enda sonen, he was 
 the only son. When used as a pronoun it is always 
 preceded by the definite or indefinite article and 
 takes an -s in the genitive : dessa voro de enda, som 
 voro ddr, these were the only ones who were there; 
 jag har ej sett en enda av dem, I have not seen a 
 single one of them. 
 
 274. Nagon (neut. nagot, gen. ndgons, nagots; 
 plur. nagra; gen. ndgras), some, some one, any, 
 anyone, a few, something, anything: har du nagra
 
 1 GO EXERCISE. 
 
 pengar? have you any money? nagon har frag at 
 efter dig, some one (has) asked for you; jag har 
 ho'rt ndgot vackert om dig, I have heard something 
 nice about you; nagons hatt ligger har, somebody's 
 hat lies here. 
 
 NOTE 1. The words for any and some when used in a partitive sense are 
 often omitted: har ni tdndstickort do you have any matches? 
 2. Some when it means a little is translated by litet (lite). 
 
 275. Ingen (neut. intet, inget, gen. ingens, 
 intets; plur. inga, gen. ingas), no one, none, nobody, 
 nothing; as adjective, no: jag har inga pengar (also 
 jag har icke nagra pengar), I have no money; 
 ingens karaktdr kan vara renare an hans, nobody's 
 character can be purer than his. 
 
 NOTE. The paraphrase icke nagon, nagra is more common than ingen, inga; 
 at the beginning of a statement ingen is preferred. Inget is becoming more 
 and more common for intet. 
 
 276. All (neut. allt, gen. alias, allts; plur. alia, 
 gen. alias), all, everything: Gud har skapat allt, 
 God has created everything; alia hans dottrar voro 
 vackra, all his daughters were pretty; all j or den 
 dr Guds verk, all the earth is the work of God. 
 
 NOTE 1. When all in English means whole it must be rendered by hela 
 without the prepositive article : jag har arbetat hela doyen, I have worked 
 all day ; hela Paris, all Paris. 
 
 2. For the use of alls see 268, for the use of allra see 316. 
 
 3. Observe the following idiomatic uses of hel: som ett hell, as a whole; 
 helt och hallet, wholly, completely ; pd del hela taget, taken as a whole, on 
 the whole. 
 
 EXERCISE XXV. 
 
 A. Supply the missing indefinites: 1. Ar . . . (anybody} 
 dar? Jag ser ... (nobody}. 2. Men jag ser ... (some- 
 body's) hatt hanga dar. . . . (nobody) har kommit, sa 
 vitt 1 jag vet. 3. ... (one) horde lasa dorren, annars kan 
 ju vem som heist komma in, och . . . (one) hb'r det icke.
 
 EXERCISE. 161 
 
 4. ... (somebody) kunde till och med komma ocli stjala 
 bort . . . (one's) 2 saker, utan att man visste det. 5. Brev- 
 bararen liar varit bar med ... (a few) brev for dig. 6. ... 
 (one) var ofrankerat, och jag maste betala fyrtio ore, . . . 
 (the other) var rekommenderat. 7. Har du . . . (any) fri- 
 marken att lana mig? Jag bar skrivit brev . . . (all) da- 
 gen till . . . (every one) i familjen, och jag bar inte . . . 
 (a single) frimarke kvar. 8. Hur skall . . . (one) fa ... 
 (one's) 2 post, nar ... (one) ar ute och reser? 9. Lat 
 adressera dina brev poste restante till . . . (some) av de sta- 
 der, du amnar besoka. 10. ... (everybody), som ar ute 
 och reser, liar svarighet med posten. 11. Middagen maste 
 vara fardig nu. Var god och tag plats bredvid mig. 
 12. ... (no) ceremonier, som ni ser; vi aro blott ... 
 (some) vanner. 13. Behagar ni ... (some) soppa? Sop- 
 pan iir utmarkt. Skulle ni vilja ge mig ... (a little more), 
 li. Behagar ni en kopp kaffe till? 
 
 l Sd vitt (vitt, neuter of vid), as far as; note omission of som (as). *Sin 
 or ens (265, a). 
 
 B. I am at home to no one 1 ; I wish to rest a little. 
 2. If anyone asks for me, say that I shall be 2 at home again 
 at seven o'clock (klockan sju). 3. One (271) of those two 
 Americans asked for (efter) you; he left no card, and I 
 cannot recall his name. 4. Have you ever seen anything 
 so annoying? Here I have waited for (pa) him all week, 
 and now when I am out (for) a few minutes he comes. 
 
 5. Do you have anything good to eat? Yes, this chicken 
 is excellent. 6. Should you like a wing or a leg? 7. If 
 you will allow 2 me, I shall take a little of this fruit. 8. Take 
 what you want without ceremony; here one helps oneself 
 (248, note). 9. Try this wine; it is ten years old and of 
 with (till) the fruit. 10. Thank you, not now; I shall 
 
 the best quality. One generally 3 takes a glass (of) wine
 
 162 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 taste your wine another time; but I shall take another 
 apple. 11. One single apple like 4 this is worth more to me 
 than all (the) wine in the world. 12. Now, when we have 
 eaten, we shall see the sights of (bese) the city. I haven't 
 seen anything of Stockholm yet. 13. Where shall we go? 
 Everybody who visits Stockholm must of course visit the 
 famous Skansen and the Northern Museum. 14. Let us 
 all go there. What do you prefer, car, cab, or automo- 
 bile? 
 
 translated: not... for anybody. 2 Use the present tense. 'Adverbs cannot 
 stand between subject and verb except adverbs of negation and a few others 
 in a dependent clause (179, a). *Translate: one such apple as (som) this. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 adresse'ra, I, to address lasa, I la, to lock 
 
 en amerikan', -er, American 
 
 behaga, I (often impers.), to 
 please; to desire 
 
 bredvid, beside 
 
 en brevbarare, , letter car- 
 rier 
 
 bast, best 
 
 en ceremoni', -er, ceremony 
 
 en familj', -er, family 
 
 ett frimarke, -n, postage stamp 
 
 fyrtio, forty 
 
 furarglig, -t, annoying 
 
 forsoka, Ila, to try 
 
 Jiiinga, lib, to hang 
 
 ett kort (visit'kort) , , card 
 (visiting card) 
 
 en kvalitet', -er, quality 
 
 kvar, over, left 
 
 mer, more 
 
 minnas (dep.), lib, to remember 
 
 ofrankerad, -at, without stamp 
 
 poste restante, general delivery 
 
 rekommende'rad, -at, regis- 
 tered 
 
 sju, seven 
 
 smaka, I, to taste 
 
 stjiila bort', bortstjula (sep.), 
 -stal, -stulo, -stulit, -en, 
 -et, to steal 
 
 en svdrignet, -er, difficulty 
 
 en soppa, -or, soup 
 
 ito.-teo 
 
 Vila sig (refl.), I, to rest 
 
 ett vin, -er, wine 
 
 en vinge, -ar, wing 
 
 ett ore, -n, ore (coin worth 
 14 cent). 
 
 lamna, I, to leave 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. Vad behagar nif What would you like? 
 
 2. Var god och tag plats, please sit down. 
 
 3. Skulle ni vilja ha en kopp kaffe tillf Would you 
 like another cup of coffee?
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 Indefinite Pronouns (Continued). 
 
 277. Mdngen (neut. mdnget, gen. mangens; pi. 
 and def . manga, gen. mangas) , many a in the singu- 
 lar and many in the plural. Ex.: manga vackra 
 blommor vdxa i trddgarden, many beautiful flowers 
 grow in the garden; mdngen rik dr olycklig, many 
 a rich person is unhappy. 
 
 278. Mycket (indeclinable), much: hur mycket 
 pengar har du pa dig ? how much money do you have 
 about you? icke alls mycket, not very much. 
 
 279. Annan (neut. annat, gen. annans; pi. and 
 def. andra, gen. andras), other. Like the English 
 other it is preceded either by the definite or in- 
 definite article in the singular: har ni en annan 
 bok? Have you another book? Vad go'ra de andra? 
 What are the others doing? 
 
 NOTE 1. ffagon annan, ndgot annat means somebody else, something else. 
 
 2. En annan means another, a different one; en till means one more: var 
 god och giv mig en annan bok, please give me another book ; jag ville garna 
 ha en kopp till, I should like another cup. 
 
 3. Varannan signifies every other : varannan dag, every other day. 
 
 280. Somlig (neut. somligt; pi. somliga, gen. 
 somligas), some, is used as a pronoun or an adjec- 
 tive generally only in the neut. sing, and plur. of 
 all genders: somliga mdnniskor, some people; som- 
 liga o'nska det har, andra det ddr, some want this 
 and some that. 
 
 NOTE 1. Note the correlatives somliga. . . . andra, some. . . . others. 
 2. The English some is generally to be rendered by ndgon, nagra, in speak- 
 ing of individuals or individual things; by litet (lite), in speaking of quantity. 
 
 281. Flera(e) (gen. fleras), more, several.
 
 164 INDEFINITES. 
 
 282. Flesta(e) (gen. flestas) , most, the majority. 
 
 Flera and fiesta are used as comparative and superlative of 
 manga. When flera does not express comparison it signifies 
 several, quite a few; fiesta is always preceded by the article, 
 but the noun it modifies does not take the postpositive ar- 
 ticle: flera voro hiir i dag an i gar, more were here to-day 
 than yesterday; pd fieras begaran sjong han sdngen, at the 
 request of several he sang the song; de fiesta rosta nog fur 
 honom, the majority will doubtless vote for him. 
 
 283. Fa (gen. fas), few. It is very often pre- 
 ceded by nagra: ndgra fa voro hdr, a few were here. 
 
 284. Varannan (neut. vartannat; no plur.), 
 every other: varannan dag ha vi tyska, we have 
 German every other day. 
 
 NOTE. Om vartannat, topsy-turvy; var (vart) tredje, var (vart) fjdrde; 
 every third ; every fourth. 
 
 285. Endera (neut. ettdera) , one of two, either; 
 
 ndgondera (neut. nagotdera), either; 
 ingendera (intetdera), neither; 
 vardera (vartdera), each. 
 
 These take an s in the genitive when used pro- 
 nominally.- They are rarely used as adjectives. Ex. : 
 ingendera av oss fick ndgot, neither of us got any- 
 thing; han kan komma endera dagen, he may come 
 one of these days ; hdr ha ni ett apple vardera, here 
 you have an apple each. 
 
 286. Var (neuter vart; no plur.) 1 
 
 varje (indeclinable) Veach, every 
 
 varenda (neut. vartenda, no pl.)J 
 
 Varje is only used adjectively. Varenda used as 
 a pronoun is followed by en, ett. Ex. : varje larjunge 
 mdste go'ra sin plikt. every pupil must do his duty;
 
 INDEFINITES. 165 
 
 jag har givit bort vartenda ett, I have given away 
 every one. 
 
 NOTE. Varje may sometimes be used with the sense of any: varje penna dr 
 god nog, any pen will do. 
 
 287. Vilken (neut. vilket, plur. vilka) som heist 
 and vad som heist (neuter) are used pronominally 
 and adjectively with the sense of whosoever, what- 
 soever, whichsoever, anyone at all, anything at all, 
 any at all; vem som heist, whosoever, anyone (at 
 all), is used only pronominally. 
 
 When these words are used as adjectives, som 
 heist generally follows the noun ; when used as pro- 
 nouns, som may be dropped before a relative clause. 
 Ex. : vilken penna som heist dr god nog, any pen is 
 good enough; vem som heist kan komma, anyone 
 at all may come; Ids vad bok som heist, read any 
 book you please; vid vilken tid som heist, at any 
 time; vdlj hvad heist, som passar, chose anything 
 that suits you. 
 
 1. Ndgon, ingen, hurudan, and conjunctive adverbs 
 like nar, hur, sd, likewise form compounds with som heist 
 to become especially indefinite; as, dr det ndgon som heist 
 or sale, varfor du icke kan din Idxa? Nej, ingen som heist, 
 is there any reason whatsoever why you do not know your 
 lesson? No, no reason whatever; kom nar som heist, come 
 at any time; kor sd fort som heist, drive as fast as you 
 please. 
 
 2. The particle an is also used with the relatives and cer- 
 tain conjunctive adverbs to impart an indefinite force: vem 
 det an dr, whoever it may be; vad du an gor, gor det veil, 
 whatever you do, do it well; vad svar han an gav, whatever 
 answer he gave; hur fort det an gar, sd, hinna vi ej from 
 i tid, no matter how fast we go, we won't be there in time. 
 
 3. Note the difference in meaning between han gjorde 
 vad som heist, and vad han an gjorde.
 
 166 EXERCISE. 
 
 288. Bdda, bdgge (gen. bddas, bdgges), both, 
 are plural forms. When bada is preceded by the 
 prepositive article it means two; as, de bdda flic- 
 korna tiro systrar, the two girls are sisters; but 
 bada systrarna kommo, both sisters came. 
 
 OBSERVE. Vi bdda, ni bada, de bdda, both of us, both of you, both of them. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVI. 
 
 A. En grosshandlare behovde en gang en springpojke 
 pa sitt kontor och satte fordenskull en annons i tidningen. 
 Manga gossar infunno sig pa kontoret nasta dag. Somliga 
 av dessa hade medfort goda rekommendationsbrev, men 
 grosshandlaren skickade bort dem alia utan att se pa deras 
 rekommendationer och beholl en enda liten gosse, som icke 
 hade nagot som heist skriftligt intyg. En av hans vanner, 
 som var narvarande, fragade varfor han just valde en, som 
 ej hade nagon rekommendation, da de fiesta andra hade 
 medfort sadana. "Jo", svarade grosshandlaren, "han hade 
 ej sa fa rekommendationer, ehuru de ej voro skriftliga. 
 Han torkade av fotterna vid db'rren och tog upp en knapp- 
 nal fran golvet, foljaktligen maste han vara bade renlig 
 och noggrann. Dessutom tog han av sig niossan och sva- 
 rade raskt och riktigt, darfor maste han vara bade forstan- 
 flig och uppmarksam. Han vantade stilla och tyst, medan 
 var och en av de andra trangde sig fram, och ar foljakt- 
 ligen ocksa bl}'gsam. En manniskas uppforande betyder 
 mycket mer an vilken rekommendation som heist." 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Vad behovde grosshandlaren? 2. 
 Vad gjorde han for att fa en springpojke? 3. Medforde 
 hans annons nagot resultat? 4. Vad hade de fiesta med- 
 fort? 5. Brydde sig grosshandlaren om deras rekommen- 
 dationsbrev? (bry sig oni=o core for). 6. Vem valde 
 han for platsen? 7. Vad var det. som forvanade en
 
 VOCABULARY. 167 
 
 av bans vanner, vilken var narvarande? 8. Vilka fern 
 goda egenskaper (qualities) agde gossen? 9. Varigenom 
 (through what) visade gossen, att han var renlig? Artig? 
 Forstandig och uppmarksam? 10. Vad brydde sig gross- 
 handlaren mer om an (than) om rekommendationsbrev ? 
 
 C. 1. Are tbere 1 many advertisements in the paper to- 
 day? No, only a few (283). 2. I should like to know 
 if there is anyone who wants an errand boy. 3. It seems 
 as if every other (279, 3) advertisement is about errand 
 boys. 4. The next morning there were many boys in (pa) 
 the office ; it was full of boys who wanted the place. 5. The 
 letters of recommendation of most were very good. 6. Some 
 of the boys had many recommendations each. 7. But the 
 merchant dismissed every one of them and kept a small 
 boy who did not have any 2 recommendation whatsoever. 
 8. Which one of you got the place? Neither. 9. Every boy 
 who did not have any letter of recommendation was dis- 
 missed, and neither of us had any. 10. I believe that he 
 will 3 soon need another (279, 2) boy in his office; the one 
 that (den som) he has is neither 4 polite nor 4 tidy. 11. The 
 conduct of both boys was good, but it seemed as if the 
 little boy behaved better. 12. Do you have any reason 
 whatsoever 2 for not having 5 done this yet? 13. I did not 
 know that it should be ready so soon; when I asked you, 
 you said that I could do it at any time. 14. How fast shall 
 I drive ? You may drive as fast as you please 2 . 
 
 ijfr del or finns det (244, b). 2 287, 1. 3 Use present or kommer att and 
 infinitive. 4 VarTcen. . . .eller. translate varfor du icke har, etc. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 en annons' (pronounced an- behdl'la (insep., see hdlla), to 
 
 nongs') -er, advertisement retain 
 
 artig, -t, polite lieho'va (insep.), lib, to need 
 
 av'torka (sep., torka av'), to bety'da( insep.), lib, to signify 
 
 wipe llygsam, -t, modest
 
 168 USE OF TENSES. 
 
 bort'skicka, skicka bor'(sep.) narvarande, , present 
 
 to dismiss nnsta, , next 
 
 bdde. . och (conj.), both. . and ocksd, also 
 
 ehu'ru (conj.), although en plats, -er, place, position 
 
 fort, fast rask, -t, quick 
 
 foljaktligen, consequently renlig, -t, cleanly 
 
 forderi 'skull, on that account en rekommendation', -er, re- 
 ett golv, , floor commendation 
 
 en grosshandlare, , whole- ett rekommendations'brev, , 
 
 sale merchant a letter of recommendation 
 
 in'finna sig, to appear, to pre- skriftlig, -t, written 
 
 sent oneself en springpojke. -ar, errand boy 
 
 ett intyg, , testimonial synas (dep.), Ha, to seem 
 
 just, just torka av', I, wipe off 
 
 en knappndl, -ar, pin trdnga sig from', lib, to crowd 
 ett kontor, , office to the front, to press forward 
 
 medan, while tyst, , quiet, silent 
 
 med'fora (sep.), to bring along upp'taga, taga upp', to take up 
 
 noggrann, -grant, careful ett uppforande (no pi.), conduct 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 Use of the Tenses. 
 
 289. In general the tenses are used as in Eng- 
 lish, but the following points should be noticed. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 290. The Present for the Future. In both lan- 
 guages the present is used with the meaning of the 
 future but this use is much more extensive in Swe- 
 dish, and a Swedish present must often be rendered 
 by the future. In fact Swedish employs the present 
 instead of the future almost always when some ad- 
 verbial expression of time accompanies the verb and 
 prevents a misunderstanding : jag gar till posten och 
 ar tillbaka om tio minuter, I am going to the post 
 office and shall be back in ten minutes. 
 
 NOTE. For the progressive present see 228 and note.
 
 USE OF TENSES. 169 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 291. The Imperfect for the Present. The im- 
 perfect of the verb v ara is used in a present sense, 
 especially in exclamatory expressions, to denote 
 intensity of feeling, such as pleasure, enthusiasm, 
 disgust, etc. It is usually combined with the imper- 
 sonal det. Ex.: Det var fortjusande vackert! How 
 charmingly beautiful ! Det var forfdrligt, hvad det 
 bldser! How fearfully it storms! Det var roligt, 
 att du kommer, I am glad that you are coming. Det 
 var da lojligt! Isn't that ludicrous? 
 
 NOTE. For the progressive imperfect see 228 and note. 
 
 292. The imperfect is used in certain expres- 
 sions with a present or imperative meaning to give 
 a tinge of modesty or politeness: herrarna beha- 
 gade komma in, please come in, gentlemen; jag on- 
 skade veta om herr X dr tillbaka, I should like to 
 know if Mr. X. is back. This might perhaps be 
 regarded as a subjunctive (167). 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 293. The Perfect for the Future Perfect. As in 
 English the perfect is often employed with the 
 meaning of the future perfect when no misunder- 
 standing can arise: ndr han har varit i Sverige ett 
 dr, sd talar han svenska flytande, when he has been 
 in Sweden a year, he will speak Swedish fluently. 
 
 FUTURE. 
 
 294. For the present taking the place of the 
 future see 290. 
 
 .295. The future expressed by the auxiliary skola 
 and the infinitive often conveys the idea of a reso- 
 
 Swedish Grammar 12
 
 170 USE OF TENSES. 
 
 lution, decision, or even command: jag skall betala, 
 I will pay, is equivalent to a promise ; du skall betala 
 is equivalent to an exhortation or command. 
 
 296. Pure futurity is often expressed by the 
 present of the verb fcowwa-f-the infinitive of the verb 
 preceded by att: jag kommer att betala, I am going 
 to pay. In this case the present could not be used 
 since there is no adverbial expression of time to 
 obviate the misunderstanding. We may say, jag 
 betalar i morgon. If we wish to translate, for 
 instance, you will laugh when you read the book, 
 we must say ni kommer att skratta, nar ni laser 
 boken and not ni skall skratta, nar ni laser boken, 
 since the latter has almost the force of a command. 
 The present of skratta may also be used but is not 
 quite as good in this case as kommer, etc. 
 
 297. Sta i begrepp is occasionally used with the 
 infinitive to express immediate futurity; it is equiv- 
 alent to the English to be about to, or on the point 
 of, but is used much less extensively: jag star i 
 begrepp att resa till Europa, I am on the point of 
 leaving for Europe. 
 
 FUTURE PERFECT. 
 
 298. The future perfect is used very little in 
 Swedish, its place being taken by the perfect (293). 
 
 299. Omission of the Auxiliary in the Perfect 
 and Pluperfect. In a dependent clause the auxiliary 
 hava is frequently omitted: nar du gdtt (har gatt), 
 skall jag borja att arbeta, when you have gone, I 
 shall begin to work.
 
 USE OF TENSES. 171 
 
 THE USES OF THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 300. The simple infinitive (without att) is used 
 much more frequently in Swedish than in English. 
 Thus, att is omitted : 
 
 (a) With the future auxiliary skall, the modals, 
 and lata, fa, Idr. 
 
 (b) When the infinitive has a subject in the ob- 
 jective, a construction very common in Swedish; as, 
 jag bad honom komma, I asked him to come; jag 
 horde honom sjunga, I heard him sing; jag sag ho- 
 nom komma, I saw him coming. 
 
 (c) Very often when the infinitive is used pred- 
 icatively after a verb in the passive: han hordes 
 saga, he was heard to say; han sages ha dott, he is 
 said to have died ; de syna-s trivas, they seem to get 
 along well. 
 
 (d) After many verbs which in English require 
 to before the infinitive which they govern, like, 
 dmna, to intend; hoppas, to hope; bruka, to use; 
 plaga, to use, etc., especially when euphony demands. 
 
 301 . The infinitive with att is used : 
 
 (a) As subject or object of a sentence: att fela 
 dr mdnskligt, to err is human. In this case the 
 infinitive is often translated by a verbal noun or a 
 gerund in English. 
 
 (b) As a modifier of nouns and adjectives : kons- 
 ten att bli rik, the art of growing rich ; detta dr latt 
 att forstd, this is easy to understand. 
 
 Note expressions like : rum att hyra, rooms for rent ; ved att saga, wood to 
 be sawed, where the noun is really the object. 
 
 (c) As predicate after vara, bliva, finnas, std, 
 etc. Swedish uses here the active infinitive where
 
 172 EXERCISE. 
 
 either the active or the passive is used in English: 
 Vad dr hdr'att gora? What is here to be done? 
 Han star ej att overtala, he is not to be persuaded. 
 
 302. Prepositions with att Infinitive. When it 
 refers to the subject of the leading verb the att 
 infinitive may be preceded by almost any prepo- 
 sition, in which case the English generally requires 
 a verbal noun; as, han lekte i stdllet for att gora 
 sitt arbete, he played instead of doing his work; 
 genom att hjalpa andra hjdlper man ofta sig sjalv, 
 by helping others, we often help ourselves; jag dr 
 glad over att kunna hjdlpa dig, I am glad that I 
 can help you. 
 
 NOTE. When the subject of the infinitive is not the same as that of the 
 leading verb, Swedish uses an att clause preceded by the preposition: genom att 
 han Idnade mig pengar, kunde jag kopa huset, by his lending me money, I was 
 able to buy the house ; han gick, utan att jag fick tala med honom, he went 
 without my getting a chance to speak to him. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVII. 
 
 A. Ett skepp, som seglade fran Smyrna till Marseille 
 med dyrbar last, forfoljdes av sjb'rovare och ansags vara 
 forlorat. Kaptenen kom da pa den tanken att lata besatt- 
 ningen ga ned under dack. Pa dacket lamnade han blott en 
 enda matros, som han noga foreskrev, vad han skulle gora. 
 Nar sjorovarnas skepp narmade sig och dess kapten be- 
 fallde, att man skulle stryka flagg, ropade matrosen med 
 jamrande rb'st: "Jag bar ej sa mycket styrka kvar; ni fa 
 bemaktiga er skeppet; vi komma fran Smyrna, och kap- 
 tenen samt halften av besattningen ha dott i pesten pa 
 b'verresan. Sex man aro annu kvar, men komma sakert 
 att do, om ni ej hjalper oss. Skynda er att stiga ombord. 
 ty ni allena 1 kan radda oss." "Far din vag, din 2 dum- 
 bom !'' ropade sjorovaren till svar, "tror du verkligen, att
 
 EXERCISE. 173 
 
 jag skulle vilja narma mig ditt fartyg!" Darpa avliigs- 
 nade ban sig sa fort 3 ban kunde. 
 
 J Note the weak form of the adjective after a personal pronoun. 2 Note the 
 use of the personal pronoun of the second person in expressions denoting 1 con- 
 tempt ; transl. you big fool. Other expressions of the same kind : din skurk, 
 din asna, etc. , 3 Note omission of som, as. 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Varifran kom skeppet? 2. Vart 
 seglade det? 3. Vad for slags last hade det? 4. Var det 
 ett segelfartyg eller ett angfartyg (steamer) ? 5. Av vem 
 forfoljdes det? 6. Kunde det undkomma (escape) sjo- 
 rovaref artyget ? 7. Vart skickade kaptenen hela besatt- 
 ningen med undantag av 1 en enda matros ? 8. Vad befall- 
 de kaptenen pa det andra fartyget honom 'att gora? 9. 
 Vad hade blivit av kaptenen? 10. Hur manga av besatt- 
 niiigen voro kvar? 11. Vad gjorde sjorovarna, niir de horde 
 detta ? 
 
 1 With the exception of. 
 
 0. Supply the proper Swedish equivalent for the Eng- 
 lish future, namely, the present, future with sTcall, or ham- 
 mer att, in the first six sentences. 
 
 1. I morgon . . . (resa, 1st plur.) till Stockholm. 2. Om 
 en vecka . . . (vara, 1st plur.) tillbaka, och da ... (besb'ka, 
 1st plur.) dig. 3. Det dar gamla fartyget . . . sakert for- 
 olyckas. 4. I morgon . . . (fara) till Chicago, och da ... 
 (kb'pa, 1st sing.) en ring at dig. 5. Du . . . (gora) allt 
 ditt arbete, Erik, innan du far ga ut och spela boll. 6. Nar 
 ni laser min daliga svenska, sa . . . (skratta, 2nd sing., 
 polite) at mina manga fel. 7. Hela besattningen ... (do, 
 progressive present). 8. I gar nar min kusin kom for att 
 besoka mig, . . . (packa, progressive imperfect, first person) 
 min koffert. 
 
 Change the following three sentences according to 299. 
 9. Om jag hade vetat, att ban var sjuk, sa hade jag besokt
 
 174 VOCABULARY. 
 
 honom. 10. Den gamle herrn, som nyss bar stigit i vagnen, 
 ar min larare. 11. Vi sakna vara vanner, som nyss ha rest 
 till New York. 
 
 In the following supply the proper infinitive, the att 
 infinitive or the simple, of the verbs indicated. 12. Genom 
 . . . (narra) sjorovarna raddade kaptenen sitt fartyg. 13. 
 Han bad matroserna ... (ga) ned under dack. 14. Han 
 ansags . . . (vara) rik. 15. Sjorovaren hordes . . . (ropa) 
 till matrosen pa dacket. 
 
 D. 1. But say, this is (291) a beautiful ship! Do you 
 know to what port it is going to sail ? 2. Shall 1 we go on 
 board? I know the captain, and shall 1 introduce you to 
 him, if you wish. 3. He is a fine man and I am sure (saker 
 pa) that you will like 2 him. 4. He has just returned from 
 America and the passage was very difficult. 5. It was only 
 by maneuvering 3 the ship skillfully that (som) he saved it. 
 6. He does not believe that his trip will be 2 stormy. 7. He 
 asked us to come on board, for (ty) he did not wish to 
 leave the city without having 3 spoken to us. 8. When the 
 sailor had (299) told the pirate that half of the crew had 
 died of the plague, the pirate sailed away without taking 3 
 possession of the ship. 9. He was on the point (297) of 
 going out when I entered. 10. Did he do all this work? 
 Well, I call that working (301, a). 11. We must walk 
 fast in order to get (Tcomma) home before night (def. 
 form). 12. Mr. Lind was kind enough to lend me a book. 
 13. He is very much interested in playing 3 tennis. 14. The 
 water is warm enough for bathing 3 (till att bada i). 
 
 *Here the future implies a decision: skola or komma attf 2 Here pure futuri- 
 ty. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 alle'na (only predicative, no bemak'tiga sig, to take pos- 
 neut.), alone session of 
 
 befal'la, lib, to command en besatt'ning, -ar, crew
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 175 
 
 dyrbar, -t, precious, costly 
 
 ett ddck, , deck 
 
 dilrpd, thereupon 
 
 ett far'tyg, , vessel 
 
 en flag g a (flagg), -or, flag 
 
 fort, quickly, rapidly 
 
 fo'reskriva (insep. v.), to pre- 
 scribe 
 
 fvrfol'ja (insep.), lib, to pur- 
 sue 
 
 en hamn, -ar, port, harbor 
 
 en hedersman, -man, man of 
 honor 
 
 en hiilft, -er, half 
 
 intresse'rad, -at, interested 
 
 jiimrande, , plaintive 
 
 en kapten', -er, captain 
 
 komma in', to enter 
 
 en last, -er, cargo; burden 
 
 en matros', -er, sailor 
 maniivre'ra, I, to maneuver 
 ned, down 
 nog, enough; certainly, to be 
 
 sure 
 
 noga (adj. and adv.), exact 
 ndrma sig, I, to approach 
 omoord, on board 
 en pest, -er, pest, plague 
 presente'ra, I, to introduce 
 ropa, I, to cry, call 
 en rost, -er, voice 
 en sjorovare, , pirate 
 skicklig, -t, skillful 
 stryka, strok, stroko, stru- 
 
 kit, -en, -et, to lower 
 en styrka, strength, power 
 en tanke, -ar, thought 
 iinnu, yet 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. Var sd god och Idna mig, be so kind as to (please) 
 lend me; han var sd god och kom, he was kind 
 enough to come. 
 
 2. att do i en sjukdom, to die of a disease. 
 
 3. att komma pd en ide, en tanke, to hit upon an idea, 
 a thought. 
 
 4. att presentera en person for ndgon, to introduce 
 a person to somebody. 
 
 5. att omtala ndgot for ndgon, to tell somebody some- 
 thing.
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 
 Comparison of Adjectives 
 
 303. Most adjectives form their comparative by 
 adding -are to the stem of the positive, and the 
 superlative by the addition of -ast. 
 
 304. Examples : 
 
 rik rikare rikast rich 
 
 ddel ddlare ddlast noble 
 
 trogen trognare trognast faithful 
 
 vacker vackrare vackrast beautiful 
 
 ringa ringare ringast humble, small 
 
 NOTE. Positive stems in unaccented -el, -en, -er, drop the e of these syllables 
 in the comparative and superlative. Positive stems in -a drop the a. 
 
 305. The following adjectives form their com- 
 parative and superlative by the addition of -re and 
 -st and modify the stem vowel if it is strong: 
 grov 
 
 hog 
 
 lag 
 
 Idng 
 
 stor 
 
 trang 
 
 tung 
 
 ung 
 
 NOTE. Grov, trdng and lag are also compared regularly ; lag then has a 
 moral signification. 
 
 306. The following are compared irregularly: 
 
 grovre 
 hogre 
 lagre 
 Idngre 
 storre 
 trdngre 
 tyngre 
 yngre 
 
 gro'vst 
 ho'gst 
 Idgst 
 Idngst 
 sto'rst 
 trdng st 
 tyngst 
 yngst 
 
 coarse 
 high 
 low 
 long 
 great, large 
 narrow, tight 
 heavy 
 young 
 
 dalig 
 gammat 
 god, bra 
 liten 
 mycken 
 manga 
 
 sdmre 
 dldre 
 bdttre 
 mindre 
 mera 
 flera(e) 
 
 stimst 
 didst 
 bast 
 minst 
 mest 
 flesta(e) 
 
 bad 
 old 
 good 
 little, small 
 much 
 many 
 
 NOTB 1. The plural of liten is sma and is compared like liten, but also has 
 the comparative smtirre. 
 
 2. God and dalig are also compared regularly.
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 177 
 
 307. Some adjectives derived from adverbs, 
 especially such as designate place, have no posi- 
 tive. These have a comparative in -re, generally 
 inverted in the superlative -erst. 
 
 bakre bakerst farther back, rear 
 
 bortre bofrterst farther 
 
 frdmre frdmst farther in front 
 
 ftfrre(a) forst former 
 
 inre innerst inner 
 
 nedre nederst nether, lower 
 
 undre under st under 
 
 yttre ytterst outer 
 
 o'vre overst upper 
 
 308. Adjectives which do not easily take the 
 endings of comparison may be compared by using 
 mera and mest together with the positive (such 
 are adjectives in -e, -ad, -s, isk and all participles) . 
 Ex. : ode, desolate, mera ode, mest ode; dlskad, mera 
 dlskad, mest dlskad. 
 
 NOTE. This is also the case when two qualities of the same object are com- 
 pared with one another: han or mera trott an somnig, he is more tired than 
 sleep}'. 
 
 DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 309. The comparative is invariable except that 
 it takes an -s in the genitive when used as a noun : 
 den dldre brodern, the older brother; det dldre bar- 
 net, the older child; den dldres rdttigheter, the 
 rights of the older. 
 
 310. The superlative is not declined in the pred- 
 icate when not preceded by the definite prepositive 
 article; when preceded by this article it is declined 
 like an adjective in the weak declension. Ex. : han
 
 178 EXERCISE. 
 
 var den flitigaste i klassen, he was the most diligent 
 one in the class ; han var didst, he was the oldest. 
 
 NOTE. Superlatives in -ast take only the ending -e: del vackraste barnet, but 
 det yngsta barnet, den yngste gossen. 
 
 311. Than is rendered by an: han ar aldre an 
 jag, he is older than I. 
 
 EXERCISE XXVIII. 
 
 A. Insert comparative and superlative forms respective- 
 ly in the blanks. 
 
 1. Jag ar trogen, du ar . . . , han ar . . . 2. Vi aro adla, 
 ni aro . . ., de aro ... 3. Detta huset ar stort, det dar 
 ar . . . , och det grona dar borta ar . . . 4. Detta ar en 
 fortjusande utsikt, men utsikten fran berget pa andra sidan 
 floden ar . . ., och utsikten fran den hoga bergstoppen 
 (peak) dar borta ar . . . 5. Karl ar liten, Erik ar . . ., 
 Ernst ar . . . 6. I dag ar det manga i kyrkan, men forra 
 sondagen var det ... 7. Han ar en lag manniska, jag 
 bar sallan sett en ... 8. Vilken av de tva bergstopparna 
 ar den . . . (lowest) ? 9. Hur gammal ar Erik? Det vet 
 jag ej sakert, men han ar . . . (older) an Karl, och Alfred 
 ar den . . . (oldest) av gossarna. 10. Vem ar . . . (most 
 musical}, Anna eller Klara? 11. Anna ar . . . (compara- 
 tive) an Klara. 12. H'ar du sett en ... (more desolate, 
 ode) trakt an denna? 
 
 E. 1. Ar icke katedralen i Koln en av de aldsta, storsta 
 och hogsta kyrkor i varlden? 2. Jo, det finns endast fa, 
 som aro aldre, storre och hogre. 3. Nar tycker ni, att det 
 ar intressantast (310) att resa? Pa sommaren, ty da aro 
 dagarna langre, man kan se mer, och det ar mycket ange- 
 namare. 4. Hur lang tid tar det att komma fran New 
 York till Liverpool? De snabbaste angarna gora over- 
 resan pa mindre an sex dagar. 5. Det ar ett misstag, att
 
 EXERCISE. 179 
 
 de europeiska tagen skulle vara langsammare an de ameri- 
 kanska. 6. I flere lander i Europa aro snalltagen bland de 
 snabbaste, som det over huvud taget finns. 7. Har man ej 
 flere klasser darborta an har? Jo, det ar vanligen tre 
 klasser; i Tyskland har man till och med fyra. 8. I Sve- 
 rige resa endast de allra rikaste (316) i forsta klass, och 
 de fiesta fara i tredje. 9. Man reser bekvamare (318) i 
 andra klass dar an i var forsta. 10. Vena bor i huset dar- 
 borta? Tva av vara narmaste slaktingar, en farbror och 
 en kusin. 11. Den forre bor i framre del en av den ovre va- 
 ningen, den senare i den bakersta delen av den undre va- 
 ningen; resten av huset star tomt. 12. Jag skulle garna 
 vilja hyra huset, om dess yttre vore vackrare, dess inre dar- 
 emot behagar mig. 13. Skulle du vilja gb'ra en langre 1 
 tur i min bil i eftermiddag? Ja, med stb'rsta nb'je 2 . 
 
 1 Translate: extended; langre means here rather long. 2 Note the indefinite 
 form of the noun. 
 
 C. 1. There are large and high churches in most cities, 
 but there are business buildings in New York which are 
 larger and higher than the largest and highest churches in 
 the world. 2. My oldest brother is the most diligent boy 
 in the class. 3. In point of 1 studies he is at the head 
 (framst, 310), but in sports he is poorer than most of 
 them. 4. We had the most beautiful weather on our 
 trip to-day; it was less warm than on our former trip. 
 5. Have you no nearer and better friend in this city than 
 he? No, he is my nearest and best friend. 6. I do not 
 know whether I shall travel first or second class. Would 
 you advise me? 7. If I were you (i ert stdlle) I should 2 
 rather travel second; that class is more comfortable than 
 our first and only the wealthiest travel first class here. 
 8. The fastest steamers are not always to be preferred 3 ; 
 a slower and larger steamer rocks less. 9. Don't you think
 
 180 VOCABULARY. 
 
 that the interior of this house is much more beautiful than 
 the exterior? Yes, but it is more beautiful than modern 
 (308). The house next to ours is for rent (301, b, note). 
 Why don't you rather rent that ? It has many more modern 
 improvements (nutida bekvamligheter). 
 
 *Use impersonal form of gdlla. Translate so, (171, B, 2) skulle jag hellre, 
 etc. *att foredraga (301, c). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 en affiirsbyggnad, -er, business en klass, -er, class 
 
 building Idngsam, -t, slow '(not lone- 
 angendm, -t, agreeable some; to be lonesome 
 
 (en) bekvamlighet, -er, comfort att ha trdkigt) 
 
 bekviim', comfortable ett miss'tag, , mistake 
 
 bredvid', next to, at the side of modern' -t, modern 
 
 ddrborta, over there ett noje, -n, amusement, pleas- 
 endast, only ure 
 
 europeisk, -t, European en rest, -er, remainder 
 
 en farbror, -broder, uncle en slakting, -ar, relative 
 
 fattig, -t, poor snabb, -t, quick, rapid 
 
 fo'redraga (insep., see draga), ett studium, -er, study 
 
 prefer till och med, even 
 
 gunga, I, to rock, to swing torn, -t, empty, vacant 
 
 gdlla, lib, to have a value; to en tur, -er, trip 
 
 be a question of vanligen, usually 
 
 Jiellre, rather en dngare, , steamboat 
 
 i'drott 1 , -er, sport over huvud taget, on the whole 
 
 en katedral', -er, cathedral en overresa, -or, trip across 
 
 *ldrott is generally used collectively in the singular.
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 Comparison of Adjectives (Continued). 
 
 312. A comparison of equality is expressed by 
 lika(sa) . . .som, (just) as. . .as; or by sa. . .sow, 
 so (as) ... as, the latter generally after negatives ; 
 lika or sa is occasionally omitted: han dr lika gam- 
 mal som jag, he is just as old as I; hon dr ej sa 
 lycklig, som hon brukade vara, she is not as happy 
 as she used to be; han dr tapper som ett lejon, he 
 is as brave as a lion. 
 
 NOTE. A comparison of equality with adverbs is expressed in the same way ; 
 
 where there is no equality the correlative as as must be rendered by d . . . . 
 
 som only : han skriver lika bra som du, he writes as well as you ; kom id fort 
 som mojligt, come as soon as possible. 
 
 313. The comparison below the positive is formed 
 by using the adverbs mindre, minst (less, least) : 
 han dr den minst framstdende av de tre brb'derna, 
 he is the least prominent of the three brothers. 
 
 314. The adverb the with a comparative is ex- 
 pressed by dess, desto (sometimes ju) ; the correla- 
 tives the. . .the by ju (normal order) . . .dess, desto 
 or ju (inverted order) ; as, jasa, han kommer, desto 
 bdttre,so, he is coming, so much the better ; ju Idngre 
 han stannade hdr, dess (ju) fattigare blev han, the 
 longer he remained here, the poorer he became. 
 
 315. The comparative and the superlative are 
 sometimes used absolutely; the comparative then 
 denotes a rather high degree and the superlative a 
 very high degree; as, en sto'rre penningsumma, a 
 rather large sum of money ; jag gor det med storsta 
 noje, I shall do that with the greatest pleasure ; min 
 baste van, my dear friend (in speaking or writing
 
 182 ADVERBS. 
 
 to some one) ; kdraste du (kdra du is perhaps more 
 common) , in speaking to very intimate friends. 
 
 316. Distributive Superlative. The superlative 
 is often strengthened by the adverb allra (old gen. 
 plural of all) : den allra storsta, den aUra vackraste, 
 the greatest, prettiest of all (the very greatest, pret- 
 tiest) . 
 
 Adverbs. 
 
 317. The indefinite forms of the neuter singular 
 of most descriptive adjectives can be used as ad- 
 verbs. Ex.: adj., god, good; adv., gott; adj., vdnlig, 
 friendly; adv., vdnligt; adj., hastig, rapid; adv., 
 hastigt. 
 
 NOTE. Some adverbs are formed from adjectives in -Kg by means of the 
 ending -en; trolig-en, probably; mojlig-en, possibly. 
 
 318. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. Adverbs form 
 their degrees of comparison like the adjectives. Very 
 few except those ending in -t can be compared. 
 
 Examples : 
 
 hovligt 
 ddelt 
 troget 
 tungt 
 
 319. The 
 
 bra, vdl 
 gdrna 
 ilia 
 ndra 
 Idnge 
 fore 
 fort 
 ofta 
 sakta 
 fram 
 
 hovligare 
 ddlare 
 trognare 
 tyngre 
 
 following 
 
 bdttre 
 hellre 
 vdrre 
 ndrmare 
 langre 
 forr 
 fortare 
 oftare 
 saktare 
 frdmre 
 
 hovligast 
 ddlast 
 trognast 
 tyngst 
 
 adverbs are 
 
 bast 
 heist 
 vdrst 
 ndrmast 
 Idngst 
 forst 
 fortast 
 oftast 
 saktast 
 frdmst 
 
 politely 
 nobly 
 faithfully 
 heavily 
 
 also compared 
 
 well 
 willingly 
 badly 
 near 
 long 
 before 
 fast 
 often 
 slow 
 forth
 
 EXERCISE. 183 
 
 320. The comparative and the superlative of 
 adverbs are invariable. Apparent exceptions are 
 a few idiomatic absolute superlatives; as, de voro 
 i det narmaste ett hundra, they were very nearly 
 one hundred; han kdmpade i det Idngsta, he fought 
 as long as possible; han hdlsade mig pa det hov- 
 ligaste, he greeted me most politely; han kom med 
 det snaraste, he came as soon as possible. 
 
 321. So also the Swedish equivalent for the Eng- 
 lish, as ... can, could : hon gick det tystaste hon 
 kunde, she walked as quietly as she could; han Idste 
 det tydligaste han kunde, he read as plainly as he 
 could (also sa tydligt han kunde; note omission of 
 som, as). 
 
 322. As. . .as possible is expressed by sa. . .som 
 mojligt ; sa snart som mojligt, as soon as possible. 
 
 323. The English more and more=aUt+the re- 
 peated comparative as in English (a single com- 
 parative may be used) : stormen rasade allt hdfti- 
 gare och hdftigare, the storm raged more and more 
 violently. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIX. 
 
 A. 1. Gar du ofta pa 1 teatern, Karl? Hogst (at the 
 most) fern eller sex ganger om aret (338, note). Jag gar 
 mycket hellre pa forelasningar och konserter. 2. Konser- 
 ten i gar var troligen den mest lyckade (308) sedan sa- 
 songens bb'rjan, salongen var i det narmaste 2 fullsatt. 3. 
 De olika numren pa programmet mottogos med det allra 
 varmaste bifall. 4. Jag tyckte, att frb'ken Forsell sjb'ng 
 lika bra som fm Jungstedt, fast den senare ar mera om- 
 talad (308). 5. Vad skall ni gora under de stundande
 
 184 EXERCISE. 
 
 helgdagarna ? Jag skall avlagga ett kortare (315) besok 
 hos min bror. 6. Halsa honom pa det hjartligaste 2 och sag 
 honom, att jag skall skriva till honom med det allra sna- 
 raste 2 . 7. Kara du, maste du verkligen resa? Jag ar sa 
 ledsen; men kom igen sa fort du kan (321). 8. Ju oftare 
 du kommer, och ju langre du gb'r ditt besok, desto battre, 
 ty du ar alltid en mycket valkommen gast hos oss. 9. Hur 
 gar det for Erik i skolan? Icke sa bra som det gjorde i 
 bb'rjan; han var visserligen icke den allra basta i sin klass, 
 men han var flitigare an nu och gjorde sitt basta. 10. Nu 
 synes han mera lat an dum (308, note), han arbetar utan 
 det ringaste intresse och ar alls icke uppmarksam i klassen. 
 11. Karl daremot studerar det flitigaste han kan och ar 
 framst i sin klass. 12. Jag har hoppats i det langsta 2 , att 
 Erik skulle bli uppflyttad i ar, men det troligaste ar, att 
 han far sitta kvar. 
 
 1 Pa is used in the sense of to in a number of phrases: att go, fa tealern, pa 
 target, to go to the theater, to market. 2 320. 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Vart gar ni heist, pa teatern eller 
 pa en forelasning? 2. Var auditoriet vid konserten i gar 
 talrikt? 3. Fann ni konserten lyckad? 4. Appladerade 
 ahorarna de olika numren 1 ? 5. Vem sjong bast, froken 
 Forsell eller fru Jungstedt? 6. Na'r amnar ni (att) avlagga 
 (ett) besok hos er bror? 7. Har ni skrifvit till honom an? 
 8. Gor en jamforelse (comparison) mellan Eriks och Karls 
 arbete i skolan. 
 
 1 Indef. form nummer ; one m is dropped in the def. form since the long m- 
 sound is no longer intervocalic. 
 
 G. 1. Do you attend the theater oftener now than you 
 used to (do), Carl? 2. No, extremely 1 seldom, and when I 
 do attend, I attend mostly 2 the opera. 3. I have never be- 
 fore been as occupied as I am now; the more (314) I do, 
 the more there is to do, it seems. 4. Aren't you working a
 
 VOCABULARY. 185 
 
 little (274, 2 ) harder than you used to? 5. Perhaps. I wish 
 to have a certain work ready as soon as possible in order 
 to get my vacation. 6. Where do you intend to spend it? 
 At a watering place? 7. No, I have been at watering 
 places several (flera) times before. This summer I prefer 
 to take a trip to northern Sweden. 8. A friend of mine 
 has given me a most (hogst) interesting account of the 
 beautiful sceneries of Lapland. 9. Are you going alone? 
 No, we shall be four, perhaps more (flera}. 10. Would 
 (skutte) you permit me to go with you if I could be ready 
 as soon as you? 11. With the greatest (315) pleasure, the 
 (314) more we are, the merrier it will be. 
 
 D. 1. Is Eric as diligent as he was in the beginning? 
 2. No, I do not know what is the matter with him, it 
 seems as if he were growing lazier and lazier (323). 3. Is 
 he not here yet ? Perhaps he will come a little later. 4. No, 
 he wrote me most politely that he would rather come an- 
 other time. 5. He sent the most cordial (316) greetings 
 to all his friends. 6. My dear (315) friend, can't you 
 come to see me a little ofterier than you do? Come as often 
 as you please (287, 1). 
 
 l Ytterst hogst, in the highest degree, very, and ytterst, extremely, ex- 
 ceedingly, are often used to form an absolute superlative. *For del mesta (320). 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ett auditorium, -cr, audience for det mesta, for the most 
 avlagga, insep., to make (a part 
 
 visit) ; sep. lay, take off en forelasning, -ar, lecture 
 
 en badort, -er, watering place en gdst, -er, guest 
 
 ett bifall, approval, applause hjartlig, -t, cordial 
 
 en torjan, beginning hard, h&rt, hard 
 
 dum, -t, stupid intressant', interesting 
 
 fast, although eft intres'se, -n, interest 
 
 friimst, foremost karihan'da, perhaps 
 
 full'satt, , crowded en Mass, -er, class 
 
 Sivedish Grammar 13
 
 186 NUMERALS. 
 
 kvar (adv. and adj. in the sjunga, sjong, sjongo, sjungit, 
 
 predicate) left, over sjungen, -et, to sing 
 
 lat (no neut.), lazy en skildring, -ar, account 
 
 ledsen, sorry snar, -t, rapid, quick; snart, 
 lyckad, -at, successful soon 
 
 norra (indeclinable), northern stundande (indecl.), coming 
 
 ett nummer, , number synas (dep. v.), I la, to seem, 
 om'talad, -at, mentioned; appear 
 
 celebrated en sdsong', -er*, season 
 
 en opera, -or, opera; opera tilldta (insep.), to permit 
 
 house troligen, probably 
 
 ett program', , program uppflyttad, -at, moved up, 
 ringa (indeclinable) insig- promoted 
 
 nificant upptagen, -et, occupied 
 
 sceneri', -er, scenery verkligen, really 
 
 en semes' ter 1 , -rar, semester; visserligen, to be sure, cer- 
 
 vacation tainly 
 
 ^Semester is a vacation from work, ferier a vacation from school. *Sasong is 
 a social season, arstid, a natural season. 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. att sitta kvar, not to be promoted. 
 
 2. att tli uppflyttad, to be promoted. 
 
 3. Hvad fattas honomf What is the matter with him? 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 The Numerals. 
 
 CARDINAL ORDINAL 
 
 1. en [neut. ett; (den) forste(a), 1st 
 def. ene(a)'\ 
 
 2. tvd andre(a), 2nd 
 
 3. tre tredje, 3rd, etc. 
 
 4. fyra fjarde 
 
 5. fern femte 
 
 6. sex sjatte 
 
 7. sju sjunde 
 
 8. dtta dttonde 
 
 9. nio nionde 
 
 10. tio tionde 
 
 11. elva elvte
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 187 
 
 12. 
 13. 
 14. 
 15. 
 16. 
 17. 
 18. 
 19. 
 20. 
 
 21. 
 
 22. 
 
 30. 
 
 31. 
 
 40. 
 
 50. 
 
 60. 
 
 70. 
 
 80. 
 
 90. 
 100. 
 101. 
 200. 
 250. 
 
 1,000. 
 1,150. 
 
 1,000,000. 
 
 tolv 
 tretton 
 fjorton 
 femton 
 sexton 
 sjutton 
 aderton 
 nitton 
 
 tjugu (tjugo, 
 tjuge) 
 tjuguett 
 tjugutva 
 trettio (tretti) 
 tretti(o)ett 
 fyrtio (fyrti) 
 femtio (femti) 
 sextio (sexti) 
 sjuttio (sjutti) 
 attio (dtti) 
 nittio (nitti) 
 (ett) hundra 
 hundra ett 
 tva hundra 
 tva hundra 
 femtio 
 (ett) tusen 
 ett tusen ett 
 hundra femtio 
 en million 
 
 tolvte 
 
 trettonde 
 
 fjortonde 
 
 femtonde 
 
 sextonde 
 
 sjuttonde 
 
 adertonde 
 
 nittonde 
 
 tjugonde 
 
 tjuguforsta 
 
 tjuguandra 
 
 trettionde 
 
 tretti(o)forsta 
 
 fyrtionde 
 
 femtionde 
 
 sextionde 
 
 sjuttionde 
 
 attionde 
 
 nittionde 
 
 hundrade 
 
 hundra forsta 
 
 tva hundrade 
 
 tva hundra femtionde 
 
 tusende 
 
 ett tusen ett hundra 
 femtionde 
 
 REMARKS ON THE CARDINALS. 
 
 325. The cardinals are indeclinable when used 
 as adjectives with the exception of en, which has 
 the neuter ett: det ar tjuguett barn i rummet; but 
 tjuguen gossar. 
 
 326. When used as nouns they take an s in the 
 genitive but are otherwise indeclinable: de fyras
 
 188 NUMERALS. 
 
 dsikt, the opinion of the four; de adertons samman- 
 komst, the meeting of the eighteen (the Swedish 
 Academy) . 
 
 NOTE. The numbers, million, milliard, billion, etc., are declined as nouns of the 
 Third Declension: tre millioner manniskor. Hundra and tusen may also be used 
 substantively and then take the form hundrade and tusende with plural in -n: 
 det tjvgonde arhundradet, the twentieth century ; del forsta tusendet, the first 
 thousand. 
 
 327. The form tu is used for tva in certain set 
 phrases; such as, pa tu man hand, in confidence 
 between two ; de unga tu, the engaged or newly mar- 
 ried couple ; ett, tu, tre (in counting time, also in the 
 sense of suddenly) ; cf. adv. itu: riva itu, tear in two. 
 
 328. Tvenne and trenne are sometimes used for 
 two and three but never in connection with other 
 numerals. Bada and bagge are occasionally used 
 with tva for the* sake of emphasis: bada tva, both; 
 in such expressions as vi bada, de bagge, etc., we 
 two, they two, bada and bagge have the force of 
 numerals. 
 
 329. Hundra and tusen are always preceded by 
 ett (in counting ett may be left out) : ett hundra 
 femtioatta; ett tusen ett hundra sextiofem; och, and, 
 is not used between the hundreds and the tens. 
 
 330. The forms tretti, fyrti, femti, etc. are used 
 mostly in compounds: femtiatta, sextitre. 
 
 NOTE. Fyrtio is pronounced as if it was written fortio. Aderton is 
 generally pronounced arton. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE ORDINALS. 
 
 331. The ordinals are used as indeclinable ad- 
 jectives, except forste(a) and andre(a) which follow 
 the weak declension. They are usually preceded by 
 the prepositive definite article, but may sometimes
 
 NUMERALS. 130 
 
 be used without it : den forsta, den andra, den tred- 
 je; but forsta dagen (also den forsta dagen) i veckan 
 ar sondagen, the first day of the week is Sunday; 
 det ar andra gdngen han ar har, it is the second 
 time he is here. 
 
 332. In compound ordinals only the last number 
 takes the ordinal ending, den ett tusen tvd hundra 
 sextiofjarde. 
 
 333. The ordinals take the genitive -s: Karl den 
 tolvtes dod, the death of Charles XII. 
 
 334. The cardirrals are occasionally used instead 
 of the ordinals ; these follow the noun : pa sidan tio, 
 on page ten. 
 
 335. The ordinals are often abbreviated, the last 
 letter or letters being used with the numbers to in- 
 dicate the ordinal. Ex.: den 5:e, den 8:e; the num- 
 ber may be used alone after the article: den 5 
 februari. 
 
 EXPRESSIONS OF TIME (O'CLOCK) . 
 
 336. The following phrases illustrate the man- 
 ner of telling the time of day : 
 
 Hur mycket ar klockan? what time is it? 
 
 Klockan ar tio, it is ten o'clock. 
 
 Klockan ar halv tio, it is half past nine. 
 
 Klockan ar en kvart over fyra, it is a quarter past 
 four. 
 
 Klockan ar en kvart fore (till, i) fyra, it is a quar- 
 ter of four. 
 
 Klockan ar tre kvart pa fyra, it is a quarter of 
 four. 
 
 Klockan ar tjugu minuter fore tre, it is twenty 
 minutes of three.
 
 190 EXERCISE. 
 
 Klockan dr tjugu -minuter over ire, it is twenty 
 minutes past three. 
 
 Klockan har jiLst slagit fyra, it has just struck 
 four. 
 
 Pa slaget ire, at three o'clock sharp. 
 
 Precis tre, at three o'clock sharp. 
 
 Vid niotiden, about nine o'clock. 
 
 Fram at tiotiden, towards ten o'clock. 
 
 Han kom klockan tio, he came at ten o'clock. 
 
 EXPRESSIONS OF MEASURE AND PRICE. 
 
 337. After nouns of measure t*he thing measured 
 is used without preposition: hon kopte fyra meter 
 svart tyg, she bought four meters of black cloth; 
 giv mig ett glas friskt vatten, give me a glass of 
 fresh water. 
 
 338. After an expression of price a noun of 
 measure requires the def. postpositive article in- 
 stead of the indef. article in English: detta tyget 
 kostar tre kronor metern, this cloth costs three 
 crowns a meter; tio kronor stycket, ten crowns a- 
 piece. 
 
 NOTE. This distributive use of the def. article is found after other expres- 
 sions of quantity, but the noun is then preceded by a preposition (generally 
 om, pa, or <) : tvd ganger om aret, two times a year ; han fortjanar trettio 
 kronor f veckan, he earns thirty crowns a week. 
 
 EXERCISE XXX. 
 
 A. 1. Practice orally. En gang ett ar ett, tva ganger 
 ett ar tva, etc. En gang tva ar tva, tva ganger tva ar fyra, 
 3X2=6, 4X2=8, etc. 2. Eead in Swedish: 2X12=24, 
 3X12=36, 4X8=32, 6X7=42, 7X9=63, 7X10=70. 
 3. Addera 1,563, 2,348, 11,213. 4. Subtrahera 15,113 fran 
 19,213. 5. Multiplicera 580 med 213. 6. live the differ-
 
 EXERCISE. 191 
 
 ent expressions for: It is a quarter past 12 1 ; 12.30; 1.45; 
 3.15; 4; 5.25. 7. Name the numbers 40, 41, 50, 53, G4, 
 67, 78, 89, 94, 100, 104, 205, 209, 371, 498, 1,000, 1,001, 
 75,012, 2,098,427. 
 
 'At a quarter past twelve, klockan en kvart efter tolv; klockan is often 
 abbreviated to kl. : kl. 12.15. 
 
 B. I denna stad bo 2,656,342 manniskor, men den ar 
 anda ej pa langt nar sa stor som London, ty dar bo nara 
 7,000,000 manniskor eller nara tre ganger sa manga. 
 2. Hur manga invanare bar staten Minnesota? Omkring 
 2,000,000, tror jag. 3. Minnesotas befolkning ar ej vidare 1 
 talrik, nar man tar i betraktande, att det ar en av de storsta 
 staterna i Unionen. 4. Med vilket tag resa vi till Stock- 
 holm i morgon? Det gar ett tag ... (a quarter past 
 seven), om vi stiga upp ... (at six or half past five), sa 
 kunde vi a'ta frukost pa hotellet. 5. Sag till uppassaren 
 att vi onska rakningen. Har ar den, jag fick den for nagra 
 minuter sedan. 6. Den ar val tamligen sa hog, formodar 
 jag. Ah nej, icke sa varst, 22 kronor och 37 ore, 10 kronor 
 for rumrnet, 8 kronor och 50 ore for supen och frukosten 
 och resten for diverse smasaker. 7. Da aro naturligtvis 
 icke drickspengarna till betjaningen inbegripna? Nej, 
 dessa far man betala sarskilt. 8. Hur mycket belb'pa de 
 sig till? 2 kr. eller 2.50 2 racker. 9. Skynda dig, ar du 
 snail, annars forsumma vi taget. 10. Det bradskar ej, vi 
 ha annu en kvarts timme pa oss (to spare), innan det gar; 
 kloekan har just slagit sju. 11. Jag har kopt en hel del (en 
 massa) saker pa torget i dag: 1 kilo mejerismbr, 4 tjog 
 agg, en skinka pa fyra kilo och diverse gronsaker. 12. Vad 
 kostar smoret och aggen? Smoret kostar 2.50 kilot 3 och 
 aggen 1.50 tjoget. 
 
 Widare means wider, further; it has an idiomatic use which is hard to render; 
 sometimes it may be translated by very. *Tva och (pronounced d) femti. 
 3 Also per kilo, ver is abbreviated to pr-
 
 192 VOCABULARY. 
 
 C. 1. In the city of London live almost 7,000.000 
 people, or more than three times as many as (312) in our 
 state. 2. Was your bill at the hotel very high ? No, it was 
 not as high as I expected; it amounted (B, 8) to about 
 thirty-six crowns, the tips not included 1 . 3. Did you have 
 breakf ast at the hotel before you started ? No, we only had 
 time to drink a cup of coffee and eat a sandwich. 4. Did 
 you oversleep ? Yes, we slept to a quarter past six and the 
 train was 2 to leave at ten minutes past seven. 5. How many 
 minutes do we have to spare (B, 10) before the train 
 leaves? 6. Let me see, only fourteen minutes; it is nine 
 minutes of five by (enligt) mj watch. Hurry, please, or we 
 shall miss the train. 7. (In a store.) What can I do for 
 you? I should like to look at. some view cards of 2 Stock- 
 holm. 8. We have cards at (till) various prices. This 
 kind is ten ore apiece (338) or a crown a dozen, that, five 
 ore apiece, or fifty ore a dozen. 9. I owe you three crowns 
 and seventy-five ore, I believe; here is a fifty-crown bill, 
 can you change it? 10. Yes, here are forty-six crowns and 
 twenty-five ore in change (tillbaka) . 11. How much is a 
 crown? A crown is one hundred ore; in American money 
 a crown is about twenty-eight cents. 12. I wish to change 
 one hundred and forty crowns into (i) American money. 
 
 'Use the plur. of the p. part, of inbegripa. *Skulle. 3 Use over or translate 
 the whole expression stockholmstyer. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 en befolkning, -ar, population ett dussin, , dozen 
 behaga, to please forso'va sig (insep., see 
 
 beldpa sig till, Ila, to amount sova), to oversleep 
 
 to forsum'ma (insep.), to neg- 
 
 en betjaning (generally no lect; to miss (train) 
 
 pi.), service, servants gronsaJcer (pi.), vegetables 
 (ett)betraktande, consideration del, -ar, part 
 brddska, I, to hurry en invanare, , inhabitant 
 
 diver" se (pi.), diverse, various mejeri'smor, creamery butter
 
 NUMERAL FORMATIONS. 193 
 
 niira, near, almost en supe, supcer, supper 
 
 olik, -t, unlike, different talrik, -t, numerous 
 
 ett pris, , price tillbaka, back 
 
 en sedel, -lar, bill; femti- ett tjog, , score 
 
 kronesedel, fifty-crown ett torg, , market place 
 
 bill tamligen, fairly, pretty 
 
 en skinka, -or, ham en union, er, union 
 
 en smdsak, -er, trifle uppassare, , waiter 
 
 en smorgds, -ar, sandwich vtinta, I, to wait, expect 
 
 en stat, -er, state vdxla, I, to change 
 
 stiga upp' (see stiga), to get ett vykort, , souvenir postal 
 
 up, rise ett dgg, , egg 
 
 ett stycke, -n, piece andd, yet 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. alt taga en sak i betraktande, to take a thing 
 into consideration. 
 
 2. icke pd Idngt ndr, not by far. 
 
 3. icke vidare mycket, not very much. 
 
 4. utan vidare, without further ado. 
 
 5. Vad behagasf What do you wish? What can I 
 do for you? 
 
 6. Jag ar skyldig honom tio .kronor, I owe him ten 
 ten crowns. 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 The Numerals (Continued). 
 NUMERAL FORMATIONS. 
 
 339. From the cardinals are formed : 
 
 (a) The variatives by the use of slags (the geni- 
 tive of slag, meaning kind) : tvd slags, two kinds of; 
 tre slags, three kinds of; manga slags blommor, 
 many kinds of flowers. 
 
 (b) The multiplicatives by the addition of dubbel 
 (neut. dubbelt, pi. dubbla) for the adjective and 
 dubbelt for the adverb ; more rarely by the addition 
 of -faldig (-t, -a) for the adjective and -fait for the
 
 194 NUMERAL FORMATIONS. 
 
 adverb: dubbel, double; tredubbel, triple; fyrdub- 
 belt (neut. and adv.), quadruple; kragar av fyr- 
 dubbelt linne, collars of four-ply linen; dubbelt sa 
 manga, twice as many; mangfaldig, manifold; vetet 
 avkastar trettiofalt, the wheat yields thirty-fold. 
 
 (c) The iteratives by the use of gang, time ; plur. 
 ganger: en gang, once or one time; tvd ganger, twice 
 or two times ; tre ganger, tva dr lika med sex, three 
 times two equals six. 
 
 (d) The distributives by the repetition of the 
 numerals : en och en, one by one, one at a time ; tva 
 och tva, by twos, two at the time; de gingo tvd och 
 tva, they went by twos, in pairs. 
 
 (e) The collectives by suffixing the word tal to the 
 numeral : 
 
 1. To denote a decade or a century ; thus, 80-talet, 
 the eighties; han gar pa fyrtiotalet, he is in the 
 forties; 1500-talet, the sixteenth century (1500 
 1599). 
 
 2. To denote an approximate number: ett tiotal, 
 about ten; ett tjugutal, about twenty. 
 
 NOTE. Observe expressions like hundratals, hundreds, tusentats, thousands. 
 dussintals, many dozen ; tusentals manniskor voro narvarande, thousands of 
 people were present. 
 
 340. From the ordinals are formed : 
 (ct) Fractional nouns by compounding the ordinal 
 with the noun del, part (plur. delar) : en tredjedel, 
 a third; tva tion(de) delar, two tenths; en halv, one 
 half ; en tjugutvaendel, a twenty-second part ; so also 
 en tretti(o)tvaendel, etc. 
 
 NOTE. Half, halv and hiilft. Halv is used as the denominator of fractions 
 and as adjective, otherwise hiilft is used : ett halvt dussin, half a dozen ; ena 
 hdlften av huset, one half of the house. 
 
 (b) Fractional adjectives by prefixing halv to the
 
 EXPRESSIONS OF DATE. 190 
 
 next higher unit: halvannan, one and a half; halv- 
 tredje, two and a half, etc. 
 
 NOTE. Only the first is in common use. 
 
 (c) Ordinal adverbs by using the preposition for 
 with the ordinal : for det forsta, first ; for det andra, 
 secondly, etc. 
 
 (d) Distributives by prefixing var to the ordinal : 
 varannan (neut. vartannat), every other; var 
 tredje (neut. vart tredje), every third: varannan 
 dag ha vi rakning, we have mathematics every other 
 day. 
 
 341. EXPRESSIONS OF DATE. 
 
 (a) In giving the day of the month the ordinal 
 is used without any preposition ; as, det ar den sjatte 
 augusti i dag, to-day is the sixth of August. In 
 dating a letter the date is placed before the name 
 of the month, not after, as in English: Boston den 
 5:e (or 5) oktober. 
 
 Observe the following date idioms: 
 
 Vad ha vi for ett datum i dag? What date is 
 it to-day? 
 
 Det ar den femtonde juni i dag. To-day is the 
 fifteenth of June. 
 
 I morgon ar det den sextonde. To-morrow will 
 be the sixteenth. 
 
 Vad for en dag ar det i dag? What day (of the 
 week) is it to-day? 
 
 Det ar onsdag i dag. To-day is Wednesday. 
 
 (b)The date of the year is given by the cardinal 
 number often preceded by ar, in the year of, espec- 
 ially in the case of historical dates; as, Napoleon 
 dog ar 1821, Napoleon died in the year of 1821.
 
 196 EXPRESSIONS OF TIME. 
 
 342. With the names of the days of the week 
 the prepositions pa (on), om (about), and i (in) 
 are used ; pa requires the def . form, om the indefinite 
 and i the genitive of the indefinite: pa mdndagen 
 voro vi borta, on Monday we were away ; i mandags 
 voro vi borta, last Monday we were away; pa son- 
 dagskvdllen voro vi i kyrkan, on Sunday evening we 
 were in church; i sondags kvdll for han till Neiv 
 York, last Sunday evening he left for New York; 
 om lordag, next Saturday; om so'ndag kvdll, next 
 Sunday evening. 
 
 NOTE 1. The day following t is the last day of that name, while the day 
 after pa is any day of that name in the past or future ; the day after' om is 
 the next day of that name (for other uses of f and om see 338, note, and 343). 
 
 2. Pa followed by the def. sing, and om followed by the def. plur. may 
 denote indefinite or recurrent time: pa sondagen horde man ga i kyrkan, on 
 Sunday one ought to go to church ; rod gor ni om sondagarnat What do you 
 do on Sundays? 
 
 343. Note such expressions -of time as: 
 
 pa morgonen, in the morning; 
 
 pa fo'rmiddagen, in the forenoon; 
 
 pa eftermiddagen, in the afternoon; 
 
 pa middagen, at noon; 
 
 vid middagen, at noon; 
 
 pa kvdllen, in the evening ; 
 
 pa natten, in the night; 
 
 vid midnatt, at midnight ; 
 
 i kvdll, to-night; 
 
 i gar kvdll, last night; 
 
 i morgon kvdll, to-morrow night ; 
 
 i morse, this morning ; 
 
 i gar morse, yesterday morning ; 
 
 i morgon, to-morrow ; 
 
 i b'vermorgon, the day after to-morrow;
 
 EXERCISE. 197 
 
 i morgon middag, to-morrow at noon ; 
 
 tidigt i morgon, early to-morrow ; 
 
 i morgon bittida, early to-morrow morning; 
 
 i borjan\ in the beginning of April ; 
 
 i slutet \pa april, the latter part of April ; 
 
 i mitten) in the middle of April ; 
 
 i sommar, this summer ; 
 
 i fjol sommar, in the summer of last year ; 
 
 i somras, the past summer (of the same year) ; 
 
 i dag for ett arsedanl to _ d 
 
 i dag ett ar sedan } 
 
 i morgon om ett ar, a year from to morrow ; 
 
 om mandag, next Monday ; 
 
 om sommarn, in the summer; 
 
 till sommarn, next summer. 
 
 344. (a) In addressing letters the street name is 
 written as one word with -gatan (def. form of gata, 
 street) ; the house number follows the street name: 
 Herr Carl Lind, 
 
 Storgatan 8, 4 tr., 
 
 Stockholm. 
 
 NOTE. tr. (trappa or trappor, stair or stairs) signifies story. 
 
 (b) In giving an address, i nummer -\-ihe number 
 generally precedes the street name : han bor i num- 
 mer 11 Linnegatan (also i ll:an [elvari] Linne- 
 gatan), he lives at number 11 Linne Street. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXI. 
 
 A. Supply in Swedish whatever is indicated. 
 
 1. Hur stor del av ett ar ar en manad? En manad ar 
 en tolvtedel av ett ar. 2. Hur manga . . . (twelfths) inne- 
 haller en hel. En hel innehaller . . . (|f) eller ... (|t) 
 eller ... ({), alltsa gar det .. ('{fete.) pa en hel.
 
 198 EXERCISE. 
 
 3. Hum adderar man ... () och ... () ? Man for- 
 vandlar bada braken till . . . (twelfths) och adderar de 
 bada taljarne. 4. Hur mycket blir det? Det blir . . . (ff ). 
 5. Vad gor man sedan ? Man dividerar taljaren med nam- 
 naren och erhaller . . . (liV)- 6. Vad for 1 datum ha vi i 
 dag? Det ar . . . (the sixth) november i dag. 7. I dag 
 ha vi salunda arsdagen av Gustav Adolfs db'd vid Liitzen, 
 han stupade . . . (the sixth) november . . . (in the year of) 
 1632. 8. Vid vilken tid pa dagen stupade konungen? . . . 
 (in the morning), tror jag. 9. I dag fira vi pappas . . . 
 (50th) fodelsedag; han foddes . . . (the ninth of) augusti 
 1861. 10. I gar for en vecka sedan kom min bror hem fran 
 Tyskand for att deltaga i firandet. 11. Sverige ar mer an 
 . . . (twice) sa stort som Minnesota och har nastan . . . 
 (three times) sa manga invanare. 12. Hur langa aro feri- 
 erna vid den svenska folkskolan ? Skolan slutar i mitten pa 
 juni och borjar igen i slutet pa augusti. 13. Sommarferier- 
 na racka alltsa omkring ... (2 |) manader. 14. Vilken ar 
 den genaste vagen, den till vanster eller den till hb'ger, bag- 
 ge leda till staden, eller hur? 15. Lit oss ta vagen till 
 vanster, den ar bortemot en och en halv kilometer kortare. 
 Den andra ar alltsa mer an diibbelt sa lang. 16. Vad ha 
 vi for en dag i dag? Det ar fredag i dag, och om (342, 
 note) lordag maste vi ha det har arbetet fardigt for att 
 kunna ta i tu 2 (327) med nagot nytt i borjan pa nasta vec- 
 ka. 17. Har du varit i herr Lindgrens tradgard nyligen? 
 Ja, jag var dar i onsdags. 18. Eosorna aro utspruckna ; de 
 aro de allra harligaste rosor, jag nagonsin har sett, dess- 
 utom har han manga andra slags blommor. 
 
 J The indef. article may be omitted, also vilket datum or vad ar det JOT datum, 
 vi, etc. *Att ta itu med nagot, to go to work with something. 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Vad ar er brors adress nu? 2. Pa 
 vilken vaning bor han ? 3. Han amnar ju att flytta, vet ni
 
 EXERCISE. 199 
 
 nar? 4. Vad ha vi for datum i dag? 5. Vad ar det for 
 datum i morgon om en vecka? 6. Nar firar er bror sin 
 fodelsedag? 7. Vilket ar och vilken dag ar han fodd? 
 8. Nar foddes Gustav den andre Adolf? 9. Nar stupade 
 Karl den tolfte? 
 
 C. 1. Have you studied fractions? Yes, we are studying 
 (290, note) them now in school. 2. Can you tell me how to 
 multiply 1 two-fifths by one-fourth ? i multiply the numer- 
 ators and the denominators together and the result is two- 
 twentieths. 3. How many units are there in seven-sixths? 
 In seven-sixths there is one unit and one-sixth over. 4. Why 
 are you in such a hurry 2 ? I am going 3 to the station to 
 meet my sister. I must be there at a quarter of ten and it 
 is half past nine now. 5. Is she coming so soon, it is only 
 the 18th to-day; a week from to-day is Christmas. 6. Yes, 
 I know, but my birthday is (on) the 20th and we shall have 
 a family festival at home. 7. How old are you ? I am in 
 (on) my 20th year. 8. You are the oldest in the family, 
 L suppose. No, my sister Mary is a year and a half older 
 than I, and I have a brother who is almost twice as old as 
 I. 9. I hope that you will pardon (use pres.) my delay 
 in writing 4 , but I received your letter, which was dated 
 Monday, August 4th, only (forst) this morning. 10. You 
 have been away very long, haven't you ? Not so very long 5 , 
 I left the city at the beginning of August and came back at 
 the end of September; so I was away a little over a month 
 and a half 6 . 11. Does your brother have the same address 
 as (som) before? No, he has moved; now he lives at num- 
 ber 13 King's Street. 
 
 ''How to followed by an infinitive must be rendered by a clause : here hur jag 
 skall multiplicera or hur man mvltiplicerar. 2 To be in a hurry, att ha bratt or 
 bruttom. IFuture with skall. 4 Translate att jag 'har drSjt med att skriva. 
 5 fcke sa varst Hinge; rdrst is colloquial. *En och en halv mdnad.
 
 200 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 adde'ra, I, to add 
 alltsd, thus (not also) 
 bliva, to become (in mathe- 
 matics, to equal) 
 ett ftrdfc, , fraction (also 
 
 trouble) 
 brattom (att Jia brtittom), 
 
 to be in a hurry 
 ett datum, -a, date 
 date'ra, I, to date 
 del'taga (sep., see taga), to 
 
 participate 
 
 divide'ra, I, to divide 
 ett drojsmdl, , delay 
 en dod, -ar, (generally sing.), 
 
 death 
 er'hdlla (insep., see hftlla), to 
 
 receive, get 
 en familjefest, -er, family 
 
 festival 
 
 ferier (pi.), vacation 
 ett ftrande, celebration 
 folkskola, -or, public school 
 fodas (pass, of foda, give 
 
 birth to), lib, to be born 
 en fodelsedag, -ar, birthday 
 formo^da, I, to presume 
 forvand'la, I, to transform 
 
 gen, -t, near, short (of a road) 
 en hel (-a), unit 
 hoger (no neut., indef.), right 
 innehdlla (insep.), to contain 
 en kilome'ter, , kilometer 
 leda, lib, to lead, conduct 
 en mdnad, -er, month 
 mitten (def. form or mitt), 
 
 middle, midst 
 multipUce'ra, I, to multiply 
 en ndmnare, , denominator 
 nastan, almost 
 nyligen, recently 
 omkring, about 
 racka, Ha, to reach; last 
 sedan (adv. and conj.), then, 
 
 thereupon, after 
 sluta 1 , I, to end 
 ett slut, , close, end 
 stupa, I, to fall (on the battle 
 
 field) 
 
 sd'lunda, thus . 
 en tdljare, numerator 
 ursdkta, I, to excuse 
 utsprucken, p. part, of spricka 
 
 ut', to open (of flowers) 
 en vdning, -ar, story, apartment 
 en drsdag, -ar, anniversary 
 
 *Sluta when it means to shut and to conclude belongs to the Fourth Conjuga- 
 tion; sluta, slot, slolo, slutil. sluten, -et.
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 Prepositions. 
 
 345. Prepositions govern the objective case 
 which, except for a few of the pronouns, is the 
 same as the nominative. 
 
 NOTE. Till and i govern the genitive in a few idiomatic phrases: till sdngi 
 to (in) bed ; i somras, last summer. 
 
 346. The following are the most important prep- 
 ositions in Swedish: 
 
 av, of, off 
 
 bakom, behind 
 
 bland, among 
 
 efter, after, behind 
 
 enligt, according to 
 
 frdn, if ran, from 
 
 framfor, in front of 
 
 for, for, before 
 
 fb'rbi, by, past 
 
 fore, before, ahead of 
 
 aenom, igenom, through, 
 
 ' by 
 
 hos, with, by, among 
 
 i, in, into 
 
 innan, before 
 
 innanf&Tt within 
 
 inom, in, within 
 
 jcimte, by, beside 
 
 kring, omkring, around, 
 about 
 
 med, with 
 
 medelst, by means of 
 
 mellan, emellan, between 
 
 mot, emot, against, to- 
 ward 
 
 nara, near, close by 
 
 nedanfor, below 
 
 nedfor, down 
 
 ovan, above 
 
 ovanfb'r, above 
 
 pa, a, on 
 
 sedan, since 
 
 till, to 
 
 undan, away from 
 
 under, beneath, below; 
 
 during 
 uppfor, up 
 ur, out, out of 
 utmed, along 
 utefter, along 
 utfor, down 
 utom, outside of; beside, 
 
 except 
 
 utan, without 
 utanfor, outside of 
 vid, invid, by, at 
 bredvid, by the side of 
 at, to, for 
 over, above 
 
 347. The following expressions with preposi- 
 tional value are of common occurrence: 
 
 Swedish Grammar 
 
 14
 
 202 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 med avseende pa, with reference to 
 
 med hdnsyn till, in regard to 
 
 i kraft av, by virtue of 
 
 i or till foljd av, in consequence of, because of 
 
 med anledning av, on account of 
 
 i trots av (trots), in spite of 
 
 oaktat, in spite of 
 
 Icings, langsmed, along 
 
 rorande 1 
 
 angdende [concerning 
 
 betraffande J 
 
 i stdllet for, instead of 
 
 undantagandes, excepting 
 
 for .... skull, for the sake of 
 
 for. . . . sedan, ago 
 
 NOTE. For... skull and for... sedan take the expressions which they govern 
 between the two parts. For... skull requires the genitive case: for min fars 
 skull, for the sake of my father ; for hans skull, for his sake ; for ett dr sedan, 
 for Idnge sedan, a year ago, long ago. 
 
 USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 348. The following are the uses of some of the 
 most common prepositions. 
 
 Av, of, off, from, by, for: 
 
 (a) Titles: konungen av Sverige, the king of 
 Sweden. 
 
 (b) Material: klockan dr av guld, the watch is 
 of gold. 
 
 (c) Agent: han beundrades av alia, he was ad- 
 mired by everybody. 
 
 (d) Cause=for, of: han grdt av glddje, he wept 
 for joy; fian dog av hunger, he died of hunger. 
 
 (e) Quality, description or characteristic: en
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 203 
 
 man av karaktdr, av ara, a man of character, of 
 of honor. 
 
 (f) Source : jag har fdtt boken av honom, I have 
 received the book from him; det ar sndllt av dig, 
 it is kind of you. 
 
 (g) Partitive idea: onskar ni ett glas av detta 
 vin? Do you wish a glass of this wine? en af mina 
 v anner, one of my friends; den flitigaste av alia, 
 the most diligent of all. 
 
 349. Efter, after, behind, according to, for, at: 
 
 (a) Time or sequence: efter middagen ar det 
 sko'nt att vila, it is nice to rest after dinner; vem 
 kommer efter mig? Who comes after me (behind 
 me)? 
 
 (b) for: after verbs of asking, looking, sending,- 
 striving, etc.: skicka efter lakaren, send for the 
 doctor; jag har letat efter boken, I have hunted for 
 the book; vem frdgar han efter? Whom does he 
 inquire for? strdva efter, to strive for, etc. 
 
 (c) according to : efter vad jag har hort, accord- 
 ing to what I have heard (enligt is more common 
 in this sense) . 
 
 NOTE. Closely related expressions are found with certain verbs: att doma 
 efter ndgot, to judge by something ; han rattar sig efter fin fan vilja, he is 
 governed by his father's will. 
 
 350. For, for, to, before, etc.: 
 
 (a) Advantage, reference, object: han har so'rjt 
 for sina barns uppfostran, he has provided for the 
 education of his children; tala om det for honom. 
 mention it to him ; han har ingen forstaelse for ide- 
 ella saker, he has no appreciation of ideal things ; for 
 mig far du gora det, as far as I am concerned you
 
 204 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 may do it; for mig dr han blott en vanlig mdn- 
 niska, in my estimation he is only a common mortal. 
 
 (b) Price: giv mig for en krona konfekt, give 
 me a crown's worth of bonbons; hur mycket har 
 du betalt for hatten? How much have you paid for 
 the hat? 
 
 (c) Place (especially figurative, a strictly literal 
 before is generally expressed by framfor) : med 
 do'den for b'gonen, with death staring one in the 
 face; ndr faran star for dorr en, when danger is at 
 hand (before the door) ; spdnn hasten for kdrran, 
 hitch the horse to the cart. 
 
 (d) Duration of time: det dr nog for en vecka, 
 that is enough for a week (see pa and under). 
 
 NOTE. The temporal before is rendered by fore and t'nnan. 
 
 (e) Succession : han har o'versatt det ord for ord, 
 he has translated it word for word; han blev varre 
 dag for dag, he grew worse day by day, steg for 
 steg, step by step. 
 
 (f) With sedan, in the sense of ago : for en vecka 
 sedan, a week ago; for lange sedan, long ago. 
 
 (g) After verbs denoting flight, concealment, 
 caution, fear, and the like: han ftydde for fienden, 
 he fled from the enemy; han gomde sig for mig, 
 he hid from me (with such verbs for is sometimes 
 used together with undan) : att varna nagon for 
 nagot, to warn somebody against something; att 
 akta sig for nagot, to be on one's guard against 
 something; att vara rddd for nagot, to be afraid 
 of something; att skrdmma nagon for nagot, to 
 frighten somebody for something. 
 
 (h) In a number of idiomatic expressions: vad
 
 EXERCISE. 205 
 
 tar du mig for? What do you take me for? jag 
 gick for mig sjalv, I walked by myself; han skrat- 
 tade for sig sjalv, he laughed to himself; for att 
 vara bara ett barn, spelar han icke sa ilia, to be 
 only a child he does not play so badly. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXII. 
 
 A. 1. Under sommaren bor ni val ej i staden? Nej, da 
 flytta vi ut pa 1 landet; vi aga ett litet lantstalle utmed 2 flo- 
 den nedanfor 3 staden. 2. Aro era forbindelser med staden 
 bekvama? Ja, de allra bekvamaste; vi ha angbatsforbin- 
 delse med tva turer i timmen, och efter vad jag bar hb'rt, 
 kommer automobilforbindelse snart att upprattas 4 . 3. Det 
 ar mycket folk i denna restaurang, men darborta i hornet 
 till hb'ger 5 ar ett bord, som ej ar upptaget av nagon. 
 4. Detta lar vara en ypperlig restaurang, jag bar fatt adres- 
 sen av en av mina vanner. 5. Dar star han sjalv fram- 
 for disken och talar med agaren. Vill ni, att jag skall pre- 
 sentera er for 6 honom? Han ar en man av karaktar och 
 bildning. 6. Jag skall ga ned i staden 7 i dag for att gora 
 nagra uppkop for mig sjalv; vill du kanske, att jag skall ko- 
 pa nagot at dig ? 7. Det var hyggligt av dig att tanka pa 8 
 mig, men jag ar alldeles utan pengar nu. 8. Pengarna kan 
 jag fb'rskottera, jag bar fatt lana av dig sa ofta. 9. Om du 
 gar forbi Lindgrens cigarrhandel, sa titta in och hor efter 9 , 
 om de fatt in av mina favoritcigarrer an, i sa fall 10 kop en 
 lada. 10. Sa sorgligt, att herr Liden skulle do sa hastigt. 
 Vad dog han av 11 ? 11. Av hjartforlamning. Han blev 
 haftigt sjuk efter middagen. Man skickade efter 9 lakaren, 
 men han kunde ej utratta nagot. 12. Han var en praktig 
 karl ; enligt ryktet bar han utovat en storartad valgorenhet. 
 Hans dod kommer att fororsaka sorg inom vida kretsar. 
 
 1 Into; note use of ut. 'Also utefter. *Nedanfor, ovanfor, designate location 
 upp/or, nedfSr denote direction. *Note use of kommer att; skall may also be
 
 206 EXERCISE. 
 
 used. "Note omission of article. 6 Not till. 'Down town. *Think of, tdnka pa, 
 but if it means to have an opinion of it must be translated by tdnka om: vad 
 tanker du om honom, what opinion do you have of him? 9 349, a. 10 In that 
 case. 11 348, d. 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Vart flyttar ni, nar sommaren 
 kommer? 2. Var ligger ert lantstalle? 3. Ar det svart att 
 komna in till staden ? 4. Aro angbatsturerna taia ? 5. Pa 
 vad satt kommer forbindelsen med staden att forbattras? 
 
 6. Varfor tror ni att den bar restaurangen ar ypperlig? 
 
 7. Vad for tjanst vill ni gora er van? 8. Vad lovar ni att 
 gb'ra, nar ban siiger, att ban ar utan pengar? 9. Var kb'per 
 ban sina favoritcigarrer? 
 
 C. 1. Where do you live during 1 the summer? We live 
 in a little country house, which we own along 1 the river a 
 little above the city. 2. Is it not inconvenient to live out- 
 side of 2 the city? No, we have connection by 3 steamer 
 every half-hour 4 , and according to the paper we are soon 
 to have connection by 3 automobile. 3. Let us ask that 
 policeman for 5 a good restaurant; I have not had a bite to 
 eat since twelve o'clock and it is now after seven. 4. This 
 looks really cozy; shall we sit down by that table in the 
 corner? 5. Who was the gentleman who just walked past 
 us and saluted ? I met him about a week ago 6 when I took 
 a trip up 7 Gotha canal from Gothenburg to Stockholm. 
 6. May 8 I give you a piece of this steak? If you please 9 . 
 That is too much, give me only half of that. 7. After din- 
 ner I shall have 10 to hurry home; I must be at the hotel 
 before nine, I expect company between nine and ten. 
 
 8. Which is the best way of getting 11 to the hotel? By 
 street car or by steamboat? 9. The little steamboat that 
 lies there by the quay will land you right 12 in front of the 
 hotel. 10. But it will leave within a few minutes. Now
 
 VOCABULARY. 207 
 
 it backs out from the quay. 11. There will soon come 13 
 another; I think a steamboat leaves every ten minutes. 
 12. If you are ready now, we shall go down to the quay 
 ancl wait for 14 the boat. 13. Just in time 15 , there it comes 
 out 16 between those two big boats. 
 
 J See A, 1, above. z Utom or utanfor. 3 Medelst (med may also be used). 4 Far;'e 
 halvtimme or far trettionde minut (note use of ordinal in such expressions). 
 '349, a. 6 350, f ; for precedes omkring. T See A, note 3, above. *Use fa. Va, jag 
 tackar or om ni bchagar. "Present of modal. "Use infinitive of komma. 
 12 Translate right by mitt; mitt, middle, is used with certain prepositions: mitt i 
 rummet, in the middle of the room ; mitt under predikan, right in the middle 
 of the sermon ; mitt pu fingrel, right on the finger. Det plus present. 14 P&. 
 K I tid. 16 Fram. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 en automobilfurbindelse, -r, hoger (no neuter, indef.), right 
 
 connection by automobile en kaj, -er, pier, quay 
 
 bekvtim, -t, comfortable kan'ske, may be, perhaps 
 
 en bildning, culture, educa- en karaktar', -er, character 
 
 tion en krets, -ar, circle 
 
 en bit, -ar, piece, bit (bite) ett lantstdlle, -n, country house 
 
 en cigar rhandlare, , cigar en poliskonstapel, -lar, police-. 
 
 dealer man 
 
 en disk, -ar, counter prdktig, -t, splendid 
 
 en favorit'cigarr', -er, favorite en sorg, -er, sorrow, grief 
 
 cigar sorglig, -t, sad 
 
 frummande, , strange en spdrvagn, -ar, street car 
 
 en forbindelse, -r, connection en stek, -ar, steak 
 
 for'orsaka (insep. v.), I, to storartad, -at, magnificent 
 
 cause titta, I, to look 
 
 forskotte'ra, I, to advance en tur, -er, trip; turn (also 
 Gota kanal, Gotha canal luck) 
 
 Goteborg, Gothenburg tilt, frequent 
 
 en halvtimme, -ar, half hour ett uppkop, , purchase 
 
 hemtrevlig, -t, cozy, homelike upp'ratta (insep. v.), I, to 
 en hjartforlamning (-ar), heart establish, institute 
 
 failure upp'tagen, -t, occupied 
 
 hygglig, -t, nice, kind ut'rdtta (insep. v.), I, to ac- 
 Mftig, -t, violent complish
 
 208 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 utova (insep. v.), I, to exer- en dngbdtsforbindelse, -r, con- 
 cise, practice nection by steamer 
 en vulgiirenhet, charity en dngbdtstur, -er, steamboat 
 ypperlig, -t, excellent, fine trip a " 
 
 en iigare, , owner 
 IDIOMS: 1. att ha frdmmande, to have company. 
 
 2. att Jia tur, to be in luck; det ur min tur, it is 
 my turn. 
 
 3. att titta in hos nugon, to call on somebody. 
 
 LESSON XXXIII. 
 Uses of Prepositions (Continued). 
 
 351. Genom (igenom), through, by means of, 
 on account of: 
 
 (a) Direction: vi gingo genom skogen, we went 
 through the forest. 
 
 (b) Time (the preposition may follow the noun 
 in this sense and has then the form igenom): han 
 var olycklig hela livet igenom, he was unhappy 
 throughout his whole life. 
 
 (c) Means: han later hdlsa genom sin bror, he 
 sends greetings through his brother; genom stora 
 anstrdngningar har han uppndtt sitt mdl, by means 
 of great exertions he has attained his goal. 
 
 (d) On account of: genom sitt ddraktiga upp- 
 forande har han forlorat vdrt fb'rtroende, on ac- 
 count of his foolish conduct he has lost our con- 
 fidence. 
 
 352. Hos, at the house of, in the shop of, in: 
 han bor hos oss, he lives with us; hos skrdddaren, 
 at the tailor's; vi Idsa hos Gothe mycket om kons- 
 ten, in Goethe we read much about art.
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 209 
 
 353. 7, in, into: 
 
 (a) Place (literal) : i rummet, in the room; 
 place into which (literal) is denoted by in i, into: 
 han kom in i rummet, he came into the room. 
 
 NOTE. Observe the difference between expressions like ya in i kyrkan, go. in 
 i skolan (go into the church, go into the' school [house]) and ga i kyrkan, 
 go. i skolan (to attend church, to attend school)'. 
 
 (b) Place (figurative) : att leva i fattigdom, to 
 live in poverty; place into which (figurative) : att 
 rdka i svarigheter, to get into difficulties. 
 
 (c) Time (with seasons and days in the genitive 
 to denote past time, translated by last) : i vdras, 
 last spring ; i fredags, last Friday ; i gar, yesterday ; 
 i dag, to-day ; i hundratals ar, for hundreds of years ; 
 en gang i veckan, once a week. 
 
 (d) Manner: skriva i hast, to write in haste; i 
 vrede, in anger. 
 
 (e) Change, transition: grddden forvandlas i 
 smor och ost, the cream is changed into butter and 
 cheese; ga i bitar, to go to pieces. 
 
 354. Med, with, by, to: 
 
 (a) Accompaniment: mil ni ga med mig i kyr- 
 kan? Will you go to church with me? han var med 
 de forsta, som gingo, he was among the first who 
 went. 
 
 (b) Manner: att studera med flit, to study with 
 diligence; med ett enda sprang, with (at) a single 
 leap. 
 
 (c) Instrument: skicka med posten, to send by 
 mail ; skriva med penna, write with pen ; fara med 
 jarnvag, travel by rail.
 
 210 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 (d) In a number of set phrases; as, besldktad 
 med, related to; tola med, speak to, etc. 
 
 NOTE. As an adverb med means along: kom med I Come along! 
 
 355. Mot, emot, against, toward: 
 
 (a) Direction: hdren marscherade emot fienden, 
 the army marched against the enemy; var vdnlig 
 emot din bror, be kind to your brother; han kommer 
 nog fram mot kv alien, he will very likely come to- 
 ward evening; gd emot nagon, go to meet somebody. 
 
 (b) Exchange, comparison: jag bytte ut det 
 gamla pianot mot ett nytt, I exchanged the old 
 piano for a new; de vunno spelet med tio podng 
 mot fyra, they won the game with ten points to 
 four. 
 
 (c) Hostility: arbeta mot nagon, work against 
 somebody; sdtta sig emot nagot, oppose something. 
 
 (d) Remedy: hdr dr ett bra medel mot huvud- 
 vark, here is a good remedy for headache. 
 
 356. Om, about, around, in, for, of, a, etc.: 
 
 (a) Subject or topic : han berdttade om sina dven- 
 tyr, he told of his adventures; vad handlar boken 
 om? What does the book treat about? jag vet ej 
 nagot om den saken, I know nothing about that 
 matter. 
 
 (b) Time (at the end of which) : taget kommer 
 om fem minuter, the train will be here in five min- 
 utes; om en manad, in a month; om onsdag, next 
 Wednesday. 
 
 NOTE. Time within which is denoted by inom: jag skall ha det fdrdigt inom 
 nagra dagar, I shall have it ready within a few days. 
 
 (c) Time at which (indefinite) : om dagen, in
 
 EXERCISE. 211 
 
 the daytime; om vintern, in winter; tva ganger 
 om dret, twice a year. 
 
 (d) Interest, competition, with verbs of asking, 
 contending 1 , etc. : bedja om ndgonting, ask for some- 
 thing (inquire for=frdga ejter, see 349, b) ; spela 
 om pengar, play for money; tdvla om ett pris, to 
 compete for a prize; att anhdlla om ndgot, to re- 
 quest something. 
 
 (e) Motion past: ska vi forsoka att ga om honom? 
 Shall we try to pass him? (here om may perhaps 
 be regarded as a separable prefix ; it takes the main 
 stress) . 
 
 (f) Position: han har en bindel om huvudet, he 
 has a bandage about his head ; med armen om nagon, 
 with the arm around somebody; jag ar vat om fot- 
 terna, my feet are wet; norr om Stockholm, north 
 of Stockholm; till hoger om, to the right of. 
 
 NOTE. Position or motion around, especially when the meaning is literal, is 
 generally denoted by omkring or kring. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIII. 
 
 A. 1. Jag skulle vilja vaxla en del 1 svenska pengar i 
 amerikanska. Kan ni saga mig, var det narmaste vaxel- 
 kontoret ligger 2 ? 2. Jag kanner ej till 3 nagot vaxelkontor 
 i narheten, men darborta om hornet ligger en bank, och dar 
 vaxlar man nog for er. 3. Det var bra, ty jag har sa bratt- 
 om; jag skall lamna Stockholm om* ett par timmar. 
 4. Hur mycket kostar ett telegram om 5 tjugufem ord till 
 Berlin? Det blir fyrtio ore per 6 ord, och dessutom maste 
 ni betala for adress och namnteckning. 5. Avgar 7 tele- 
 grammet i dag? Ja, med 8 forsta lagenhet. 6. Jag skulle 
 vilja siinda ett tusen kronor per telegraf till Berlin, har ar 
 adressen och telegi'ammet. Tors 9 jag be om 10 ett kvitto?
 
 212 EXERCISE. 
 
 7. Du var val ej hos Bloms i gar ef teriniddag ? Nej, herr 
 Carlen bad mig ga med honom till Idrottsparken, och vi 
 kommo ej tillbaka forran fram mot 11 niotiden. 8. Hur av- 
 lopte f otbollmatchen ? Idrottsklubben Kamraterna vann 
 med tre mal mot ett. Kamraterna spelade med kraft och 
 elegans. 9. Jag traffade var gamle van Agrell i mandags. 
 Han talade om de ekonomiska svarigheter, i vilka han ra- 
 kat, och anholl om 10 ett mindre Ian. 10. Stackars Agrell, 
 allt synes ha sammansvurit sig mot honom. 11. Visst inte, 
 han har adragit sig sina motgangar genom sitt slarv. Han 
 hade kunnat vara valbargad for lange sedan 12 , om han 13 
 skb'tt sig. 
 
 l En del is used colloquially in the sense of tome, a number of. *Also dr belii- 
 get or or. *Kanna till, know of. 4 456, b. *0/. The Latin per is used after 
 an expression of price with the meaning of a; we could also say fyrtio ore ordet. 
 'Note use of pres. ; also kommer att avga. "See 354, b ; also vid. 'Common 
 form of polite request. I0 356, d. "355, a. "350, f. "Note omission of auxil- 
 iary. 
 
 B. 1. Here is a telegram for you. It is from my brother; 
 I wish to answer immediately by 1 telegraph. 2. Could 2 you 
 tell me where the nearest telegraph office is ? You will find 
 one around the corner on the first cross street. 3. How 
 much does a telegram of 3 twenty words to Paris cost? It 
 costs forty-five ore a 4 word. 4. May I then send the ad- 
 dress and signature for nothing 5 ? No, you will have to pay 
 for them too. 5. Will you take 6 dinner with 7 us next 8 
 Wednesday ? I am so sorry, but it will not be 9 possible for 
 me. 6. Why not? I have promised to take my friend Car- 
 len along to the football game in the afternoon. 7. I should 
 like to go with you myself ; they are going to compete for 10 
 the championship in football. 8. Get 11 into this compart- 
 ment; the train will start 12 in a few minutes. Hurry up! 
 9. I shall 13 take these parcels with me into the car. It was 
 so kind of you to check that valise for me. 10. That seat
 
 VOCABULARY. 213 
 
 will be 1 * very comfortable for you, if you are not afraid to 
 ride 15 backwards. 11. Thank you, good-bye! Now they 
 ring for the 16 third time. 12. How far 17 is it to Upsala? 
 Upsala lies thirty miles north 18 of Stockholm. 13. You 
 ought to visit it in 19 the spring, while the students are still 
 there. 14. They will return within 20 a month, I think. 
 15. Now we are there. Who is this gentleman that comes 
 to meet 21 us? 16. Over there, towards the west 22 , we have 
 Old Upsala. 
 
 'See A, 6, above. 2 Sec A, 1, above. 3 See A, 4, above. 4 See A, 4, above, 
 note 5. *Intet, not ingenting. 6 Use ata. 7 352. 8 356, b. 'Use present of 
 bliva. 1P 356, d. "Use j;d. 12 Use pros, of ga. 13 Use skall since the future here 
 denotes a determination. "Use kommer ait bli. 15 350, g. 18 Leave out the 
 prepositive def. article. "Use langt. 18 356, f. 19 0m or pa. 20 356, 6, note. 
 21 358. a. ''-Vaster. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 an'Mlla (insep. v.), to request 
 av'gA, to go out, depart; gd 
 
 av' to break 
 baklanges, backwards 
 en bank, -er, bank 
 ekonomisk, -t, financial 
 elegans, 1 elegance 
 en fotbollmatch, -er, football 
 
 game 
 
 genast, immediately 
 en herre, -ar, gentleman 
 en idrottspark, -er, athletic 
 
 park 
 Idrottsparken, Athletic Park 
 
 in Stockholm 
 inom, within 
 
 en kraft, -er, force, strength 
 ett kvitto, -n, receipt 
 en Wgenhet, -er, opportunity 
 en motg&ng, -ar, adversity 
 ett mal, goal; meal 
 
 ett mdsterskap, , champion- 
 ship 
 
 mojligt, -t, possible (ly) 
 
 en namnteckning, -ar, signa- 
 ture 
 
 norr (adj. and noun, no indef.), 
 north 
 
 (en) narhet, nearness, vicinity 
 
 ett ord, , word 
 
 ett paket, -er, parcel 
 
 polette'ra, I, to check 
 
 en resviiska, -or, valise 
 
 raka, I, to meet; encounter 
 
 radd (no neut. indef.), timid, 
 afraid 
 
 sammansvarja sig (refl. v.), 
 -svor, -svuro, -svurit, -en, 
 -et, to conspire 
 
 skota sig (refl. v.), Ha, to 
 take care of oneself 
 
 ett slarv, , carelessnosfi
 
 214 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 elt sate, -n, seat vaxla, I, to change 
 
 en telegraf, -er, telegraph ett vaxelkontor, exchange 
 
 en tvargata, -or, cross street office 
 
 Idvla, I, to compete . d'draga sig (refl. v.), to bring 
 
 vdlMrgad, -at, well-to-do on, contract 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. att rdka en person, to see, meet a person; att rdka 
 
 i fattigdom, svdrigheter, to become poverty-stricken, 
 
 to get into difficulties; jag rdkar inte hdr, I do 
 
 not find my way here. 
 
 2. att ddraga sig en sjukdom, to contract a disease. 
 
 'Pronounced elegangs 1 . 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 Uses of Prepositions (Continued). 
 
 357. Pa, on, upon, at, in, for, to. 
 
 (a) Place in which: boken ligger pa bordet, the 
 book lies on the table; jag mo'tte honom pa gatan 
 (not i gatan); I met him in the street; han ar pa 
 sitt rum, he is in his room ; ett hdl pa rocken, a hole 
 in the coat; pa landet, in the country. 
 
 (b) Place into which : gd pa target, pa posten, pa 
 teatern, to go to market, to the post office, to the 
 theater; gd ut pa faltet, pa landet, to go into the 
 field, into the country. 
 
 NOTE. Till teatern mean? only to the theater as a place ; pa teatern Implies 
 attendance ; att skicka till posten, to send to the post office ; att skicka pd 
 posten, to mail. 
 
 (c) Direction toward an object: han riktade sin 
 kamera pd mig, he pointed his camera at me; jag 
 blickade (sag) pd honom, I looked at him ; han syf- 
 iade pd mig, he alluded to me. 
 
 (d) Time during which, for how long: han har 
 rest till Sverige pd ett ar, he has gone to Sweden
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 215 
 
 for a year; han har ej skrivit pa en vecka, he has 
 not written for a week. 
 
 (e) Time at which : pa morgonen, in the morning ; 
 pa varen, in the spring. 
 
 NOTE. Om morgonen, om varen, etc. is much more indefinite: we must say 
 i dag pa morgonen, this morning (not om morgonen), see om. 
 
 (f) Response and expectation after certain verbs : 
 
 1. Response: svara pa, to answer; ho'ra pa, to 
 listen to; giva akt pa, to pay attention to: ho'r pa 
 vad jag sdger, listen to what I say; svara pa mitt 
 brev, answer my letter. 
 
 2. Expectation : hoppas pa, to hope for ; lita pa, 
 to rely upon; rdkna pa, to count on, etc.: jag 
 hoppas pa regn, I hope for rain; jag rdknar pa din 
 hjdlp; I count on your help; tank pa det! Think of 
 it ! jag vdntar pa honom, I am waiting for him. 
 
 (g) With certain adjectives : ond pa, angry with ; 
 matt pa, tired of; avundsjuk pa, envious of; upp- 
 mdrksam pa, attentive to; svartsjuk pa, jealous of, 
 etc.: jag dr matt pa sddana saker, I am tired of 
 (have had enough of) such things; han dr ond pa 
 mig, he is angry with me. 
 
 (h) In a number of idiomatic expressions: pa 
 svenska, in Swedish ; soppa pa oxkb'tt, beef soup ; 
 att leva pa tio dollars i veckan, to live on ten dollars 
 a week; jag har inga pengar pa mig, I have no 
 money about me; en vdxel pa (a) femtio kronor, 
 a draft for fifty dollars; pa delta sdtt, in this man- 
 ner; det gar hundra ore pa kronan, there are one 
 hundred ore to the crown. 
 
 358. Till, to, in, for, of, etc.: 
 
 (a) Motion to a place: ga till staden, till svarta 
 tavlan, till posten, till himlen: go to town, to the
 
 216 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 blackboard, to the post office, to heaven; sjunka till 
 batten, sink to the bottom; fora till bords, conduct 
 to the table; han kom till mig, he came to me. 
 
 (b) Place at or in which: ligga till stings, to lie 
 in bed ; sitta till bords, sit at table ; till sjoss, on sea. 
 
 (c) Purpose, appointment, destination, transfor- 
 mation: nyckeln ar till att Idsa upp med, the key 
 is for unlocking; de ha kront honom till konung, 
 they have crowned him king; bliva till sten, become 
 stone; har ar ett paket till er, here is a package for 
 you; vara till nytta, be of use; taga till hustru, to 
 marry (lit. to take for wife) . 
 
 (d) Specification, reference: god till karaktaren, 
 of good character; vanlig till sattet, of a good dis- 
 position ; skomakare till yrket, shoemaker by trade ; 
 benet till bordet, the leg of the table ; han ar son till 
 presidenten, he is the president's son. 
 
 NOTE. Here may perhaps be classed the Swedish equivalent for the objective 
 genitive : karleken till fosterlandet, love of country; Guds kdrlek till oss, 
 God's love for us. 
 
 (e) Addition : jag dricker kaffe till maten, I drink 
 coffee with my meals; tag socker till kaffet, take 
 sugar with the coffee. 
 
 (f) In a number of idiomatic expressions: till 
 hosten, next fall ; till pdsk far jag hem, I shall go 
 home for Easter; vad fick du till julklapp? what did 
 you get for Christmas present? vi hade lax till mid- 
 dag, we had salmon for dinner ; gratulera till fb'delse- 
 dagen, to congratulate on a birthday, etc. 
 
 (g) till och med=to, up to, including : frdn sidan 
 tjugu till och med sidan trettio, from page twenty 
 to page thirty inclusive. As an adverb it means 
 even: till och med han, even he.
 
 EXERCISE. 21? 
 
 359. Under, under, beneath, during, amid: 
 
 (a) Place, direction: jag stod under trddet, 1 
 stood beneath the tree ; jag star under hans uppsikt, 
 I am under his supervision; under omstdndigheter- 
 na, under the circumstances; kom under mitt para- 
 ply, come beneath my umbrella. 
 
 (b) Time : under hans livstid, during his lifetime ; 
 under tiden, in the meantime; under marschen, on 
 the march; under middagen, in the course of the 
 dinner. 
 
 (c) Rank, value, age: kaptenen star under majo- 
 ren i rang, the captain is below the major in rank; 
 hans bok dr under all kritik, his book is beneath all 
 criticism; vill ni salja huset under 10,000 kronor? 
 Do you wish to sell the house for less than 10,000 
 crowns? under tjugu ar, under twenty years of age. 
 
 (d) Manner: under tarar omtalade han vad som 
 hdnt, weeping (with tears) he related what had 
 happened ; under skratt och skdmt, amidst laughing 
 and joking. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIV. 
 
 A. 1. Pa 1 manga ar har ej en sa forfarlig jarnvagsolycka 
 hant som i gar; till foljd av en felsignal ursparade natt- 
 snalltaget mellan Stockholm och Uppsala. 2. Min kusin 
 var bland passagerarne, han blev raddad pa 2 ett underbart 
 satt. 3. Vad vantar du pa 3 ? Jag vantar pa att fa* en vaxel 
 a ett tusen kronor inlost, som jag utstallde pa denna bank 
 genom 5 dess korrespondent i Chicago. 4. Jag har mycket 
 litet kontanta pengar pa mig, men jag har ett kreditbrev 
 pa denna bank till belopp av tio tusen kronor. 5. Har du 
 tagit ut 6 alia dina pengar? Nej, jag har till 7 princip att 
 
 Sivedish Grammar 15
 
 218 EXERCISE. 
 
 alltid lata en mindre summa innesta; jag raknar pa att 
 kimna satta in 6 mera senare. 6. Har du reda pa att ogynn- 
 samma rykten rorande denna bank under de senaste veckor- 
 na varit i omlopp. 7. Nu vanta vi ej langre 8 pa honom, 
 utan 9 ga till bords; pa honom kan man da aldrig rakna. 
 8. Vad ha vi till middag i dag, Anna? Soppa pa lions, 
 lammstek m. m. (etc.) Maken till middag ha vi ej haft 
 pa 10 lange. 9. Vem och vad ar den dar unge mannen, som 
 vi traffade pa 11 bjudningen i gar? Han ar en son till dr 
 Liden och ar larare till yrket. 10. Lagg det har brevet pa 
 posten, sa ar du snail. Du har glomt att satta frimarke pa. 
 11. Det var bra att du gav akt darpa. Adressaten hade nog 
 blivit ond pa 12 mig, om han fatt 13 betala losen. 
 
 ^57, A. 2 357, h. '357, f. *Fa can often be translated by get. 5 351, c. 
 Generally separated; but de uttagna pengarna, de insatta pengarna; uttagare, 
 insdttare. T 358, c. 8 Translate, any longer. 'Adversative conjunction ; trans- 
 lates but after a negative. 10 357, d. "357, a. 12 357, a, f. "Fa, have to. 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Var gardagens jarnvagsolycka 
 obetydlig? 2. Varigenom ursparade taget? 3. Vem befann 
 sig pa taget vid tillfallet ? 4. Omkom han ocksa ? 5. Vad 
 beloper sig er vaxel till ? 6. Varf or behover ni ej bara myc- 
 ket kontanta pengar pa er? 7. Varf or later ni en mindre 
 summa innesta i banken? 8. Varf or vore det sakrare att 
 taga ut allt, som ni satt in? 9. Varf or har ni ej gatt till 
 bords forut? 10. Vad ar er tanke 1 om middagen? 
 
 ^Thought is here equivalent to opinion. 
 
 C. What do you think of 1 the railroad accident which 
 happened yesterday afternoon ? It is the most serious for 2 
 many years. 2. My brother, who is on a trip to Narvik, 
 was among the passengers, but was saved. 3. How? He 
 had gone into 3 the dining car and this was the only one 
 of the cars which did not derail. 4. The accident hap- 
 pened because of carelessness on 4 the part of the employees. 
 5. Could you tell me where Stockholms Enskilda Bank is?
 
 VOCABULARY. 219 
 
 I have a drjift on it foi 5 one thousand crowns. 6. All the 
 banks are closed at three o'clock sharp 6 and you have only 
 five minutes to spare 7 . 7. I must have the money, for I 
 have very little cash about me. During 8 all my travels I 
 have never been so short of money. 8. I believe that I must 
 turn to 9 you and ask for help. You can count on me. 
 9. I shall gladly 10 advance the amount of the draft for you; 
 to-morrow they will 11 cash it in the bank. 10. Now we have 
 waited long enough for 12 him and the dinner is getting 
 cold. He seems to have a habit 13 of always coming late. 
 11. What is your opinion about the book? According to 
 my opinion it is badly written. 12. How is he as to 14 
 character? I observed only one fault in 15 him while he was 
 under my supervision: too great a love of 16 money. 13. 
 Is your coffee sweet enough? Take a little more sugar. 
 No, thank 17 you. I have not used sugar with 18 my coffee 
 for many years. 14. Mr. Lind will surely be envious of 
 Carl when he hears that they have elected Carl chairman 19 . 
 
 *356, a. ; tonka om, to have an opinion of ; tanka pa, to think of (have in 
 mind), 357, f, 2. 2 357, d. 8 353, a. 4 A betjdningens sida; a is used instead 
 of pa in a few set expressions ; the place is never literal. 5 357, h. 8 Pd slaget 
 tre or precis klockan ire. To. er. 8 359, a. "Att vanda tig till, to turn to, 
 address oneself to. 10 Garna; future with skall (the future here denotes a 
 promise). "Use present; we have here a temporal adverb which obviates 
 ambiguity. 12 357, f, 2. I3 /To till vana att ; 358, c. "358, d. "352. 18 358, 
 d. note. "Nej, jag tackar. 358, e. I9 358, c. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 en adressat', -er, addressee gdrdag, yesterday 
 
 all'varsam, -t, serious en Jijalp, help 
 
 avundsjuk, -t, envious lions (collective), chickens, 
 
 ett belopp, , amount poultry 
 
 en bjudning, invitation, party in'nestd (generally insep. in 
 
 ett fel, , error, mistake this sense), to remain 
 
 en felsignal, -er, wrong signal (money) 
 
 forfarlig, -t, terrible in'losa, losa in', to redeem; 
 
 giva akt' (pa), to heed to cash
 
 220 
 
 PUKI'OSITIOMJ. 
 
 in'satta, satta in' (see sdtta) 
 to deposit 
 
 iMllna, I, to become cold 
 
 kontant', , (adj.), cash 
 
 en Correspondent', -er, corre- 
 spondent 
 
 ett kreditbrev, , letter of 
 credit 
 
 en lammstek, -ar, lamb steak 
 
 en losen, ransom; postage due w ^rbar, -t, miraculous, won- 
 
 en restaurangvagn, -ar, a din- 
 ing car 
 
 ett rykte, -n, rumor; reputation 
 
 rakna, I, to count 
 
 en sida, -or, side; page; part 
 
 ett socker (def. sockret), sugar 
 
 en soppa, -or, soup 
 
 ett satt, , manner; way 
 
 en make, -ar, mate, match 
 ett nattsncilltag, , night ex- 
 press 
 
 o'betydlig, -t, insignificant 
 ogynnsam, -t, unfavorable 
 ett omlopp, , circulation 
 om'komma (see komma), 
 
 perish 
 en princip', -er, principle 
 
 derful 
 en uppsikt, supervision 
 ur'spara, spdra ur', to derail 
 ut'stalla (generally insep. in 
 
 this sense), lib, to draw 
 
 (a draft) 
 ut'taga, taga ut' (see taga), 
 
 to take out 
 en vilxel, -lar, draft 
 
 en reda (-0 in compounds) 
 order; knowledge 
 
 vdrdslosJiet, carelessness 
 ett yrke, -n, trade 
 IDIOMS : 1. att ha reda pd nagot, to know something. 
 
 2. att gora reda for nagot, to give an account of 
 . something. 
 
 3. till foljd af, in consequence of, because of. 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 Uses of Prepositions (Continued). 
 
 360. Vid, at, by, on, etc.: 
 
 (a) Vicinity: slaget vid Breitenfeld, the battle of 
 Breitenfeld; vid bordet, at the table; vid stranden, 
 by the shore ; vid Stockholm, in the neighborhood of 
 Stockholm ; fdstad vid vdggen, fastened to the wall. 
 Also figuratively: fdsta sig vid nagon, fix one's 
 affections on somebody ; vid lampan, by the lamp. 
 
 (b) Time: vid jul, at Christmas; vid femtio ars
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 22 1 
 
 alder, at fifty years of age; vid forsta tillfdlle, at 
 the first opportunity; vid Idsandet av detta brev. 
 at the reading of this letter. 
 
 (c) Condition: vara vid god hdlsa, to be in good 
 health; vid stark hetta, at a great heat; vid gott 
 lynne, in good humor; han dr vid armen, he is in 
 the army. 
 
 (d) Contact: taga vid handen, to take by the 
 hand; rora vid saret, touch the wound; used thus 
 with verbs like hdlla, to hold ; gripa, to seize ; leda, to 
 lead; fora, to conduct; draga, to pull. 
 
 (e) Penalty: vid livsstraff, at the penalty of 
 death; vid tjugu kronors bb'ter, at a fine of twenty 
 crowns. 
 
 361. At, toward, to: 
 
 (a) Direction=toward, in the direction of, to. In 
 this sense at does not necessarily imply attainment 
 of the goal; the idea of direction is often strength- 
 ened by till placed after the governed word: han 
 har gatt at floden till, he has gone toward the river ; 
 kasta ett ben at hunden, throw a bone to the dog; 
 han skot stolen at sidan, he pushed the chair to the 
 side; han sag inte ens at mig, he didn't even look 
 at me (in my direction) . 
 
 (b) Often before an indirect object (also till) : 
 jag gav boken at Karl, I gave the book to Carl. 
 
 (c) Cause (often with a touch of ridicule or con- 
 tempt) : att skratta at, to laugh at; det dr sa man 
 kan grata at det, it is enough to make one weep. 
 
 362. A, on, is used in a few common phrases; 
 as, d andra handen. on the other hand ; d ena sidan,
 
 222 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 on the one side; en vdxel a femtio kronor, a draft 
 for fifty crowns ; a Hans vdgnar, in his behalf. When 
 the expression is literal, pa must be used: pa ena 
 sidan gatan, one one side of the street. 
 
 363. over, over, above, across, beyond, about, 
 etc.: 
 
 (a) Place (literal and figurative) =over, above, 
 beyond: ett stort moln hanger over berget, a big 
 cloud hangs over the mountain; lararen star over 
 sina larfungar, the teacher is above his pupils; over 
 havet, beyond the sea; han ar nog over trettio ar, 
 I think he is above thirty. Related to this construc- 
 tion is over after such verbs as regera, to rule ; rada, 
 to hold sway (primarily to advise) ; segra, to gain 
 a victory: Karl den tolvte regerade over ett vid- 
 strdckt rike, Charles XII. ruled over an extensive 
 realm; han segrade over sina fiender, he was vic- 
 torious over his enemies. 
 
 (b) Direction=over, across: bron, som leder over 
 floden, har rasat, the bridge which leads across the 
 river has collapsed. Related to this construction 
 are expressions like han har rest till New York over 
 Chicago, he has gone to New York by way of Chi- 
 cago. 
 
 (c) Excess: denna sak kostar over en krona, this 
 thing costs over a crown; det gar over mitt for- 
 stdnd, that surpasses my understanding. 
 
 (d) Duration: han blev hos oss over sommaren, 
 he remained with us during the summer ; over natten, 
 over night. 
 
 (e) Cause, topic=about, of, concerning, on, at: 
 
 1. With verbs like skriva, to write; tola, to
 
 EXERCISE. 223 
 
 speak ; yttra sig, express oneself : han skrev, talade 
 over ett svart dmne, he wrote, spoke on a difficult 
 topic; han yttrade sig over dagens frdgor, he ex- 
 pressed himself concerning the questions of the day. 
 
 NOTE. Om used with similar verbs may have a different meaning: att tain 
 om ndgon, to speak of somebody (make a mention of), skriva om, to write 
 about. 
 
 2. With verbs denoting feeling: sorja over, to 
 mourn; klaga over, to complain of; gladja sig over, 
 to rejoice at; vredgas over, to become angry at; 
 fortvivla over, to despair of. 
 
 3. With adjectives denoting feeling: glad over, 
 glad of; ond over, angry at; ledsen over, sorry on 
 account of. 
 
 NOTE. We say in Swedish, ond pa en person, angry with a person, but ond 
 over en sak, angry at a thing. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXV. 
 
 A. 1. Din far ar visst ej vid synnerligen god halsa nu 
 for tiden. Nej det ar han inte, men han klagar aldrig over 
 nagot, och kan inte formas 1 att tala vid en lakare. 2. Jag 
 har sagt at 2 honom mer an en gang, att vid bans hoga alder 
 och med hans svaga kroppskonstitution maste han varda 
 sig om sin halsa battre. 3. Ser ni anslaget darborta vid 
 gangen ? Det dar under tradet med orden : "Det ligger i 
 (is to) allmanhetens intresse att skona planteringarna ?" 4. 
 Ja ! Det ar ett av de manga satt, pa vilka svensken uttrycker 
 det amerikanska "Keep off the grass." Han faster 3 stor 
 vikt vid hovlighet. 5. Under min vistelse i Sverige har jag 
 ofta forvanats over den stora hovlighet, vanned 4 svenskarna 
 vid alia tillf alien bemota varandra. 6. Har ni varit vid 5 
 Skansen, det beromda friluftsmuseet, som Hazelius har 
 upprattat? Vi svenskar aro med ratta 6 stolta darover. 
 7. Nej, annu har jag ej haft tid, men vid 7 forsta tillfalle
 
 224 EXERCISE. 
 
 skall jag ga dit. 8. Doktor White, en av mina vanner i 
 London, hb'll for ej sa liinge sedan ett hogst intressant fore- 
 drag over 8 Skansen. 9. Har du traffat Karl? Han har 
 fragat efter dig. Ja, jag traffade honom nyss ute pa va- 
 gen ; han gick at staden till 9 , men sade, att ban skulle vara 
 tillbaka vid 7 niotiden. 10. Har Klara blivit fardig med sin 
 laxa an? Nej, hon var sa trott, stackars liten 10 , att bon 
 somnade over boken. 
 
 J Fd and forma are often used in the sense of make, cause : fa nagon att tro, 
 to make somebody believe ; hon kan icke format, he can't be made to ; there 
 is more compulsion implied in fd. 2 361, b; also till. *Att fasta vikt (av- 
 seende) vid, attach importance to; att Idgga vikt pa, lay stress on. 4 Note the 
 prepositional compound. "Also pa. c Med rdtta, rightly. '360, b. S 363. e. 
 9 361, a. "Note the irregularities of liten, neut., litet, def., Kile, -a, pi. amd. 
 
 B. 1. What shall 1 we do to-night? I am going to 2 the 
 theater; will you go with me? 2. No, I think I shall pass 
 the evening over my books. I am in 3 such a humor to-night 
 that I could not laugh at 4 anything. 3. I know that you 
 are tired of 5 the theater ; I am not very fond 6 of it either ; 
 you know how I have often expressed myself concerning 7 
 it. 4. At what time does the play begin? It begins as 
 usual at eight o'clock, I suppose 8 . 5. Do you intend to re- 
 main here over Christmas? No, I am going home for 9 
 Christmas. 6. Where is your home ? You have mentioned 
 it to 10 me before, but I have forgotten it. I live in Djurs- 
 holm, close by 11 Stockholm. 7. Is not Djursholm a suburb 
 of Stockholm? Yes, and it has become famous by reason 
 of the many prominent men that have lived there. 8. Vic- 
 tor Eydberg died there not so very long ago and all 12 
 Sweden mourned his death. 9. Although -I have traveled 
 across the ocean many times, the rolling and pitching of 
 the ship always makes 13 me sick. 10. How quickly we glide 
 over the water ! We shall 14 soon be at the mouth of the 
 Elbe. 11. Were you at 15 the spring festival at Skansen yes-
 
 VOCABULARY. 225 
 
 terday ? No, on account of the bad weather we all stayed at 
 home in the afternoon. We are so sorry 10 that we could not 
 go there 17 . 12. Were you not out at all? Yes, during the 
 evening the weather got better and we went to Berns and 
 listened to 18 the music. 13. Your eyes look 19 very sore. 
 Yes, I am quite worried about 20 them. 14. Have you con- 
 sulted an eye doctor about them? Yes, and he told me to 
 otudy only by daylight. 15. Take the little one 21 by the 
 hand, he may be frightened at the sight of horses. 
 
 'Future with shall. Why? 2 357, b. 3 360, c. 4 361, c. 5 357, g. *Fastad 
 fid. haller ej vidare pa, etc. 7 363, e, also angaende. 8 Use an adverb. 9 358, e, 
 fid jul, at Christmas. 10 350, a. "Invid (nara invid), i narheten av. "What 
 is the Swedish equivalent for all used in the sense of whole f 13 What order? 
 "Present. Why not future with si-all f 15 360, a. 16 What preposition? In this 
 case the preposition may also be left out. "Here and there used in the sense 
 of hither and thither are hit och dit: kom hit, not kom heir. ^357. f. 1. 
 "Se-f what? 20 363, e, 2. Den -\- what form of litenf 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 en allmanhet, public, gen- klaga, to complain 
 
 eralities en kroppskonstitution, -er, 
 en anblick, , sight, aspect constitution (of body) 
 
 ett anslag, , design, placard, ledsen, -et, sorry 
 
 notice ett lynne, -n, humor, disposition 
 
 bemci'ta, Ha, to treat, to re- en mynning, -ar, mouth (of riv- 
 
 ceive er, cannon) ; nozzle 
 
 ett dagsljus, daylight om'tala, tola om', to mention 
 
 framstdende (invariable), ond, ont, angry; evil, sore 
 
 prominent orolig, -t, uneasy, worried 
 
 fiista, I and Ha, to fasten, en pj<is, -er, play (theater) 
 
 attach en plantering, -ar, vegetation 
 en forstad, -sttider, suburb in parks, squares, etc. 
 
 furv&nas (dep. v.), I, to be en rullning, rolling 
 
 astonished rddfrdga (insep. v.), I, to con- 
 glida, gled, gledo, glidit, -en, suit (a doctor) 
 
 -et, to glide Skansen, an open air museum 
 glomma, lib, to forget in Stockholm 
 
 ett hall, , hold; direction skona, I, to spare, to treat with 
 (en) hovligJiet, -er, politeness care
 
 226 ADVERBS. 
 
 en stampning, pitching (of ett tillfiille, -n, opportunity, 
 
 ships) occasion 
 
 stanna, I, to remain uttrycka, Ha, to express 
 
 stolt, , proud en vikt, -er, weight; impor- 
 synnerligen, especially tance 
 
 sorja, lib, to mourn en v&rfest, -er, spring festival 
 
 till'bringa (insep. v., see vdrda, to care for 
 
 bringa), to spend, pass en alder, -rar, age 
 
 (of time) en ogonlakare, , eye doctor 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 Adverbs. 
 
 364. Origin. With respect to their origin ad- 
 verbs may be divided into three groups: 
 
 (1) Primitive words and compounds of such as 
 nu, now; fort, fast; blott, only; ja, jo, yes; nej, no; 
 ej, icke, inte, not; dar, there; hdr, here; darav, of 
 or from that; hdrtill, to this, hereto. 
 
 (2) The neuter singular of the indefinite form of 
 adjectives: beskedligt (from beskedlig), modestly; 
 elakt (from elak), wickedly; klart (from klar), 
 clearly; hoppfullt (from hoppfull), hopefully. 
 
 (3) Derivatives formed by means of a suffix: bara 
 (from bar), only; mojligen (from mojlig), possibly; 
 nagorlunda, tolerably. 
 
 365. Derivative Suffixes. The usual adverbial 
 suffixes are: 
 
 (a) -a: borta (bort), away; hemma (hem), at 
 home. 
 
 Note the following idiomatic expressions: att vara borta, to be out; att vara 
 hemma, to be at home.
 
 ADVERBS. 227 
 
 (b) -deles: alldeles, entirely, quite; framdeles, 
 later on; sdrdeles, especially. 
 
 Note the following idiomatic expressions: alldeles riktigt, quite right; jag 
 mar alldeles ypperligt, I am feeling very well ; jag tycker ej sa sdrdeles om 
 honom, I can't aay I like him very well ; vi fa se framdeles, we shall see later. 
 
 (c) -e (in some adverbs of time and place) : 
 Idnge, long; framme, in front, at hand, at the des- 
 tination; inne, in; uppe, up; ute, out, etc. 
 
 Note the following idiomatic expressions: i morgon aro vi framme, to-morrow 
 we shall be at our destination; har du boken framme t Do you have the book 
 at hand ? / dag var jag uppe tidigt, to-day I was up early ; han or ute och 
 gar, aker, he is taking a walk, ride. 
 
 (d) -en (from adjectives in -lig) : dagligen, daily; 
 mojligen, possibly; troligen, probably, etc. 
 
 (e) -ledes: sdledes, thus; dvenledes, likewise. 
 
 (f) -Ugen: bitterligen, bitterly; storligen, greatly; 
 svdrligen, hardly; nyligen, recently. 
 
 (g) -lunda (an old genitive of the Old Swedish 
 lund, manner, disposition) : annorlunda, in any oth- 
 er way ; ingalunda, by no means ; nagorlunda, toler- 
 ably. 
 
 (h) -s, -es (originally a genitive, generally in com- 
 pound adverbs, see 365, b, e, and 366, note 2) : alls in 
 alls icke or icke alls, not at all; ndgonstans, any- 
 where; hoptals, in great numbers; tidtals, at times; 
 tjogtals, by the score ; hundratals, by hundreds. 
 
 (i) -vis (ws=English wise) : lyckligtvis, fortu- 
 nately; mojligtvis, possibly; troligtvis, probably; 
 styckvis, piecemeal ; delvis, partly. 
 
 366. Compound adverbs are usually composed of 
 prepositions and adverbs. A very common form of 
 adverb compound is hdr, here, or ddr, there, -fa 
 preposition : hdri, in this, or that ; ddrtill, to this, or
 
 228 ADVERBS. 
 
 that; hdri bestdr skillnaden, the difference consists 
 in this ; ddrav foljer, att . . . . , from this it follows 
 (or results) that. . . ., etc. 
 
 NOTB 1. Hdr and dfir are also prefixed to many adverbs of place to form 
 extremely common compounds: daruppe, up there, upstairs; darborta, over 
 there ; da.rhem.ma, at (my, your, his, etc.) home ; ddrinne, in there, inside, etc. 
 
 2. Another form of adverb compound sometimes met with consists of a 
 noun generally in the genitive case preceded by some other part of speech 
 (see also 365): avsides, apart; halvvags, half-way; liggdags (pronounced daks). 
 bedtime (also hur dagsf at what time?); ndgonstades, somewhere; utomhus, 
 outdoors. 
 
 367. Position and comparison of adverbs have 
 already been discussed. 
 
 368. The functions of the adverb are practically 
 the same as in English. 
 
 369. The following examples illustrate the idio- 
 matic uses of certain adverbs and adverbial ex- 
 pressions : 
 
 Allt: Karl kunde allt vara flitigare, Carl could cer- 
 tainly be more diligent; han har allt bedragit dig, 
 I am sure he has deceived you. 
 
 Alltfor, for: han dr alltfor strdng, he is much too 
 strict ; du kommer for sent, you come too late. 
 
 Bar a: om jag bar a hade tid! If I only had time! 
 Kom du hit bara! Just come here (threat) ; om ni 
 behover nagot, sa bara kom till mig, if you need any- 
 thing, just come to me; bara ett ogonblick, just a 
 moment. 
 
 Ens (in questions and after negatives) : han har 
 icke ens skrivit till sin mor, he hasn't even written 
 to his mother. 
 
 For all (for ing en) del: kom for all del, innan jag 
 reser, come by all means before I leave; gor det for 
 all del icke, by all means, don't do it; jag vill for
 
 ADVERBb. 229 
 
 ing en del sdra hans kdnslor, I would by no means 
 wound his feelings. 
 
 En gang: han har varit hdr en gang, tror jag, he 
 has been here' once, I believe; han kommer en och 
 annan gang, he comes now and then; det levde en 
 gang en konung, once upon a time there was a king ; 
 han skriver inte en gang till mig, he does not even 
 write to me. 
 
 Gdrna: jag dter gdrna fisk, I am fond of fish; jag 
 skulle gdrna gora det, I should gladly do it ; jag ville 
 gdrna ha litet mera kott, I should like a little more 
 meat ; han vill nog hellre (comp. of gdrna} vila sig, 
 I think he would prefer to rest. 
 
 Heller: min bror var icke trott, och icke jag heller, 
 icke heller jag, my brother was not tired, and I was 
 not tired either, neither was I. 
 
 Inte, icke, ej: of the negative adverbs inte is used 
 most frequently in conversation. Note such em- 
 phatic expressions as : 
 
 alldeles icke, by no means; inte (icke) alls, alls 
 (icke) inte, not at all; inte ett grand, inte en smul, 
 not a bit ; inte det ringaste, inte det allra minsta, not 
 in the least. 
 
 Ju: du gor det ju? You are sure to do it? Han dr 
 ju min far, he is my father, you know ; det kunde jag 
 ju gora, I suppose I could do that. 
 
 Nog: han kommer nog, he will very likely come; 
 det kan nog vara sant, it may possibly be true ; nog 
 borde du ha lytt din far, I think you ought to have 
 obeyed your father ; jag ville nog gdrna ga med, men 
 jag har inte tid, I should indeed like to go along, but 
 I do not have time.
 
 230 EXERCISE. 
 
 i 
 
 Till: giv mig en kopp till, dr ni snail, give me an- 
 other cup, please; hum manga till? How many 
 more? 
 
 Veil 1 : ni dr vdl trott, I suppose you are tired ; det 
 dr vdl sant, that is no doubt true ; lat dr han vdl, men 
 ej dum, he is lazy, to oe sure, but not stupid. 
 
 *Val has almost the same meaning as nOg ; both denote supposition ; nog is 
 more subjective, has a ring of concern and sincerity which vdl lacks. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVI. 
 
 A. 1. Det hande en gang, att en skomakares hustru blev 
 allvarligt sjuk. 2. Hennes man hade garna kallat 1 en 
 skicklig lakare, men han hade alls ingenting, varmed han 
 kunde betala en sadan och befaim sig alltsa i stor nod. 
 3. Han kande nog en framstaende lakare, som bodde mitt 2 
 emot (tvars ofver gatan) i ett stort, vackert hus, men han 
 visste ocksa, att denne skulle begara ganska mycket for sin 
 behandling. 4. Han overlade saken lange for 3 sig sjalv och 
 kom slutligen pa foljande tanke. 5. Han gick namligen 
 till lakaren och bad honom att 4 besoka bans 5 hustni. 
 
 6. "Har ni da 6 nagot att betala mig med?" fragade lakaren. 
 
 7. "Tyvarr ej sa mycket", svarade skomakaren, "men jag 
 ger er garna allt vad jag bar, om ni bara botar min hustni." 
 
 8. "Under femtio kronor, atager jag mig icke er hustrus 
 behandling, och ni forstar ju, att ni maste betala, antingen 
 jag botar henne eller icke." 9. Skomakaren betankte sig 
 icke lange, sa mycket pengar hade han val inte, men det 
 gallde ju hans sjuka hustru darhemma, och nagon utvag 
 funnes 7 nog. 10. "Kom bara", sade han, "och jag betalar, 
 vad ni begar, antingen ni botar henne eller bringar henne 
 om livet." 11. Lakaren atog sig den sjuka fruns behandling, 
 men denna blev allt varre och varre 8 och dog slutligen. 
 12. Strax darpa 9 begarde lakaren sitt honorar av skoma-
 
 EXERCISE. 231 
 
 karen. 13. "Botade ni min hustru" fragade denne. "Olyck- 
 ligtvis icke", svarade lakaren. 14. "Ni bragte henne val ej 
 om livet", fortsatte skomakaren. Lakaren protesters de na- 
 turligtvis daremot. 15. "Ja, da kan jag alls icke inse, att 
 jag ar skyldig er nagot. 16. Dessa voro ju de tva villkor, 
 pa vilka jag lovade att betala er." 
 
 Would have liked to. *Ex. XXXII, C, Note 12. 8 350, h. 4 May be omitted. 
 s llonom referring to lakare is the subject of the infinitive, hence hans and not 
 sin. Translate : But do you have, etc. 'Translate : and there would probably 
 be, etc. 8 Note allt plus repeated comparative. 9 366, note 1. 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Vem insjuknade, skomakaren eller 
 hans hustru? 2. Varfor hamtade ban icke en lakare med 
 detsamma. 3. Fanns det nagon skicklig lakare i narheten ? 
 4. Varfor tvekade skomakareu att hamta honom? 5. Vil- 
 ken bb'n riktade skomakaren till lakaren ? 6. Vad ville den- 
 ne forst veta, innan han atog sig den sjuka fruns behand- 
 ling? 7. Var denna lakare barmhartig? 8. Vad lovade sko- 
 makaren att betala? 9. Pa vilka villkor skulle han betala 
 detta honorar? 10. Lyckades lakaren att bota den sjuka? 
 11. Var skomakaren enligt sin asikt skyldig lakaren nagot? 
 
 C. 1. She has fallen seriously ill, and her illness will 1 
 probably last long. 2. I should have liked 2 to send for a 
 prominent physician, if I had only had money. 3. The doc- 
 tor who lives right across the street is skillful, but he charg- 
 es at least ten crowns a visit 3 , I suppose 4 . If he had been 
 sick instead of his wife, he would probably 4 not have hesi- 
 tated at all to summon the expensive doctor. 5. When the 
 health of my wife is concerned, no expense, of course 5 , can 
 be too great. 6. You know, do you not 6 , that you will never 
 get your fee from him. He is honest, to be sure 6 , but al- 
 together too poor. 7. I heard that the doctor, soon after 
 sent the shoemaker a bill for his 7 treatment. 8. I have 
 not seen her since she became better. Neither have I.
 
 232 VOCABULARY. 
 
 9. I should like 6 to see Mr. Edgren; is he at home? No, ho 
 is out for the moment. He is out riding 8 with Dr. Forsell. 
 
 10. Do you happen to have those books at hand 8 ? No, I have 
 them somewhere; just wait and I shall look for them. 
 
 11. Please don't take the trouble just now; you will, no 
 doubt 6 , find them later on. 12. How are you now 10 ? I am 
 feeling somewhat better ; until now 11 the doctor has visited 
 me daily. 13. What was the cause? Too much indoor 12 
 work, I think 13 . 
 
 'Not future with skall. Why? 2 A, 1, above. S A, 3, above. Use the definite 
 postpositive article. Attention has been called before to this distributive 
 use of the definite article after expressions of price ; often per is used, XXXIII, 
 A, Note 5. In expressions of time i and om are used : han fortjilnar fyrtio 
 kroner i veckan, 2,000 kronor om aret, he makes forty crowns a week, 2,000 
 crowns a year ; en gang i manaden, once a month. ^Translate by nog, which 
 follows the simple verb or the auxiliary. 'Translate by ju which follows verb ; 
 invert. 6 Translate by an adverb. ''Hans or sinf 8 365, c. Note. 9 349. b. 
 10 There are three common ways of asking for the health of a person in Swe- 
 dish ; which are they ? ^Tills nu, tills for narvarande. '-Certain adverbs may 
 be used to modify nouns in Swedish, when so used they follow the noun : 
 arbete inomhus, indoor work ; nb'jen vtomhtis, outdoor amusements ; resan dit, 
 the trip thither, etc. "Invert. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 allvarligt (adv.), seriously framstdende, prominent 
 
 barmhdr'tig, -t, charitable, foljande, following 
 
 merciful ett honorar', fee 
 
 befinna sig (refl. v., see fin- en Jialsa, health 
 
 no,), to be, be situated; feel hdndelsevis (adv.), by chance 
 
 begdra, lib, to demand, charge inomhus (adv.), indoors 
 
 en behandling, -ar, treatment in'se (insep. v., see se), to 
 betdnka sig (refl. v.), Ha, to see, realize 
 
 reflect i stdllet for, instead of 
 
 bota, I, to cure leta, I, to search for 
 
 dagligen (adv.), daily ndmligen (adv.), namely, that 
 fort'sdtta (insep. v., see sat- is to say 
 
 ta), to continue clyckligtvis, unfortunately 
 
 framme (adv.), in front, at proteste'ra, I, to protest 
 
 hand rikta, I, to aim, direct
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 233 
 
 en sjukdom, -ar, sickness d'taga sig (refl. v.), to under- 
 slutligen, at last, finally take 
 
 tveka, I, to hesitate dtininstone, at least 
 
 tvars (adv., prep), across ett ogonblick, , moment 
 
 en utgift, -er, expense o'verldgga (insep. v., see lag- 
 en utvag, -ar, expedient ga), to deliberate 
 vara, I, to last; endure 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. att bringa om livet, to deprive of life, to kill. 
 
 2. att komma p& en tanke, to hit upon an idea. 
 
 3. Har du hdndelsevis sett min ftofcf Do you happen 
 to have seen my book? 
 
 4. langre fram (framdeles), later on. 
 
 5. for ogonblicket, for the moment. 
 
 LESSON XXXVII. 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 370. There are two general classes of conjunc- 
 tions: (1) the coordinating conjunctions, which are 
 used to connect clauses, phrases, and words of equal 
 rank; (2) the subordinating conjunctions, which 
 join a dependent clause to some other part of the 
 sentence. 
 
 I. COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 371. The coordinating conjunctions are divided 
 into two groups: (a) general connectives and (b) 
 adverbial conjunctions. 
 
 (a) General connectives. 
 
 The most important of these are : 
 
 anting en . . . eller, either ... or 
 
 bade . . . och, both . . . and 
 
 ej heller, nor, neither 
 
 eller, or 
 
 Swedish Grammar 16
 
 234 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 icke blott. . .utan dven(ocksd), not only. . .but also 
 
 men, but 
 
 och, and 
 
 samt, and 
 
 sdval. . .som, as well as 
 
 ty, for 
 
 utan, but (adversative) 
 
 varken . . . eller, neither . . . nor 
 
 372. REMARKS ON THE GENERAL CONNECTIVES. 
 Those of the general connectives which connect 
 clauses require the normal order (subject before 
 predicate) with the exception of antingen. . . .eller, 
 varken. .. .eller and ej heller, which require the 
 inverted order (predicate before subject) when 
 they connect clauses: han reste genast, men jag 
 stannade, he left immediately, but I stayed ; antingen 
 vet han ingenting, eller vdgar han ingenting saga, 
 either he knows nothing, -or he dares not say any- 
 thing. 
 
 NOTE. Icke blott... utan tifven may take either word order. The normal is 
 more common, in which case icke blott and aven are placed within the sentence ; 
 if they stand at the beginning the inverted order must be used: han icke blott 
 gav miff yoda rad, utan han lanade mig aven penningar, he not only gave me 
 good advice but he also lent me money ; icke blott gav han mig goda rad, 
 utan liven lanade han, etc., (aven rarely stands at the beginning). In dependent 
 clauses the Mormal order is used with antingen. . .eller: jag vet inte antingen 
 han kommer eller ej. 
 
 373. The following peculiarities in usage should 
 be noted : 
 
 (1) ej heller translates nor when it it not correla- 
 tive: hem kommer icke, ej heller jag, he does not 
 come, nor do I. 
 
 (2) eller requires the inverted order when used 
 with antingen and varken but not as a rule when 
 used alone.
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 235 
 
 (3) samt does not connect clauses and is not used 
 in conversational language. 
 
 (4) for often takes the place of ty in conversa- 
 tion. 
 
 (5) utan is used only after a negative and intro- 
 duces a contrast which excludes or contradicts what 
 goes before : detta dr icke ett skdl, utan en forevdnd- 
 ning, this is not a reason, but a pretext. 
 
 374. (b) Adverbial conjunctions. A large num- 
 ber of conjunctions are adverbs in form, but are 
 used as conjunctions to connect coordinate clauses. 
 The most important of these are the following : 
 
 alltsd, consequently 
 
 annars, otherwise 
 
 dels .... dels, partly . . partly 
 
 dock, yet, still 
 
 ddrfor, therefore 
 
 emellertld, yet, still 
 
 icke desto mindre, nevertheless 
 
 likvdl, yet, still 
 
 ock, also 
 
 ocksd, also 
 
 sd, so 
 
 sdledes, thus 
 
 sdlunda, thus 
 
 an. . . .an, now. . . .now 
 
 dndock, yet, still 
 
 dven, also, even 
 
 REMARKS ON THE ADVERBIAL CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 375. The adverbial conjunctions require the in- 
 verted order: klockan dr dtta, sdledes bo'r han vara
 
 236 EXERCISE. 
 
 har snart, it is eight o'clock, consequently he ought 
 to be here soon. 
 
 376. Note the following peculiarities in usage : 
 
 (1) Do not confuse the Swedish alltsa with the 
 English also; the equivalents of also are ock, ocksa, 
 and dven. Ocksa is more common than ock; when 
 used as mere adverbs ock and ocksa like English 
 too often follow the word they modify, while aven 
 precedes: man har ej hort av honom pa manga ar, 
 alltsa dr han troligen dod, he has not been heard of 
 for many years, consequently he is probably dead; 
 jag ocksa har varit i Paris, I, too, have been in 
 Paris. 
 
 (2) Dock, emellertid, likval, and dndock are often 
 placed after the subject and the predicate: angrep- 
 pet var hdftigt, dock (likval, etc.) blev det tillba- 
 kaslaget (or det blev dock, etc.) , the attack was fu- 
 rious, yet it was repulsed. The adverbial conjunc- 
 tions must be placed after the subject and the pred- 
 icate when a dependent clause precedes: ehuru han 
 var ddr, fick jag dock ej tillfdlle att tola vid honom, 
 although he was there I had no opportunity to speak 
 to him. 
 
 (3) An. . .an is equivalent to the English now. . . 
 now or at times. . . .at times (or alternately. . . . ) : 
 an grdt hon, an skrattade hon, she laughed and cried 
 alternately. Quite common in the same sense is 
 omsom .... o'msom. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVII. 
 
 A. 1. Det Jigger ett paket smutsiga starksaker anting- 
 en i matsalen eller i salongen. Var snail och tag dem
 
 EXERCISE. 237 
 
 till strykinrattningen, Karl. 2. Sag at dem, att bade 
 kragar och skjortor maste vara vita och val 1 strukna, ty 
 de aro mycket vardslosa. 3. Jag later 2 icke hamta tvat- 
 ten sjalv, utan 3 de maste skicka hem den fore klockan 
 sex pa onsdag kvall. 4. Herr Sjostedt bad mig halsa och 
 saga, att antingen 4 kommer han pa slaget fem, eller kom- 
 mer han icke forran i morgon. 5. Klockan fem? Det 
 ar bara halv tva nu; da hinner jag icke blott att ga till 
 barberaren, utan ocksa att utratta ett par arenden. 6. Har 
 sir en f risersalong ; ehuru den icke ser fin ut, far jag lik- 
 val lov 5 att ga in, ty jag har brattom. 7. Jag onskar 
 att bli bade klippt och rakad, men jag har bratt, alltsa 
 far ni vara snail och skynda er. 8. Vad felas den har 
 rocken? Dels 6 saknas ett par knappar, dels 6 har den 
 gatt upp i sommarna har och dar. 9. Ehuru det ar myc- 
 ket att laga pa den, sa skall jag emellertid 7 forsoka att 
 fa den fardig till i kvall. 10. Emedan ni lagat rocken sa 
 val 1 , skall jag ocksa bestalla en ny kostym hos er. Var dar- 
 for sa god och tag matt pa (of) mig. 11. Jag anvander en- 
 dast de basta varor och sysselsatter endast de skickligaste 
 arbetare, salunda kan jag garantera bade tyget och snit- 
 tet. 
 
 1 Bra and val would here be interchangeable, val denoting a. higher degree 
 of excellence. Bra often has reference to the essential excellence, val, to the 
 outward: skriva val and skriva bra are not the same, the former refers to form, 
 the latter to contents. Bra colloquially may have the sense of very (much): 
 bra mycket, arbeta bra, etc. 2 Note use of later. '373, 5. 4 372. 5 Fd lov, 
 must. 375. '376, 2. 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Var ligger paketet med starksa- 
 kerna? 2. Vart vill ni, att Karl skall bara det? 3. Hu- 
 ru vill ni ha era kragar och skjortor?' 4. Nar maste 
 tvatten vara fardig? 5. Yarfb'r? 6. Vad later herr Sjo- 
 stedt halsa ? 7. Vad amnar ni gora under tiden ? 8. Var- 
 for gar ni in i en f risersalong, som ej ser fin ut? 9. Vad 
 vill ni ha gjort dar? 10. Vad fattas er rock?
 
 238 VOCABULARY 
 
 C. 1. A boy is here from the laundry and asks for 1 
 your washing, but we can't find it, therefore I came in 
 to ask you. 2. It is either on the little table in the dining 
 room or in the hall. Just 2 wait a little, I shall come 
 down myself. 3. It is a very poor laundry, they can 
 neither wash nor iron. Carl is not satisfied with their 
 work either 3 . 4. You must not wait for 4 me to call for it 
 this time, but send it home on Friday 12 without fail. 
 5. Neither the collars nor the cuffs were well ironed last 
 time. 6. Both the washing and the ironing must be bet- 
 ter next 5 time, or 6 I shall send my washing to another 
 laundry. 7. I don't know his address ; consequently I can't 
 write to him. 8. My friend writes that he will either come 
 at five o'clock sharp 7 or not at all. 9. Although he will be 
 here in an hour, yet I shall go to the barber shop. 10. I 
 need not only a hair cut 8 , but also a shave 8 . 11. I have only 
 three quarters 9 of an hour to spare 10 , hence you must hurry. 
 12. The coat was almost worn out; nevertheless he sent it 
 to the tailor to be mended. 13. Although the coat was al- 
 most worn out, nevertheless 11 he sent it, etc. 
 
 1 349, b. 2 369, bara. 3 369, heller; place negative + adverb after the subject. 
 4 357, f, 1, 2. (Translate by clause.) 'A'a'sia; note definite form of adjective, 
 noun is indefinite. What two words translate timef 6 When or equals other- 
 wise, it is translated by annars. ''Precis klockan fern or pa slaget fern. 8 Idioni 
 3. 9 Tre kvarts timme. IO Use a prepositional phrase. "376, 2. "See 342. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 en arbetare, , workingman fore (prep.), before 
 an'vanda, lib (impf. anvdn- forrdn' (conj.), before 
 
 de), to use garante'ra, I, to guarantee 
 
 en barberare, , barber g& upp' (sep.), to go up; rise 
 
 bestal'to, lib, to order (sun) ; open 
 
 ehuru, although hamta, I, to fetch 
 
 felas (dep., intr.), I, to lack, hinna, Tiemn, hunno, hunnit, 
 
 to ail -en, -et, to have time; at- 
 
 en f riser' salong, -ei; (common- tain, get (to) 
 
 ly, rakstuga) , barber shop
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 239 
 
 en kostym', -er, suit, costume stryka, stro'k, stro'ko, stru- 
 en Jcrage, -ar, collar kit, -en, -et, to iron; erase, 
 
 laga, I, to mend; to occasion rub 
 
 en manschett', -er, cuff en strykinrattning, -ar, laundry 
 
 ett matt, , measure (en)strykning, ironing 
 
 ned (adv.), down starksaker (pi.), laundry 
 
 nojd, nojt, satisfied (linen) 
 
 en onsdag, -ar, Wednesday sysselsatta (see satta) , to oc- 
 ett paket', -er, parcel cupy; to employ 
 
 sakna, I, to miss en som, so'mmar, seam 
 
 en salong', -er, drawing room; en tambur', -er, vestibule, hall 
 auditorium (in a theater) ett tyg, -er, cloth 
 
 utsliten, -et, worn out 
 
 en skjorta, -or, shirt vara, -or, article; merchandise 
 
 smutsig, -t, dirty, soiled v&rdslos, -t, careless 
 
 ett snitt, , cut ett iirende, -n, errand 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. Jag hinner ej att go'ra det, I shall not have time 
 to do it. 
 
 2. Han hann dit i tid, he reached there in time. 
 
 3. Jag o'nskar att bli klippt, rakad, 1 wish to have a 
 hair cut, a shave. 
 
 4. Rocken har gdtt upp i sommen, the coat has ripped 
 in the seam. 
 
 5. Darren har gdtt upp, the door has opened. 
 
 6. Laga, att ni ar har da, see to it that you are 
 here then. 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 Conjunctions (Continued). 
 
 II. SUBORDINATING CONJUNTIONS. 
 
 377. The most important of these are : 
 
 (a) Comparative: ju....desto (dess), the.... 
 the ; som, as ; sasom, as, such as ; an, than. 
 
 (b) Concessive: ehuru, fast, fastdn, oaktat, 
 though, although; om ock, om an, aven om, even if, 
 even.
 
 240 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 (c) Causal : da, efter, eftersom, since, as ; emedan, 
 because ; entir, since ; som, as ; darfor att, because. 
 
 (d) Conditional: bara, if only; if all, in case, if; 
 om, if, whether. 
 
 (e) Consecutive (result) : sa. . . .att, so. . . .that; 
 sa att, so that. 
 
 (f) Final: for att, pa det att, in order that; sa 
 att, so that, in order that; att, that. 
 
 (g) Temporal: da, when; forrdn, innan, before; 
 medan, while; ndr, when; sedan, after; 'sa ofta, as 
 often as ; sa snart, as soon as ; tills, until. 
 
 (h) The general subordinating att, that. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 378. After a subordinating conjunction many 
 adverbs (negative adverbs, indefinite temporal ad- 
 verbs and certain adverbs expressing supposition, 
 etc.) which in an independent clause follow the sim- 
 ple predicate or auxiliary must be placed before the 
 predicate: eftersom han icke kommer, sa fa vi 
 borja dta utan honom, since he does not come, we 
 shall have to begin to eat without him; det dr osd- 
 kert, om vi ndgonsin fa se honom, it is doubtful, if 
 we ever shall see him; han sade, att han mojligen 
 skulle kunna lana mig ett par hundra, he said that 
 he possibly might be able to lend me a couple of hun- 
 dred. 
 
 NOTE. If the independent clause follows, its verb precedes the subject and 
 is often introduced by sd, so: ehuru solen tycktes skina ganska varmt i dag 
 pa formiddagen, sa var luften ratt sval, although the sun seemed to shine 
 quite warm, the air wag quite cool. 
 
 379. In a subordinate clause the auxiliary hava 
 is very often omitted: om han inte slosat bort sina 
 pengar, sa hade han varit vdlbdrgad nu, if he had
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 241 
 
 not squandered his money, he would have been in 
 easy circumstances now. 
 
 380. The following will serve to illustrate the 
 uses of the subordinating conjunctions: 
 
 (1) Ju requires the normal order of words, its 
 correlative desto (dess) the inverted order: ju forr 
 du go'r det, desto Idttare gar det, the sooner you 
 do it, the easier it will be (go). 
 
 (2) Som may have both a comparative and a caus- 
 al value (eftersom is more common in the sense of 
 since) : han gjorde precis som jag, he did exactly 
 as I ; lika rik som du, as rich as you (sdsom is less 
 common; it is more emphatic than som: sdsom det 
 nu regnar, har det icke regnat forr i ar, as it now 
 rains it has not rained before this year) ; som vddret 
 var tryckande, holl jag mig inne, as the weather was 
 oppressive, I stayed indoors. 
 
 (3) Om ock, om an are often separated if they 
 stand at the beginning of a clause, ock and an being 
 placed immediately after the subject: om han an 
 vore har, sd kunde m inte gora ndgot, even if he 
 were here, we could not do anything. 
 
 (4) Da and ndr are temporal conjunctions, but 
 both may, like ivhen in English, have a causal value 
 (da is more common in the sense of as) ; when as 
 interrogative nar. 
 
 (5) Emedan and endr are used less in the spoken 
 than in the written language. 
 
 (6) Bara=om bara (often om. . .bara), if only: 
 om det bara inte regnar, sa skola vi ga, if only it 
 does not rain, we shall go.
 
 242 EXERCISE. 
 
 (7) Om is also equivalent to whether in an indi- 
 rect question: jag vet ej, om jag skall stanna eller 
 ffd, I do not know whether I shall stay or not. Som 
 om, as if, as though : det ser ut, som om det skulle 
 regna, it looks as though it would rain. 
 
 (8) Pa det att is less common than the other final 
 conjunctions ; sa att always denotes result when used 
 with the indicative : han skadade sig, sa att han icke 
 kunde arbeta, he injured himself so that he could 
 not work. For att with the infinitive is used when 
 the subject in the purpose clause would be the same 
 as in the principal one. 
 
 (9) Sa ofta, as often as, and sa snart (sa fort), 
 as soon as, may take som but generally do not: sd 
 snart han kommer, sand honom hit, as soon as he 
 comes send him here. 
 
 Observe : sd ofta som heist, as often as you please ; sd snart som heist, as 
 soon as you please ; ndr som heist, whenever you please. 
 
 (10) Att is almost identical in its usage with the 
 substantive conjunction that. Like its English 
 equivalent it is often omitted: jag formodar han 
 kommer snart, I suppose he will soon be here; jag 
 tror icke jag kan, I don't believe I am able. 
 
 NOTE 1. Subordinate noun clauses introduced by att may be immediately 
 preceded by a preposition: han har ofveitygat mig om att han menar vpprik- 
 tigt, he has convinced me that his intentions are sincere ; endast genom att du 
 kom miff till hjdlp, blev jag rdddad, only by your coming to my assistance I 
 was saved. 
 
 2. Prepositions may also govern other clauses : jag tanker pa hur jag skall 
 fa bud till min bror, I am thinking of how I shall get a message to my broth- 
 er ;jag gldder mig over vad som har hdnt, I rejoice over what has happened. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVIII. 
 
 A. En viss person erholl en gang ett tungt brev f ran en 
 van. Enar brevet ej var frankerat, maste han betala ganska
 
 EXERCISE. 243 
 
 mycket i losen. Da ban oppnade det, fann han ingenting 
 annat an orden : "Jag mar alldeles fortraffligt." Mottaga- 
 ren skrattade och avsande samma dag 1 ett stort paket till 
 vannen, avenledes utan att frankera det. Adressaten beta- 
 lade utan att knota den hoga losen i hoppet, att han skulle 
 bli rikligt ersatt genom paketets innehall, sa mycket mer 
 som dess tyngd lat ana nagot vardefullt. Till sin over- 
 raskning fann han dock intet annat dari an en stor sten 
 med orden: "Vid underrattelsen att du madde bra, foil 
 narslutna 2 sten fran mitt hjarta." 
 
 1 Note use of indefinite form with samma. 2 Narslutna is definite and the noun 
 indefinite, so innelyckta, inclosed. 
 
 B. Conversation. 1. Vad maste man betala, nar ett 
 brev ar ofullstandigt eller icke alls frankerat? 2. Vad fann 
 personen i fraga, nar han oppnade brevet? Vad gjorde han 
 for att hamnas pa vannen ? 4. Varf or betalade vannen den 
 hoga losen utan att knota ? 5. Vad var det i all synnerhet, 
 som kom honom att tro, att paketet inneholl nagot varde- 
 fullt? 6. Hur kande han sig vid upptackten av paketets 
 innehall? 7. Vad hade avsandaren bifogat? 
 
 C. Complete the following according to the anecdote 
 above and the indications given; be especially careful to 
 get the word order correct. 1. Brevet var ej frankerat, 
 alltsa 1 . . . (must pay, etc.). 2. Da han oppnade brevet, . . . 
 (he found, etc.). 3. Nar en viss person var pa resa, . . . 
 (he received, etc.). 4. Eftersom han insag, att bans van ve- 
 lat spela honom ett spratt, . . . (lie decided, etc). 5. Han 
 onskade att hamnas pa sin van, darfor 1 ... (lie sent, etc.). 
 6. Emedan han sag, att en van hade sant det tunga brevet, 
 ... (he paid, etc.). 7. Ehuru han sag, att avsandaren ej 
 var en av bans vanner, . . . andock ... (he paid, etc.). 
 8. Han trodde, att paketet inneholl nagot vardefullt, sa 
 mycket mer som. . . (it was not light). 9. Ehuru han van-
 
 244 EXERCISE. 
 
 tat nagot annat, . . . icke desto mindre 3 ... (he did not 'be- 
 come, astonished). 10. An 1 ... (he played) en van ett 
 spratt, an en annan. 11. Ju tyngre det ar, desto 4 vardeful- 
 lare . . . (one believes the contents to be). 12. Den fattige 
 mannen her om brb'd, ty 5 ... (he is hungry). 13. Han 
 sade, att ... (he knew nothing). 14. Ju fb'rr ... (he 
 conies), desto 4 fortare... (we shall be ready). 15. Yara 
 kusiner komma icke att besoka oss i bb'rjan pa juli . . . 
 (but) i slutet av September i stallet. 16. Jag tordes ej 
 vanda mig till honom, enar ... (I had never seen him 
 before). 
 
 WS. 378, note. 376, 2. 379, 7. *372. 
 
 D. 1. As soon as 1 the tailor comes, please 2 send him up 
 to me. 2. I have sent for 3 you because my friends have rec- 
 ommended you to me so often. 3. If you have samples of 
 cloth that I like 4 , I may order 5 a suit. 4. The finer and 
 more durable the cloth is, the better, even if it should cost 
 a little more. 5. As the suit now is, it does not please me, 
 (but 6 ) you will have to change it. 6. Don't you see that 
 the coat is altogether too tight under the arms; besides it 
 does not fit me very well in the back. 7. You must hurry 
 and change it so that you can send it home on 7 Friday, 
 for I shall leave 8 the city on Saturday. 8. He did his 
 work so well that all were pleased 9 with it. 9. Since you 
 went away yesterday, he has done nothing but play 10 . 
 10. Since you cannot do it, you must let me try. 11. As 
 long as 11 it rains, we cannot go out. 12. The boys had seat- 
 ed themselves at the table in order to 12 study. 13. We have 
 not gone away, nor 13 shall we. 14. He does not believe what 
 you say, nor I either 13 . 15. The dearer the food is and the 
 colder the weather, the more the poor suffer. 16. He went 
 out of the house without saying 14 a word. 17. Have }ou
 
 VOCABULAKY. 
 
 245 
 
 thought of 15 how we can help him? 18. I have no confi- 
 dence in 15 what he does. 
 
 1 380, 9. 2 Far god och. Give at least three equivalents for the English 
 please. "349, b. *Tycka om can be used in the sense of like about both ani- 
 mate and inanimate objects ; alska, to love, generally only about animate ob- 
 jects (also about objects like home, fatherland, ete.) : hdlla av, to cherish af- 
 fection for, only about animate objects. "Use present of verb with kanhdnda, 
 perhaps. "373, 5. 'Either pa or om. What form does pa require? What, 
 omf (See 342 and note 1.) 'Either of the three equivalents for the future 
 will do here. Which are they ? 9 Nojda or belatna. "Swedish uses the supine 
 instead of the infinitive. "In analogy with as soon as, 380, 9. 12 380, 8. 18 369, 
 heller, and 373, 1. "Use infinitive. 15 380, 10, note 2. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ana, to have a presentiment narsluten, -et, inclosed 
 arm, -ar, arm passa, I, to suit, fit 
 
 av' siinda, sanda av', to send, ett prov, -er, sample; test 
 
 dispatch 
 
 beldten, -et, satisfied 
 
 er'hdlla (insep.), to receive 
 
 er'satta (insep.), to compen- 
 sate; take the place of 
 
 fattig, -t, poor 
 
 fin, -t, fine 
 
 (Pi. ) 
 
 riklig, -t, abundant 
 sitta, satt, sutto, suttit, to 
 
 sit; fit 
 
 ett spratt, , trick 
 trdng, -t, narrow, tight 
 tvng, -t, heavy 
 
 ett fortro'ende, -n, confidence toras, tordes, torts, to dare 
 Jiamnas (dep.), I, to take en underrattelse, -r, informa- 
 
 revenge tion 
 
 ett innehdll, , content (s) varaTctig, -t, durable 
 knota, I, to grumble vardefull, -t, valuable 
 
 leka, Ha, to play dndra, I, to change 
 
 lida, led, ledo, lidit, -en, -et, dvenledes, likewise 
 
 to suffer o'verrasfcad, -at, surprised 
 
 en mottagare, , recipient o'verraskning, -ar, surprise 
 
 IDIOMS: 1. ingenting annat an, ingen annan an, nothing but, 
 no one but. 
 
 2. att hamnas pd ndgon, to revenge oneself upon 
 somebody. 
 
 3. att lata ana, to indicate.
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 Interjections. 
 
 381. The most common interjections are: 
 
 ack! alas! oh! hysch! hush! 
 
 ah! aha! ah! klatsch! crack! 
 
 aj! ouch! kras! smash! 
 
 fy! shame! whew! kratsch! crash! 
 
 7m/ ha! o/oh!0! 
 
 halld! hello! ojl ouch! 
 
 hejl hey! paff! pang! bang! 
 
 hejsan! heigh-ho! plask! splash! 
 
 hm! hm! ptro! whoa! 
 
 hurra! hurrah! puh! usch! whew! 
 
 hu! whew! ve! woe! 
 
 NOTE 1. A number of other words and expressions are also used as inter- 
 jections, such as ffott I good ! halt ! halt ! hell ! hail ! hjdlp ! help ! Se dtir ! 
 look! Se upp ! look out! Vdlan' ! very well! etc. 
 
 2. Aj is the usual interjection to express pain. Usch expresses disgust ; 
 hu, horror, puh, oppression and discomfort, fy, reprimand and disgust. These 
 interjections are often followed by da: usch da t fy da! 
 
 382. The affirmatives ja and jo, yes, and the 
 negative nej, no, may be classed as interjections. 
 Jo is used in answer to a negative question or in 
 answer to a question or statement implying doubt: 
 
 (1) Kommer han snart? Ja, det gb'r han. Will 
 he come soon? Yes, he will. 
 
 (2)Du har val icke tid nu? Jo, det har jag visst. 
 I don't suppose you have time now? Yes, certainly 
 I have. 
 
 (3) Ska vi fara (doubt) ? Jo visst! Shall we go? 
 Certainly ! 
 
 NOTE. Ja and jo are often strengthened by the addition of da and visst: 
 ja visst, jo visst, certainly, yes ; jo da, why, yes. Ja may sometimes be rendered 
 by well: ja, har jag inte sagt dig detf Well, haven't I told you so.
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 247 
 
 383. Jasd, an interjection extensively used in 
 Swedish, is made to express almost any emotion, 
 as joy, sorrow, anger, menace, etc. It may be ren- 
 dered by so, oh! is that so? ivell, you don't say! etc. 
 
 384. Nej is often strengthened by da, visst inte 
 or inte alls: Nej da, no indeed; nej visst inte, cer- 
 tainly not; nej, inte alls, not at all. It has other 
 idiomatic uses: Nej, vad sdger du? You don't say! 
 Nej, se ddr! Why, just look! Nej, sa vackert! How 
 beautiful !
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 The Use of the Articles. 
 
 1. Some of the most important uses of the articles have 
 been given already. The following summary may be useful. 
 
 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 The definite postpositive article is used: 
 
 (a) With abstract nouns, nouns of material and class: leve 
 friheten, long live freedom; guldet dr ej sd nyttigt som jdrnet, 
 gold is not as useful as iron; mdnniskan dr sJcapelsens krona, 
 man is the crown of creation. 
 
 NOTE. The article is omitted when the noun is not used in an absolutely 
 general way: han har guld, he has gold (partitive). 
 
 Cb) With names of seasons and days of the. week: sommaren 
 dr slut, summer is ended; om vdren, in the spring; pd mdnda- 
 gen, on Monday. 
 
 Note omission of article in expressions like om mdndag. 
 next Monday. 
 
 (c) With many names of rivers, lakes, oceans, mountains: 
 Of re sjon, Lake Superior; Osiers jon, the Baltic; Klippiga Ber- 
 gen, the Rocky Mountains. 
 
 (d) With names of streets: Linnegatan, Linng Street; Oden- 
 gatan, Oden Street. 
 
 (e) With names of places of public and official resort: i 
 kyrkan, in or to church; i skolan, at (in) or to school; infor 
 ratten, in court. 
 
 (f) In a distributive sense where English uses the indefinite 
 article. In temporal expressions the noun is preceded by a 
 preposition, generally i or om: tvd Jcronor metern, two crowns 
 a meter; hundra Jcronor i veckan, a hundred crowns a week; 
 tvd gdnger om dret, twice a year. 
 
 (g) Instead of possessive adjective, see 178.
 
 APPENDIX. 249 
 
 (h) With titles used alone in address: vill doktorn vara sd 
 god och komma? Please come, doctor; har kyrkoherden trdffat 
 honomf Have you met him, rector? (See 142.) 
 
 2. The definite postpositive article is omitted: 
 
 (a) With nouns used as partitives (some, any) or as & 
 simple predicate: har ni pengarf Do you have money? But 
 penningen (general) dr upphovet till mycket ont, money is 
 the cause of much evil. 
 
 Cb) After samme, same: samme gosse, som m sago i gat, 
 the same boy that we saw yesterday. 
 
 3. The prepositive article is as a rule used in connection 
 with the postpositive article when the noun is preceded by 
 an adjective. It may be omitted in a few instances (cf. tht 
 remarks on the prepositive article, 126, 2). 
 
 THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 4. ft thus appears that the definite article is used more 
 widely than in English. On the other hand the indefinite 
 article is more frequently omitted: 
 
 (a) Before an unmodified noun denoting vocation, rank 
 character, station in life, used alone, or connected by som, 
 in the former case also before a noun denoting nationality. 
 han dr soldat, he is a soldier; han talade som soldat och ej 
 som statsman; he spoke as a soldier and not as a statesman. 
 But we must say: han ar en tapper soldat, he is a brave 
 s. oldier. 
 
 NOTE. If the noun and modifier form a set phrase the indefinite article is 
 omitted : han ar svensk sprdklarare, he is a teacher of Swedish ; han ar e>< 
 svensk sprdkldrare would mean he is a Swedish teacher of langiiages ; han a, 
 kungligt rad, he is a royal councilor. 
 
 (b) Often in phrases: i hast, in haste, in a hurry; me& 
 grdtande stamma, in a tearful voice; med darrande hand. 
 with a trembling hand; jag har huvudvdrk, tandvdrk, etc., 
 I have a headache, toothache; jag har fdtt svar, I have re- 
 ceived an answer, etc. 
 
 (c) Note such forms as nagra fd, a few; mdngen, -et, many a; 
 en sddan, ett sddant, such a; vilken, -et, what a; vilken man 
 han dr! What a man he is! 
 
 Sivedish Grammar. 17
 
 350 APPENDIX. 
 
 Rules of Gender. 
 
 REMARK. Only the rules for determining the neuter gender 
 are given. In regard to masculine and feminine nouns it 
 will suffice to say that sex names follow the sex male names 
 being masculine, female names, feminine. Originally masculine 
 or feminine names of inanimate objects or abstracts are now 
 classed as common gender (Swedish realgenus or den-genus). 
 
 5. Neuter are: 
 
 (a) Almost all names of continents, countries, places, 
 metals, letters of the alphabet, and all words not real sub- 
 stantives but used as such: det mdktiga Amerika, the powerful 
 America; det vackra Stockholm, the beautiful Stockholm; 
 jdrnet, the iron; det sko'na, the beautiful. 
 
 (b) Verbal abstracts of the same form as the verb after 
 dropping the infinitive ending -a, with or without change of 
 vowel: fallet, the fall; kallet, the calling; skriket, the cry; 
 derived from falla, kalla, skrika. 
 
 (c) Nouns ending in -a (pi. -n), -an (in concrete nouns), 
 ande 1 , ende 1 , at 1 , dome 1 , -e (pi. -n), -el and -er (plur.=sing) ! , 
 eri, -ment, -on, -skap (plur.=sing.) 2 , -um, -eum, -turn. 
 
 J In abstract nouns. 2 Other\vise common gender. 
 
 Note* on Inflection of Nouns. 
 VOWEL MODIFICATION IN THE PLURAL. 
 
 6. The following nouns modify the vowel in the plural, 
 some also double the final consonant: 
 
 en and, Under, duck en man, man (manner) man 
 
 en bok, bocker, book en moder, modrar, mother 
 
 en bot, boter, fine en mus, moss, mouse 
 
 en brand, Grander, fire-brand en natt, natter, night 
 
 en broder, broder, brother en rand, rander, border 
 
 en dotter, dottrar, daughter en rot, rotter, root 
 
 en fader, fader, father en son, soner, son 
 
 en fot, fotter, foot en spdng, spanger, foot-bridge 
 
 en gd$, gdss, goose en stad, stader, city 
 
 en hand, hdnder, hand en stav, staver, stave 
 
 en ledamot, ledamoter, member en stang. sttinger, pole 
 
 en ZMS, loss, louse en tdng, tiinger, pincers
 
 APPENDIX. 251 
 
 DOUBLE PLURALS. 
 
 7. Some nouns have double plurals, corresponding to dif- 
 ferent senses of the singular: 
 
 en bors, borsar, purses borser, bourses 
 
 en form, formar, molds former, shapes 
 
 en gang, gdngar, paths gdnger, times 
 
 en stav, stavar, staffs staver, staves 
 
 SINGULAR LACKING. 
 
 8. Some nouns occur only in the plural, the following being 
 the most important: 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 anor, pedigree snubbor, scolding 
 
 bannor, scolding sndsor, snubbing 
 
 hdvor, goods, gifts sddor, chaff 
 
 inalvor, entrails dthdvor, gestures, manners 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 furaldrar, parents vagnar, behalf; pd (d) ndgons 
 
 goddagar, easy life vagnar, in behalf of somebody 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 annaler, annals ranker, intrigues 
 
 ferier, vacation skrofler, scrofula 
 
 flnanser, finances specerier, groceries 
 
 gronsaker, vegetables umgalder, dues 
 
 musikalier, music (written) utskylder, taxes 
 
 DOUBLE GENDER. 
 
 9. Some nouns may have either common or neuter gender: 
 the most important of these are: 
 
 blod, blood ndbb, beak, bill 
 
 bolster, bolster paraply', umbrella 
 
 borr, drill parasoll', parasol 
 
 brarn, border, trimming redskap-, utensil, tool 
 
 doft, fragrance snitt, cut
 
 252 Al'PENDlX. 
 
 finger 1 , finger span, shaving 
 
 musslin', muslin tack, thanks 
 
 'Generally fingrar in the plural. 2 Always common gender when used in a 
 collective sense : redskapen, the utensils. 
 
 Irregularities in Conversational Pronunciation. 
 
 10. Conversational Swedish presents many peculiarities 
 in pronunciation, among which are the following: 
 
 (a) The words mig, dig, sig, and saga are practically always 
 pronounced as if written maj, ddj, saj, and saja. 
 
 (l>) Det often drops the t in pronunciation. Colloquially 
 dem is always pronounced as if written dom. In certain parts 
 of Sweden, especially in Stockholm, dom is used for de. An- 
 other common colloquial form for de is di. 
 
 (c) Adjectives ending in -ig generally drop g before the 
 neuter -t in pronunciation: tro'ligt, probable, pronounced 
 tro'litt; ste'nigt, stony, ste'nitt, etc. 
 
 (d) Ar and aro, is, are, are often pronounced o or e. 
 
 (e) Och is generally pronounced d, so is also att when it is 
 the sign of the infinitive: jag skulle tycka om att (d) traffa 
 honom, I should like to see him. 
 
 (f) Vad very often drops d in conversation: Va(d) fbe)falls? 
 I beg your pardon, what did you say? Va(d) menar duf What 
 do you mean? 
 
 (g) Final -t in the supine of verbs of the Fourth Conjugation 
 is dropped in conversation in many parts of Sweden: tagi 
 (hard or soft g) for tagit, skrivi for skrivit. So also final -t in 
 mycket and litet. 
 
 (h) Skall is generally pronounced ska; taga, bliva, draga, 
 hava, 'bedja giva are generally shortened to ta, Wi, dra, ha, 
 be, ge. 
 
 (i) Verbs of the First Conjugation often drop the ending -de 
 of the past tense in conversation: jag tala med honom i gdr, 
 I spoke to him yesterday. 
 
 (j) There are a number of familiar words which are 
 softened in conversation by the dropping or assimilation of 
 a consonant: tradgdrd, garden, tragg&rd; gastgivare, inn- 
 keeper, where stg^= sJi.
 
 APPENDIX. 2o:> 
 
 (Jc) The plural ending -or of the First Declension is often 
 pronounced ~er: vecka(or), vecker. 
 
 (I) For enclitic pronouns 'en, 'et ('t), and -na, see 140, c. 
 
 Irregularities in Conversational Grammar. 
 
 11. The most common grammatical irregularities met with 
 in the spoken language are here noted: 
 
 (a) The singular of a verb regularly takes the place of the 
 plural in conversation. 
 
 (~b) Neuters of the Fifth Declension take -ena in the def. 
 form of the plural instead of -en, thus becoming like nouns 
 of the Fourth Declension: hus-ena, the houses; namn-ena, the 
 names. 
 
 (c) Gender nouns ending in -n preceded by a vowel often 
 have the definite form the same as the indefinite: han stfir 
 pa grdsplanen (pronounced grasplan), he stands on the lawn; 
 fageln sitter pd grenen (pronounced gren), the bird sits on 
 the branch.
 
 STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 INFINITIVE 
 
 PRES. 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 SING. PLUR. 
 
 SUPINE 
 
 PAST PART. 
 
 bedja, ask, pray 
 
 beder (ber)bad 
 
 b&do 
 
 belt 
 
 bedd, bett 
 
 binda, bind 
 
 binder 
 
 band 
 
 bundo 
 
 bundit 
 
 bunden, - et 
 
 bita. bite 
 
 biter 
 
 bet 
 
 beto 
 
 bitit 
 
 biten, et 
 
 bjuda, offer 
 
 bjuder 
 
 bjod 
 
 bjodo 
 
 bjudit 
 
 bjuden, et 
 
 bliva, become, re- 
 main 
 
 * bliver 
 i blir 
 
 blev 
 
 blevo 
 
 blivit 
 
 bliven, et 
 
 bringa 1 , bring 
 
 bringar 
 
 bragte 
 
 bragte 
 
 bragt 
 
 bragt, bragt 
 
 brista, burst 
 
 brister 
 
 brast 
 
 brusto 
 
 brustit 
 
 brusten, et 
 
 bryta, break 
 
 bryter 
 
 brot 
 
 broto 
 
 brutit 
 
 bruten. et 
 
 brinna, burn 
 
 brinner 
 
 brann 
 
 brunno 
 
 brunnit 
 
 brunnen, et 
 
 bara, bear 
 
 bar 
 
 bar 
 
 buro 
 
 bur it 
 
 buren, et 
 
 bora, ought 
 
 bor 
 
 bqrde 
 
 borde 
 
 bort 
 
 
 
 dimpa, /o# 
 
 dimper 
 
 damp 
 
 dumpo 
 
 dumpit 
 
 dumpen, - et 
 
 draga, draw 
 
 drager 
 
 drog 
 
 drogo 
 
 dragit 
 
 dragen, et 
 
 dricka. drink 
 
 dricker 
 
 drack 
 
 drucko 
 
 druckit 
 
 drucken, et 
 
 driva, drive 
 
 driver 
 
 drev 
 
 drevo 
 
 drivit 
 
 driven, et 
 
 drapaS, A-i7/ 
 
 drapa 
 
 drap 
 
 dripo 
 
 drapit 
 
 drapen, et 
 
 do, die. 
 
 dor 
 
 dog 
 
 dogo 
 
 dott 
 
 
 
 falla./otf 
 
 faller 
 
 foil 
 
 folio 
 
 fallit 
 
 fallen, et 
 
 fara, go, travel 
 
 far 
 
 for 
 
 foro 
 
 farit 
 
 faren, et 
 
 finna, find 
 
 finner 
 
 fann 
 
 funno 
 
 funnit 
 
 f unnen, et 
 
 flyga, fly 
 
 flyger 
 
 flog 
 
 flogo 
 
 flugit 
 
 flugen, - et 
 
 flyta, flow 
 
 flyter 
 
 flot 
 
 floto 
 
 flutit 
 
 ftuten. et 
 
 f rysa, freeze 
 
 fryser 
 
 fros 
 
 froso 
 
 frusit 
 
 frusen, et 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ -f&dd, fattS 
 
 fa, get, may 
 
 far 
 
 fick 
 
 fingo 
 
 f&tt 
 
 ' -fangen. et3 
 
 f orgata, forget 
 
 gater 
 
 gat 
 
 
 
 - gatit 
 
 gaten, et 
 
 fornimma, perceive nimmer 
 
 nam 
 
 nummo 
 
 nummit 
 
 nummen, et 
 
 forsvinna, disap- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pear 
 
 svinner 
 
 svann 
 
 svunno 
 
 - svunnit 
 
 - svunnen, et 
 
 giva 
 
 i giver 
 
 
 
 
 
 ge f ff e 
 
 ger 
 
 gav 
 
 g&vo 
 
 givit 
 
 given, et 
 
 gitta, care 
 
 gitter 
 
 (gitte 
 < gittade 
 
 gitte 
 gittade 
 
 gittat 
 
 
 
 gjuta, pour, cast 
 
 gj uter 
 
 got 
 
 goto 
 
 gjutit 
 
 gjuten, et 
 
 glida, glide, 
 
 glider 
 
 gled 
 
 gledo 
 
 glidit 
 
 gliden, et 
 
 gnida, rub 
 
 gnider 
 
 gned 
 
 gnedo 
 
 gnidit 
 
 gniden, et 
 
 gripa, seize 
 
 griper 
 
 grep 
 
 grepo 
 
 gripit 
 
 gripen, et 
 
 grata, weep 
 
 grater 
 
 grat 
 
 grato 
 
 gr&tit 
 
 graten, et 3 
 
 gft, go 
 
 gar 
 
 gick 
 
 gingo 
 
 g&tt 
 
 g&ngen, - et 
 
 gora, do 
 
 gor 
 
 gjorde 
 
 gjorde 
 
 gjort 
 
 gjord, gjort 
 
 1 Also First Conjugation. 2 Also Second Conj., Class I. 
 3 In compounds.
 
 Al'I'KNDIX. 
 
 255 
 
 beta, be named 
 
 heter 
 
 hette 
 
 hette 
 
 hetat 
 
 
 
 hinna, have time 
 
 hinner 
 
 hann 
 
 hunno 
 
 hunnit 
 
 hunnen, et 
 
 hugga, hew 
 
 hugger 
 
 hogg 
 
 hoggo 
 
 huggit 
 
 huggen, et 
 
 h&lla, hold 
 
 h&ller 
 
 holl 
 
 hollo 
 
 hallit 
 
 hallen, et 
 
 Idas 1 , 
 
 ids 3 
 
 iddes 
 
 iddes 
 
 j itts 
 1 idits 
 
 
 
 klinga.'i, Round 
 
 klingar 
 
 klang 
 
 klungo 
 
 klungit 
 
 klungen, et 
 
 kliva, stride 
 
 kliver 
 
 klev 
 
 klevo 
 
 klivit 
 
 kliven, et4 
 
 klyva, split 
 
 klyver 
 
 klov 
 
 klovo 
 
 kluvit 
 
 kluven, et 
 
 knipa, pinch 
 
 kniper 
 
 knep 
 
 knepo 
 
 knipit 
 
 knipen, et 
 
 knyta, tie 
 
 knyter 
 
 knot 
 
 knoto 
 
 knutit 
 
 knuten, et 
 
 komma, come 
 
 kommer 
 
 kom 
 
 kommo 
 
 kommit 
 
 kommen, et 
 
 krympa, shrink 
 
 krymper 
 
 krympte 
 
 krympte 
 
 3 krympt 
 1 krumpit 
 
 t krympt 
 1 krumpen, - et 
 
 krypa, creep 
 
 kryper 
 
 krop 
 
 kropo 
 
 krupit 
 
 krupen, - et 
 
 le, smile 
 
 ler 
 
 log 
 
 logo 
 
 lett 
 
 ledd, lett 4 
 
 ledas, be lonesome 
 
 1 ledes 
 
 ' leds 
 
 leddes 
 
 leddes 
 
 letts 
 
 
 
 leva, live 
 
 lever 
 
 levde 
 
 levde 
 
 levat 
 
 levad, at 
 
 lida, suffer 
 
 lider 
 
 led 
 
 ledo 
 
 lidit 
 
 
 
 ligga, lie 
 
 ligger 
 
 lag 
 
 lago 
 
 legat 
 
 legad, - at* 
 
 ljuda, sound 
 
 Ijuder 
 
 Ijod 
 
 Ijodo 
 
 ljudit 
 
 
 
 ljuga, lie 
 
 ljuger 
 
 Ijog 
 
 Ijogo 
 
 ljugit 
 
 ljugen. et 4 
 
 Ijuta5, suffer 
 
 ljuter 
 
 Ijot 
 
 Ijoto 
 
 ljutit 
 
 ljuten, et 
 
 lyss, listen 
 
 lyss 
 
 lyddes 
 
 lyddes 
 
 
 
 
 
 lata, sound 
 
 later 
 
 lat 
 
 lato 
 
 l&tit 
 
 
 
 lata. let 
 
 later 
 
 lat 
 
 lato 
 
 latit 
 
 l&ten. et4 
 
 lagga, /a,!/ 
 
 lagger 
 
 lade 
 
 lade 
 
 lagt 
 
 lagd, lagt 
 
 lasa, read 
 
 laser 
 
 laste 
 
 laste 
 
 \ last 
 1 lasit 
 
 > last 
 1 lasen et 4 
 
 lopaC, mtn 
 
 loper 
 
 lopp 
 
 lupo 
 
 lupit 
 
 lupen, et 
 
 may 
 
 ma 
 
 matte 
 
 matte 
 
 
 
 
 
 must 
 
 maste 
 
 maste 
 
 maste 
 
 mast 
 
 
 
 niga, curtsy 
 
 niger 
 
 neg 
 
 nego 
 
 nigit 
 
 
 
 njuta, enjoy 
 
 njuter 
 
 njot 
 
 njoto 
 
 njutit 
 
 njuten, et 
 
 nysaG, sneeze 
 
 nyser 
 
 nos 
 
 lliisn 
 
 nysit 
 
 
 
 pipa, pi IK' 
 
 piper 
 
 pep 
 
 pepo 
 
 pipit 
 
 
 
 rida, ride 
 
 rider 
 
 red 
 
 redo 
 
 ridit 
 
 riden, et 
 
 rinna.Jiow 
 
 rinner 
 
 rann 
 
 runno 
 
 runnit 
 
 runnen, et 
 
 riva, tear 
 
 river 
 
 rev 
 
 revo 
 
 rivit 
 
 riven, et 
 
 radas, be afraid 
 
 rades 
 
 raddes 
 
 raddes 
 
 radits 
 
 
 
 ae, see 
 
 ser 
 
 sag 
 
 sago 
 
 sett 
 
 sedd, sett 
 
 simmaS, swim 
 
 simmar 
 
 sam 
 
 summo 
 
 summit 
 
 summen, et 
 
 sitta, sit 
 
 sitter 
 
 satt 
 
 sutto 
 
 \ suttit 
 1 setat 
 
 5 -sutten, -et 4 
 < suten4 
 
 sjuda, seethe 
 
 sjuder 
 
 sjod 
 
 sjodo 
 
 sjudit 
 
 sjuden, et 
 
 sjunga. sing 
 
 sjunger 
 
 sjong 
 
 sjongo 
 
 sjungit 
 
 sjungen, et 
 
 1 Att icke idas gora nd 
 
 got = to be too lazy to do a thing. 
 
 2 Pronounced iss. 3 Also First Conjugation, 
 
 4 In compounds. 5 Only in the expression ljuta dSden, to suffer death 
 Generally Second Conjugation, Class I.
 
 25G 
 
 sjunka, sink 
 
 sjunker 
 
 sjonk 
 
 skina, shine 
 
 skiner 
 
 sken 
 
 skjuta, shoot 
 
 skjuter 
 
 skot 
 
 skola, shall 
 skrida, move 
 
 skall 
 skrider 
 
 skulle 
 \ekred 
 
 skrika, cry 
 
 skriker 
 
 skrek 
 
 skriva, write 
 
 skriver 
 
 skrev 
 
 skryta, boast 
 
 skryter 
 
 skrot 
 
 skara, cut 
 
 skar 
 
 skar 
 
 slinka, slink 
 
 slinker 
 
 slank 
 
 slinta, slip 
 
 slinter 
 
 slant 
 
 slippa, not to 
 have to 
 
 slipper 
 
 slapp 
 
 slita, tear 
 
 sliter 
 
 slet 
 
 sluka 1 , devour 
 
 sluker 
 
 slok 
 
 slutaS, shut 
 
 sluter 
 
 slot 
 
 sla, strike 
 
 sl&r 
 
 slog 
 
 smita, sneak 
 
 smiter 
 
 smet 
 
 smyga, go stealthilysmyger 
 
 smog 
 
 snyta, blow the nosesnyter 
 
 snot 
 
 sova, sleep 
 
 sover 
 
 sov 
 
 spinna, spin 
 
 spinner 
 
 spann 
 
 spricka, crack 
 
 spricker 
 
 sprack 
 
 springa, leap 
 
 springer 
 
 sprang 
 
 spritta, start 
 
 spritter 
 
 spratt 
 
 stickaS, stick 
 
 sticker 
 
 stack 
 
 stiga, step 
 
 stiger 
 
 steg 
 
 stinga, sting 
 
 stinger 
 
 stang 
 
 stinka, stink 
 
 stinker 
 
 stank 
 
 stjala, steal 
 
 stjal 
 
 stal 
 
 stryka, stroke 
 
 stryker 
 
 strok 
 
 stupa! .fall 
 
 stupar 
 
 stop 
 
 sta, stand 
 
 star 
 
 stod 
 
 suga, suck 
 
 suger 
 
 sog 
 
 supa, imbibe 
 
 super 
 
 sop 
 
 svida, smart 
 
 svider 
 
 sved 
 
 svika, disappoint 
 
 sviker 
 
 svek 
 
 svalta, starve 
 
 svalter 
 
 svalt 
 
 svar(j)a, swear 
 
 svar(jer) 
 
 svor 
 
 saga, say 
 
 sager 
 
 sade 
 
 satta, set 
 
 satter 
 
 satte 
 
 taga, take 
 
 tager 
 
 tog 
 
 tiga, be silent 
 
 tiger 
 
 teg 
 
 tjuta, howl 
 
 tjuter 
 
 tjot 
 
 tryta, run short 
 
 tryter 
 
 trot 
 
 tvinga 1 , force 
 
 tvingar 
 
 tvang 
 
 sjonko 
 
 sjunkit 
 
 skeno 
 
 skinit 
 
 skoto 
 
 skjutit 
 
 skulle 
 
 skolat 
 
 skredo 
 
 skridit 
 
 skreko 
 
 skrikit 
 
 skrevo 
 
 skrivit 
 
 skrb'to 
 
 skrutit 
 
 skuro 
 
 skurit 
 
 slunko 
 
 slunkit 
 
 slunto 
 
 sluntit 
 
 sluppo 
 
 sluppit 
 
 sleto 
 
 slitit 
 
 sloko 
 
 slukit 
 
 sloto 
 
 slutit 
 
 slogo 
 
 slagit 
 
 smeto 
 
 smitit 
 
 smogo 
 
 smugit 
 
 snb'to 
 
 snutit 
 
 sovo 
 
 sovit 
 
 spunno 
 
 spunnit 
 
 sprucko 
 
 spruckit 
 
 sprungo 
 
 sprungit 
 
 sprutto 
 
 spruttit 
 
 stucko 
 
 . stuckit 
 
 stego 
 
 stigit 
 
 stungo 
 
 stungit 
 
 stunko 
 
 stunkit 
 
 stulo 
 
 stulit 
 
 stroke 
 
 strukit 
 
 stopo 
 
 
 
 stodo 
 
 sogo 
 
 sopo 
 
 svedo 
 
 sveko 
 
 svulto 
 
 svuro 
 
 sade 
 
 satte 
 
 togo 
 
 tego 
 
 tjoto 
 
 troto 
 
 tvungo 
 
 st&tt 
 
 sugit 
 
 supit 
 
 svidit 
 
 svikit 
 
 svultit 
 
 svurit 
 
 sagt 
 
 satt 
 
 tagit 
 
 tegat 
 
 tjutit 
 
 trutit 
 
 tvungit 
 
 KJunken, et 
 skjuten, et 
 
 skriden, et 
 skriken, et 
 skriven, et 
 skruten, et 
 skuren, et 
 slunken, et 
 slunten, - et 
 
 sluppen, - et 
 sliten, et 
 sluken, et 
 sluten, et 
 slagen, et 
 smiten, - et 
 smugen, et 
 snuten, et 
 
 spunnen, - et 
 sprucken, et 
 sprungen, et 
 sprutten, et 
 stucken, et 
 stigen, - et 
 stungen, et 
 
 stulen, et 
 struken, et 
 
 _t-st&dd, tt4 
 i standen, et 
 
 sugen, et 
 
 supen, et 
 
 sviken, et 
 svulten, et 
 svuren, et 
 sagd, sagt 
 satt, satt 
 tagen, et 
 tegad, - at 4 
 
 truten, - et4 
 tvungen, et 
 
 Also First Conjugation. 2 Also First Conjugation in the sense of end. 
 Also First Conjugation in the sense of to knit. 4 In compounds.
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 257 
 
 tvi, wash 
 
 tv&r 
 
 tv&dde 
 
 tv&dde 
 
 ( tvait 
 i tv&tt 
 
 > tvagen 
 i tv&dd 
 
 be lilct'li/ 
 
 tor 
 
 torde 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 toras, dare 
 
 tors 
 
 tordes 
 
 tordes 
 
 torts 
 
 
 
 vara, be 
 
 ar 
 
 var 
 
 voro 
 
 var it 
 
 
 
 varda. become 
 
 varder 
 
 vart 
 
 vordo 
 
 
 
 vorden, et 
 
 veta, know 
 
 vet 
 
 visste 
 
 visste 
 
 vetat 
 
 
 
 vetta, face 
 
 vetter 
 
 vette 
 
 vette 
 
 vettat 
 
 
 
 vika, yield, fold 
 
 viker 
 
 vek 
 
 veko 
 
 vikit 
 
 viken, et 
 
 vilja, will 
 
 vill 
 
 ville 
 
 ville 
 
 velat 
 
 
 
 vinna, win 
 
 vinner 
 
 vann 
 
 vunno 
 
 vunnit 
 
 vunnen, et 
 
 vrida, twist 
 
 vrider 
 
 vred 
 
 vredo 
 
 vridit 
 
 vriden, et 
 
 vidladal , adhere 
 
 lader 
 
 ladde 
 
 ladde 
 
 < -l&tt 
 'i -l&dit 
 
 
 
 ta, eat 
 
 ater 
 
 at 
 
 ato 
 
 atit 
 
 aten, et 
 
 1 Also First Conjugation.
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 SWEDISH-ENGLISH. 
 
 In the vocabulary, only the gender of neuter nouns is designated ; all nouns 
 not marked (n.) are gender nouns. For the principal parts of irregular and 
 strong verbs the list on page 254 should be consulted. Parts of speech are 
 designated only in cases of ambiguity. 
 
 abborre, -ar, perch 
 adde'ra, I, add 
 adjo', good-bye 
 adress', -er, address 
 adresse'ra, I, address 
 adressat', -er, addressee 
 affur', -er, business; store 
 affdrsbyggnad, -er, business 
 
 building 
 aga, I, punish 
 akt (invar.), notice 
 alldeles, entirely, quite 
 alle'na (gen. def.), alone 
 allmdnhet, public; i , in 
 
 general 
 alls, at all 
 alltid, always 
 
 alltsd, consequently, thus, so 
 allvarlig, sober, grave, serious 
 allvarligt, adv., seriously 
 amerikan', -er, American 
 an-, accented var. prefix 
 anblick, -ar, sight, spectacle 
 anfortro, III, intrust 
 angendm, agreeable, pleasant 
 anhd.Ua, st. v., request 
 ankare (n-* -^, anchor 
 ankomma, st. v., arrive 
 
 anliigga, irr. v., found, estab- 
 lish 
 
 anliinda, lib, arrive 
 
 anse, irr. v., regard, consider, 
 think 
 
 ansikte (n.), -n, face 
 
 anslag (n.), , plot, design; 
 placard, notice 
 
 anvdnda, lib, use 
 
 ana, I, suspect; anticipate 
 
 annars, otherwise 
 
 annons' (annongs'), -er, ad- 
 vertisement 
 
 apote'kare, , druggist 
 
 apt it', appetite 
 
 arbeta, I, work 
 
 arbetare, , workingman 
 
 arm, -ar, arm 
 
 arreste'ra, I, arrest 
 
 artig, polite 
 
 att, conj., that; to (infinitive 
 sign) 
 
 auditorium (n.),-ier, audience 
 
 automobil', -er, automobile 
 
 automobilforbindelse, -r, con- 
 nection by automobile 
 
 av, prep, and accented vari- 
 able prefix, of, by, from, etc. 
 
 avbryta, st. v., insep., inter- 
 rupt; sep., break off
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 250 
 
 avgd, irr. v., sep., depart 
 avlfigsna (sig), I, remove; refl., 
 
 go away. 
 
 avliJpa, lib, turn out 
 avsiinda, lib, sep., send away, 
 
 dispatch 
 avundsjuk, envious 
 
 B 
 
 backa, I, back 
 
 bad (n.), , bath 
 
 badort, -er, watering place 
 
 baka, I, bake 
 
 bagare, , baker 
 
 bakgrund, -er, background 
 
 bakllinges, backwards 
 
 bakom, behind 
 
 bank, -er, bank 
 
 bara, only 
 
 barmhar'tig, merciful 
 
 barn (n.), , child 
 
 be-, unaccented insep. prefix 
 
 bedja (om), irr., pray, ask for 
 
 bedraga, st. v., cheat, deceive 
 
 befalla, lib, command 
 
 beftnna sig, st. v., be (health 
 and place) 
 
 befolkning, -ar, population 
 
 begara, lib, demand, request 
 
 begaran, no pi., demand 
 
 behaga, I, please 
 
 behandling, -ar, treatment 
 
 behdlla, st. v., keep, retain 
 
 behova, lib, need 
 
 bekant, known, acquainted; 
 en , an acquaintance 
 
 bekvam, comfortable, conven- 
 ient 
 
 bekvdmlighet, -er, comfort, 
 convenience 
 
 belopp (n.), , amount 
 
 beldten, -et, def. -lutna, satis- 
 fied 
 
 beliist, well-read 
 
 beldpa sig (till), I la, amount 
 to 
 
 bemdktiga sig, I, take posses- 
 sion of 
 
 bemota, Ha, treat; receive 
 
 ben (n.), , bone, leg 
 
 berg (n.), , mountain 
 
 beratta, I, relate 
 
 beromd, n. -romt, famous 
 
 beromma, lib, praise 
 
 bestd, irr. v., exist; stand (a 
 test); treat; av, consist 
 of 
 
 bestdlla, lib, order 
 
 besdttning, -ar, crew 
 
 besok (n.), , visit 
 
 besoka, Ha, visit 
 
 betala, I, Ha, pay 
 
 betjaning, no pi., servants, 
 attendance 
 
 betraktande (n.), considera 
 tion ; taga i , take into 
 
 betyda, lib, mean, signify 
 
 betunka, Ha, consider, delib- 
 erate; sig, reflect 
 
 bevista, I, attend 
 
 bifall (n.), applause 
 
 bil, -ar, "auto" 
 
 bildad, n. -at, cultured 
 
 bildning, culture, education 
 
 biljett'kontor' (n.), ticket of- 
 fice 
 
 bit, -ar, piece 
 
 bita, st. v., bite 
 
 bjudning,- ar, invitation, party 
 
 blank, smooth, shiny, glossy
 
 3GO 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 bliva, st. v., become; remain, 
 
 be (aux. of passive) 
 olixtra, I, lighten 
 Momma, -or, flower 
 blom'sterrabatt', -er, flower 
 
 bed 
 
 blott, only 
 
 blygsam, def. -samma, modest 
 bldsa, Ila, blow 
 black (n.), ink 
 bo, III, dwell, live 
 boJc, bo'cker, book 
 bonde, bonder, peasant, farmer 
 bord (n.), , table 
 borsta, I, brush 
 bort, away 
 borta, away from home; dar- 
 
 , over there 
 bostad, -stdder, dwelling, 
 
 residence 
 bota, I, heal, cure 
 bra (adj. and adv.), good, fine; 
 
 well, quite 
 
 bredvid', by, at the side of 
 brev (n.), letter 
 brevbarare, , letter carrier 
 brodd, sprout 
 broder, bro'der, brother 
 bruka, I, use 
 bryta av', st. v., break off 
 brddska, hurry 
 brdk (n.), , trouble; frac- 
 tions (math.) 
 bras pd, take after, favor 
 brdtt, brdttom, ha , be in -a 
 
 hurry 
 
 brod (n.), , bread 
 by, -ar, village 
 bygga, lib, build 
 bdde. . .och, both. . .and 
 
 bdra, st. v., carry 
 
 biirare, , porter 
 
 bust, best 
 
 borja, I, begin 
 
 borjan (no. pi.), beginning 
 
 C 
 
 ceremoni', -er, ceremony 
 cigarr', -er, cigar 
 cigarrhandel, cigar store 
 cigarr Jiandlare, , cigar dealer 
 
 D 
 
 dag, -ar, day 
 
 daglig (adj.), daily 
 
 aagngen (adv.), daily 
 
 dagsljus (n.), daylight 
 
 dal, -ar, valley 
 
 dam, -er, lady 
 
 date'ra, I, date 
 
 datum (n.), data, date 
 
 del, -ar, part 
 
 deltaga, st. v., sep., participate 
 
 den(pron.), that, it; (art.) the 
 
 dessutom, besides, in addition 
 
 det (pron.), it; (art.) the 
 
 dikt, -er, poem 
 
 direkt', direct 
 
 disk, -ar, counter; dish 
 
 dit, thither 
 
 diver' 'se (pi. only), diverse 
 
 divide'ra, I, divide 
 
 doktor, dokto'rer, doctor 
 
 dotter, dottrar, daughter 
 
 dram, -er, drama 
 
 drama (n., no plur.), drama 
 
 dricka, st. v., drink 
 
 drickspengar (pi. only), tip(s) 
 
 droska, -or, cab 
 
 droja, lib, delay, take (time) 
 
 drojsmdl (n.), , delay
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 duell', -er, duel 
 duka, I, set the table 
 dum, def. dumma, stupid, 
 
 foolish 
 
 dumbom, -bommar, fool 
 dussin (n.), , dozen 
 dyrbar, expensive, precious 
 dalig, poor, bad, wicked 
 ddr, there 
 
 durbar 1 ta, over there 
 darhem'ma, at home 
 darpd, thereafter, thereupon, 
 
 on it (them) 
 do, irr. v., die 
 dod, dott (adj.), dead 
 dod, (-or), death 
 doda, I, kill 
 dorr, -ar, door 
 
 cfter, prep., adv., and accented 
 
 variable prefix, after 
 efterkomma, st. v., comply 
 
 with, komma efter, come 
 
 after 
 eftermiddag, -ar, afternoon; 
 
 i , this afternoon 
 ehuru, although 
 ej, not 
 
 ekono'misk, financial 
 eld, -ar, fire, conflagration 
 elegans' (elegangs'), elegance 
 elektrisk, electrical 
 emedan, because 
 emot (prep, and adv.), against, 
 
 opposite 
 
 en, ett, a, an, one 
 endast, only 
 en rat; everybody 
 enligt, according to 
 
 episk, epic 
 
 er-, accented insep. prefix 
 erbjuda, st. v., offer 
 erfarenhet, -er, experience 
 erhdlla, st. v., receive, get 
 erinra, I, remind; sig, 
 
 remember 
 ersatta, irr. v., to replace, 
 
 compensate 
 europe'isk, European 
 exporte'ra, I, export 
 
 fabrik', -er, factory 
 
 fader (far), fader, father 
 
 familjefest, -er, family festival 
 
 familj', -er, family 
 
 fara, st. v., travel, drive, go 
 
 fara med', go along (drive, 
 
 travel ) 
 
 farbror, -bro'der, uncle 
 fartyg, , ship, vessel 
 fast, n. fast, firm, solid, fast 
 fast (conj.), although 
 fattas, I, dep. impers. v., lack, 
 
 ail; vad digf What is 
 
 ailing you? 
 fattig, poor 
 
 fel (n.), , error, mistake 
 felas, I, dep. impers. v., lack 
 ferier (pi.), vacation 
 fin. nice, fine, delicate 
 finna, st. v., find; det ftnns, 
 
 there is (are) 
 fira, I, celebrate 
 firande (n.), celebration 
 fisk, -ar, fish 
 flagga, -or, flag; hissa flaggan, 
 
 hoist the flag 
 Here, several, more
 
 262 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 flicka, -or, girl 
 
 flitig, diligent 
 
 flod, -er, river 
 
 fly, III, flee 
 
 flyta, st. v., flow 
 
 flytande, indecl., flowing, fluent 
 
 flytta, I, move 
 
 folk (n), , people, nation; 
 also collectively, people 
 
 folkskola, -or, public school 
 
 forsla, haul 
 
 fort (adv.), fast, quickly 
 
 fortsatta, irr. v., continue 
 
 fot, fotter, foot 
 
 fotbollag (n.), , football 
 team 
 
 fotbollspel (n.), , or -match, 
 -er, football game 
 
 fram, adv. and accented var. 
 prefix, forth, forward 
 
 framdeles, in the future, later 
 
 framme (adv.), at destination, 
 at hand 
 
 framracka, or rdcka fram', 
 reach forth, hold out 
 
 framstfiende, indecl., promi- 
 nent 
 
 framtid, future 
 
 franke'ra, I, stamp (put on 
 stamp) 
 
 Frankrike (n.), France 
 
 Frans, Francis, Frank 
 
 fransk, French; franska, 
 French language 
 
 fri, fritt, free 
 
 frikopa, sep., v., ransom, re- 
 deem 
 
 friluftsmuseum (n.), -er, open 
 air museum 
 
 frimarke (n.), -n, stamp 
 
 / riser' salong, -er, barber shop 
 frisk, fresh, healthy 
 fru, -ar, lady, wife, Mrs. 
 frukost (pronounced fruc'- 
 
 kost), -ar, breakfast 
 frukt, -er, also collective pi., 
 
 frukt, fruit 
 frysa, st. v., freeze 
 frysa bort', perish by frost 
 fryspunkt, -er, freezing point 
 frdga (efter), I, ask a ques- 
 tion, inquire 
 jran, prep., adv. and accented 
 
 variable prefix, from 
 frammande, n., , strange, 
 foreign, ha , have com- 
 pany 
 
 framst, foremost, first 
 fullpackad, n. -at, crowded 
 fullsatt, n. , crowded 
 fylla, lib, fill; Ar, have a 
 
 birthday 
 fyrtio, forty 
 
 fa, irr. v. (modal), get, re- 
 ceive ; may 
 fdgel, fdglar, bird 
 fait (n.), , field 
 fdrdig, ready 
 fdsta, I and Ila, fasten 
 fodas, lib, dep. v., be born 
 fodelsedag, -ar, birthday; till 
 fddelsedagen, for a birthday 
 folja, lib, follow 
 folja med', accompany 
 foljaktligen, consequently 
 foljande, n. , following 
 fonster (n.), , window 
 for (prep.), for, before 
 for. . .sedan, ago
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 for (adv.), too; mycket, 
 
 too much 
 for-, accented insep. prefix, 
 
 before 
 
 for-, unaccented insep. prefix 
 forarglig, annoying, vexatious 
 forbindelse, -r, connection; ob- 
 ligation 
 fiirbjuden, n. -bjudet, def. 
 
 bjudna, prohibited 
 fordraga, st. v., tolerate; 
 varandra, bear with one an- 
 other 
 
 fore, prep., adv., and accented 
 var. prefix, usually insep., 
 before, first, ahead 
 foredrag (n.), , lecture 
 foredraga, st. v., prefer 
 forelasning, -ar, lecture 
 forening, -ar, union, society 
 foreskriva, st. v., dictate, pre- 
 scribe 
 
 fore-Sid-, st. v., propose 
 forestallning, -ar, performance 
 foretaga (sig) , st. v undertake 
 forfattare, , author 
 forfiirlig, terrible 
 forfolja, lib, pursue 
 furgifta, I, poison 
 forhindra I, prevent 
 forhdllande (n.), -n, relation, 
 condition; i till, relative 
 to 
 forklada (sig), lib, disguise 
 
 (oneself) 
 
 forkyla sig, lib, catch cold 
 forkyld, n. -kylt, having a cold 
 forkylning, -ar, cold (sick- 
 ness) 
 
 forlora, I, lose 
 formak (n.), , parlor 
 formiddag, -ar, forenoon; pd 
 formiddagen, in the fore- 
 noon 
 
 formoda, I, suppose 
 
 formd, III, intr., be able; tr., 
 induce 
 
 forolyckas, I, dep. v., perish 
 
 for'orsaka, I, cause, occasion 
 
 forr (adv.), before 
 
 forre(a), former 
 
 forran (conj.), before, until 
 
 forsena, I, cause to be late, 
 delay 
 
 forsiktig, cautious 
 
 forskotte'ra, I, advance 
 (money) 
 
 forslag (n.), , proposition 
 
 forsona, I, reconcile; refl. v., 
 become reconciled 
 
 forsova, st. v., oversleep 
 
 forst, first 
 
 forstad, -stader, suburb 
 
 forstd, irr. v., understand 
 
 forstdndig, wise, sensible 
 
 fiirstora, lib, destroy 
 
 forsumma, I, neglect, miss 
 (train, meal, etc.) 
 
 forsoka, Ha, try 
 
 fortjusande, n. , charming 
 
 fortjdna, I, also Ila, earn 
 
 fortrdfflig, excellent 
 
 forvandla, I, change, trans- 
 form 
 
 forvdnas, I, dep. v., to be as- 
 tonished 
 
 fordldrar, pi. only, parents
 
 264 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 gammal, def. gamla, old 
 
 ganska, quite, entirely 
 
 garante'ra, I, guarantee 
 
 gata, -or, street 
 
 gen (adj.), near (of a road) 
 
 genast, immediately 
 
 genom or ige'nom (prep, and 
 
 adv.), through; as adverb 
 
 it has the form igenom 
 giva, st. v., give; akt' pd, 
 
 notice, observe 
 glad, n. glatt, glad, happy 
 glas (n.), , glass 
 glasogon, pi., spectacles 
 glida, st. v., glide 
 glddja, irr. v., gladden 
 gladje, no pi., joy 
 glomma, lib, forget 
 golv (n.), , floor 
 gosse, gossar, boy 
 grad, -er, grade, degree; i 
 
 ho'gsta , in the highest 
 
 degree 
 
 gren, -ar, branch 
 gro, III, sprout 
 grosshandlare, , wholesale 
 
 merchant 
 
 grata, st. v., weep, cry 
 grds (n.), grass 
 grasmatta, -or, lawn 
 gron, green 
 
 gronsaker, pi. only, vegetables 
 gul, yellow 
 gunga, I, rock, swing 
 gd, irr. v., go, run; det gar 
 
 icke, it won't work ; klockan 
 
 gdr, the watch is running 
 gd upp', rise 
 
 gang, -er, time (in counting) ; 
 
 en , once 
 gang, -ar, walk, path 
 gdr, i gdr, yesterday 
 gdrdag, yesterday 
 gds, gdss, goose 
 galla, lib, concern; have a 
 
 value; be a question of 
 gdst, -er, guest 
 gora (irr. v.), do, make 
 Goto, kanal, Gotha Canal 
 Goteborg (n.), Gothenburg 
 
 H 
 
 hals, -ar, neck, throat 
 
 Jialv, half 
 
 halvtimme, -ar, half hour 
 
 halvsula, I, half-sole 
 
 halvvags (adv.), halfway 
 
 hamn, -ar, harbor, port 
 
 han, he 
 
 hand, hander, hand 
 
 handbagage, hand baggage 
 
 handla, I, act, trade; om, 
 
 treat about 
 
 handlande, , merchant 
 harv, -ar, harrow 
 hastig, quick, rapid, sudden 
 hatt, -ar, hat 
 havre (n.), oats 
 hedersman, -man, man of 
 
 honor 
 
 hcl, n. -t, whole; en , a unit 
 helgdag, -ar, holiday 
 hellre, rather 
 hem (n.), home 
 hem (adv.), home; gd , go 
 
 home
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 265 
 
 hemifrdn, from home 
 
 hemma, at home 
 
 hemtrevlig, cozy, homelike 
 
 Jiennes, her, gen. case 
 
 herr, Mister, in address 
 
 herre, -ar, master, gentleman 
 
 heta, irr. v., to be called; jag 
 Jieter Karl, my name is Carl 
 
 hinna, st. v., attain; have time 
 to do or get to 
 
 historia, -ier, history, story 
 
 hitta, I, to find 
 
 hjalp, help 
 
 Jijalpa, Ha, help 
 
 hjarta (n.), -n, heart 
 
 hjartforlamning, -ar, heart 
 failure 
 
 hjartlig, hearty, cordial 
 
 hon, she 
 
 hopp (n.), , hope 
 
 hoppa, I, jump 
 
 hoppas, I, dep. v., to hope 
 
 hos, with, by, in, in the house 
 of 
 
 honorar' (n.), , fee 
 
 hotelV (n.), , hotel 
 
 hund, -ar, dog 
 
 hungrig, hungry 
 
 hur, how 
 
 hus (n.), , house 
 
 hustru, -r, wife 
 
 huvudvark, headache 
 
 hygglig, nice, "kind, accommo- 
 dating 
 
 hyra, lib, rent, hire 
 
 Mlla, st. v., hold, keep 
 
 Mil (n.), , hold; direction; 
 dt alia , in all directions 
 
 Mr (n.), , hair 
 
 hard,, n. Mrt, hard 
 
 haftig, violent, vehement 
 
 hiilft, -er (noun), half 
 
 halsa, health 
 
 halsa, I, greet 
 
 Ml'sa pd, greet 
 
 halsa pd' (hos), make a call 
 (at somebody's home) 
 
 halsning, -ar, greeting 
 
 hamnas, I, dep. v., take re- 
 venge 
 
 hamta, I, fetch 
 
 Mnda, lib, happen 
 
 handelse, -r, event 
 
 hdndelsevis (adv.), by chance 
 
 htinga, lib, hang 
 
 hanseende (n.), -n, respect 
 
 Mr, here 
 
 harlig. glorious, magnificent 
 
 hast, -ar, horse 
 
 hog, high 
 
 hoger, def. hogra, right; till 
 , to the right 
 
 hojd, -er, height, hill 
 
 hons (n.), , chicken, col- 
 lective, chickens 
 
 hora, lib, hear 
 
 hora pd, listen to ; ho'r pd mig, 
 listen to me 
 
 horn (n.), , corner 
 
 host, -ar, fall; i hostas, last 
 fall 
 
 hostdag, -ar, autumn day 
 
 hovlig, polite 
 
 hovlighet, politeness 
 
 I 
 
 i (prep.), in, into 
 i'akttaga, st. v., observe 
 ibland', sometimes 
 
 Sicedish Grammar 
 
 IS
 
 266 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 i'drott, -er, sport 
 idrottspark, -er, athletic field 
 igen', adv. and accented var. 
 
 prefix, again, back 
 igenMnna, lib, sep. v., recog- 
 nize 
 
 i'hdliff, hollow 
 ilia (adv.), bad; det var ilia, 
 
 that was too bad 
 illumine'rad, -at, illuminated 
 in, prep., adv., and accented 
 
 var. prefix, in, into 
 inackordering, -ar, boarder, 
 also board; Jiel , room 
 and board 
 
 inbegripa, st. v., include 
 infinna sig, st. v., to come, 
 
 arrive 
 ingen, intet, or inget, no, no 
 
 one, nothing 
 inledp (n.), , purchase 
 inlosa, Ila, sep., to redeem, 
 * cash 
 
 innan (conj.), before 
 inne (adv.), inside 
 inne-, accented var. prefix 
 innehdll (n.), , contents 
 innehdlla, st. v., contain 
 innestd, irr. v., remain (mon- 
 ey in a bank) 
 inom (prep.), within 
 inomhus (adv.), indoors 
 insiitta, irr. sep. v., deposit 
 inse, irr. v., to see, under- 
 stand 
 inte, not 
 
 intet, n. of ingen, no, nothing 
 intresse'rad, n. -at, interested 
 intrcssant', n. , interesting 
 intres'se (n.), -n, interest 
 
 intyg (n.), , testimonial 
 invdnare, , inhabitant 
 is, -ar, Ice 
 Ita'lien (n.), Italy 
 
 ja, yes 
 
 jasd (pronounced jas'sd), so; 
 
 you don't say! Is that so? 
 jo, yes 
 
 ju, the (with the compara- 
 tive), you "know, to be sure 
 jul, -ar, Christmas; vid , 
 
 at Christmas; till , for 
 
 Christmas 
 just, just 
 juste'ra, I, adjust 
 jdmrande, n., , plaintive 
 jdrnvdgs'biljett, -er, railway 
 
 ticket 
 jdrnvdgsolycJca, -or, railway 
 
 accident 
 jdrnvdgsstation, -er, railway 
 
 station 
 
 K 
 
 kaffe (n.), coffee 
 kaj, -er, quay, pier 
 kail, cold 
 
 kallna, I, grow cold 
 kalla, I, call 
 kamma, I, comb 
 kanhdn'da, perhaps 
 kan'ske, perhaps 
 kappa, -or, cloak 
 karaktdr', -er, character 
 kapten', -er, captain 
 kasta, I, throw 
 kasta ut', throw out
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 katedral', -er, cathedral 
 
 katt, -er, cat 
 
 kilo, kilogram (n.), , kilo 
 gram 
 
 kilome'ter, , kilometer 
 
 klack, -ar, heel (of shoe) 
 
 klaga (over), I, complain 
 
 klandra, I, criticise 
 
 Jclar, clear 
 
 klass, -er, class 
 
 klassisk, classic 
 
 klen, weak 
 
 klimat' (n.), , climate 
 
 klippa, Ha, cut, shear 
 
 kldda, lib, dress 
 
 kldda sig, dress (oneself) 
 
 kldda om' sig, change dress 
 
 kldder, pi. only, clothes 
 
 knacka, I, knock; pd dor- 
 ren, knock at the door 
 
 knappast, hardly 
 
 knappndl, -ar, pin 
 
 knota (over), I, grumble 
 
 koffert, -ar, trunk 
 
 koka, I, cook, boil 
 
 kollide'ra, I, collide 
 
 komma, st. v., come 
 
 komma in', come in 
 
 konduktor', -er, conductor 
 
 konsert', r er, concert 
 
 konst, -er, art; pi. tricks 
 
 konstndr', -er, artist 
 
 kontant, n. , cash 
 
 kontor (n.), , office 
 
 kopp, -ar, cup 
 
 korg, -ar, basket 
 
 korrespondent' ', -er, corre- 
 spondent 
 
 kort (o long and close) (n.), 
 , card 
 
 kort (o short and open), n. 
 , short 
 
 kosta, I, cost 
 
 kostym', -er, suit 
 
 kraft, -er, strength, power 
 
 krage, -ar, collar 
 
 kredit'brev (n.), , letter of 
 credit 
 
 krets, -ar, circle, society 
 
 krok, -ar, hook 
 
 Arena, -or, crown 
 
 kroppskonstitution, -er, con- 
 stitution (of body) 
 
 kulle, -ar, hill 
 
 kunna, know; (modal) can, 
 be able 
 
 Kungsgatan, King's Street 
 
 kupe, -er, compartment (rail- 
 way) 
 
 Tcusin' -er, cousin 
 
 kusk, -ar, driver, cabman 
 
 kvalitet', -er, quality 
 
 kvar, adv. and accented var. 
 prefix, left over, behind, re- 
 maining 
 
 kvarlamna, I, sep., leave be- 
 hind 
 
 kvarn, -ar, flour mill 
 
 Kvart, -er, quarter; en kvarts 
 timme, a quarter of an hour 
 
 kvdll, -ar, evening; i gar , 
 last night; pd kvdllen, in 
 the evening 
 
 kyckling, -ar, young chicken 
 
 kylig, chilly 
 
 kyrka, -or, church 
 
 kdmpa ut', I, fight to a finish ; 
 die 
 
 kdnna, lib, know (acquainted 
 with)
 
 268 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 klinna till', be acquainted 
 
 with 
 
 kdrlek, love 
 kold (n.), cold 
 kopa, I la, buy 
 kora, lib, drive 
 
 laga, I, mend; bring to pass 
 lammstek, -or, lamb steak 
 land, lander, country; pd lan- 
 
 det, in the country; i land, 
 
 ashore 
 
 landskap (n.), , landscape 
 landsatta, irr. v., land 
 lantstalle (n.), -n, country 
 
 house 
 
 lantbrukare, , farmer 
 last, -er, load; vice 
 lot, no neuter, lazy 
 le, irr. v., smile 
 leda, lib, lead 
 ledsen, n. ledset, def. ledsna, 
 
 sad, sorry 
 
 lek, -or, play, game 
 Zefca, Ha, play 
 leva, irr. v., live 
 lida, st. v., suffer 
 ligga, irr. v., lie 
 /ifc (adj.), like, alike 
 lika (adv.), (just) as 
 liten, n. litet, def. lilla, pi. 
 
 sra4, little, small 
 litteratur, -er. literature 
 ttv (n.), , life 
 ljus (n.), , light; candle 
 I jus (adj.), light 
 loge, logar, threshing floor 
 
 londondngare, , London 
 
 steamer 
 lov (n.), permission; vacation 
 
 (from school); fd lov, may 
 
 have to 
 
 lova, I, promise; praise 
 lugn (adj.), calm, quiet 
 lycka, happiness, fortune 
 lyckad, n. -at, successful 
 lyckas, I, dep. v., succeed 
 lycklig, happy 
 lyda. lib, obey 
 lynne (n.), -n, humor; via 
 
 gott , in good humor 
 Idda, -or, box, drawer 
 Una, I, lend; borrow 
 Idng, long 
 
 Idngsam, def. -samma, slow 
 Idsa, I la, lock 
 Idta, st. v., let, allow; cause 
 
 to do or be done 
 lagenhet, -er, opportunity 
 Idgga bort', irr. v., put away 
 lakare, , physician 
 Idmna, I, leave 
 lange (adv.), long 
 Idngre, comp. of Idng, lange, 
 
 longer 
 
 Idra, lib, teach; learn 
 Idrare, , teacher 
 lard,' n. Idrt, learned 
 Idrjunge, -ar, pupil 
 Idsa, Ila, read 
 
 Idsa upp', also upp'ldsa, recite 
 Idsebok, -bocker, reader 
 Idxa, -or, lesson 
 Idsa (biljett), buy (ticket) 
 losen, no pi., ransom
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 269 
 
 M 
 
 maj, May 
 
 majs, Indian corn 
 
 make, -ar, match, mate 
 
 mala, lib, grind 
 
 man, man, man 
 
 man (indef. pron.), one, they 
 
 manschett', -er, cuff 
 
 manovre'ra, I, maneuver 
 
 marJcnad, -er, fair 
 
 marknadsstdnd (n.), , booth 
 at a fair 
 
 mat, food 
 
 matsal, -ar, dining room 
 
 matsedel, -sedlar, bill of fare 
 
 med, prep., adv., and accented 
 var. prefix, with, along, etc. 
 
 medfora, lib, bring, entail 
 
 medan (conj.), while 
 
 mejeri'smor (n.), creamery 
 butter 
 
 mellan (emellan), between 
 
 men, but 
 
 mena, I, mean 
 
 mer(a), more 
 
 meta, I, angle 
 
 middag, -ar, noon; dinner; i 
 middags, this (past) noon 
 
 min, n. mitt, my 
 
 minnas, lib, dep. v., remem- 
 ber 
 
 minut', -er, minute 
 
 miss'taga, st. v., mistake 
 
 misstaga sig, be mistaken 
 
 misstag (n.), , mistake 
 
 mitt, indecl. noun, middle; i 
 mitten, in the middle 
 
 mjol (n.), flour 
 
 mjolnare, , miller 
 
 moder, modrar, mother 
 
 modern', modern 
 
 mogen, n. moget, def. mogna, 
 
 ripe 
 
 mogna, I, ripen 
 morgon, morgnar, morning; 
 
 tidigt pd morgonen, early 
 
 in the morning 
 i morgon, to-morrow 
 morgontidning, -ar, morning 
 
 paper 
 
 i morse, this morning 
 mot, prep, and accented var. 
 
 prefix, also emot, against 
 motgdng, -ar, adversity 
 mottaga, receive 
 mottagare, , recipient 
 mottagningsrum (n.), , re- 
 ception room 
 mo'torbdt, -ar, motor boat 
 mulna, I, become cloudy 
 multiplice'ra, I, multiply 
 mun, munnar, mouth 
 munter, def. muntra, merry 
 museum (n.), museer, museum 
 musik', music 
 musikalisk, musical 
 musikkdr, -er, band 
 mycken, n. mycket, def. myck- 
 
 na, much 
 
 mycket (adv.), very 
 mynning, -ar, mouth (of river, 
 
 cannon) ; nozzle 
 md (modal), may 
 ma, III, feel; hur mar nif 
 
 How are you? 
 mdl (n.), goal; meal 
 mdnad, -er, month 
 mdndag, -ar, Monday 
 mdtt (n.), , measure
 
 270 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 mdnniska, -or, human being, 
 person 
 
 mdsterskap (n.), , champ- 
 ionship 
 
 mo'bel, mobler, piece of furni- 
 ture 
 
 mojlig, possible 
 
 mojligen, possibly 
 
 morJc, dark 
 
 mossa, -or, cap 
 
 m.ota, Ha, meet 
 
 motas, reciprocal; meet (one 
 another) 
 
 N 
 
 namn (n.), , name 
 namnteckning , -ar, signature 
 natt, natter, night; i , last 
 
 night 
 nattsndlltdg (n.), , night 
 
 express 
 nappa, I, bite 
 natur', nature 
 
 naturligtvis (adv.), of course 
 ned, down 
 nej (adv.), no 
 ni, you (polite address) 
 nog, enough 
 
 nog, certainly; I suppose 
 noga (adv. and predicate adj., 
 
 indecl.), careful (ly) 
 noggrann, n. -grant, careful, 
 
 accurate 
 norr (noun and adj., def. form 
 
 only), north, northern 
 nu, now 
 
 nu for tiden, now-a-days 
 nummer (n.), def. numret, 
 
 , number 
 ny, n. nytt, new 
 
 nyhet, -er, newness, novelty; 
 
 news 
 
 nyligen, recently 
 nyss, just now 
 nag on, n. -ot, pi. ndgra (adj. 
 
 and pron.), any, some 
 ndgonsin, ever 
 namligen, that is to say; 
 
 namely 
 
 namnare, , denominator 
 ndr, when 
 ndr (adj.), near 
 ndra (adv. and prep.), near 
 ntirhet, nearness, vicinity 
 ntirma sig, I, approach 
 ndrsluten, n. -slutet, def. -slut- 
 
 na, inclosed 
 
 ndrvarande, indecl., present 
 ndsta, indecl., next, following 
 ndstan, almost 
 nod, distress 
 nojd, n. no'jt, contented 
 noje (ik), -n, amusement, 
 
 pleasure 
 
 o-, accented prefix of negation 
 
 obetydlig, -t, insignificant 
 
 obetydlighet, -er, insignifi- 
 cance, trifle 
 
 och, and 
 
 ocksd, also 
 
 oense (indecl. predicate adj.), 
 at variance 
 
 officer', -er or -are, officer 
 
 officerskappa, -or, officer's 
 cloak 
 
 ofrankerad, n. -at, not 
 stamped, not prepaid 
 
 ofta, often
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 271 
 
 ogynnsam, def. -samma, un- 
 favorable 
 
 oliJc, unlike, different 
 
 olycka, -or, misfortune 
 
 olyckligtvis, unfortunately 
 
 olympisk, Olympic 
 
 om, conj., if; prep, and ac- 
 cented var. prefix, around, 
 about; concerning 
 
 ombord, aboard 
 
 om'komma (see komma), 
 perish 
 
 omkring (adv. and prep.), 
 about, around 
 
 omlopp (n.), circulation 
 
 omtala. I, sep., relate, tell 
 
 omtalad, n. -at, mentioned; 
 celebrated 
 
 omojlig, impossible 
 
 ond, n. ont, bad, evil; sore; 
 angry 
 
 onsdag, -ar, Wednesday 
 
 opera, -or, opera 
 
 ord (n.), , word 
 
 ordforande, , chairman 
 
 ordine'ra, I, prescribe 
 
 orolig, uneasy 
 
 orsak, -er, reason 
 
 otdlig, impatient 
 
 oskadlig, harmless 
 
 ovanlig, unusual 
 
 packa, I, pack 
 packa upp', unpack 
 pallet' (n.), , parcel 
 pant, -er, security; forfeit 
 par (n.), , pair, couple; ett 
 par, a couple of 
 
 paraply (n.), -n, umbrella 
 
 passa, I, fit, suit; be proper 
 
 passagerare, , passenger, 
 traveler 
 
 passande, n. , proper 
 
 patient', -er, patient 
 
 pengar, pi., money 
 
 penna, -or, pen 
 
 person', -er, person 
 
 pessimistisk pessimistic 
 
 pest, -er, pestilence, plague 
 
 piller (n.), , pill 
 
 pjas, -er, play (theatrical) 
 
 plan, -er, plan 
 
 plane' ra, I, plan 
 
 plante'ring, -ar, park; plant 
 ing 
 
 plats, -er, place; tag , sit 
 down 
 
 plocka, I, pick 
 
 plaga, I, pain, torment, trouble 
 
 polette'ra, I, check (trunk) 
 
 polis'konstapel, -staplar, po- 
 liceman 
 
 post, mail; post office; skic- 
 ka pa posten, mail 
 
 poste restante, general de- 
 livery 
 
 postanvisning, -ar, money or- 
 der 
 
 pota'tis, (colloquially often 
 -ar), potato 
 
 precis', exactly; precis kloc- 
 kan fern, five o'clock sharp 
 
 predi'ka, I, preach 
 
 predikan, no. pi., sermon 
 
 presente'ra (for), introduce 
 
 princip', -er, principle 
 
 pris (n.), -er, price
 
 272 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 program' (n.), , def. -gram- 
 met, program 
 
 promene'ra, I, take a walk 
 
 proteste'ra, I, protest 
 
 prov, -er, sample; test (pi. ) 
 
 pryda, lib, decorate, adorn 
 
 praktig, fine, magnificent, 
 splendid 
 
 punJct, -er, point, dot 
 
 pa, on, upon 
 
 pdminna, lib, remind 
 
 R 
 
 raka, I, shave 
 
 rask, quick, brisk 
 
 recept' (n.), , prescription 
 
 redan, already 
 
 regna, I, rain 
 
 rekommendationsbrev (n.), 
 , letter of recommendation 
 
 rekommende'ra, I, recom- 
 mend; register 
 
 rekommenderad, n. -at, regis- 
 tered 
 
 reda (-0 in compounds), or- 
 der; ha pd, know about; 
 ta pA, find out 
 
 regna, I, rain 
 
 rengora, irr. v., clean 
 
 resa, I la, travel, go 
 
 resa, -or, journey, trip 
 
 resona'bel, def. -abla, reason- 
 able 
 
 rest, -er, remainder 
 
 restaurang', -er, restaurant 
 
 restaurangvagn, -ar, dining 
 car 
 
 resultat (n.), , result 
 
 resvdska, -or, valise 
 
 rev, -ar, fish-line 
 
 revolver, -rar, revolver 
 
 rik, rich 
 
 riklig, abundant 
 
 rikta, I, aim, direct 
 
 riktig, right, correct, quite 
 (adv.) 
 
 ring, -ar, ring 
 
 ringa, indecl., humble, insig- 
 nificant 
 
 ringa, lib, ring 
 
 ringa pd' (hos), ring up 
 
 riva, st. v., tear, scratch 
 
 ro, III, row 
 
 roa sig, I, amuse oneself 
 
 rock, -ar, coat 
 
 roddbdt, -ar, rowboat 
 
 rolig, amusing; ha roligt, have 
 fun 
 
 roll, -er, part (theatrical) 
 
 ropa, I, call, shout; pd, call 
 (somebody) 
 
 ruin', -er, ruin 
 
 rullning, -ar, rolling 
 
 rum (n.), , room 
 
 rykte (n.), -n, reputation; 
 rumor 
 
 Ryssland (n.), Russia 
 
 rdd (n.), , advice; ha rdd, 
 have the means to 
 
 rdda, lib, advise 
 
 rdgbrod (n.), , rye bread 
 
 rddfrdga, I, consult 
 
 raka, I, meet; get (into) ; i 
 svdrigheter, get into diffi- 
 culties; rdkas, to meet one 
 another 
 
 rlicka, Ha, reach, last, be suf- 
 ficient 
 
 rddd, no. n., timid, afraid; 
 radd for, afraid of
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 rddda, I, save 
 
 rdkna, I, count 
 
 rdkning, -ar, bill; calculating, 
 
 counting 
 rdtt (adj.), n. , right; ha 
 
 rdtt, be right 
 rod, n. rdtt, red 
 ro'ka, I, smoke 
 rokare, , smoker 
 rokkupe, -er, compartment 
 
 for smokers 
 rokning, smoking 
 riirande, concerning 
 rorelse, -r, movement, motion, 
 
 exercise 
 rust, -er, voice 
 
 S 
 
 sak, -er, thing, matter 
 sakna, I, lack, miss, feel loss 
 
 of 
 sakta (sig), slow down; lose 
 
 time (watch) 
 sakta (adv.), slowly 
 sal, -ar, hall 
 salong', -er, drawing room, 
 
 auditorium 
 salt (n.), salt 
 sam-, accented, insep. prefix, 
 
 together 
 
 samma, (the) same 
 sammansvdrja (sig), irr. v., 
 
 conspire 
 
 samtal (n.), , conversation 
 samtala, I, converse, chat 
 sceneri' (n.), -er, scenery 
 se, irr. v., see; se' pd, look at; 
 
 se ut', look (appearance) 
 sed, -er. custom 
 
 sedan, (conj.), after, when; 
 (adv.), then, thereupon, af- 
 ter; (prep.), since, after 
 
 sedel, sedlar, bill 
 
 segelbat, -ar, sailboat 
 
 segla, I, sail 
 
 semes' ter, -rar, semester; va- 
 cation 
 
 sen, late 
 
 senare, later 
 
 sex, six 
 
 sida, -or, side; page 
 
 sig, him-, her-, itself, them- 
 selves 
 
 sin, reflex, possessive, 3d pers. 
 
 sist, last; till sist, at last 
 
 sitta, irr. v., sit 
 
 sju, seven 
 
 sjuk, sick 
 
 sjukdom, -ar, sickness 
 
 sjunga, st. v., sing 
 
 sjunka, st. v., sink 
 
 sjo, -ar, sea, lake 
 
 sjorofvare, , pirate 
 
 sjosjuk, seasick 
 
 sjostrand, -strdnder, lake 
 shore 
 
 skada, -or, injury, damage 
 
 skadad n. -at, injured, dam- 
 aged 
 
 ske, III, happen 
 
 skepp (n.), , ship 
 
 skicka, I, send 
 
 skicka ~bort', send away; dis- 
 miss 
 
 skicka in', send in 
 
 skicka ut', send out 
 
 skicklig, skillful 
 
 skildring, -ar, description, 
 portrayal
 
 274 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 skillnad, difference; pd, 
 difference between 
 
 skina, st. v., shine 
 
 skinka, -or, ham 
 
 skiva, -or, slice 
 
 skjorta, -or, shirt 
 
 skjuta, st. v., shoot 
 
 sko, -r, shoe 
 
 skola, -or, school; gd i , go 
 to school (attend) 
 
 skolavgift, -er, tuition 
 
 skolkamrat, -er, school-mate 
 
 skog, -ar, forest 
 
 skomakare, , shoemaker 
 
 skona, I, spare 
 
 skorsten, -ar, chimney, smoke- 
 stack 
 
 skratta, I, laugh 
 
 skriftlig, written 
 
 skrika, st. v., shout, cry 
 
 skriva, st. v., write 
 
 skriva om', rewrite 
 
 skridsko, -r, skate; dka skrid- 
 sko, skate. 
 
 skridskobana, -or, skating rink 
 
 skraddare, , tailor 
 
 skuld, -er, guilt; debt 
 
 skydda, I, protect 
 
 skyldig, guilty; vara skyldig, 
 owe 
 
 skynda, I, hurry 
 
 skynda sig, hurry 
 
 skammas (for), lib, dep. v., 
 be ashamed (of) 
 
 skota, Ha, take care of; man- 
 age 
 
 slag (n.), , blow, stroke 
 
 slagsmdl (n.), , fight 
 
 slant, -ar, coin 
 
 slott (n.), castle 
 
 slut (n.), close, end 
 
 sluta, I and st. v., close; end; 
 
 shut 
 
 slutligen, finally, at last 
 sld, st. v., strike 
 slakting, -ar, relative 
 slarv (n), , carelessness 
 sla, (irr. v.), strike 
 slappa, Ha, let go; sltippa in, 
 
 ut, let in, out 
 slatt, -er, plain 
 smaka, I, taste 
 smeka, Ha, caress 
 smutsig, dirty 
 smdsak, -er, trifle 
 smiilta, Ha, melt 
 smor (n.), butter 
 smorgds, -ar, bread and butter, 
 
 sandwich. 
 
 sna6&, quick, rapid, fast 
 snar, quick, speedy 
 snart, soon 
 
 snitt (n.), , cut (fashion; 
 snail, good, kind; var , 
 
 please 
 
 snulltdg (n.), , express train 
 sno, snow 
 
 socfcer(n.), def. sockret, sugar 
 so/fa, -or, sofa, seat 
 solsken (n.), sunlight 
 solstrdle, -ar, sunbeam 
 som (rel. pron.), who, which, 
 
 that; (conj.) as 
 sommar somrar, summer; i 
 
 somras, last summer 
 somna, I, fall asleep 
 son, soner, son 
 soppa, -or, soup 
 sorg, -er, sorrow, grief 
 sorglig, sad, sorry
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 275 
 
 sova, st. v., sleep 
 
 spare, I, save 
 
 spatser'tur, -er, walk; gora en 
 , take a walk 
 
 spegel, speglar, mirror; ne sig 
 i spegeln, look in the mirror 
 
 spel (n.), , play; game 
 
 spela, I, play 
 
 spratt (n.), , trick; spela 
 ett , play a trick on 
 
 springa, st. v., run 
 
 springpojke, -ar, errand boy 
 
 sprdk (n.), , language 
 
 spdrvagn, -ar, street car 
 
 stackars, indecl., poor, wretch- 
 ed 
 
 stad, stdder, city 
 
 stampning, pitching (ship) 
 
 stanna, I, stop, stay, remain 
 
 stark, strong 
 
 stat, -er, state 
 
 station', -er, station 
 
 stek, -ar, steak 
 
 sten, -ar, stone 
 
 stiga, st. v., step 
 
 stiga from', step forth 
 
 stiga pd', enter 
 
 stiga upp', get up, rise 
 
 stil, -ar, style; print 
 
 stjdla bort', st. v., steal 
 
 stjdlpa, Ila, upset 
 
 stol, -ar, chair 
 
 stolt. n. , proud 
 
 stor, great, large 
 
 storartad, n. -artat, grand, 
 magnificent 
 
 stormig, stormy 
 
 strand, strdnder, shore 
 
 strax, soon 
 
 stria, -er, strife, struggle, fight 
 
 stryka, st. v., iron; lower (of 
 a flag) ; stroke 
 
 strykning, ironing 
 
 strykinrdttning, -ar, laundry 
 
 stude'ra, I, study 
 
 studium (n.), studier, study 
 
 stund, -er, while; om en kort 
 , in a short while 
 
 stundande, indecl., coming 
 
 stupa, I, fall; die (on the bat- 
 tle field) 
 
 stycke (n.), -n, piece 
 
 styrka, strength, force 
 
 std till', irr. v., be (with ref- 
 erence to health), hur star 
 det till? How are you? 
 
 stdlle (n.), -n, place; i ert , 
 in your place 
 
 stdnga, lib, close, shut 
 
 stdrk'saker, pi. only, laundry 
 (washing) 
 
 supe, -er, supper 
 
 svag, weak 
 
 svar (n.), , answer 
 
 svara, I, answer 
 
 svensk (adj.), Swedish; (n.), 
 -ar, Swede 
 
 Sverige (n.), Sweden 
 
 svar, difficult; serious 
 
 svdrighet, -er, difficulty 
 
 svalja, lib, also svalde, svalt. 
 swallow 
 
 synas, Ila, dep. v., seem 
 
 synnerligen, especially 
 
 sysselsdtta, irr. v., busy; em- 
 ploy 
 
 syster, -trar, sister 
 
 sd, III, sow 
 
 sd, so 
 
 sd att, so that
 
 276 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 sdlunda, thus, consequently 
 
 sdng, -er, singing, song 
 
 saga, irr. v., say; dt (till), 
 
 tell 
 
 saker, def. sdkra, sure, cer- 
 tain ; pd, sure of 
 sallan. seldom 
 siillskap, -er, society, club 
 sullsynt, n. , rare 
 sang, -ar, bed; gd till stings, 
 
 go to bed 
 sarskilt, separate 
 sasong', -er, season 
 sate (n). -n, seat; bench 
 satt (n.), , manner, way 
 satta, irr. v., set, put, place 
 sutta sig, sit down 
 sodra, def. only, southern 
 soka, Ha, seek, look for 
 som, sommar, seam 
 somnig, sleepy 
 sondag, -ar, Sunday 
 sorja, lib, mourn, grieve 
 sot, n. sott, sweet 
 
 faga, ta, st. v., take 
 
 taga upp', take up 
 
 tal (n.), , speaking, speech; 
 
 number 
 
 tambur', -er, hall, vestibule 
 talrik, numerous 
 tand, tander, tooth; ha ont i 
 
 tdnderna, have a toothache 
 tandvark, toothache 
 tanke, -ar, thought 
 tappa, I, lose, drop 
 'tavla, -or, picture, painting 
 tavelgalleri' (n.), -er, picture 
 
 gallery 
 
 teater, teatrar, theater; gd pd 
 teatern, go to the theatre 
 
 telegraf, telegraph 
 
 telegram (n.), , telegram 
 
 telegram'bud (n.), , mes- 
 senger boy 
 
 telefone'ra, I, telephone 
 
 tennis, tennis 
 
 termome'ter, -metrar, ther- 
 mometer 
 
 tid, -er, time; i , on time 
 
 tidig, early 
 
 tidtdbell', -er, time table 
 
 tidning, -ar, newspaper 
 
 tiggare, , beggar 
 
 till, prep., adv., and accented 
 var. prefix, to, until. 
 
 tillbaka, back 
 
 tillbringa, I and irr. v., pass, 
 spend 
 
 tillfdlle (n.), -n, chance, occa- 
 sion; vid forsta , at the 
 first occasion 
 
 tillhora, lib, belong to 
 
 tillkomma, st. v., befit, be the 
 right of 
 
 tilldta, st. v., allow, permit 
 
 tilldtelse, -r, permission 
 
 tillsammans, together 
 
 tillverka, I, manufacture 
 
 tills (conj.), until 
 
 timme, -ar, hour 
 
 titta, I, look; pd, look at 
 
 tjog (n.), , score 
 
 tjugu, twenty 
 
 torn, def. tomma, empty, va- 
 cant 
 
 torg (n.), , market place 
 
 torka, I, dry 
 
 torka av', wipe off, dry
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 277 
 
 torr, dry 
 
 trevlig, pleasant, nice; ha det 
 trevligt, have a fine home, 
 time, etc. 
 
 tro, III, believe 
 
 trogen, n. troget, def. trogna, 
 faithful 
 
 troligen, probably 
 
 tr&kig, tedious, boring, un- 
 pleasant 
 
 trdng, narrow, crowded 
 
 trad (n.), , tree 
 
 trddgdrd, -ar, garden 
 
 traffa, I, meet, see 
 
 trdffas, reciprocal, meet, see 
 one another 
 
 trdnga sig from, lib, crowd 
 up, make a way for one- 
 self 
 
 troska, I, thresh 
 
 trott, n. , tired 
 
 tu (tvd), two; itu, in twain, 
 apart, asunder 
 
 tung, heavy 
 
 tunga, -or, tongue 
 
 tur, -er, trip, turn; luck 
 
 tveka, hesitate 
 
 tvenne, two 
 
 tvist, -er, quarrel 
 
 tvd, two 
 
 tvdrgata, -or, cross street 
 
 tvdrs (over), across 
 
 tvaft, -ar, wash (ing) 
 
 tvdtta, I, wash 
 
 ty, for, because 
 
 tycka, Ila, think, fancy; 
 om', like; ilia om, dis- 
 like 
 
 tyg (n.), -er, cloth 
 
 tyngd, -er, weight 
 
 tysk, German 
 
 tyska, German language 
 
 tyst, n. , silent 
 
 tyvdrr', unfortunately 
 
 tag (n.), , train 
 
 tacka, Ila, cover 
 
 taljare, , numerator 
 
 tdmligen (adv.), quite, fairly 
 
 tdnka (pa), Ila, think (of) 
 
 tat, frequent 
 
 tdvla (om), compete (for) 
 
 to'ras (modal), dare; may 
 
 U 
 
 under, prep, and accented 
 var. prefix, under, beneath, 
 etc. 
 
 underhdlla, st. v., entertain; 
 support 
 
 underldta, st. v., neglect 
 
 underrdttelse, -r, information 
 
 undersoka, Ila, examine, in- 
 vestigate 
 
 underbar, wonderful 
 
 undra, I, wonder 
 
 union', -er, union 
 
 upp, adv. and accented var. 
 prefix, up 
 
 uppassare, , waiter 
 
 uppbrand, n. -brant, burnt up 
 
 uppdragen, n. -et, def. dragna, 
 wound up 
 
 iippflyttad, n. -at, moved up; 
 promoted 
 
 uppfora, lib, erect, build 
 
 uppfora sig, conduct oneself, 
 behave 
 
 uppforande (n.), , conduct, 
 performance 
 
 uppldsa, Ila, sep., recite
 
 278 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 uppluckra, I, sep., loosen 
 (soil) 
 
 uppmarksam, def. -samma, at- 
 tentive 
 
 upprndrksamhet, attention 
 
 upprdtta, I, establish, found 
 
 uppsats, -er, composition 
 
 uppsikt, supervision 
 
 uppsTcatta, I, esteem 
 
 uppsta, irr. v., sep., to arise; 
 originate 
 
 upptaga, st. v., sep., to take 
 up; to adopt 
 
 upptagen, n. -et, occupied; 
 busy; adopted 
 
 urmakare, , watchmaker 
 
 urspdra, I, derail 
 
 ursakta, I, excuse 
 
 ut, adv. and accented var. 
 prefix, out (motion) 
 
 utan, prep, and adv., with- 
 out; att vara , lack 
 
 utantill, by heart 
 
 utbryta, st. v., sep., break out 
 
 ute, out 
 
 utflykt, -er, picnic, excursion 
 
 utforande (n.), execution 
 
 utgift, -er, expense 
 
 utgiva, st. v., sep., publish; 
 edit; spend 
 
 utkdmpa, I, bring a contest 
 to a close; play (a game) 
 
 utmana, I, challenge 
 
 utmarkt, n. , excellent 
 
 utom, outside of, beside; ex- 
 cept 
 
 utrikes, adv. and indecl. adj., 
 abroad, foreign 
 
 utrdtta, I, to carry out, ac- 
 complish 
 
 utsikt, -er, view 
 
 utsliten, n. -et, def. -slitna, 
 worn out 
 
 utsprucken, n. -et, def. -spruck- 
 na, open (about leaves and 
 flowers) 
 
 utstdlla, lib, exhibit; draw 
 (draft) 
 
 uttaga, st. v., sep., take out 
 
 uttrycka, Ha, express 
 
 utvdg, -ar, expedient 
 
 utova, I, practice; exercise 
 
 vacker, def. vackra, pretty 
 vagn, -ar, wagon, carriage 
 vakna, I, awaken 
 vaktmdstare, , janitor, 
 
 waiter 
 
 vandra, I, wander, stroll 
 vanlig, usual, common 
 vanligen, usually 
 vapen (n.), def. vapnet, , 
 
 weapon 
 
 var, indecl. adj., each, every 
 var och en, everyone 
 vara, -or, ware, merchandise 
 vara, I, to last, endure 
 vara (v.), to be 
 varaktig, lasting, durable 
 varje, indecl. adj., each, every 
 varm, warm 
 varsebliva, st. v., sep., become 
 
 aware of 
 vart, whither 
 Vasagatan, Vasa Street 
 vatten (n.), water 
 vattna, I, water
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 279 
 
 veranda, -or, porch 
 
 verk (n.), , work 
 
 verkligen, really 
 
 vete (n.), wheat 
 
 vetebrod (n.), , white bread, 
 loaf of 
 
 vid, prep., adv., and accented 
 var. prefix, at, by 
 
 vid, n. vitt, wide 
 
 vidare, further; utan , with- 
 out further ado, directly 
 
 vikt, -er, weight; importance 
 
 viktig, important 
 
 vila, I, rest 
 
 vilja (v.), will, wish, intend, 
 etc.; ha, want 
 
 villkor (n.), , condition 
 
 vin (n.), -er, wine 
 
 vinge, -ar, wing 
 
 vinter, -rar, winter; i vint- 
 ras, last winter 
 
 vinterhatt, -ar, winter hat 
 
 visa, I, show 
 
 viss, sure, certain 
 
 visst, adv., surely, certainly 
 
 visserligen, to be sure 
 
 vistelse, -r, sojourn 
 
 vykort (n.), , souvenir pos- 
 tal card 
 
 vdning, -ar, story, apartment 
 
 var, -ar, spring; i vdras, last 
 spring 
 
 vdrda, I, nurse, take care of 
 
 vdrdslos, careless 
 
 vdrdsloshet, carelessness 
 
 vdrfcst, -er, spring festival 
 
 vdt, n. vdtt, wet 
 
 vdcka, I la, wake up 
 
 viider (n.), , weather 
 
 valbargad, n. -at, well to do 
 
 vdlgorenhet, charity, oenevo- 
 
 lence 
 
 valja, lib, choose, elect 
 vdlsigna, I, bless 
 van, vanner, friend 
 vdnda, lib, turn, turn back; 
 
 sig, turn around 
 vdnlig, friendly, kind; mot, 
 
 kind to 
 
 vdnskap, friendship 
 vdnster, def. vdnstra, left; till 
 
 vanster, to the left 
 vdnta (pa), I, wait (for) 
 vdntsal, -ar, waiting room 
 vardefull, valuable 
 vdrd (n.), vdrt, worth 
 vdrld (I mute), -ar, world 
 vasnas, I, dep. v., make noise 
 vdxa, I la, grow 
 vdxel, vdxlar, draft; utstdlla 
 
 en , draw a draft 
 vdxelkontor (n.) , exchange 
 
 office 
 vdxla, I, change, exchange 
 
 Y 
 
 ypperlig, excellent 
 
 A 
 d, prep, and accented insep. 
 
 prefix, on 
 ddraga sig, st. v., contract, 
 
 incur 
 
 Alder, dldrar, age 
 dka, Ila, ride 
 dker, dkrar, field 
 dngare, , steamer 
 dngbdtsforbindelse, -r, connec 
 
 tion by steamer 
 dngbdtstur, -er, steamboat trip 
 dngmaskin, -er, steam engine
 
 280 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 dr (n.), , year 
 
 drsdag, -or, anniversary 
 
 dsikt, -er, opinion 
 
 dtaga sig, st. v., undertake 
 
 dter, adv. and accented var. 
 
 prefix, again; back 
 dterldmna, I, sep., return 
 dterstd, irr. v., remain 
 itervdnda, lib, sep., return 
 dtmins'tone, at least 
 ditto, eighty 
 
 ddel, def. ddla, noble 
 
 iiga, lib, own 
 
 agare, , owner 
 
 dgg (n.), egg 
 
 arnna, I, intend 
 
 an, yet; than (after a com- 
 parative) 
 
 dndamdl (n.), , purpose 
 
 tindd, yet, nevertheless 
 
 dndra, change; sig, change 
 one's mind 
 
 dng, -ar, meadow 
 
 dnnu, still, yet 
 
 apple (n.), -n, apple 
 
 urende (n.), -n, errand 
 
 d'venledes, likewise 
 
 tita, st. v., eat 
 
 
 o, -ar, island 
 
 60a (n.), 60on, eye 
 
 ogonblick (n.), , moment 
 
 ogonldkare, , oculist 
 
 omsesidig, mutual 
 
 onska, I, wish 
 
 onskan, indecl., wish 
 
 oppna, I, open 
 
 ore (n.), -n, Swedish coin 
 
 over, prep., adv., and accented 
 var. prefix, over 
 
 overldgga, irr. v., deliberate 
 
 dverraska, I, surprise 
 
 overruskning, -ar, surprise 
 
 overresa, -or, trip across, voy- 
 age 
 
 overtyga, I, convince 
 
 overvaka, I, supervise 
 
 overvikt, overweight 
 
 ENGLISH-SWEDISH. 
 
 For particulars of declension and conjugation, the Swedish-English vocabulary 
 must be consulted. 
 
 a, an, en, ett 
 able, be , kunna 
 about, om, omkring 
 abroad, utrikes 
 abundant, riklig 
 accident, olycka, olycksfall 
 accompany, folja med 
 accomplish, utratta 
 
 according to, enligt 
 
 accordingly, foljaktligen 
 
 account, skildring, rakning; 
 on account of, med anled- 
 ning av, till foljd av 
 
 acquainted, bekant 
 
 accustom, vanja 
 
 across, tvars (over) 
 
 add, addera
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 281 
 
 address, adress 
 
 address, adressera 
 
 addressee, adressat 
 
 adopt, upptaga, antaga 
 
 adorn, pryda 
 
 advance (money), forskottera 
 
 adversity, motgang 
 
 advertisement, annons 
 
 advice, rad 
 
 advise, rada 
 
 afternoon, eftermiddag; this 
 
 , i eftermiddag; in the , 
 
 pa eftermiddagen 
 afraid (of), radd (for) 
 after, efter 
 again, igen 
 against, emot, mot 
 age, alder 
 ago, for. ..sedan 
 agreeable, angenam, behaglig 
 ail (impers.), fattas 
 aim, rikta 
 air, luft 
 alike, lika 
 allow, tillata 
 almost, nastan 
 alone, generally def., allena 
 along (as in come ), med 
 already, redan 
 also, ocksa 
 
 although, ehuru, fastan 
 altogether, alldeles 
 always, alltid 
 American (n.), amerikan, 
 
 (adj.), amerikansk 
 among, bland, ibland 
 amount, belopp 
 amount to, belopa sig till 
 amuse, roa; to amuse oneself, 
 
 ha roligt 
 
 amusement, noje 
 
 amusing, roande, rolig 
 
 and, och 
 
 angle, meta 
 
 another, en annan 
 
 anniversary, arsdag 
 
 annoying, forarglig 
 
 answer, svara 
 
 any, nagon; any longer, langre 
 
 anything, nagonting, nagot 
 
 appetite, aptit 
 
 applause, bifall 
 
 apple, apple 
 
 approach, narma sig 
 
 approval, bifall 
 
 arm, arm 
 
 around, omkring, om 
 
 arrest, arrestera 
 
 arrive, ankomma, anlanda 
 
 art, konst 
 
 article, artikel; vara 
 
 artist, konstnar 
 
 as, som 
 
 ashamed, skamsen; to be , 
 
 skammas (for) 
 ashore, i land 
 
 ask, fraga (efter), bedja (om) 
 astonished, forvanad; be , 
 
 forvanas 
 at, vid (time, place) ; at the 
 
 house of, hos 
 attain, uppna, hinna 
 attend (visit), besoka, bevis- 
 
 ta; church, ga i kyrkan 
 attention, uppmarksamhet 
 attentive, uppmarksam 
 audience, auditorium 
 author, forfattare 
 automobile, automobil 
 autumn day, hostdag 
 
 Swedish Grammar 
 
 19
 
 282 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 aware, varse; to become of, 
 
 bliva varse 
 away, bort, borta; to go away, 
 
 ga bort; to be away (out), 
 
 vara borta 
 
 B 
 back, tillbaka; back and forth, 
 
 fram och tillbaka 
 back (v.), backa 
 background, bakgrund, fond 
 backwards, baklanges 
 bad, dalig, ond, elak 
 badly, ilia 
 bake, baka 
 baker, bagare 
 band, band, musikkar 
 bank, bank 
 
 barber shop, frisersalong 
 basket, korg 
 be, vara; how are youf Hur 
 
 star det till? 
 bear, bara 
 
 beat, sla; besegra (in games) 
 beautiful, skon, vacker 
 because, emedan, ty 
 become, bliva; what became 
 
 of himf Hvad blev det av 
 
 honom? cloudy, mulna 
 bed, sang; go to , ga till 
 
 sangs 
 
 befit, passa; tillkomma 
 before (prep.) fore; (adv.) 
 
 forr, forut; (conj.) innan 
 beg, tigga; for, bedja om 
 beggar, tiggare 
 begin, borja, begynna 
 beginning, borjan; in the , 
 
 i borjan 
 behind, bakom 
 
 being, vasen ; human , man- 
 niska 
 
 belated, forsenad, sen 
 
 belief, tro 
 
 believe, tro; in, tro pa 
 
 bell, klocka 
 
 belong (to), tillhora 
 
 bench, bank, sate 
 
 beside, bredvid, vid; utom 
 
 (except) 
 besides (prep.) utom; (adv.) 
 
 dessutom, dartill 
 best, bast 
 
 between, (e)mellan 
 big, stor 
 
 bill, sedel; rakning 
 bill of fare, matsedel 
 bird, fagel 
 birthday, fodelsedag 
 bite, bita; nappa (of fish) 
 bite, napp (of fish), bit. 
 bless, valsigna 
 blow, blasa 
 blonde, ljus, blond 
 board (fare), kost 
 board and room, inackordering 
 board (a train), stiga pa' 
 boarder, inackordering 
 boil, koka 
 bone, ben 
 book, bok 
 booth, stand 
 boring, trakig 
 born, fodd; be , fo'das 
 borrow, lana; borrow from, 
 
 lana av 
 both, bada, bagge; both... 
 
 and, bade. . .och 
 boy, gosse 
 branch, gren 
 bread, brod 
 break, bryta
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 283 
 
 break off, bryta av, avbryta 
 
 break out, bryta ut 
 
 breakfast, frukost 
 
 bring, bringa, hamta 
 
 bring along, medfora, fora med 
 
 brother, broder 
 
 brunette, brunett, mb'rk 
 
 brush, borsta 
 
 build, bygga 
 
 building, byggnad 
 
 burn, branna 
 
 burnt up, uppbrand 
 
 business, affar; do a good , 
 
 gora goda affarer 
 business building, affarsbygg- 
 
 nad 
 but, men, (after a negative, 
 
 utan) 
 
 butter, smor 
 buy, kopa 
 by, vid, bredvid 
 
 cab, droska 
 
 cabman, kusk 
 
 calculation, rakning 
 
 call, kalla 
 
 call on, balsa p, (hos), be 
 
 soka 
 
 called, be , beta 
 calm (adj.), lugn 
 can, kunna 
 captain, kapten 
 car, vagn, sparvagn 
 card, kort 
 care (noun), yard, skotsel, 
 
 omsorg 
 
 care (v.), varda, skota 
 careful, aktsam, noggrann 
 careless, vardslos, slarvig 
 
 carelessness, vardslb'shet, 
 
 slarv 
 
 cargo, last 
 carriage, vagn 
 carry, bara 
 cash (noun), kontant 
 cash (v.), inlosa 
 castle, slott 
 cat, katt 
 
 cathedral, katedral 
 cause (noun), orsak 
 cause (v.), fororsaka 
 cautious, forsiktig 
 cease, sluta, avsluta, upphora 
 
 med 
 
 celebrate, fira 
 celebrated, firad, omtalad 
 celebration, firande 
 certain, saker, viss 
 chair, stol 
 
 chairman, ordforande 
 challenge, utmana 
 championship, masterskap 
 chance, tillfalle; by chance. 
 
 handelsevis 
 
 change, andra; vaxla( money) 
 character, karaktar 
 charge, begara 
 charitable, barmhartig, valgo- 
 
 rande 
 charity, barmhartighet, valgo- 
 
 renhet 
 
 charming, fortjusande 
 chat (noun), samtal 
 chat (v.), samtala 
 cheat, bedraga 
 check, polettera 
 chicken, hons, kyckling 
 child, barn 
 chilly, kylig
 
 284 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 choose, valja 
 
 Christmas, jul 
 
 church, kyrka 
 
 cigar, cigarr; dealer, ci- 
 
 garrhandlare 
 circle, cirkel 
 circulation, omlopp 
 city, stad 
 class, klass 
 classic, klassisk 
 clean, ren 
 cleanly, renlig 
 clear, klar 
 olimate, klimat 
 clock, klocka 
 close (noun), slut 
 close (v.), sluta, stanga 
 cloth, tyg 
 clothes, klader 
 cloudy, mulen; become , 
 
 mulna 
 coat, rock 
 coffee, kaffe 
 coin, mynt, slant 
 cold (adj.) kail, (noun) for- 
 
 kylning 
 collar, krage 
 collide, kollidera 
 comb, kamm 
 come, komma 
 
 come (to a place), infinna sig 
 comfort, trost 
 comfortable, bekvam 
 coming, kommande, stundan- 
 
 de 
 
 command, befalla 
 common, allman, vanlig 
 company, sallskap, framman- 
 
 de (guests) 
 
 compartment, kupe" 
 compensate, belona, ersatta 
 compete, tavla 
 complain, klaga (over) 
 comply, efterkomma 
 composition, uppsats 
 concern, anga, galla 
 concert, konsert 
 condition, f orhallande ; till- 
 
 stand 
 
 conduct (noun), uppforande 
 conduct (oneself), uppfora sig 
 conductor, konduktor 
 confidence, fortroende 
 conflagration, brand, eldsvada 
 connection, forbindelse 
 consequently, foljaktligen 
 consideration, betraktande 
 consist, besta (av) 
 conspire, sammansvarja (sig) 
 consult, radfraga 
 constitution, kroppskonstitu- 
 
 tion 
 
 contain, innehalla 
 contents, innehall 
 continue, fortsatta 
 contract, adraga sig (as a 
 
 sickness) 
 
 converse, samtala 
 conversation, samtal 
 cook, koka 
 cool, kylig 
 
 correspondent, korrespondent 
 cordial, hjartlig 
 corner, horn 
 cost, kosta 
 
 costly, dyrbar, kostbar 
 costume, kostym 
 count, rakna 
 counter, disk
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 285 
 
 country, land; in the , pa 
 
 landet 
 
 country house, lantstalle 
 couple, par; a couple of, ett 
 
 par 
 course, gang, kurs; of course, 
 
 naturligtvis 
 cousin, kusin 
 cozy, hemtrevlig 
 creamery butter, mejerismb'r 
 crew, besattning 
 cross street, tvargata 
 crowd, folkmassa 
 crowded, fullsatt, fullpackad 
 cuff, manschett 
 culture r kultur 
 cultured, bildad 
 cup, kopp 
 cure (v.), bota 
 custom, sed 
 cut (noun), snitt 
 cut(v.), klippa, skara, avmeja 
 
 D 
 
 daily, daglig 
 damage (v.), skada 
 dark, mork 
 date, datum 
 date (v.), datera 
 daughter, dotter 
 day, dag 
 
 daylight, dagsljus 
 dead, dod 
 deal, del; a great deal, myc- 
 
 ket, en hel del 
 dealer, handlande 
 dear, kar, dyr (price) 
 death, dod 
 debt, skuld 
 deceive, bedraga 
 deck, dack 
 
 degree, grad 
 delay (noun), drojsmal 
 deliberate, betanka, overvaga 
 demand (noun), anhallan, be- 
 
 garan 
 
 demand (v.), anhalla 
 denominator, namnare 
 deposit, insatta 
 derail, urspara 
 description, beskrivning 
 deserve, fortjana 
 design, anslag; monster 
 desire (noun), onskan, lust 
 destroy, forstora 
 die, do 
 
 different, olik, annorlunda 
 difference, skillnad 
 difficult, svar 
 difficulty, svarighet 
 diligent, flitig 
 dining car, restaurangvagn 
 dining room, matsal 
 dinner, middag 
 direct, direkt 
 direction, hall, riktning 
 dirty smutsig 
 disguise, forklada 
 -dismiss, skicka bort 
 dispatch, avsanda 
 diverse, diverse 
 divide, dividera 
 do, gora 
 doctor, doktor 
 
 doctor's office, mottagningsrum 
 doctor's fee, honorar 
 dog, hund 
 door, dorr 
 dot, prick, punkt 
 down (adv.) ned; (prep.) ned- 
 
 for
 
 286 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 .dozen, dussin 
 
 draft, vaxel 
 
 drama, dram, drama 
 
 draw, draga; rita 
 
 drawing room, salong 
 
 dress, klada (sig) 
 
 drink, aricka 
 
 drive, kora 
 
 drop, slappa ned, tappa (lose) 
 
 druggist, apotekare 
 
 dry, torr 
 
 duel, duell 
 
 durable, varaktig 
 
 dwelling, bostad 
 
 each, var, varje 
 
 early (adj.) tidig; (adv.) ti-- 
 
 digt 
 
 earn, fortjana 
 eat, ata 
 economical, sparsam, ekono- 
 
 misk 
 egg, agg 
 eighty, attio 
 either (conj.), antingen 
 elect, valja 
 electric, elektrisk 
 elegance, elegans 
 emperor, kejsare 
 employees, betjaning 
 empty, torn 
 
 end (noun), slut, ande 
 endure, fordraga; besta; vara 
 enjoyment, noje 
 enough, nog 
 entail, medfora 
 enter, intrada, komma in 
 
 entertain, underhalla, roa 
 entertaining, roande, under- 
 
 hallande 
 
 entirely, belt och ballet 
 entrust, anfortro 
 envious, avundsjuk 
 erect, uppfora, uppratta 
 errand, arende 
 errand boy, springpojke 
 error, fel, misstag 
 especially, isynnerhet 
 establish, anlagga, uppratta 
 esteem, uppskatta 
 European, europS, europeisk 
 even, till och med; afven 
 evening, afton, kvall 
 every, varje, var 
 everybody, envar, var och en 
 exact, noga, noggrann 
 exactly, precis 
 
 examine, examinera, undersoka 
 excellent, fortramig, ypperlig 
 except, utom 
 exchange, byta, utbyta 
 excursion, utflykt 
 excuse (v.), ursakta 
 execution, utforande 
 exercise (noun), ovning, ro- 
 
 relse 
 
 exercise (v.), utova, ova, rora 
 expect, vanta 
 expedient, medel; rad 
 expense, utgift 
 expensive, dyr 
 experience, erfarenhet 
 export (v.), exportera 
 express (v.), uttrycka 
 express train, snalltag 
 eye, oga
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 287 
 
 face, ansikte 
 
 factory, fabrik 
 
 fair (noun), marknad 
 
 faithful, trogen 
 
 fall, falla, stupa (fall on the 
 
 battlefield) 
 family, familj; festival, fa- 
 
 miljefest 
 
 famous, beromd, ryktbar 
 farmer, lantbrukare 
 fast (speed), fort, hastigt 
 fast (immovable), fast 
 father, fader 
 fault, fel 
 fee, honorar 
 feel, kanna 
 fetch, hamta 
 
 feiv, fa; a few, nagra (fa) 
 field, aker 
 
 fight (noun), slagsmal, strid 
 fill, fylla 
 
 finally, slutligen, antligen 
 find, finna, hitta 
 fine, fin, trevlig, vacker 
 fire, eld, eldsvada 
 first, forst 
 fish, fisk 
 fit. passa 
 flag, flagga 
 flee, fly 
 floor, golv 
 flour, mjol 
 flow, flyta 
 floiver, blomma: bed, blom- 
 
 sterrabatt 
 fluent, flytande 
 folloio, folja 
 following, foljande 
 food, mat 
 
 fool, narr 
 
 football game, fotbollspel 
 
 football team, fotbollag 
 
 for (prep.) for; (conj.) f or, ty 
 
 force, kraft, styrka 
 
 foreign, frammande; utrikes 
 
 foremost, framst 
 
 forenoon, formiddag; in the 
 
 forenoon, pa formiddagen 
 forest, skog 
 forget, glomma 
 fortune, lycka; formogenhet 
 fraction, brak (arithmetic) 
 France, Frankrike 
 Francis, Frans 
 free, fri 
 freeze, frysa 
 
 freezing point, fryspunkt 
 French, fransk 
 friend, van 
 friendly, vanlig 
 friendship, vanskap 
 frightened, forskrackt 
 from, (i)fran 
 
 front, front; in front, framme 
 frost, frost 
 fruit, frukt 
 full, full 
 
 further, langre, vidare 
 future, framtid 
 
 game, spel, lek 
 garden, tradgard 
 general, allman, vanlig 
 general delivery, poste re- 
 
 stante 
 
 generality, allmanhet 
 generally, vanligen
 
 288 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 German, tysk 
 
 Germany, Tyskland 
 
 get, fa, erhalla, bekomma 
 
 get up, stiga upp 
 
 girl, flicka 
 
 give, giva 
 
 glad, glad; I am glad, det gla- 
 
 der mig 
 glass, glas 
 glide, glida 
 glorious, harlig 
 go, ga, resa, fara 
 goal, mal 
 God, Gud 
 good, god, snail 
 good-bye, farval, adjo 
 goose, gas 
 
 Gotha Canal, Gota kanal 
 Gothenburg, Goteborg 
 granary, lada 
 
 , gras 
 
 , stor 
 green, gron 
 greet, halsa 
 greeting, halsning 
 0nef, sorg 
 grind, mala 
 
 grow, vaxa, blifva (become) 
 grumble, knota 
 guest, gast 
 0ttiZ, skuld 
 guilty, skyldig 
 
 H 
 
 habit, vana 
 Twiir, bar 
 
 f, halv (adj.), halft (noun) 
 
 w, halvtimme 
 half-sole, halvsula 
 halfway, halvvags 
 
 hall, tambur 
 ham, skinka 
 hand, hand; at , till hands, 
 
 framme 
 
 hand baggage, handbagage 
 hang, hanga 
 happen, ske 
 happiness, lycka 
 happy, lycklig, glad ; make , 
 
 gladja 
 
 harbor, hamn 
 hard, hard, svar 
 harmless, oskadlig 
 hat, hatt 
 
 haul, forsla, kora 
 he, han 
 
 headache, huvudvark 
 health, halsa 
 healthy, frisk, halsosam 
 hear, hora 
 
 heart, hjarta; by , utantill 
 heart failure, hjartforlamning 
 heavy, tung 
 heed, lyda, giva akt pa 
 heel, hal; klack (of shoe) 
 height, hojd 
 help (noun), hjalp 
 help (v.), hjalpa 
 her (gen. and obj.), hennes, 
 
 henne 
 herself, sig 
 here, bar 
 hesitate, tveka 
 high, hog 
 
 highly, hogt, hogligen, mycket 
 hill, hojd, kulle 
 him, honom 
 himself, sig 
 hire, hyra 
 7m. bans
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 289 
 
 history, historia 
 
 hold (noun), hall 
 
 hold (v.), halla; out, rac- 
 
 ka fram 
 
 holiday, helgdag 
 hollow, ihalig 
 home (noun), hem; at , 
 
 hemma 
 
 home (adv.), hem 
 honest, arlig 
 hook, krok 
 hour, timme 
 hope (noun), hopp 
 hope (v.), hoppas 
 hotel, hotell 
 house, bus; at the house of, 
 
 hos 
 human, mansklig; being, 
 
 manniska 
 
 humanity, mansklighet, 
 humor, lynne 
 hungry, hungrig 
 hurry (noun), bradska; be in 
 
 a , ha brattom 
 hurry (v.), skynda, skynda 
 
 sig 
 hurry up, skynda pa 
 
 I 
 
 ice, is 
 if, om 
 ill, sjuk 
 
 illuminated, illuminerad 
 immediately, genast 
 impatient, otalig 
 important, viktig 
 inclose, innesluta, narsluta 
 inclosed, narsluten 
 include, inbegripa 
 inconvenient, obekvamt 
 
 indicate, visa 
 induce, forma. 
 industrious, flitig 
 information, underrattelse 
 inhabitant, invanare 
 injured, sarad, skadad 
 ink, black 
 
 insignificance, obetydlighet 
 insignificant, obetydlig 
 intend, amna, vilja 
 interest (noun), intresse 
 interested, intresserad 
 interesting, intressant 
 interrupt, avbryta 
 introduce, presentera (for) 
 invite, bjuda, inbjuda 
 invitation, inbjuaning 
 iron (v.), stryka 
 ironing, strykning 
 island, 6 
 it, det 
 Italy, Italien 
 
 journey, resa 
 joy, gladje 
 jump (v.), hoppa 
 just, just 
 
 K 
 
 keep, behalla, halla 
 kilogram, kilogram, kilo 
 kilometer, kilometer 
 kind (adj.), snail, vanlig 
 kind (n.), slag 
 king, konung, kung 
 King's Street, Kungsgatan 
 knock (v.), knacka 
 know, veta, kanna, kunna 
 know about, kanna till
 
 290 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 lack, sakna; impers., fattas, 
 
 felas 
 
 lady, dam 
 lake, sjo, insjo 
 lake shore, sjostrand 
 lamb steak lammstek 
 land (noun), land 
 land (v.), landa (intr.), land- 
 
 satta (tr.) 
 landscape, landskap 
 language, sprak 
 Lapland, Lappland 
 large, stor 
 
 last (v.), vara, racka 
 last (adj.), sist; last night, i 
 
 gar kvall; last year, i fjol; 
 
 last Monday, i mandags 
 late, sen, forsenad 
 laundry, strykinrattning 
 
 (place) 
 
 laundry, stryksaker 
 lawn, grasmatta 
 lazy, lat 
 lead (v.), fora 
 learn, lara 
 learned, lard 
 
 least, minst; at , atminstone 
 leave (v.), lamna, avresa, ga 
 leave behind, kvarlamna 
 lecture, forelasning 
 left, vanster; to the , till 
 
 vanster 
 
 left, kvarlamnad 
 leg, ben 
 lend, lana 
 less, mindre 
 lesson, laxa; lektion 
 let, lata 
 
 letter, brev; of credit, kre- 
 ditbrev; of recommenda- 
 tion, rekommendationsbrev 
 
 lie, ligga 
 
 lie, ljuga 
 
 life, liv 
 
 like (adj.) lik; (adv.) as 
 
 likewise, afvenledes 
 
 like, tycka om 
 
 line (fishing), rev 
 
 listen, lyssna; to, hora p& 
 
 literature, litteratur 
 
 little, liten; a little, lite(t) 
 
 live, leva, bo 
 
 load, last, borda 
 
 loaf, kaka 
 
 lock, lasa 
 
 long, lang; (adv.) lange 
 
 longer, langre 
 
 long (v.), langta 
 
 long expected, lange vantad 
 
 look, titta, blicka; se ut (ap- 
 pearance) ; at, se pa; look 
 for, soka efter, leta efter 
 
 lose, forlora, tappa 
 
 love, karlek 
 
 lower, taga ned; stryka (flag) 
 
 luck, lycka, tur 
 M 
 
 magnificent, harlig, storartad 
 
 mail (noun), post 
 
 mail (v), bara, lagga pa pos- 
 ten 
 
 make, gora; (induce) forma 
 (att), fa (att) 
 
 man, man, manniska 
 
 maneuver (v.), manovrera 
 
 manner, satt, vis 
 
 manufacture, tillverka 
 
 many, manga
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 market place, torg 
 
 mate, make 
 
 may, ma, fa, kunna 
 
 meadow, ang 
 
 meal, mal 
 
 mean (v.), mena, betyda 
 
 means, medel ; by means of, 
 
 medelst 
 measure, matt 
 meet, mota, traffa 
 melt, smalta 
 mend, laga 
 
 mention, namna, omtala 
 merchant, handlande 
 merciful, barmhartig 
 merry, glad, munter 
 miraculous, underbar 
 messenger boy, telegrambud 
 middle, mitt (i mitten) 
 mill, kvarn 
 miller, mjolnare 
 minute, minut 
 mirror, spegel 
 misfortune, olycka 
 miss, sakna, forsumma 
 mistake (noun), misstag 
 mistake (v.), misstaga (sig) 
 Mister (Mr.), herr 
 modern, modern 
 modest, blygsam 
 moment, ogonblick 
 Monday, mandag 
 money, pengar; make , for- 
 
 tjana pengar 
 
 money order, postanvisning 
 month, manad 
 more, mer, flere 
 morning, morgon; to-morrow, 
 
 i morgon; this , i morse: 
 
 paper, morgontidning 
 
 most, rnest; most people, de 
 fiesta 
 
 mother, moder 
 
 motor boat, motorbat 
 
 mountain, berg 
 
 mourn, sb'rja 
 
 mouth, mun; mynning (can- 
 non, river) 
 
 move, flytta 
 
 movement, rorelse ; verk 
 
 much, mycken, mycket 
 
 multiply, multiplicera 
 
 museum, museum 
 
 music, musik, spel 
 
 mutual, omsesidig 
 
 my, rriin 
 
 N 
 
 namely, namligen, that is to 
 
 say 
 
 nature, natur 
 near (adj.) nar, (adv. and 
 
 prep.) nara 
 nearness, narhet 
 need, behova 
 
 neglect, forsumma, underlata 
 nest, bo 
 never, aldrig 
 new, ny 
 newness, nyhet 
 news, nyheter 
 newspaper, tidning 
 next, nast 
 next to, bredvid 
 nice, hygglig, snail, trevlig 
 night, natt; to-night, i kvall 
 night express, nattsnalltag 
 no (adv.), nej; (adj.) ingen 
 noble, adel 
 noise, vasen, larm
 
 292 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 noon, middag; at , pa mid- 
 
 dagen 
 north (noun) norr, (adj.) 
 
 norra (def. only) 
 northern, norra (def. only), 
 
 nordlig 
 Northern Museum, Nordiska 
 
 museet 
 
 not, inte, icke, ej 
 nothing, ingenting, intet 
 notice (v.j, varsebliva 
 now, nu 
 
 number, nummer, tal 
 numerator, namnare 
 numerous, talrik 
 
 O 
 
 oats, havre 
 obey, lyda 
 observe, iakttaga 
 occasion, tillfalle 
 occupied, sysselsatt, upptagen 
 occupy, sysselsatta, upptaga 
 oculist, ogonlakare 
 of, av, om 
 offer (v.), erbjuda 
 office, kontor 
 
 office building, affarsbyggnad 
 officer, officer 
 often, ofta 
 old, gammal 
 Olympic, olympisk 
 on, pa 
 
 on board, ombord 
 one, en, ett; (indef. pron.) 
 
 man 
 
 once, en gang 
 only, bara, endast, blott 
 open (adj.), oppen; utspruc- 
 
 kep (flowers) 
 open (v.), 6'ppna 
 
 opera, opera 
 
 opinion, mening, tanke 
 
 opportunity, tillfalle, lagenhet 
 
 or, eller, annars 
 
 order (noun), ordning, reda 
 
 order (v.), befalla, bestalla 
 
 originate, uppsta 
 
 otherwise, annars 
 
 out, ut, ute 
 
 over, over; kvar; there, 
 
 darborta; sleep, forsova 
 
 (sig) 
 
 overweight, overvikt 
 owe, vara skyldig 
 own, aga 
 owner, agare 
 
 P 
 
 pack, packa 
 page, sida 
 
 pain (v.), plaga; gora ont 
 painting, malning, tavla 
 pair, par 
 palace, palats 
 paper, papper, newspaper, tid- 
 
 ning 
 
 parcel, paket 
 pardon, ursakta 
 parents, foraldrar 
 parlor, formak 
 park, park 
 
 part, del; roll (theater) 
 participate, deltaga 
 pass, tillbringa 
 passage, overresa 
 passenger, passagerare 
 past (prep, and adv.), forbi 
 patience, talamod 
 patient, talig; patient 
 pay, betala 
 peasant, bonde
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 293 
 
 pen, penna 
 
 people, folk 
 
 perch, abborre 
 
 performance, forestalling 
 
 perhaps, kanske, kanhanda 
 
 permission, tillatelse, lov 
 
 permit, tillata 
 
 person, person, manniska 
 
 pessimistic, pessimistisk 
 
 pest, pest 
 
 physician, lakare 
 
 picture gallery, tavelgalleri 
 
 pick, plocka 
 
 pick upp, taga upp 
 
 piece, stycke, bit 
 
 piece of furniture, mobel 
 
 pill, piller 
 
 pin, knappnal 
 
 pirate, sjorovare 
 
 pitching, stampning 
 
 placard, anslag, plakat 
 
 place, plats; in the of, i 
 
 stallet for; take the of, 
 
 ersatta 
 
 plaintive, jamrande 
 plan (noun), plan 
 plan (v.), planera 
 plant, plantera, sit 
 play (v.), leka; spela 
 play (noun), lek; spel; pjis 
 
 (theater) 
 pleasant, angenam, behaglig, 
 
 trevlig 
 
 please, behaga 
 pleasure, behag, noje 
 poem, dikt 
 poet,, diktare, skald 
 point, punkt, dot 
 poison, forgifta 
 policeman, poliskonstapel 
 
 polite, hovlig, aitig 
 politeness, hovlighet, artighet 
 poor, fattig, stackars, dalig 
 population, befolkning 
 porch, veranda 
 port, hamn 
 porter, barare 
 portrayal, skildring 
 position, plats; stallning 
 possible, mojlig 
 postage stamp, frimarke 
 post office, postkontor 
 potato, potatis 
 power, kraft; makt 
 practice (v.), praktisera, ova, 
 
 utova 
 
 praise, beromma 
 pray, bedja 
 preach, predika 
 preacher, predikant 
 precious, dyrbar 
 prefer, foredraga, hellre 
 
 (heist) +verb 
 
 prescribe, ordinera, foreskriva 
 prescription, foreskrift, recept 
 present (adj.), narvarande 
 presentiment, aning; have a 
 
 , ana 
 
 presume, formoda, tro sig 
 pretty, vacker; (adv.) tamli- 
 
 gen, ganska 
 prevent, forhindra 
 price, pris . 
 print, tryck, stil 
 principle, princip 
 probable, trolig 
 probably, troligen 
 program, program 
 prohibit, torbjuda 
 prohibited, forbjuden
 
 294 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 prominent, framstaende 
 promise (v.), lova 
 promoted, befordrad 
 propose, fbresla 
 proposal, forslag 
 proposition, forslag 
 protect, skydda 
 protest, protestera 
 proud, stolt 
 public (noun), allmanhet, 
 
 publik 
 
 public (adj.), allman, offentlig 
 public school, folkskola 
 publish, utgiva 
 pupil, larjunge 
 purchase (noun), inkop 
 purpose, avsikt 
 pursue, forfolja 
 put, lagga, satta 
 put away, lagga bort 
 
 Q 
 
 quality, kvalitet 
 
 quarrel (v.), trata 
 
 quay, kaj 
 
 quick, kvick, hastig, snabb, 
 
 snar, rask 
 quickly, fort 
 quiet, tyst 
 quite, ganska, riktigt, alldeles 
 
 R 
 
 railway, jarnvag; accident, 
 
 jarnvagsolycka . 
 rain (noun), regn 
 rain (v.), regna 
 ransom (noun), losen 
 ransom (v.), frikopa 
 rapid, hastig, snabb 
 rather, hellre 
 rare, sallsynt 
 
 reach, racka; reach out, rac- 
 
 ka fram 
 read, lasa 
 reader, lasebok 
 ready, fardig 
 realize, inse 
 really, verkligen 
 reason, orsak; by reason of, 
 
 till foljd av 
 reasonable, resonabel 
 recall, minnas, komma ihag 
 receive, erhalla, fa, mottaga 
 recently, nyligen 
 reception room, mottagnings- 
 
 rum 
 
 recipient, mottagare 
 recite, upplasa 
 reconcile, torsona 
 recognize, igenkanna 
 recommend, rekommendera 
 recommendation, letter of, re- 
 
 kommendationsbrev 
 red, rod 
 redeem, inlosa 
 reduce, reducera 
 reflect, betanka (sig) 
 regard, anse, betrakta 
 registered, rekommenderad 
 regulate, justera 
 relate, beratta, omtala 
 relation, forhallande 
 relative, slakting 
 remain, bliva, forbliva; inne- 
 
 sta (money in bank) ; stan- 
 
 na; Mersta 
 remainder, rest 
 remember, minnas, erinra sig 
 remind, erinra (om), paminna 
 rent, hyra 
 reputation, rykte
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 request (noun), begaran 
 
 request (v.) anhalla, begara 
 
 respected, respekterad 
 
 rest (noun), vila 
 
 rest (v.), vila sig 
 
 restaurant, restaurang 
 
 result, resultat 
 
 retain, behalla 
 
 return, aterlamna (tr. v.) ; 
 
 komma tillbaka, atervanda 
 revenge, hamnas 
 revolver, revolver 
 rewrite, skriva om 
 rich, rik 
 
 ride (noun), aktur 
 ride (v.), rida (horse); aka 
 right, ratt; be , ha ratt 
 right, hoger; to the , till 
 
 hoger 
 ring, ring 
 
 ring up, ringa pa hos 
 rink, skridskobana 
 ripe, mogen 
 ripen, mogna 
 rise, stiga upp 
 river, flod; bank, flod- 
 
 strand 
 road, vag 
 rock (v.), gunga 
 rolling, rullning 
 room, rum 
 
 row, ro; boat, roddbat 
 ruin, ruin 
 rumor, rykte 
 
 run, springa; ga (watch) 
 Russia, Ryssland 
 
 S 
 
 sad, sorgsen, sorglig, trakig 
 sail, segla; boat, segelbat 
 sailor, sjoman 
 
 salt, salt 
 
 salute, halsa (pa) 
 
 sample, prov 
 
 sandwich, smorgas 
 
 satisfied, belaten, nojd 
 
 save, spara; radda (rescue) 
 
 say, saga 
 
 scenery, sceneri 
 
 school, skola 
 
 score, tjog 
 
 scratch, riva 
 
 seam, som 
 
 sea, sjo, hav 
 
 seasick, sjosjuk 
 
 seat, sate, soffa, plats 
 
 security, sakerhet; pant 
 
 see, se, traffa 
 
 seek, sb'ka 
 
 seem, synas; it seems to me, 
 det synes mig 
 
 seldom, sallan 
 
 sell, salja 
 
 semester, semester; termin 
 
 send, skicka 
 
 send for, skicka efter 
 
 send away, skicka bort 
 
 sensible, forstandig 
 
 serious, allvarlig, allvarsam, 
 svar 
 
 sermon, predikan 
 
 servant, tjanare; servants 
 (coll.), betjaning 
 
 service, tjanst; betjaning (at- 
 tendance) 
 
 settle, avgora, uppgora 
 
 seven, sju 
 
 several, flera, atskilliga 
 
 share (noun), del 
 
 she, hon 
 
 shine, skina
 
 296 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 shiny, skinande, blank 
 
 ship, skepp, fartyg 
 
 shirt, skjorta 
 
 shoe, sko 
 
 shoot, skjuta 
 
 shore, strand 
 
 short, kort 
 
 shout, ropa, skrika 
 
 show, visa 
 
 shut, stanga 
 
 shut, stangd 
 
 sick, sjuk 
 
 sickness, sjukdom 
 
 side, sida; to the , at sidan 
 
 sight, syn; anblick, asyn 
 
 signature, namnteckning 
 
 signify, betyda, mean 
 
 since, sedan (time), emedan 
 
 (cause) 
 sing, sjunga 
 sink, sjunka 
 sister, syster 
 six, sex 
 sit, sitta 
 situated, belagen; be , lig- 
 
 ga, befinna sig 
 skate (noun), skridsko 
 skate (v.), aka skridsko 
 skating rink, skridskobana 
 skillful, skicklig 
 sleep (noun), somn 
 sleep (v.), sova 
 sleepy, somnig 
 slice (noun), skiva 
 slow, langsam 
 slowly, sakta 
 slow up, sakta 
 small, liten 
 smile (v.), le 
 smoker, rokare 
 
 smokestack, skorsten 
 smoking, rokning 
 smooth, jamn, blank 
 snow (noun), sno 
 snow (v.), snoa 
 so, sa, jasa 
 so that, sa att 
 society, societet; forening 
 sofa, soffa 
 sometimes, ibland 
 some, nagon 
 somewhat, nagot 
 somewhere, nagonstades 
 
 (-stans) 
 son, son 
 song, sang 
 soon, snart, strax 
 sore, 6m; ond 
 sorrow, sorg 
 sorry, ledsen 
 soup, soppa 
 southern, sodra, sydlig 
 souvenir postal, vy^ort 
 sow, sa 
 spare, skona 
 speak, tala 
 spectacles, glasogon 
 speech, tal 
 spend (money), giva ut; 
 
 time, tillbringa 
 splendid, praktig 
 sport, idrott 
 spring, var 
 
 spring chicken, kyckling 
 spring festival, varfest 
 sprout (noun), brodd 
 sprout (v.), gro 
 stamp, frimarke; without , 
 
 ofrankerad 
 start (v.), starta, borja, avresa
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 29' 
 
 state, stat 
 
 station, station 
 
 stay, stanna 
 
 steak, stek 
 
 steal, stjala, stjala bort 
 
 steamboat, angare, angbat 
 
 steam engine, angmaskin 
 
 step (v.), stiga; up, forth, 
 
 stiga fram 
 still, annu 
 stop, stanna 
 store, bod, butik 
 stormy, stormig 
 story, berattelse; vaning (of 
 
 a house) 
 
 strange, frammande 
 street, gata 
 street car, sparvagn 
 strength, styrka, kralt 
 strife, strid, gral 
 strike, sla 
 stroll, vandra 
 strong, stark 
 student, student 
 study (noun), studium 
 study (v.), studera 
 stupid, dum 
 style, stil 
 suburb, forstad 
 succeed, lyckas 
 successful, framgangsrik, lyc- 
 
 kad 
 
 sudden, hastig, haftig, snabb 
 suddenly, plotsligt 
 sugar, socker 
 suffer, lida 
 suit (noun), kostym 
 suit (v.), passa 
 suitable, passande 
 
 summer, sommar; last , i 
 
 somras 
 
 summon, kalla 
 sun, sol 
 
 sunbeam, solstrale 
 Sunday, sondag; last , i 
 
 son dags 
 
 superintend, b'vervaka 
 supervision, uppsikt 
 supper, kvallsmat, sup6 
 sure, saker; to be , nog, vis- 
 
 serligen 
 
 surely, sakert, sakerligen 
 surprise (noun), overraskning 
 surprise (v.), overraska 
 swallow, svalja 
 Sweden, Sverige 
 sweet, sot, alsklig 
 swing (v.), gunga 
 
 table, bord; set the , duka 
 
 tailor, skraddare 
 
 take, taga; a walk, ga ut 
 och ga, promenera; time, 
 droja; after, bras pa 
 
 talk (noun), samtal 
 
 talk (v.), tala, samtala 
 
 taste, smaka 
 
 teach, lara 
 
 teacher, larare 
 
 tear, riva 
 
 tedious, trakig 
 
 telegram, telegram 
 
 telegraph, telegrafera 
 
 tell, beratta, omtala, tala om, 
 saga at, till 
 
 telephone, telefonera 
 
 ten, tio 
 
 tennis, tennis 
 
 Swedish Grammar. 
 
 20
 
 298 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 terrible, forfarlig 
 
 test (noun), prov 
 
 than, an 
 
 thank, tacka 
 
 that, (rel.) som; (dem.) den- 
 
 ne, den dar; (conj.) att 
 theater, teater 
 then, da, sedan 
 there, dar 
 therefore, darfor 
 thereupon, darpa, sedan 
 thermometer, termometer 
 think, tanka, tycka 
 this, denna, detta 
 thought, tanke 
 thresh, troska 
 threshing floor, loge 
 throat, hals 
 through, genom 
 throw, kasta 
 thus, sa, salunda 
 ticket, biljett; - - office, bil- 
 
 jettkontor 
 
 tidy, renlig, ordentlig 
 time, tid; have , hinna 
 time (counting), gang 
 time table, tidtabell 
 timid, radd 
 tip, drickspengar 
 tired, trott 
 to-day, i dag 
 together, tillsammans 
 tolerate, tala, fordraga 
 to-morrow, i morgon 
 tongue, tunga 
 to-night, i kvall 
 too, for, ocksa 
 tooth, tand 
 toothache, tandvark 
 town, stad 
 
 torment (v.), plaga 
 
 train, tag 
 
 transform, forvandla 
 
 travel, resa, fara 
 
 travel (noun), resa 
 
 treat, behandla; besta; bemo- 
 
 ta; about, handla om 
 treatment, behandling 
 t'iee, trad 
 trick, spratt 
 
 trifle, smasak, obetydlighet 
 trip, resa, tur 
 trouble (noun), svarighet, 
 
 brak 
 
 trouble (v.), besvara, plaga 
 true, sann 
 try, forsoka 
 tuition, skolavgift 
 turn (v.) vanda (om) 
 turn (noun), tur 
 twenty, tjugu 
 twice, tva ganger 
 two, tva 
 
 U 
 
 umbrella, paraply 
 uncle, farbror 
 under, under 
 understand, forsta 
 undertake, foretaga, ataga sig 
 uneasy, orolig 
 unfavorable, ogynnsam 
 unfortunate, olycklig 
 unfortunately, olyckligtvis, 
 
 tyvarr 
 
 union, union 
 unit, (en) hel 
 unpack, packa upp 
 unpleasant, trakig 
 until, till, tills (conj.)
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 299 
 
 unusual, ovanlig 
 
 upon, pa 
 
 upset, stjalpa 
 
 usage, set! 
 
 use (noun), bruk 
 
 use (v.), bruka, anvanda 
 
 useful, nytcig 
 
 usual, vanlig; as- , som van- 
 
 ligt 
 usually, vanligen 
 
 vacant, ledig, torn 
 
 vacation, ferier; semester 
 
 valise, resvaska 
 
 valley, dal 
 
 value (noun), varde; have a 
 , galla 
 
 valuable, vardefull 
 
 variance, be at, oense 
 
 various, olika 
 
 Vasa Street, \asagatan 
 
 vegetables, gronsaker 
 
 vehement, haftig 
 
 very, mycket; with negative 
 vidare, varst 
 
 vessel, fartyg 
 
 vestibule, tambur 
 
 vicinity, narhet 
 
 vie iv, utsikt 
 
 villa, villa 
 
 village, by 
 
 violent, haftig, valdsam, sud- 
 den 
 
 visit (noun), besok 
 
 visit (v.), besoka, halsa pa 
 (hos) 
 
 voice, rost 
 
 voyage, overresa 
 
 W 
 
 ic agon, vagn 
 wait, vanta (pa) 
 waiter, uppassare, vaktmasta- 
 
 re 
 
 ivaitlng room, vantsal 
 wake up, vakna 
 walk (noun), spatsertur 
 wander, vandra 
 want (v.), onska, vilja ha; 
 
 sakna 
 
 warm, varm 
 wash (v.), tvatta 
 u-ash, washing, tvatt, tvatt- 
 
 ning 
 
 watch, fickur, klocka 
 watchmaker, urmakare 
 water (noun), vatten 
 water (v.), vattna 
 way, vag; satt, vis 
 weak, svag 
 wealthy, rik 
 weapon, vapen 
 weather, vader 
 Wednesday, onsdag 
 week, vecka 
 iveigh, vaga 
 weight, vikt, tyngd 
 weighty, viktig 
 well, val, frisk, bra; off, 
 
 valbargad; read, belast 
 wet, vat 
 wheat, vete 
 when, nar 
 where, var 
 which, (interrog.) vilkeu; 
 
 (rel.) vilken, som 
 ivhile (conj.), medan 
 while (noun), stund 
 whither, vart
 
 300 
 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 who, (interrog.) vem; (rel.) 
 
 som, vilken 
 whole, hel 
 wholesale merchant, gross- 
 
 handlare 
 
 wholly, belt och ballet 
 wife, hustru 
 wind up, draga upp 
 window, fonster 
 wine, vin 
 wing, vinge 
 winter, vinter; last winter, i 
 
 vintras 
 
 wipe, torka; off, torka av 
 wise, klok 
 
 wish (noun), onskan 
 wish (v.), 6'nska 
 with, hos, meet 
 within, inom, innanfor 
 without, utan 
 
 wonder (noun), under 
 wonder (v.), undra 
 wonderful, underbar 
 word, ord 
 
 work (noun), arbete; verk 
 work (v.), arbeta 
 ivorkingman, arbetare 
 world, varld 
 worn out, utsliten 
 worried, orolig 
 worth (adj.), vard 
 write, skriva 
 
 Y 
 
 year, ar 
 
 yell (v.), skrika 
 yellow, gul 
 yes, ja, jo 
 yesterday, i gar 
 yet, an, annu; anda 
 you, du, ni
 
 CONDENSED INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 The reference is to sections. In general only the first of successive sections 
 on the same topic is indicated. 
 
 Accentuation, 33. 
 
 Accent-stress, simple words, 34 ; com- 
 pounds, 35 ; foreign, 38. 
 
 Accent, musical, 39. 
 
 Address, see Pronouns ; of letter, 344. 
 
 Adjectives: declension, 109; indefi- 
 nite, 110 ; use of indefinite declen- 
 sion, 113 ; definite, 122 ; use of, 
 124 ; pronominal, see demonstra- 
 tive, interrogative, etc. ; compared, 
 303. 
 
 Adverbs: form, 317, 364; position, 
 179 ; compared, 318. 
 
 Alphabet, 1. 
 
 Apostrophe, 130, a. 
 
 Articles, 62; definite, 68; postposi- 
 tive, 69, 70, 71, 79 ; generic and ab- 
 stract, 74 ; distributive, 338 ; syn- 
 tax, app. ; prepositive, 73 ; use of, 
 126 ; indefinite, 63 ; syntax, 64 and 
 app. 
 
 Auxiliaries: hava, 65, 96; tiara, 66, 
 96 ; skola, 143 ; bliva, 188 ; varda, 
 190 ; modal, see modal auxiliaries ; 
 omission of, 299. 
 
 Capital letters, 45. 
 
 Cardinal numbers, 324 ; remarks on 
 325 ; formations from, 339. 
 
 Cases, 129 ; syntax of, 131. 
 
 Causative, lata, 262. 
 
 Comparison, adjective, 303 ; by auxil- 
 iary, 308 ; of equality, 312 ; abso- 
 lute, 315 ; adverbs, 318. 
 
 Compound verbs, 204. 
 
 Concord, gender, 56 ; adjectives, 116 ; 
 sing, for plur. in verbs, 67, c. 
 
 Conjugation: 87, 97, 136, 143, 152, 
 158, 180, 188. 
 
 Conjunctions, coordinating, 371 ; gen- 
 eral connectives, 372 ; adverbial 
 conjunctions, 374 ; subordinating, 
 377. 
 
 Date, expressions of, 341. 
 Declension, of nouns, 76 ; first, 77 ; 
 
 second, 80 ; third, 83 ; fourth, 105 ; 
 
 fifth, 118; irregularities, 127 and 
 
 app. ; foreign, 127, g ; proper, 128 ; 
 
 v* adjectives, see adjectives ; of 
 
 pronouns, see pronouns. 
 Demonstratives, 195 ; remarks on, 
 
 200 ; uses of, 201. 
 Dependent clauses, word order after, 
 
 104, 2 ; omission of the auxiliary 
 
 in, 299. 
 
 Deponent verbs, 194. 
 Double forms, in nouns, app. 
 
 Foreign words, pronunciation of, 18, 4, 
 note ; 21, 1 ; 22, note, 23, note ; ac- 
 centuation of, 38 ; nouns, 127, g. 
 
 Future tenses: form, 143 ; use of 
 294 ; present used for future, 290 ; 
 expresison of pure futurity, 296. 
 
 Gender, 55. 
 
 Genitive, 132 ; uses of, 133 ; with 
 
 nouns of measure, 134 ; objective, 
 
 135. 
 
 Imperative, 144 ; substitutes, 147. 
 
 Imperfect, 291. 
 
 Impersonal passive, 187, 243. 
 
 Impersonal verbs, 241. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns and adjectives, 
 265 ; pronouns only, 265 ; pronouns 
 and adjectives, 270. 
 
 Infinitive, 300; to express purpose, 
 165, 2 ; att omitted, 300 ; preposi- 
 tions with infinitive, 302. 
 
 Inseparable prefixes, 205. 
 
 Interjections, 381, 
 
 Interrogatives, 214 ; remarks, 216. 
 
 Measure, nouns of, 134, 338. 
 Modal verbs, forms, 251 ; uses of, 
 252 ; senses of, 255.
 
 302 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Negatives, position, 179. 
 
 Nominative case, 131, 130, c, 134. 
 
 Nouns, declension, 76 : first, 77 ; sec- 
 ond, 80 ; third, 83 ; fourth, 105 ; 
 fifth, 118 ; irregularities, 127 and 
 app. ; gender, 55 ; foreign, 127, g ; 
 compound, 35; of measure, 134, 
 338 ; verbal, 230. 
 
 Number, singular of verbs for English 
 plural, 67, c. 
 
 Numerals, cardinal, 324 ; 325 ; ordinal, 
 324, 331 ; formations from, 339. 
 
 Omission, of auxiliary in dependent 
 clauses, 299 ; of prepositive definite 
 article, 126, 2. 
 
 Order of words, of verb (normal, in- 
 verted), 104, 1, 2; questions, 104, 
 2 ; adverbs, 179 ; object with vari- 
 able verb-compounds, 210 ; nagon- 
 ting, ingenting, 268, 2. 
 
 Paradigms, see nouns, adjectives, etc. 
 
 Participle, present, 226; past, 233: 
 past participle and supine, 240. 
 
 Passive, 180 ; in -s, 181 ; with auxili- 
 aries fbliva, varda, vara) ; compar- 
 ison of passives in -s and with 
 bliva, 192 ; agent with passive, 183 ; 
 substitute for, 184 ; apparent or 
 false passive, 185 ; idiomatic mean- 
 ings, 186 ; impersonal, 187. 
 
 Past tense, 291. 
 
 Perfect tense, form, 94, 6 ; use, 293. 
 
 Personal, names, 128, 130, a ; pro- 
 nouns, 139. 
 
 Possessives, 172 ; reflexive possessive 
 sin, 174; substitute for, 178. 
 
 Prefixes, inseparable, 204 ; variable, 
 207 ; position of object, 210 ; ac- 
 cent, 211; for and fore, 211, 1. 
 
 Prepositions, 345 ; uses, 348 ; 351 ; 
 357, 360. 
 
 Present tense, 290. 
 
 Principal parts, of strong and ir- 
 regular verbs, app. 
 
 Pronominal adjectives, see demonstra- 
 tives, indefinite, etc. 
 
 Pronouns, personal, 139 ; in address, 
 67, a, b ; use of title instead, 142 ; 
 
 reflexive, 150, intensified, 248, note; 
 'possessive, 172 ; demonstrative, 195 ; 
 
 interrogative, 214 ; relative, 219 ; 
 
 reciprocal, 250 ; indefinite, 265. 
 Proper nouns, 128. 
 Pronunciation, 2 42. 
 Punctuation, 50. 
 
 Quantity, 2 ; long m and n, 3, note. 
 
 lieciprocal, pronoun, 250 ; reciprocal 
 sense of the passive, 186, a. 
 
 Relatives, 219 ; remarks 222 ; omis- 
 sion of, 224. 
 
 Separable prefixes, 207. 
 
 Subjunctive, 158 ; uses of, 163 ; wish. 
 164 ; purpose, 165 ; concession, 166 ; 
 potential, 167 ; (condition) unreal, 
 171. 
 
 Supine, 91. 
 
 Superlative, see Comparison ; distrib- 
 utive, 316 ; absolute, 315. 
 
 Syllabication, 51 ; compound words, 
 54. 
 
 Tenses (forms), sec Paradigms; 
 (uses), present, 290; imperfect, 
 291 ; perfect, 293 ; future, 294 ; in 
 unreal conditions, 171 ; progressive-. 
 93 ; 290, note ; 292, note ; emphat- 
 ic, 93. 
 
 Time of day, 336; date, 335, 341. 
 
 Umlaut, 14. 
 
 Verbs, weak, 88 ; strong, 89 ; first 
 conjugation, 90 ; second conjuga- 
 tion, 97 ; third conjugation, 136 ; 
 fourth conjugation, 152 ; irregular 
 verbs, 168 ; passive, 180 ; imperson- 
 al, 241 ; reflexive, 245 ; modal, 251 : 
 number, 67, c ; list of principal 
 parts, strong and irregular verbs, 
 app. 
 
 Verbal nouns, 230. 
 
 Vowels, quantity, 2 ; hard and soft, 
 13 ; modification, 14. 
 
 Weak verbs, 88. 
 
 Weight, nouns of, 134, 338.
 
 SWEDISH NATIONAL 
 SONGS
 
 Dane liksom askan, broder. 
 
 Marcia. 
 f 
 
 J. H. STUNZ. 
 
 Zgl.-J- j Hi '^' " * 
 
 Da-ne lik sum as-kan, bro-der, hogt var fosterlandaka sang! 
 
 rt 
 
 
 U -*- -H TT 
 
 b p p " 
 
 Pul-sen briuner, hjUrtat gloder; marsch framat annu en gang! 
 
 i. > , * * 
 
 rte& 
 
 afcfc 
 
 H f 
 
 +-4 
 
 .- 
 
 8ang-en ad- la kans-lor fo - der, hjar-tatanyckelhetersang. 
 
 gff . . L L'STT 
 
 - Di) i i " I I T g B " 
 
 rp-T. . 
 
 Sangen ad-la kanslor foder, 
 
 Ma vi da i to - ner 
 
 -pa. 
 
 mm 
 
 rrTTTTTJ 
 
 !,_,_! -L C 
 
 Ma vi da 
 
 to - ner svii - - ra 
 
 Ma vi da, i to - uer
 
 sva 
 
 ra tro-hets-e - den hand i hand; 
 
 ,3==:toi4g 
 
 tro-hets-e - den hand i 
 
 sva - - ra tro-hets - e - den hand i 
 
 hand; 
 hand; 
 
 ~l F 1 1 f 
 
 it 
 
 t> t t 
 
 0" 
 
 v \ p 
 
 liv och blod for Sver-ges a - ra, hell ! vart dy - ra fos - ter- 
 
 AiiMiJ. ^:\:\ 
 
 r- f .r P f* 
 ^^ira^a^ L . r 
 
 ^=t 
 
 /#f-H 4- r 
 
 1 ii J J 
 
 ! * ^ 
 
 ^^ ~ /^ J~* 
 
 -r- 
 
 ~r ^ 
 
 land! Liv och blod for Sver-ges 
 Liv och blod 
 
 a - ra, 
 
 J 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 
 J. J * f 
 
 9"*fffr "~ *' * J^ b B 
 
 I 1 ' i ^ 
 
 ? 
 
 "^ ^ /y ~ fc ~ ~ 
 
 
 
 Liv och blod 
 
 ri- 
 
 I 
 
 -*-*- 
 
 b b 
 
 sva - ra trog-na bro-der hand i hand! Ma vi hand! 
 
 _^ 
 
 ^~- 
 
 Dine liksom Sskan, broder 2. 
 
 J. JOLIB, efter GRUNDTVIG.
 
 Dalkarlasang. 
 
 Marsch. 
 
 0. LlNDBLAD. 
 
 ^fc-rriiizi^ rr 
 
 
 H 
 
 P 
 
 Jag vet ett land langt upp 
 
 h 
 
 i h6 - ga nord, ej 
 
 _fc_h b 
 
 
 
 - n 
 
 mm 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 s 
 
 " * * i 
 
 ' 
 
 ZZS-OZIfi L m * * 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i r H 
 
 ^ 
 
 2 
 
 4 ! 
 
 
 U 1 P 
 
 -j 
 
 -h 
 
 r 
 
 
 jf'\)' K j "1 r ^ H 
 
 3= 
 
 E tr 
 
 -l J 
 
 vZC 
 
 >- **-^S -T 9 -* 1 , I-!-*- 1 " 
 
 -br5 
 
 J- 5H 
 
 varmt och rikt som so-derns 12n-der, men h jar-tan klap-pa 
 f ^ -J-- J 5 f ----- *-.*- J ^ + + 
 
 f\* H n Ui 
 
 
 
 >A 
 
 
 
 F i* 
 
 
 n 
 
 ( * 
 
 r r 
 
 sQjijE * p r 
 
 
 ) y 
 
 
 
 ri r i J 
 
 
 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 1 ! t-5 
 
 
 
 
 
 _0_, J2 ^ s K K 1 
 
 
 P: 
 
 hi h 
 
 S K, 
 
 yf U B 
 
 
 
 -^ P 
 
 H 
 
 EX * _i 
 
 a 
 
 
 5^ -m m 
 
 * * -m- 
 
 VVJJ 1^.^^ g ' 
 
 n 
 
 , 
 
 3 m hm- 
 
 
 dar for fos-ter-jord,och man-d( 
 
 (-1-: 
 
 >mbc 
 
 =? ; 
 
 >r,ja, 
 
 * 
 
 man - dom bor pa 
 2 / ^~ v> * t a 
 
 a*, u. L_ **. p 
 
 
 
 
 l l 1 
 
 
 j * 
 
 ^/ ^ i9 
 
 * F 
 
 >^ H n ki M ^ 
 
 (1_ 
 
 n 
 
 " ' . 
 
 5 u 
 
 P U 1 v V s - - -\ v 
 
 
 * 
 
 ) j 
 
 ^ p 1 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 ,V i ^| J '1 J 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 "5 h S 
 
 
 (^y^ J ^ * ^\j 5 "^ 
 
 =1= 
 
 3: 
 
 i Li . ^ L 
 
 --** 
 
 Sil - jans gro - na stran - der; 
 
 -fl* A. _ 
 
 och 
 
 v q* ; n c 
 
 sko-gar su-sa 
 
 *- f- -P r 
 
 ^1 
 dar i 
 
 ~\ U ^ * M A 
 
 
 iijj-^-ii 
 TJ l - 
 
 P3--B 
 
 W j 
 
 PT r i D -i R- ' n 
 
 U U 
 
 H-^- 
 
 z 3
 
 dys -ter prakt, ocli ill - var bru -sa diir fran trakt till trakt. 
 : j -*:_ -* --.-*- *-. -*- -Jn -t- --. -- -J- 
 
 a~~; " " r 
 
 !^r_rj 
 
 4-^L 
 
 t=^ 
 
 :^: 
 
 ^t^_f5ZR 
 
 lEiiEH 
 
 
 Ett har - ligt land, ett bar - ligt land, I go - de da - la- 
 
 "f f"f .r > :r 
 
 p T T i 
 
 decrease. 
 
 X h _| H 
 
 D 
 
 K s 
 
 
 
 
 Ifh 1" m m 
 
 -^^- 
 
 , R ^ 
 
 
 
 
 132 9 J 
 
 
 J - i 
 
 ! 
 
 ~ . .j. _j. _j 
 
 man, I go - de da - la-mftn! Och vem det 
 
 
 1 
 
 -- x 
 
 
 I 1 
 
 l 
 
 \ * K A A 
 
 
 ^ m P r 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 =^1i 
 
 
 - 1 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 I go - de da 
 
 la - mfln! Och vem det 
 
 ^fc 
 
 / 
 
 
 . -*~' 
 
 landet en gang sett, ban langtar dit,langtar dit i- gen. 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 = 
 
 r 
 
 DalkarlasSne 2. 
 
 G. NYBI.AEUS.
 
 Mitt hemlands dal. 
 
 Andante. 
 mf 
 
 PFBIL. 
 
 5ita 
 
 1. Var dof - tar en blom - ma sa skon 
 
 2. Var tin - nes en him - mel 
 
 (sa skon), 
 (sa bla), 
 
 var sjung - er en fa - gel sa nojd 
 var stra - lar vftl so - len sa varm 
 
 nojd), 
 varm), 
 
 fc4 
 
 * 
 
 wm 
 
 ^ 
 
 y #11 
 
 
 K 
 
 -. 
 
 
 
 X. 
 
 
 IL n 
 
 
 E * 1 i m 
 
 
 
 irh " < 
 
 
 f- jj-iij * 
 
 i 
 
 I hf 
 
 ts 
 
 
 V/ 
 
 
 . ##i i 
 
 
 
 tf s tt 
 
 
 var sor - lar en kal - la sa ren (sa 
 
 ren), 
 
 var kSn - de ditt hjSr - ta du sla (du 
 
 sla) 
 
 ^ 
 
 .... ^ A ^. ^ ^ j ^4t .*. 
 
 f\'^L 
 
 
 
 
 . E 
 
 
 ti 
 
 z^" 5 ^; * 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^* 1 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 r * 1 
 
 
 sil klar ned fran klip - pi - ga hojd (fran hojd), 
 sa friskt i din sval - Ian - de barm (din barm), 
 
 ^ T- . 
 
 ^- 
 
 i
 
 rit. 
 
 -j&f ft 1 
 
 
 ***-*- 
 
 
 g- 
 
 ^- 4 9^ \ 
 
 $2 4 M f ' 
 
 var flak - tar 
 var &u - sar 
 
 -* r ^' ^ 
 
 val vin - den s& mild och sval 
 sa ljuvt det i sko - gens sal 
 
 -j : ^ * ^ ^ * 
 
 
 
 | , 
 
 
 
 
 
 i **^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 1 
 
 
 -^ "Tj 
 
 
 
 
 
 SOLO. Alt. el. Bas. 
 
 n# mj ^ 
 
 
 ^v^tf 
 
 
 -3) 
 
 -H- 
 
 -\ f-j- J ; * h d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 som i min dal, som i mitt hem-lands dal, 
 
 \f T^^ 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 Jf 
 
 
 3 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 s 1 
 
 fn\ TI i 
 
 
 -1 ^ I 
 
 11 - * * ^ * 1 
 
 ^=1 
 
 som i min dal, som i min dal, 
 
 
 
 
 
 U. g 
 
 
 
 - S * 
 
 >* N* 
 
 
 = ft h 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 J ^J J ^ 1 -f 
 
 
 [ 
 
 1 
 
 
 \ 
 <^ / -5^ 
 
 
 I/ Tr^ ^^^ 
 
 .^-^ 
 
 1 ^ s 
 
 ii 
 
 X" ^'jl 
 
 -4- 
 
 -& F H -^ R M^ ^- -H S-H 
 
 icp Tl j 
 
 
 
 
 
 v 
 
 ~^-H 
 
 ? 
 
 som i min 
 
 -*- * 
 
 dal, som i mitt hem-lands dal 
 
 < > f /T\ 
 
 -^ 1 i 1 S K Nil 
 
 
 
 il X ! 
 
 
 - -i 
 
 H ^ 1 
 
 3^ 
 
 (fl) ** 1 
 
 
 -^ i 
 
 
 - -t 
 
 EErtE! S ^ **- -J 
 
 som i min 
 
 dal, som i mitt hem-lands dal? 
 
 spa 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 r ' i 
 
 II 
 
 ^tftt ^ 
 
 1 
 
 -P X * 
 
 
 
 
 =^H 
 
 ^f-P 
 
 
 H ^h 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ 3 ^-^ ^ -r- 
 
 .1 i 
 
 Mitt hemlands dal 2.
 
 Du gaxnla, du fria. 
 
 Andante maestoso. 
 mf 
 
 Folkmelodi fran Norrland. 
 
 
 f* 1 -i-PU" fr-ft 
 
 * J ' i 3 f= 
 
 3E* 
 
 1. Du gam - la, du fri - a, du fjiill-ho-ga Nord,du tys - ta, du 
 
 2. Du tro -nar pa min-nenf ran forn-sto ra-dar, da a - ratditt 
 
 i^t^fefe! 
 
 x 31 n_a NL 
 
 i i ^ ' J 
 
 n P 
 
 fn\ <5 _P " ji 
 
 Pa a * 
 
 
 VJ/ 1 * L /ou 
 
 1 |; 1 *, m f. 
 
 u# 
 
 * i " >^g| 
 
 gliid - je - ri - ka, sko 
 namnflogo - \er jor 
 
 , - J 5 - J^ 
 
 - r r*^ 
 
 - na! Jag hal - sar dig, vS 
 - den; jag vet, att du iir 
 
 ui 
 
 nas-te 
 och du . 
 
 rv* S i ^ , 
 
 m > I i f f f 
 
 i 
 
 r-* * 
 
 i ;* JL 
 
 
 ~s .-, ,j n 
 
 'UP ffl* I* 
 
 
 
 land up-pajord,dinsol,dinhim-mel,di-na;ing-dergr6 - na! 
 blir vad du var, ack, jag vill le va, jag vill do i Nor - den! 
 
 
 "P~ 
 
 ten. 
 
 
 Ja, jag vill le - va, jag vill do i Nor - den! 
 
 t-^Lr- 
 
 > 
 
 1 
 
 n n 3 
 
 - m -f- -*- 5 
 
 ^= a5 
 
 S 
 
 K. DYBECK
 
 Fjariln vingad syns pa Haga. 
 
 C. M. BELLMAN. 
 
 > 
 
 W l 1) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' ^ 
 
 m d m *m 
 
 -^ iM 
 
 C 
 
 \ PI , \ ' r 
 
 ) 1 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 m m m 
 
 R 1 
 
 ^. 
 
 4 
 
 Ll 
 
 
 
 
 OT 
 
 4 1 
 
 
 
 m m m 
 
 
 V '^f-4--4--4--4--4--4- 
 
 1. Fjft-riln ving-ad syns pa Haga mellan dimmors frost och dun 
 2. Ha-ga, i dittsko-te ro-jes gra-sets brodd och gro-na plan. 
 
 . . - - - - +--**- *?- -9- -+-&- 
 
 
 90 
 
 i i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 r 
 
 * L 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 \>\-L I) L- 
 
 k 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 lJ 
 
 E 
 
 t r ^* 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 N 
 
 L 1 1 j u . 
 
 jj 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 . 
 
 \ft 1 
 
 C 
 
 "\ J n 
 
 1 i 
 
 
 
 l 
 
 
 ^v ' 
 
 
 
 (5J *" 1 
 
 
 ) 4 y 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 ^4 
 
 . 
 
 - - Xu f. 
 
 *. 
 
 V b ' 
 
 sig sitt g 
 Stolt i c 
 
 4- -4- -4- 
 
 ro-na akjul 
 li - na rann-! 
 
 4- -4- -4- | j w {{* ' 
 
 Jl - la - ga och i blom-man sin pau 
 ar ho-jes, gung-an-de, den vi - ta 
 
 -lun. 
 svan. 
 
 O 
 
 ' 
 
 
 z s 
 
 < 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 i r 
 
 w P 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 ^i 
 
 i J 
 
 
 v 1 
 
 s 
 
 b ; ) u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * u 
 
 gj 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 , t r , 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 \ R. 
 
 ' 
 
 1 
 
 T\ ' \*T 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 ' 
 
 i | 1 ; D 
 
 ' _J 1 
 
 J J yl 
 
 tfr * 1 
 
 
 -. 
 
 
 
 
 II \ V 
 
 fe 
 
 ) * -h 
 
 
 :S 
 
 
 
 
 
 -0-^ 
 
 -tf- 
 
 J_ _ 
 
 * P 1 
 
 . 
 
 TI Tl 
 
 Mins - ta krak i karr och sy ra, nyss av 
 Langst ur skogens gle-sa kam-rar ho - ras 
 
 -ff-4--t--*-+-+-.t-+- m + 
 
 so - lens var-ma vackt, 
 ta - ta a - ter-skall 
 
 f- t*- -4- f - -- 
 
 s 
 
 i W 
 
 m lii 
 
 i 
 
 
 HtU 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 - i 
 
 \ b 
 
 * > 
 
 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 U 
 
 PZCSEI 
 
 s 
 
 n * U 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 r 
 
 x L- 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 c 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i > 
 
 
 
 L r 
 
 
 -B i 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 . -I 
 
 
 j 
 
 ^-fc Sj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N fl 
 
 
 - n u 
 
 \* 1 1 
 
 1 
 
 \ p ! ; h 
 
 1 '1 
 
 i 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 f: 
 
 
 ^^3 
 
 7 * \' 
 
 ! 1 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 H 9 
 
 _ 
 
 9 m fl i.4 2 
 
 till en ny hog-tid - lig y - ra el 
 an fran den gra-ni -ten hamrar, an 
 
 a . P N 1 ** J-i-rg-t-tf 
 
 W R* r 
 
 - das vid se - fi - rens flakt. 
 fran yx' i bjork och tall. 
 
 
 - \> b ff H 
 
 i- 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 - ^f.^4 F- - 
 
 P^* 2 p 
 
 :iz*i| 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 . l^ pj_ 
 
 1 |
 
 Maestoso. 
 
 F. PACIDS. 
 
 i> p- & ' : 
 
 1. Vartland,vartland,vartfos-ter-land,ljudhogt,ody-raord! Ej 
 
 2. Vi al-ska va-ra strom-mars brusoch va-ra backarssprang,den 
 
 3. Din blom-ning,sluten an i knopp,skall mognaur sitttvang;ae, 
 
 
 /z 
 
 dim. 
 
 dim. 
 
 P ' P 
 
 lyftsenh(3jdmothimlensrand,ejsauksendal,ejskolJ8eustrand,mer 
 
 mor-ka sko-gens dyst ra sus, varstjarDenatt,vart8ommarljus, allt, 
 urvar karlek skall gaopp ditt ljns,din glans,din frojd,ditthopp,och 
 
 -r* 
 
 fr^i 
 
 rt<. 
 
 3& 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 -7- 
 
 als - kad an var bygd i nord, 
 allt, vad harsom syn, som sang 
 hogre klinga skall en gang 
 
 r> 
 
 an va-ra fit ders jord. 
 v&rt hjarta rort en gang, 
 var fosterlandska sting. 
 
 mer alskad an var bygd, an va-ra fii-ders jord. 
 
 allt, allt, vad bar som syn, vart hjarta rort en gang. 
 
 och hogre klinga skall var fosterlandska sang. 
 
 J. L. Rl'XEBERG.
 
 Mandom, mod och morska man. 
 
 Allegretto. Folkmarsch fran Orsa i Dalarne. 
 
 Ill 
 
 r\ 
 
 7 r P n 
 
 (^ 
 
 ^ ^ n ^ N . 
 
 
 
 V i o 
 
 5 n m 
 
 
 Si 
 
 
 fl _P J n 
 
 
 5 
 
 K, 
 
 
 yr Yj^ _i 
 
 
 * 
 
 Zm , 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 ft\ - 1 f 
 
 m * * 
 
 
 9 1 
 
 
 t 
 
 f 
 
 
 s i 
 
 fr 
 
 \>\) H- i 
 
 
 f \ 
 
 
 . 9 I 
 
 1 
 
 
 t^ p p- 
 1 j Mandom, mod och mors-ka man finns i gam-la Sver-ge an, 
 ' { To-ner an fran for - na dar lju - da dar i skog och dal, 
 
 +- -- -f- -P- -f- > - -- J> 1- -t - -F- V 5 -- -F- 
 
 o* o 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 J*i 3 
 
 i 
 
 
 M 
 
 P P P I 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 ? Ss 
 
 R PW 
 
 
 ^ F 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 i ^_ 
 
 
 ? 
 
 
 kraft i arm och mod i barm, ungdomsvarm i bardalarm. 
 vil - da som en storm pa hav, mil-da som en suck vid grav. 
 
 == 
 
 BS=gt. 
 
 *& 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 -99- 
 
 P P 
 
 -0- -0- 
 
 P P 
 
 ( 0- gon bla da och da le i bloms-ter-da-lar dar! 
 / Lyss-nen da, van-ner, pi, hemlandsk hund-ra-a-rig sSng! 
 
 T-fr 
 
 i 
 
 f 
 
 I 
 
 -I--i-^|Jr l 
 
 d*" fs " ^ 
 
 Nord, du jor- dens jat - te - lem,Nord,dumildahjartanshem! 
 Lyss-nen, als- ken, la- renden,sjungen,sjungdensjalvase'n! 
 
 pn 
 
 -3- 
 
 i=c^: 
 
 = 
 
 $= 
 
 R. DYBECK.
 
 Dalmarscti. 
 
 Hurtigt. M. M. J = 100. 
 
 IVAR WlD^BN. 
 
 AIT. af toQsattaren. 
 
 yrty/tr 
 
 _ 
 
 -I 
 
 Mar-schen gar till Tu - na pa hed och bac-kar bru - na, 
 
 f. \ 1 4- + 1 + i4 -T* 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 I 
 
 1 I -*\ 
 
 ^-Mk . 
 
 H 1 1 
 
 I | ! 1_ 
 
 ''1 ' ' 1 
 
 Mar-schen ar 
 
 -Q A h- 
 
 , | ; |/// 
 
 h - 
 
 v L V '^ u 
 
 
 
 
 _^i j 
 
 -j jj 
 
 "SI ~lj s 
 
 vO W i 
 
 
 ' J 2 
 
 
 -*ri m 
 
 mar-schen gar till Mo - ra och her - gen de bla. Med 
 
 r\* K i 
 
 - 
 
 
 z 
 
 
 & m \ \ 
 
 )'\ v \ o 
 
 
 
 fir' 
 
 
 -ml 
 
 S b 
 
 . L 
 
 
 1 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 m f 
 
 *Z^ W 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 P i 
 
 
 x b 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 flsz 
 
 
 
 
 EZJ 1 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 Ed 
 
 
 -f -0- <5> f *T 
 
 r -w rTf i r i 
 
 hac-ka och med spa - de vi dra-ga hem sa gla - de till 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 -* . _--!--- 
 
 f\ U 9 
 
 
 P--P 
 
 -P ' ^ F- 
 
 hv-T F 
 
 -^ \) V f * 
 
 --^rf-t-r- 
 
 -^ i h 
 
 1 J J 
 
 i 
 
 h- 1 T h~ 
 
 
 sko - gar - na de sto - ra och kul - lor - na de sma. 
 P t?P . ~\*' P ,. P 
 
 t 
 tto 
 
 m 
 
 P-
 
 Lifligore. f 
 
 PM-^^ 
 
 mf 
 
 ~f =f= f^f^ 
 
 mf 
 
 Hur latt det ar att vand-ra, I bro-der, med var-and-ra, nar 
 
 L. 
 
 -0 - 
 
 m 
 
 at 
 
 ff 
 
 >r c 
 
 j B-T-OT a 
 
 (flj J J J I J Z I ^**l w |.H>j "^ 
 
 
 ^11 
 
 slan - tar - na i 
 
 * : f r J 
 
 1 F 
 flc - kan ala takt mot byx-ana skinn! Hur 
 
 f\* h - 
 
 ^ r i y 
 
 J-i P P 
 
 m I eZ3E2 
 
 Z-& * 
 
 - P r b F C? r. 
 
 
 * 1 
 
 1 p 1 
 
 h - ' ' 
 
 i/ i ' 
 
 \ 
 
 4 H fs 
 
 J J 1 1 
 
 C>^ ah -P J- 
 
 - -v* 3 3 S -^ * 1 - -^1 1 
 
 W i : $_ _*-^& * ^- L j. '-g j. i ' 
 
 kla - ri-net-ten la - ter, da spel-man van-der a - termed 
 
 X" ' ' ~^N X" ' ""~N 
 
 ^X L ^ -.j ^ -^ 
 
 
 ! . [7 ^ ^^ | ,^ 
 
 r i 
 
 ^^ tt i 
 
 F. ^ ^ 
 
 17 1 1 
 
 P 1 i ii 
 
 la - la - la, 
 
 r i 
 
 tra - la - la, la - la - la, tra - la - la, 
 
 
 I/ ^ 
 
 I i 
 
 JVL n >. 
 
 t \ \ -^ ^^ ^1 
 
 fn\ " P^ 
 
 n * m -UsJ 
 
 ^^ M 
 
 HZZZ Jl* ^ 
 
 i: -^ -* 
 
 brudgumaskank al 
 
 / flickan och brollopaluat i sinn! 
 
 
 /^ 
 
 *\ * hi AX^ A ^v 
 
 
 1 i [7 "--^ .^-^ 
 
 ^ p ^- o 'vpx^ si i 
 
 Z p i 1 
 
 -*-*-- 1 1 --<9- -*&-<&- -S 1 -^-! 
 
 C L_^ 1 ^ n _-_ ^^ , TrrLf _ rn 
 
 la la - la, tra-la-la, la - la - la, tra-la-la,tra-la-la, 
 Dalmarsch 2.
 
 a tempo. 
 
 A K 
 
 Jr U 1 
 
 _ i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 l() 1 
 
 -4 
 
 
 ^)Z. 1 -I. J- L 
 
 ft T 
 I bergs-lags-man pa vre ten, som stra 
 
 f)l \) | 1 [ 1- 
 
 r r ' 
 
 ven och ar- 
 
 r U 
 
 1? 1 
 _ ^ i 
 
 n K 
 
 = -S= 
 
 / I bergs-lags-man, 
 
 ^ \ h 1 1 1 1 
 
 1 
 
 / , P 
 
 p-d L J -J 
 
 )' , j 
 
 C) 
 
 S -I *-* * * fit 1 4 ^ > 
 
 i M -i 1 M 1 1 m 1 m- 
 
 -s-fc-i > - 1 
 
 be - ten, gan med dit upp till Sil - jan i da-la-mar-schens 
 
 - -P- * *: J> - 
 
 fV h 
 
 - * f? 1 B 
 
 
 
 -s'\? " L 
 
 tump i , ' p 
 
 * L 1 C 
 
 
 U kj 
 
 B 1 
 
 t/ [ 
 
 r i r 
 
 , 
 
 
 i i i 
 
 p 
 
 (/ L? 
 
 
 
 Jf H ^^1 
 
 ^* 
 
 
 
 /^\ " 
 
 
 
 VK.!/ f^ 
 
 ^ >> 
 
 
 / * T f r r 
 
 takt! Gan med ocb ska-den Ian- den, dar kyr-kor-na pa 
 . __i _fi*- ^ 2 
 
 rx. L, 2 
 
 F r P i r 
 
 ^ F 
 
 ^t^TV^ v 
 
 
 i 
 
 Z ^ * 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 | 
 
 b 
 
 1 
 
 r = 
 
 
 . 1 
 
 jr 
 
 j^ b ~~ 
 
 S p Ui L. j ^ 
 
 ' fl 
 
 ^>^- 
 
 ^Hs^ d. * a^l- ^g *^f - --r-< 
 
 ( i ^^' ~si I 
 
 i/,C? ^ t| > j^ | J.HJ__ 
 
 stran - den sta glim-man-de som lil-jan u - ti sin vi -ta prakt! 
 
 
 ^ i j 
 
 rt-r-i i 
 
 Dalmarsch 8.
 
 Lifligore. f 
 
 m f 
 
 m=f 
 
 T 
 
 Hur latt del &r att vand-ra, I bro-der, med var-and-ra, niir 
 
 H 
 * * 
 
 ,-M z 
 
 t ir 
 
 
 J J |j. I' j fP^ 
 
 m 5 *1 m H*/^ 
 
 * * L r * ^s^ 
 
 slan-tar-na i fie- kan sla takt mot byx-ans skinn! Hur 
 
 ^ 
 
 H 
 
 ^^ : 
 
 j. 
 
 * it -*- I * 
 
 kla - ri-net-ten la - ter, da spel-man vSn-der a - termed 
 
 :i2: 
 
 la - la - la, tra-la-la, la - la - la, tra-la-la, 
 dim. e rit. -== n== 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^&r T 
 
 brudgumsskank at flickan och brollopslust i sinn! 
 
 >-- 
 
 la - la - la, tra-la-la, la - la - la, tra-la-la,tra-la-la, 
 Dalmarsch 4. E. A. KARLFELDT.
 
 Svenska kungssangen. 
 
 Maestoso, mf 
 
 OTTO LINDKLAD. 
 
 Ur svens-ka h jar-tans djup en gang en samfalld och en 
 
 1 
 
 -. 
 
 /K r ^ m 
 
 i-r^f 
 
 h^^ 1 
 
 
 
 P^-H 
 
 en-kel sang, som gar till kung-en fram! Var ho-nom tro-fast 
 
 i ' f 8 
 
 ~ ~ _, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 npoztzp p 
 
 , m 
 
 e\ |t 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ff 1 ^ 
 
 
 ex . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 J *l J 
 
 I >. 
 
 
 frv\ IT * * fl 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 sz J 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 tr -*- * -5-1 J- ^: 
 
 och bans att, gor kro - nan pa hans hjas - sa latt, och 
 
 n> "T" -> *- ' 
 
 
 ^^^ \- 
 
 S 3 
 
 
 3i5>' ' :; b 1 
 
 -1--- * 
 
 P-s ! ^ w- 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 ^=S ^ J 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 all din tro till ho-nom salt, du folk av frej - dad stam. 
 
 * try; 
 
 a r 
 
 K. V. A. STRASDBKRG.
 
 Varmiands-visan. 
 
 
 
 Folkmeiodi. 
 
 C^. h P*! h h 
 
 J 
 
 1 *> 1 h. 
 
 K f) ^ X J (* * J J 
 
 5 
 
 f\ 
 
 33 FS fe 
 
 M- -- --i jfM- 
 
 
 V 
 
 '4 M_P ,," * 
 
 -f- -Jy - -, 0- 
 
 *j f 
 
 ~\ 
 
 ig:' t* P- ^ P| 
 
 P 
 
 ( Ack Var-me-land du, sko - na, du bar - li - ga land, du . 
 \ Och komme jag an mitt i det for-lo - va -de land, till 
 
 Aj5 . >- -F^V -- --. -^- 
 
 o * 
 
 m L. \ f 
 
 
 
 C55HQ * P 
 
 ft. * ^r F 
 
 f r 
 
 2 
 
 \*A r .\ 
 
 GF u L) CF 
 
 n 
 
 
 '-+ ^ rj 
 
 w ^ K V !) T\ 1 1 J L) 
 
 1 V 
 
 3 
 
 K 
 N h.' 
 
 P ^ J 
 
 
 A 
 
 L ^ k. 
 
 5 S.I ,^ 
 
 ;N 
 
 A 
 
 r& J +^- 
 
 u , RI rfl i -t n :| h - 
 
 ) j 
 
 
 >- * -, 
 
 *i '4 I..J. i M-i- 
 
 * i 
 
 kro - na bland 8ve-a ri - kes Ian - der! . . \ -, ,.. ,.,, . 
 Varmland jag andock a - ter - van - der! . . ^ 
 
 
 F C 
 
 S F IF 
 
 - 
 
 
 i r b 
 
 * * i 1 *r 
 
 
 ~^r 
 
 b P ^ 
 
 I * 
 
 ) b 
 
 
 
 D ^ ' L - 
 
 v V 
 
 -j 
 
 
 * 1 O ^ 
 
 
 
 K I 1 L S, 
 
 u._P | 
 
 / 
 
 b J i 1 ' N " , 
 
 ^ *.\ i 1 k. K n 
 
 34 
 
 \ 
 
 r f m P i - 
 
 _i M ' ^1 h P J \ * 
 
 i % L 
 
 
 f J 
 
 m m M ! . ! 
 
 i * _r 
 
 , r * * s* -^ *& 9 m P 
 " P 
 
 le - va, ja, dar vill jag do; om en gang i-fran Vfirmlaud jag 
 
 J- -P^ . j""3 - - - J> b - fer- -- - - 
 
 
 1 II 
 
 * 9 m \ t 
 
 , r 
 
 1 
 
 
 lL)PrLr 
 
 * *- 
 
 i^S 
 
 b F * JB* * 
 
 ' ^ } .F 
 
 > CF 
 
 
 
 ) * <s n \ *~. i 
 
 P ^l\ 1 
 
 e 
 
 _P h 1^ h 
 
 J -^ P 
 
 
 J 
 
 , | ^ ^ J 1 i 
 
 NI r5Nk.k.Nhs 
 
 ^ II 
 
 X 
 
 
 - 9( < " 
 
 T i il 
 
 
 > it Tt 
 
 ' t m f m ' * 
 
 '1 
 
 V 
 
 ' * 1.9 
 
 **'! 
 
 ! 
 
 -' gj. ^ 
 
 ta-ger mig en mo, sa vet jag, att aldrig jag mig ang-rar. 
 
 o 
 
 
 L ii -P 
 
 i 
 
 1 1 
 
 i m F F r 
 
 -FT i 
 
 K 111 
 
 z 
 
 b * r 
 
 
 13*1 
 
 l ' l\ li _) _) 1 
 
 " ^ -! 
 
 J 
 
 v V * * 
 
 " " ' 5 '. 
 
 FRTXKLL.
 
 Langtan till landet. 
 
 Tempo di marcia. 
 f > 
 
 0. LlNDBLAD. 
 
 Jr L 1 1 N 1 h\ 
 
 K S 
 
 3 fH 
 
 tfft^- &- J' 1J' 
 
 R h -fl-d s 
 
 5^~i| 
 
 SSZ 1 | 1 J 
 
 J . * f i 
 
 .: I I 
 
 1 j Vin-tern ra - sat ut bland va- ra fjal - lar, dri-vans blom-mor 
 ' "j Ja, jag kom-mer! Halsen, glada viu - dar, ut till Ian - det, 
 
 m . ftp p /- -f- -f-' -f- -*- *- -* -*- -P-' -* 
 
 r\* SIT r 
 
 III 
 
 
 J*i ^ v V 
 
 
 
 ZZHC * 
 
 U | . Li ! U 
 
 i i i \ 
 
 ^ S 
 
 L j ' n i 
 
 tS 
 
 
 p P b i i 
 
 
 i N K K. k. 
 
 h 
 
 
 X. b RPR 
 
 * 
 
 M P C K H 
 
 KTv J^J-J 1 
 
 v f * m 
 
 I J _P P _P 
 
 VMJ ** *| * J 
 
 TI * m *i 
 
 rf * J . * 
 
 b *> b 
 
 smiil - ta ner och do, 
 ut till* fag - lar - ne, 
 
 p-: 1 hp-: * -J- 
 
 +--*- j w * -!- 
 him -len ler i va- rens lju - sa 
 att * jag ills - kar dem, till bjork och 
 
 r\* j " - 
 
 8 8 Hr 
 
 i 1 
 
 J., p p ,) p 
 
 r~ m ' m 
 
 
 -^ b 
 
 S r 
 
 u p . M 
 
 
 1 ! 
 
 r n r n 
 
 
 >> 
 
 ^ P ^ p 
 
 7 | 1 
 
 J rV 
 
 
 X b 1 J a 
 
 -al, 'J s: h- 
 
 
 ^7 1 ^~ "~^ 
 
 -1 ^ h R- 
 
 
 "f * ^" ' ^ r 
 
 kval - lar, so - len kys - ser liv i skog och sjo. ) 
 lin - dar, sjo och berg, jag vill dem a - ter - se; \ 
 
 -*- -f- ftt r * +" - - ' ' 
 
 ^r -rr F- 
 
 -b-s to i^-- 
 
 ~~* ii ra 
 
 ^M! SB P 
 
 - ? ^ y _ 
 
 _ I_A_r| 
 
 
 J I rg i r 
 
 
 feH : h ^> > vi ^*H- 1 h Hh n- 
 
 * ^r^* ^ v f * * ^y^y 
 
 ^ Snart a*r so'mmarn har ; i pur - pur - va - gor, guld-be-lag - da, 
 / se dem an som i min barndoms stun-der, fol-ja back -ens 
 
 f) f) \ m. - m P*P 
 
 "X 1 ^ ^ ^ m m 
 
 ^"Vl* 
 
 *~~~f t*vf r ^ 
 
 -ft f P 
 tt to b to 
 
 Tl_iL_^_iL_p_L_J 
 
 ^ 
 
 P P
 
 a - zur - skif - tan - de, lig - ga ang - ar - na i 
 dans till klar - nad sjo, tras-tens sang i fu - ru- 
 
 ^f-Z ^ | 00000 
 
 S 
 
 r^ 
 
 ff 
 
 2 
 
 33 
 
 t-l 4.: X j-MSft^?: : 
 
 i> I p 
 
 da gens la - gor, och i lun - den dan-sa kiil-lor-ne. 
 sko - gens lun-der, vat-teo-fa-gelnslekkringfjardocho. 
 
 " T.^T "t i_:i_f J~ : tih"'>-p- jL f-f- 
 
 Langtan till landet 2. H. SATHERBERG. 
 
 Nackens polska. 
 
 ^4ndan<e con moto. Folkmelodi. 
 
 $= 
 
 
 1. Djupt i ha -vet pa de-man-te-hal-len nac-ken vi - lar i 
 
 2. A - girs dott-rar ho-nom sak-te-li - ga gung-a fram pa den 
 
 gro-nan sal, nat-tens tar - nor span-na mor-ka pal-len 
 kla - ra sjo. Har-pansljud, de ga sa sor - ge - 11 - ga, 
 
 & 
 
 |> 
 ' 
 
 --.
 
 dt 
 
 PP 
 
 i 
 
 EE*E 
 
 6 - ver skog, 6 - ver berg och dal. Kval-len har-lig star i 
 so - ka fjar - ran en vag att do. Fast bans 6 - ga star at 
 
 > P ft 
 
 9id?=F=F- 
 
 -S K i. 
 
 tt=4t 
 
 :P=3= 
 
 rfl. 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 : t *:r 
 
 P P 
 
 svartan hog-tids-skrud, nar och f jarran.ej en sus-ning, ii 
 dunk-la him-me-len, ing-en stjar-na ba-dar nattens drottning an. 
 
 f 
 
 5^5 
 
 - 
 tnnnT- 
 
 a tempo. 
 
 *^*= 
 
 ^ 
 
 P P 
 
 *c. 
 
 3= 
 
 m 
 
 fcdt 
 
 ^ 
 
 stor det lugn 6 - ver nejden rar, nar havets kung ur gyllne 
 Fre-ja smyckar sitt gyll-ne bar, ocb nac-ken sa sin sorg pa 
 
 f * 
 
 y v 
 
 t^t 
 
 35 
 
 ^fe=|b=ig 
 
 ___Jjw_J5 L_i. 
 
 p 
 
 1 
 
 bor-gen gar, nar havets kung ur gyll-ne bor-gen gar. 
 bar-pan slar, och nac-ken sa sin sorg pa bar-pan slar. 
 
 b ft . J> ft -&- 
 
 % 
 
 -r**- 
 
 i 
 
 v- 
 
 mr 
 
 Nackens polska 2. 
 
 A. A. AFZELIUS.
 
 A 000 666 352